Hollywood Is Dying, And The Elites Don’t Care February 28 2023 | From: AltMarket / Various
I don’t write much about the entertainment industry because, frankly, I see it as mostly irrelevant to the bigger picture.
Geopolitics and economics are the great driving force in our society, and the elitist groups that influence these elements should be our primary focus. That said, I have to admit that pop culture is a pervasive element of American public psychology, or at least it was until recently, and for decades the masters of pop culture all resided in Hollywood.
I have been a film buff for at least 20 years and I understand the business; I was even a screenwriter at one point and obtained an agent, but after dealing with the slimy behavior of some of the Hollywood ilk I was immediately disenchanted and decided to walk away.
What I realized at the time was that the entertainment world is designed for a very specific purpose: To steal the energies of talented people and exploit those energies to achieve the most meaningless or manipulative endeavors.
The people that manage and own production and distribution companies are for the most part talent-less; like most narcopaths they have no capacity to be creative.
So, they must feed on the intelligence and imagination of normal people in order to fuel their business. If it stopped there, then maybe the system would actually work and there could be some symbiosis.
Many artistic people don’t handle business very well, so someone has to.
But, production creatures want more than money, they also want to micromanage the message of every film, TV show, video game and product that is released.
They want to inject their own ideologies into every property. They do this because, as narcopaths, they desperately want to feel creative power even if it means hijacking the projects of others.
They also do it because they have an agenda to influence society to accept or reject certain ideas; they want to mold the politics and values of the public.
Hollywood is ultimately about narrative control, not free expression. If you have a unique message or an interesting story to tell, they are going to twist it into something else, something that feels a lot like every other story that gets produced.
Writers and directors with vision are either filtered out of the system or they are forced to conform to the propaganda model in order to get work. In the end, the people who get the most work and make it to the top are the people with no principles or morals; the people that will do anything to succeed.
Success and artistry are not necessarily mutually exclusive concepts. On the other hand, free expression and artistry are mutually inclusive – You cannot have one without the other.
If you have been noticing a severe decline in the quality of American entertainment over the course of the past decade, you are not the only one.
70% of Americans say they would rather stay home and watch movies instead of paying to go to theaters, even if theaters reopen.
Industry spin doctors will claim that the drop in interest is due solely to the coronavirus, but this is a lie. Domestic movie attendance hit a 25 year low in 2017, and this is part of a long term slide which was building for years beforehand.
It’s important to note that when I talk about “Hollywood” I’m including the internet streaming services, which are completely intertwined with the Hollywood machine.
While streaming services have been growing (to a point) because of the pandemic lockdowns, the subscription jump is an anomaly compared to the past few years.
Netflix in particular was on a severe slide in subscriptions before the pandemic hit, and with the “Cuties” child pornography debacle it will be interesting to see how many subscribers jumped ship in the final quarter of 2020.
Another interesting development among streaming services is that the most popular content is in most cases OLD content. Shows and movies from 10 to 20 years ago draw the most views by far.
New content consistently fails, and this is happening among all demographics from Gen Z to Baby Boomers. This says a lot about modern Hollywood’s decline.
The point is, Hollywood was crashing well before the pandemic and the reason is clearly related to the change in priorities from making money and making consumers happy to making value statements regardless of logic or practicality.
There is a massive evolution going on, and the public is growing tired of the controlled pop culture paradigm as well as the intrusive zealotry of new hyper-political messaging.
Most people are not stupid; maybe slow to catch on to certain things, but not stupid.
They recognize when they are being bombarded with propaganda, and they don’t like it when the balance of storytelling and entertainment shifts too far in either direction, left or right.
Imagine if all movies, television, music, comics, etc. went full-bore evangelical Christian or Sharia Muslim and nothing else was allowed to be made?
Well, that is what is happening with the leftist cult religion of social justice right now; they have attempted to suffocate all other points of view and it is alienating millions of people that prefer to see multiple points of view represented, as well as people that just want to be entertained rather than preached to.
Telling a story is actually easy as long as you follow certain rules:
Rule #1: Don’t talk down to your audience.
Rule #2: Don’t tell your audience how they should think or feel.
Rule #3: Tap into archetypes that people relate to.
Rule #4: Write characters that audiences can feel sympathy for.
Rule # 5: Audiences will not feel sympathy for narcopathic characters.
Rule #6: Your characters MUST have a story arc, even if they end up right back where they started.
Rule #7: Most stories have a message, but not all messages matter to most audiences.
Rule #8: People do not need to see themselves in a story in order to relate to a story.
Rule #9: Stories made by committee will usually fail, or they are quickly forgotten.
Rule #10: A superior storyteller is able to meet audience expectations while at the same time surprising them. “Subverting expectations” is a method for weak minded and lazy storytellers.
The current crop of people in Hollywood and the entertainment industry in general are completely incapable of following any of the rules above. Why?
Because they don’t care anymore about telling good stories that inspire or entertain the public. They don’t even really care about the public and their money.
In fact, they often show disdain and hatred for the public.
The only thing they care about is force feeding their ideology to the public whether the public likes it or not.
Hollywood is no longer a business. They are no longer concerned with making a profit. They do not care if the public is repelled by their content.
Everything is changing. Hollywood is becoming what I suspect it was always meant to be: An Orwellian bullhorn blaring in the ears of the people 24/7.
When I look at Hollywood and the media today, I am consistently reminded of the loudspeakers in the cities and towns of communist North Korea, which fill the streets with propaganda songs and messages until it becomes an insidious background hum in the minds of every citizen.
Some critics argue that Hollywood is attempting to influence the public to think just like they do (to join the social justice cult), and this is partially true, but the reality is that this is about narrative saturation rather than pure thought control.
They know that many people will not be influenced by them, and they don’t care. They are removing all alternative viewpoints from people’s daily lives because they want to torture anyone who disagrees with them.
They seem to take joy in this.
Many North Korean citizens HATE the street speakers and the constant propaganda, but the job of propaganda is not always to convince everyone or control their thoughts, it is sometimes meant to send a message:
“You will get nothing else; we are here to make you miserable and there is nothing you can do about it. The only way to stop the misery is to give in and submit.”
To summarize, If they can’t brainwash you, they are perfectly content to remove all happiness from your life by ensuring you never see anything inspiring ever again.
The message is absolute, and like a black hole it absorbs and destroys everything else around it. Think of it like the Spanish Inquisition of the Dark Ages, but with a technological edge.
Obviously, this is leading to people abandoning all new entertainment in droves. Propaganda films with blockbuster budgets are crashing and sales are dismal.
Classic franchises like Star Wars, Star Trek, Ghostbusters, etc are being abandoned by audiences.
Disney’s Mulan remake, filled with social justice and Chinese communist agitprop, was a complete and utter disaster. Numerous studios are now facing huge profit shortfalls and layoffs, and Covid is only partly to blame.
Netflix’s “Cuties”, a love letter to pedophilia posing as a “commentary” on the sexualization of children, is now under investigation and indictment and Netflix lost vast numbers of subscribers in protest.
And for good reason, the film features 11 year old girls acting out overtly sexual scenes including nudity and feigned masturbation all with creepy hovering camerawork (Note to Netflix: Child porn is NOT a 1st Amendment right).
Basically every production that carries a hard leftist message is failing. The saying “Get Woke, Go Broke” is popular for a reason. The hills that Hollywood and their streaming partners are choosing to die on might seem bizarre to most people.
But again, the Hollywood elites don’t care anymore. You want to know why they are doubling and tripling down on a garbage fire like “Cuties”?
As mentioned, it’s about saturating the environment until there is nothing else while also sending a message that “there’s nothing you can do about it”. I think this says something about our immediate future.
Why is Hollywood now scorning any profit incentive? Are the elites that run Hollywood privy to some kind of information that makes them confident in their decision to undermine and alienate the majority of their consumers?
I mean, eventually these companies are going to go bankrupt if they continue on this path. Is it possible they understand that the system in general is on the verge of collapse anyway and they have decided to go out in a blaze of glory, like a suicide bomber?
It’s hard to say, but I question the state of storytelling in our culture for the foreseeable future. Alternative production and distribution is easily accomplished in the digital age.
Hollywood is completely unnecessary and Americans are starting to realize this. However, I wonder if alternatives will be allowed to exist, or will they be attacked and shut down in the name of the “new normal”?
If we are following a traditional communist model, then the goal will be to continue to eradicate choice until the only options left are those that are granted to us by centralized committee.
My suspicion is that economic crisis along with corporate monopoly will be used to this end. Our only option at that point will be to avoid consuming anything they are selling.
But of course it’s also possible that one day you will have a TV installed in your home that you can never shut off, playing movies like Cuties nonstop until it becomes an ingrained background noise in your brain.
Censorship Of The Biden Story & Blockbuster Report Reveals How Biden Family Was Compromised By China February 27 2023 | From: DailyCaller / Zerohedge / Various
The destruction of journalistic ethics is nearly complete.
The same group of reporters and pundits who rushed to report every rumor, every speculation, every lie about Donald Trump for the last four years now close ranks and refuse to report the emerging allegations about the Biden family.
Hunter Biden’s abandoned laptops have been a treasure trove of inside information about his reported influence peddling and shady deals, based entirely on his status as son of the vice president.
It is obvious that Joe Biden supported his son’s dealings, and it may also be the case that the “big guy” directly profited from them.
And it is now beyond question that Joe Biden used the power of his office to bully Ukraine to end an investigation into corruption at the energy firm Burisma, where his son inexplicably was a board member.
The New York Post has brought some of this evidence to light, or at least tried to.
The Biden campaign has not denied that the laptop and its contents are genuine, which they would have done quickly had it been bogus.
And former Hunter Biden associate Bevan Cooney has given access to 26,000 additional emails that reportedly substantiate what has been released.
You would think that other reporters and news outlets would be clamoring for access to the rest of the information. Isn’t that what credible journalists do, ferret out the facts, without fear or favor?
But not anymore.
Adherence to the liberal narrative has replaced the old norm of objectivity. Fear and favor are the order of the day.
The only fact that matters is that the “laptop from Hell,” as President Trump called it, could be fatal to the Biden campaign. Thus, the story must be dismissed, censored, criticized and made to go away. Quickly.
One excuse for not covering the story is that it was based on hacked information.
But the emails were not hacked, they were extracted from an abandoned computer that lawfully belonged to the repairman who tried many times to return it and collect on the $85 repair bill.
And anyway, the media’s “hacked information” ban was only invented during the last election cycle to defend against a different round of revelations about Democrats.
Real reporters should have no ethical qualms about any information that is hacked, leaked or otherwise surreptitiously obtained, so long as it is factual.
Another angle has been to resurrect the discredited Russian collusion charge.
Pundits have charged, without evidence, that the emails are part of a Kremlin plot. Dozens of has-been intelligence officials published a letter claiming the emails bore the hallmarks of Russian disinformation, even if they were true.
But the Director of National Intelligence, the State Department, the FBI and DOJ say there is no evidence of Russian involvement, and really how could there be? The charge is ludicrous on its face. But that has not stopped the baseless charge.
Then there are the tech titans who are doing their best to make sure the story does not spread.
Twitter suspended the New York Post’s account because of the story and locked the Trump campaign’s account over a Hunter Biden-related video.
But Twitter reflects a very rarefied ultra-liberal slice of the electorate anyway, so does it really matter? Facebook has reduced distribution of the story, and many major newspapers and cable channels are ignoring it.
Forget the idea that reporters would pressure the Biden campaign to give substantive answers to any questions regarding this scandal. The only tough question Biden has been asked recently was what flavor milkshake he bought.
There has also been little journalistic curiosity regarding the FBI’s role with the laptop. The Bureau had a copy of the files dating back to September 2019, and had the actual laptop by December.
This was during the Trump impeachment fiasco and the evidence on the laptop might have nipped the process in the bud. But it was kept under wraps.
Senate Homeland Security and Government Affairs Committee Chair Ron Johnson has asked FBI Director Christopher Wray for details about how the Bureau handled the laptop, and there have been persistent rumors that Wray will either resign or be fired.
Clearly there is a story here, but few reporters seem interested in it.
This ideologically driven approach to reporting is sadly nothing new. In “Looking Back on the Spanish War,” George Orwell wrote that during the Spanish Civil War he saw “newspaper reports which did not bear any relation to the facts,” and “eager intellectuals building emotional superstructures over events that had never happened.”
That accurately describes most coverage of the Russian collusion hoax.
In addition, Orwell wrote he saw “history being written not in terms of what happened but what ought to have happened according to various ‘party lines.’”
And that is how the Biden laptop story is being shaped.
Blockbuster Report Reveals How Biden Family Was Compromised By China
In a day when half the US population remained transfixed by the ongoing revelations about the contents of Hunter Biden's "laptop from hell" and the other half was doing everything in its power to ignore the news which the socials have conveniently been desperate to censor;
A far less noticed but perhaps just as important investigative report authored by the unknown Typhoon Investigations, was released by Christopher Balding, Associate Professor at Peking University HSBC School of Business Shenzhen, China and also Bloomberg contributor (which is odd considering the clear anti-Trump bias of the Bloomberg media empire) exposing Biden activities in China which "the press has simply refused to cover", and which reveals "how Biden was compromised by the Communist Party of China."
In a series of tweets around noon on Thursday, Balding said that he had really "not wanted to do this but roughly 2 months ago I was handed a report about Biden activities in China the press has simply refused to cover. I want to strongly emphasize I did not write the report but I know who did."
Some more background on the origins of the report from Balding's website:
"For two months I have worked on behalf of my colleague to ensure that this report helped others report on the documented evidence of Biden activities with regards to China. I want to emphasize a couple of things about my own involvement.
First, I did not write the report and I am not responsible for the report. I have gone over the report with a fine tooth comb and can find nothing factually wrong with the report. Everything is cited and documented. Arguably the only weakness is that we do not have internal emails between Chinese players or the Chinese and Bidens that would make explicit what the links clearly imply.
Second, I will not be disclosing the individual who did write this report. They have very valid reasons to fear for both their personal safety and professional risks. Throughout the years that I have known this individual we never discussed politics. I have never heard them criticize any political party other than the CCP. They are not a Republican.
Third, it was my very real wish that the press would have reported on the documented evidence in this report and left me and the author entirely out of this situation. I did not vote for Trump in 2016 and will not vote for him in 2020. This information however is entirely valid public interest information that the press has simply refused to cover due to their own partisan wishes. I have serious policy differences with President Trump.
I am pro-immigration. I would like to see more free trade efforts to shift trade away from China and into partner countries from Mexico to Vietnam and India. I believe that institution building in Asia is vital and America needs to take that lead. However, I cannot in good conscience allow documented evidence of the variety presented here go unreported by partisans who are simply choosing to hide information.
Finally, I will not be answering any questions about the report. I had no wish to be involved in Presidential politics. I do not want to be on the news. I will not be answer any questions about who wrote the report. We need to return the focus to the known documented facts.'
"Hunter Biden is partnered with the Chinese state. Entire investment partnership is Chinese state money from social security fund to China Development Bank. It is actually a subsidiary of the Bank of China. This is not remotely anything less than a Chinese state funded play.
Though the entire size of the fund cannot be reconstructed, the Taiwanese cofounder who is now detained in China, reports it to be NOT $1-1.5 billion but $6.5 billion. This would make Hunters stake worth at a minimum at least $50 million if he was to sell it.
Disturbingly, everyone on the Chinese side are clearly linked with influence and intelligence organizations. China uses very innocuous sounding organization names to hide PLA, United Front, or Ministry of Foreign Affairs influence/intelligence operations.
This report cannot say Hunter was the target of such an operation or that China even targeted him. However, based upon the clear pattern of individuals and organizations surrounding him it is an entirely reasonable conclusion.
Finally, the believed Godfather in arranging everything is a gentleman named Yang Jiechi. He is currently the CCP Director of Foreign Affairs leading strategist for America, Politburo member one of the most powerful men in China, and Xi confidant. Why does this matter?
He met regularly with Joe Biden during his stint as Chinese ambassador the US when Biden chaired the Senate Foreign Relations Committee.
Later he was Minister of Foreign Affairs when the investment partnership was made official in 2013. Importantly, the Taiwanese national listed MOFA institutions as the key clients in helping to arrange everything.
Yang would clearly have known the importance of Hunter Biden and undoubtedly would have been informed of any dealings.
Given that he is now the point person in China for dealing with the US this raises major concerns about a Biden administration dealing impartially with an individual in this capacity.
These are documented facts from Chinese corporate records like IPO prospectuses and media. They raise very valid concerns about Biden linkages to China.”
TikTok is an app often used for entertainment. But could it be a tool for the Chinese Communist Party (CCP)? And is the CCP using TikTok to manipulate the presidential election while creating chaos and division in the United States?
Turning to the report itself, here is the 10-point summary of its findings:
"Joe Biden’s compromising partnership with the Communist Party of China runs via Yang Jiechi (CPC’s Central Foreign Affairs Commission). YANG met frequently with BIDEN during his tenure at the Chinese embassy in Washington.
Hunter Biden’s 2013 Bohai Harvest Rosemont investment partnership was set-up by Ministry of Foreign Affairs institutions who are tasked with garnering influence with foreign leaders during YANG’s tenure as Foreign Minister.
HUNTER has a direct line to the Politburo, according to SOURCE A, a senior finance professional in China.
Michael Lin, a Taiwanese national now detained in China, brokered the BHR partnership and partners with MOFA foreign influence organizations.
LIN is a POI for his work on behalf of China, as confirmed by SOURCE B and SOURCE C (at two separate national intelligence agencies).
BHR is a state managed operation. Leading shareholder in BHR is a Bank of China which lists BHR as a subsidiary and BHR’s partners are SOEs that funnel revenue/assets to BHR.
HUNTER continues to hold 10% in BHR. He visited China in 2010 and met with major Chinese government financial companies that would later back BHR.
HUNTER’s BHR stake (purchased for $400,000) is now likely be worth approx. $50 million (fees and capital appreciation based on BHR’s $6.5 billion AUM as stated by Michael Lin).
HUNTER also did business with Chinese tycoons linked with the Chinese military and against the interests of US national security.
BIDEN’s foreign policy stance towards China (formerly hawkish), turned positive despite China’s country’s rising geopolitical assertiveness."
To simply the various opaque Chinese intermediaries, the report shows the transfer of Chinese state money to Hunter, via major Chinese financial SOEs.
The third and final chart shows the relationships connecting US leaders with communist leaders in China and North Korea.
While there is official state-to-state dialogue and relationships between US and Chinese leaders, just one or two levels below are connected business arrangements with their relatives and associates, who are always the personal recipients of Chinese state money.
The report also quotes from a 2019 National Review article detailing Hunter Biden's financial links to China:
"Late Summer 2006: Hunter Biden and his uncle, James Biden, purchase the hedge fund Paradigm Global Advisors. According to an unnamed executive quoted in Politico in August, James Biden declared to employees on his first day, “Don’t worry about investors. We’ve got people all around the world who want to invest in Joe Biden.”
At this time, Joe Biden is months away from becoming chairman of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee and launching his second bid for president.
The unnamed executive who spoke to Politico charged that the purchase of the fund was designed to work around campaign-finance laws:
"According to the executive, James Biden made it clear that he viewed the fund as a way to take money from rich foreigners who could not legally give money to his older brother or his campaign account.
“We’ve got investors lined up in a line of 747s filled with cash ready to invest in this company,” the executive remembers James Biden saying."
Incidentally, this same article also points out the following:
"An outside audit of Paradigm by the firm of Briggs, Bunting & Dougherty finds a “failure to reconcile Investment Advisors reimbursement of fund expenses, failure to reconcile and review cash account on a timely basis, and failure to reconcile and review various other accounts on a timely basis.”
And while the National Review article does an exhaustive look into both Biden, Paradigm's and Seneca Global Advisors, the real focus is on China, which concludes that its "research indicates the Biden family and associates went on to execute a string of business deals with China and the CPC for nearly a decade."
Fast-forwarding through the report, we learn about a curious entity called Thornton consulting:
Shortly after BIDEN was named as Obama’s running mate in August, HUNTER founded Seneca Global Advisors and the Beijing government approved the incorporation of Thornton Beijing - Solebury Thornton（Beijing）Consulting Co Ltd.
On October 21, 2007 LIN, LAKIS and ARCHER visited HNA Group in Beijing, this time with ARCHER, acting as COO of Rosemont Solebury Capital, and had dinner with Chen. On the same day, the Thornton delegation also met with officials from PKU.
HNA, which was originally an airline carrier, is of course best known for becoming a major Chinese conglomerate which in 2015-2016 was the most acquisitive Chinese company involved in a flurry of multi-billion global M&A, including US electronics distributor Ingram Micro, CIT Group's aircraft leasing business, a 25% stake in Hilton, a 5% stake in Deutsche Bank, and is widely regarded as backed by or ultimately owned by Wang Qishan, then former vice premier (2008 – 2013).
Wang is currently China’s Vice-President and a close aide of Xi. According to the report:
"HNA has allegedly used various methods to bribe targets in the past, including hosting parties and supplying targets with young women. It is unknown if Thornton representatives were targeted in this manner at Chen’s dinner, but if any nighttime entertainment was provided, it was probably recorded by HNA/Chinese intelligence (as is commonplace in China)."
The following day a Thornton/Rosemont Solebury/SLLF delegation, including LIN, ARCHER, and LAKIS, met with Peng Fang, Director General of the NPC’s Foreign Affairs Committee, which is responsible for communicating with foreign affairs committees from other countries.
The meeting was held in the Great Hall of the People, China’s most prestigious state building used to host legislative and ceremonial activities.
In other words, the Thornton delegation met with a senior Chinese foreign affairs official at China’s most famous state building, in a meeting which would have been approved by or informed to China’s top leaders.
This was clearly not a business meeting, but (at least in the eyes of the Chinese contingent), rather a nation to nation, state to state meeting.
Fast-forwarding to 2010 (the report has all the interim details), we read that between April 7-9, 2010, "HUNTER was introduced by LIN to China’s most powerful government controlled financial institutions."
Here the report notes that "while the English news item is no longer accessible on Thornton’s website, but the Chinese version remains."
Only that's no longer the case, because since the publication of this report, it appears that someone had a keen interest in quickly removing that particular URL as can be seen here.
However, courtesy of the wayback machine, we can see what the Thornton consulting website, which was summarily taken down in the past 3-4 weeks, had to say as of this Sept 26 (after which the website just disappears) snapshot:
The report continues that according to Thornton’s news item, HUNTER was introduced as the chairman of Rosemont Seneca and the second son of the US Vice-President, and the purpose of his visit was to “deepen mutual understanding and explore the possibility of commercial cooperation”.
LIN had delivered HUNTER to the Chinese for discussions on his pay-off.
Three days later, BIDEN met with then Chinese President Hu Jintao in Washington as part of the Nuclear Security Summit.
At the time Hunter was just barely 40 years old.
The Secret Service protects, by statute, the president and vice president and their families.84 As the son of a sitting Vice-President, HUNTER will have had secret service protection during his business trip to China.
Freedom of Information Act request records show that HUNTER visited China from April 6 to April 9, 2010. Unusually, for such a high-profile visit, there were no media reports in English or Chinese media.
Therefore, his father BIDEN (even if unaware personally, which is unlikely given how close to each other they live and work), will have been aware of his son’s business trip to Beijing through official channels.
Given the sensitive nature of US-China relations, HUNTER would have been closely watched by various Chinese securities agencies during the trip.
The report then pivots to dad Joe, who August 18, 2011 held talks with Xi, then Chinese Vice-President, during a five-day trip.
At the meeting Biden said the US "fully understands that Taiwan and Tibet issues are China's core interests, the U.S. will continue to resolutely pursue the one China policy, the U.S. does not support ‘Taiwan's independence’, and the U.S. fully recognizes that Tibet is an inalienable part of the People's Republic of China."
Biden’s words are verbatim from China’s official standpoint on Taiwan and Tibet. Additionally, Biden said he "has spent more time in private meetings with Xi than any other world leader, including 25 hours of private dinners with Xi and one interpreter."
A few days later BIDEN delivered a speech at Sichuan University, where he said:
"China’s development and prosperity are in line with the interest of the U.S”, in comments on the university’s website. The Obama Whitehouse records published a transcript of the speech during which BIDEN said“Let me be clear - let me be clear: I believed in 1979 and said so and I believe now that a rising China is a positive development, not only for the people of China but for the United States and the world as a whole…
In order to cement this robust partnership, we have to go beyond close ties between Washington and Beijing, which we’re working on every day, go beyond it to include all levels of government, go beyond it to include classrooms and laboratories, athletic fields and boardrooms.”
A few months after Biden’s Sichuan trip, Archer and Lin worked with a Sichuan Chemical, a large Sichuan state-owned company to set-up a major potash deal (that never materialized) for Prospect Global, a listed US company at the time, that soon delisted and no longer appears to be in business.
According to the report, "it is unclear if the purpose of the deal was to just deliver Archer millions of dollars in compensation, to talk up the Prospect Global stock, or if it resulted in Sichuan Chemical transferring millions of US dollars to the US (either for capital flight purposes or to be directed to US politicians such as BIDEN and KERRY)."
The story only gets more interesting from here, and focuses on the arrival on the scene in 2013 of none other than John Kerry, who is intimately tied to Hunter (and thus Joe Biden) via Rosemont Seneca's predecessor Rosemont Capital, established in 2005 by Chris Heinz and Devon Archer who were roommates at Yale University.
The firm was named after a Heinz family farm, and the capital was from Heinz, heir to the Heinz food processing empire, and step-son of John Kerry, a former Yale graduate who at the time was the senator for Massachusetts.
On June 25 2009, Hunter Biden co-founded Rosemont Seneca with Archer and Heinz; the company’s offices in Georgetown were located two miles from both Biden's office in the White House and his residence at the Naval Observatory, and one mile from Kerry’s Georgetown mansion.
We will let readers do their own digging but we will highlight one section from the report, detailing how the Hunter Biden received Chinese state money...
...and it involved the creation of BHR, which served as the entity facilitating the bulk of Chinese fund flows into the Bidens, as Hunter's initial BHR stake, purchased for just $400,000, is now likely be worth approximately $50 million.
From the report:
On December 4, 2013 HUNTER accompanies BIDEN on his official trip to China.
HUNTER told the New Yorker that he met Li during the December 2013 trip but described it as social encounter. “How do I go to Beijing, halfway around the world, and not see them (Li) for a cup of coffee?” he said.
HUNTER arranged a quick meeting in the lobby of the American delegation’s hotel in Beijing between BIDEN and Li, the BHR CEO.
This was followed by a "social meeting" between HUNTER and Li, according to reports by the New Yorker.
The trip by HUNTER coincided with an official trip by the Ukranian President Viktor Yanukovych. Many business deals promoting trade and investment between China and Ukraine were signed during this trip.
Some deals between Chinese and Ukranian firms have ties to firms HUNTER is known to be involved with such as the Bohai Commodity Exchange, owned by the same local governments that own a part of Bohai Industrial Investment.
On 16 December 2013, a week after the BIDEN and HUNTER visit to Beijing, BHR was incorporated in Shanghai, with its registered address in the Shanghai Free Trade Zone, according to State Market Regulatory Administration <SMRA> records.
HUNTER’s profile no longer appears on the BHR website. One archived version lists him as a director on November 16, 2015. BIDEN is referred to in the profile as a managing partner of Rosement Seneca Partners and a consultant at Boies Schiller Flexner LPP <Boies Schiller>.
According to a statement by BIDEN’s lawyer George Mesires on October 13, 2019, BIDEN was of counsel with Boies Schiller and advising Ukraine-linked Burisma Holdings Limited on its corporate reform initiatives. He is also listed on Chinese PE websites where he is also referred to by the Chinese name ‘Hengte Baideng’ (亨特·拜登)
SMRA records show HUNTER purchased 10% of BHR on October 23, 2017 (via his investment vehicle Skaneateles LLC) and was a director until April 20, 2020. Previously he was invested via other holding companies.
BHR’s current shareholders are Bohai Capital (30%), Shanghai Ample Harvest Financial Services Group Co Ltd (上海丰实金融服务（集团）有限公司) (30%), Angju Investment (10%), Thornton (10%), Ulysses Diversified Inc (10%), Skaneateles LLC (10%). According to Chinese corporate records, the original owner of the US stake in BHR was Rosemont, Seneca Thornton, LLC with a 30% shareholding. This was split just under two years later into what is believed to be 20%/10% holding between Rosemont, Seneca, Bohai LLC and Thornton LLC.
This was later changed again splitting Rosemont, Seneca, Bohai into Skanletes and Ulyssees.
As Rosemont is the HEINZ KERRY vehicle and Seneca is the Biden vehicle, it is believed that the final split allowed HEINZ to exit the partnership divesting to ARCHER.
In summary, the Chinese government funded a business that it co-owned along with the son of a sitting US vice president and Secretary of State who was with high probability directly or indirectly invested in the holding company.
But if China funded a business, what was the value for Hunter? Here the report goes into detail calculating that the entity likely had $6.5BN in AUM, generating $100-$150MM in annual revenue, and if one day the business was sold, it could do so for ~$300 million (see page 14-15).
This returns the entire partnership to the fundamental problem: two sons of the Vice President of the United States and the Secretary of State willingly entered into a financial partnership with a government their fathers were supposed to deal with in an impartial manner.
Evidence indicates that the Secretary of State was directly or indirectly financially invested in his sons firms and benefitted from asset purchases made by firms directly linked to his son.
HUNTER invested in a firm that by his own words has had almost nothing to do with, managed by state government with departments dedicated to elite capture, focusing on state enterprise deals in a foreign country, but has grown to manage $6.5 billion in assets and likely realize yearly revenue of $100-150 million.
The ultimate sale price for his stake or the partnership would be whatever the Chinese Communist Party decides his partnership stake is worth.
And this is where the Typhoon Investigations report, the Biden presidential campaign, and Hunter's "laptop from hell" all converge:
On May 2, 2019 BIDEN remarked, “They can't figure out how they're going to deal with the corruption that exists within the system. I mean, you know, they're not bad folks, folks. But guess what, they're not, they're not competition for us.”
On May 3, it was reported that BHR [where Hunter was an investor] invested in Face++, a Chinese surveillance company which develops facial-recognition software for law enforcement in China, including targeting ethnic minority Muslims Xinjiang.
“I have never spoken to my son about his overseas business dealings,”
Still, while Hunter benefiting monetarily from deals with China may be unethical, it's hardly illegal (all else equal).
Where things get dicey is if to curry favor with China, and continue the freeflow of China-sourced cash, Hunter or his father, is betraying his fellow Americans.
Our research shows that for more than decade, HUNTER has been personally targeted by China’s intelligence apparatus and its various ‘foreign relations agencies’.
A U.S. Senate Committee on Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs <HSGAC> published on September 23, 2020, details HUNTER’s recent payoffs from a PLA linked tycoon, Ye Jianming <YE>, chairman of Chinese energy company CEFC China Energy Company Limited <CEFC>.
YE’s first break came when he purchased a small piston factory that supplied the Chinese army, after which he was a proxy for PLA officials, based on a New York Times article, and our proprietary research of the PLA’s logistics network.
In line with his intelligence role, YE arranged events that brought together retired American and Chinese military officers. In 2015, YE arranged for an aide to meet with HUNTER and in May 2017, YE met privately with HUNTER at a Miami hotel.
The purpose of the meeting was for HUNTER to use his contacts to help “identify investment opportunities for Ye’s company CEFC China Energy,” and afterwards YE gave HUNTER a 2.8-carat diamond.
According to HSGAC’s Confidential Document 9, YE and his associate Dong Gongwen, applied to a bank and opened credit lines for a business named Hudson West III LLC, giving HUNTER, his brother James (and James’ wife Sarah Biden), credit cards which the Bidens used to buy extravagant items.
The HSGAC report details a series of transfers and transactions worth millions of US dollars between CEFC, Hudson West and the Bidens.
This – 11 years after HUNTER and James denied selling their political connections to foreigners for personal gain.
In March 2018, YE was detained and put under investigation on suspicion of economic crimes. CEFC was then declared bankrupt in March 2020 alleged to have faked deals and bribed foreign governments for oil rights.
Some of these were facilitated by Patrick Ho, CPPCC member and the former Hong Kong Secretary for Home Affairs in Tung’s administration.
On November 18, 2017, Ho was arrested at the John F. Kennedy International Airport on bribery and money-laundering charges, and called HUNTER for legal assistance.
HUNTER later told The New Yorker that he doesn’t see Ye as a “shady character at all,” and he characterized the outcome as “bad luck.”
The report's conclusion:
Whether he understands it or not, it is apparent that HUNTER has been compromised by Chinese intelligence, who most likely have detailed files on HUNTER’s time spent in China, encompassing his personal meetings and any other activities.
Furthermore, YE is associated with the PLA’s General Political Department, which directly opposes the US military in Asia, creating a serious conflict of interest for his father BIDEN.
Putting it all together, the report concludes that the Chinese influence operation targeting Biden and Heinz, the two most important people in US foreign policy under the Obama administration, and their children can now be tied between a small group of organizations and individuals.
Dating back to Biden’s time in the Senate meeting with Yang, this was never from the Chinese perspective anything less than an official influence operation.
Everything surrounding HUNTER took place with official Chinese organizations known to engage in and tasked with influence operations.
Of course, in exchange for funneling tens of millions to Hunter (and, indirectly according to recent allegations, his father), China also got something: this:
Over time BIDEN’s approach to China changed significantly.
Under the Clinton and early part of the Bush administrations he could be considered moderately hawkish on China. However, during his time in the Obama administration as one of the key people tasked with China policy, his views became very dovish.
Interestingly, BIDEN repeatedly is using preferred CCP language in describing approaches to relations or specific issues.
The CCPIT specifically works with businessmen to convince their home governments it is in their best interest to avoid damaging measures such as sanctions to China.
Other organizations mentioned work specifically to engage in elite capture or influence politicians or governments.
The presence of all these institutions collectively strongly imply this was an influence operation by the Chinese state and whether directly or indirectly, BIDEN shifted his view from hawkish to dovish after HUNTER began receiving entrée into Chinese elite political and financial institutions.
Finally, going back to Chris Balding who originally published the report, here is his own brief summary of everything laid out in the 64 page report:
Beginning just before Joe Biden's ascendancy to the Vice Presidency, Hunter Biden was travelling to Beijing meeting with Chinese financial institutions and political figures would ultimately become his investors.
Finalized in 2013, the investment partnership included money from the Chinese government, social security, and major state-owned banks a veritable who’s who of Chinese state finance.
It is not simply the state money that should cause concern but the structures and deals that took place. Most investment in specific projects came from state owned entities and flowed into state backed projects or enterprises.
Even the deals speak to the worst of cronyism. The Hunter Biden investment firm share of a copper mine in the Congo was guaranteed with assets put at risk by the larger copper company to ensure deal flow to Hunter’s firm.
In another instance, Bank of China working on an IPO in Hong Kong gave its share allocation to the BHR investment partnership.
They were able to do this because even though the Hunter Biden firm completed no notable work on the IPO, it is counted as a subsidiary of the Bank of China.
The Hunter Biden Chinese investment partnership is literally invested in by the Chinese state and a subsidiary of the Bank of China owned by the Chinese Ministry of Finance.
The entire arrangement speaks to Chinese state interests. Meetings were held at locations that in China speak to the welcoming of foreign dignitaries or state to state relations.
The Chinese organizations surrounding Hunter Biden are known intelligence and influence operatives to the United States government.
The innocuous names like Chinese People’s Institute for Foreign Affairs exist to “…carry out government-directed policies and cooperative initiatives with influential foreigners without being perceived as a formal part of the Chinese government.”
Interestingly the CPIFA is under the Chinese Ministry of Foreign Affairs. When the investment partnership was struck in 2013, the Minister of Foreign Affairs was Yang Jiechi.
Yang would have been very familiar with Hunter Biden from his days in Washington as the Chinese Ambassador to the United States from 2001 to 2005 during which he met regularly with Joe Biden chairing the Senate Foreign Relations Committee.
Today the same individual who oversaw institutions helping shepherd Hunter’s investment partnership as the Minister of Foreign Affairs is Xi Jinping’s right hand man on foreign affairs and member of the powerful Politburo.
Most worrying is the financial leverage this gives the Chinese state over a direct member of the Biden family.
Despite the widely reported $1-1.5 billion of investment the reality is likely much higher. A co-founder of the investment firm reports the total assets under management as $6.5 billion.
While this number cannot be completely replicated, given that two deal alone were worth in excess of $1.6 billion this number is not unrealistic at all.
A 2% annual fee on assets under management would generate $130 million annually. Add in the 20% fee on capital gains the firm would recognize and it is not difficult to see Hunter’s stake being worth in excess of $50 million.
According to Hunter’s attorney, he did not invest his $400,000 in the company until 2017. Even assuming the veracity of this statement, this raises a major problem.
Founded in 2013, the firm had large amounts of revenue and assets under management by 2017. In other words, his $400,000 stake would have already been worth far more than what he paid for it.
This paltry $400,000 investment worth more than $50 million now would have realized a gain of more than 12,400% in three years.
The difficulty in eluding these concerns is their documentability by anyone who cares to look.
There is no potential for hacking because it is all public record in China. Any journalist who wishes to look can go review IPO prospectuses, news reports, or corporate records.
There is no secret method for discovering this data other than actually looking.
There is simply no way to avoid the reality that Hunter Biden was granted a 10% stake worth far in excess of what he paid for a firm that is literally operated and owned by the Chinese state.
I did not vote for Donald Trump in 2016 and have significant concerns about his policies in areas like immigration.
Having lived in China for nine years throughout the Xi regimes construction of concentration camps and having witnessed first hand their use of influence and intelligence operations, the Biden links worry me profoundly.
Whether Joe Biden personally knew the details, a very untenable position, it is simply political malpractice to not be aware of the details of these financial arrangements.
These documentable financial links simply cannot be wished away.
And this is why Beijing is desperate to get Joe Biden - whose son got extremely wealthy thanks to China's influence peddling operation for the past a decade- into the White House.
Some of my friends have told me that basic human nature is somewhat violent, but I told them I disagree.
If we examine different animals, for example, those whose very survival depends on taking others lives, such as tigers or lions, we learnt that their basic nature provides them with sharp fangs and claws.
Peaceful animals, such as deer, which are completely vegetarian, are gentler and have smaller teeth and no claws. From that viewpoint we human beings have a non-violent nature.
As to the question of human survival, human beings are social animals. In order to survive we need companions. Without other human beings there is simply no possibility of surviving; that is a law of nature.
Since I deeply believe that human beings are basically gentle by nature, I feel that we should not only maintain gentle, peaceful relations with our fellow human beings but also that it is very important to extend the same kind of attitude towards the natural environment.
Morally speaking, we should be concerned for our whole environment.
We depend on our environment and our environment depends on us
Then there is another viewpoint, not just a question of ethics but a question of our own survival. The environment is very important not only for this generation but also for future generations.
If we exploit the environment in extreme ways, even though we may get some money or other benefit from it now, in the long run we ourselves will suffer and future generations will suffer.
When the environment changes, climatic conditions also change. When they change dramatically, the economy and many other things change as well. Even our physical health will be greatly affected. So this is not merely a moral question but also a question of our own survival.
Therefore, in order to succeed in the protection and conservation of the natural environment, I think it is important first of all to bring about an internal balance within human beings themselves.
The abuse of the environment, which has resulted in such harm to the human community, arose out of ignorance of the importance of the environment.
I think it is essential to help people to understand this. We need to teach people that the environment has a direct bearing on our own benefit.
I am always talking about the importance of compassionate thought. As I said earlier, even from your own selfish viewpoint, you need other people.
So, if you develop concern for other people’s welfare, share other people’s suffering, and help them, ultimately you will benefit. If you think only of yourself and forget about others, ultimately you will lose. That is also something like a law of nature.
It is quite simple: if you do not smile at people, but frown at them, they respond similarly, don’t they? If you deal with other people in a very sincere, open way, they behave similarly.
Everybody wants to have friends and does not want enemies. The proper way to create friends is to have a warm heart, not simply money or power.
The friend of power and the friend of money are something different: These are not true friends. True friends should be real friends of heart, shouldn’t they?
I am always telling people that those friends who come around when you have money and power are not truly your friends, but friends of money and power, because as soon as the money and power disappear, those friends are also ready to leave.
They are not reliable.
Genuine, human friends stand by, whether you are successful or unlucky, and always share your sorrow and burdens. The way to make such friends is not by being angry, nor by having good education or intelligence, but by having a good heart.
True connection comes from the heart: From kindness
To think more deeply, if you must be selfish, then be wisely selfish, not narrow-mindedly selfish. The key thing is the sense of universal responsibility; that is the real source of strength, the real source of happiness.
If our generation exploits everything available – the trees, the water, and the minerals – without any care for the coming generations or the future, then we are at fault, aren’t we?
But if we have a genuine sense of universal responsibility as our central motivation, then our relations with our neighbors, both domestic and international, improves.
Another important question is: What is consciousness, what is the mind? In the Western world, during the last one or two centuries there has been great emphasis on science and technology, which mainly deal with matter.
Your Life in One Minute
Life's journey is unpredictable. But that part of it called death isn't.
Yet most of us don't like to talk about death. In fact, we are so afraid to face our own mortality that we do anything we can to avoid thinking about it.
But let's admit it: Whether we like it or not, we're all going to die. And one thing is certain: To pretend like we won't die isn't going to make our lives any better.
On the contrary, when we don't accept death we can't truly enjoy life. If you'd like to understand why, check out my newest video where I'm sharing my thoughts on the matter.
Today some nuclear physicists and neurologists say that when you investigate particles in a very detailed way, there is some kind of influence from the side of the observer, the knower. What is this knower?
A simple answer is; A human being, the scientist. How does the scientist know? With the brain, Western scientists have identified only a few hundred so far.
Now, whether you call it mind, brain, or consciousness, there is a relationship between brain and mind and also mind and matter. I think this is important.
I feel it is possible to hold some sort of dialogue between Eastern philosophy and Western science on the basis of this relationship.
No doctor can give you an injection of mental peace, and no market can sell it to you
In any case, these days we human beings are very much more involved in the external world, while we neglect the internal world.
We do need scientific development and material development in order to survive and to increase the general benefit and prosperity, but equally as much we need mental peace.
Yet no doctor can give you an injection of mental peace, and no market can sell it to you. If you go to a supermarket with millions and millions of dollars, you can buy anything, but if you go there and ask for peace of mind, people will laugh.
And if you ask a doctor for genuine peace of mind, not the mere sedation you get from taking some kind of pill or injection, the doctor cannot help you.
Even today’s sophisticated computers cannot provide you with mental peace.
Mental peace must come from the mind. Everyone wants happiness and pleasure, but if we compare physical pleasure and physical pain with mental pleasure and mental pain, we find that the mind is more effective, predominant, and superior.
Thus it is worthwhile adopting certain methods to increase mental peace, and in order to do that, it is important to know more about the mind. When we talk about preservation of the environment, it is related to many other things.
The key point is to have genuine sense of universal responsibility, based on love and compassion, and clear awareness.
Imagine a private, global supercourt that empowers corporations to bend countries to their will.
Say a nation tries to prosecute a corrupt CEO or ban dangerous pollution. Imagine that a company could turn to this super court and sue the whole country for daring to interfere with its profits, demanding hundreds of millions or even billions of dollars as retribution.
Imagine that this court is so powerful that nations often must heed its rulings as if they came from their own supreme courts, with no meaningful way to appeal.
That it operates unconstrained by precedent or any significant public oversight, often keeping its proceedings and sometimes even its decisions secret.
That the people who decide its cases are largely elite Western corporate attorneys who have a vested interest in expanding the court’s authority because they profit from it directly, arguing cases one day and then sitting in judgment another.
That some of them half-jokingly refer to themselves as “The Club” or “The Mafia.”
And imagine that the penalties this court has imposed have been so crushing - and its decisions so unpredictable - that some nations dare not risk a trial, responding to the mere threat of a lawsuit by offering vast concessions, such as rolling back their own laws or even wiping away the punishments of convicted criminals.
This system is already in place, operating behind closed doors in office buildings and conference rooms in cities around the world.
Known as investor-state dispute settlement, or ISDS, it is written into a vast network of treaties that govern international trade and investment, including NAFTA and the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which Congress must soon decide whether to ratify.
These trade pacts have become a flashpoint in the US presidential campaign. But an 18-month BuzzFeed News investigation, spanning three continents and involving more than 200 interviews and tens of thousands of documents, many of them previously confidential, has exposed an obscure but immensely consequential feature of these trade treaties, the secret operations of these tribunals, and the ways that business has co-opted them to bring sovereign nations to heel.
The BuzzFeed News investigation explores four different aspects of ISDS. In coming days, it will show how the mere threat of an ISDS case can intimidate a nation into gutting its own laws, how some financial firms have transformed what was intended to be a system of justice into an engine of profit, and how America is surprisingly vulnerable to suits from foreign companies.
The series starts today with perhaps the least known and most jarring revelation:
Companies and executives accused or even convicted of crimes have escaped punishment by turning to this special forum. Based on exclusive reporting from the Middle East, Central America, and Asia, BuzzFeed News has found the following:
A Dubai real estate mogul and former business partner of Donald Trump [not that that means anything, he's had hundreds of business partners] was sentenced to prison for collaborating on a deal that would swindle the Egyptian people out of millions of dollars - but then he turned to ISDS and got his prison sentence wiped away.
In El Salvador, a court found that a factory had poisoned a village - including dozens of children - with lead, failing for years to take government-ordered steps to prevent the toxic metal from seeping out. But the factory owners’ lawyers used ISDS to help the company dodge a criminal conviction and the responsibility for cleaning up the area and providing needed medical care.
Two financiers convicted of embezzling more than $300 million from an Indonesian bank used an ISDS finding to fend off Interpol, shield their assets, and effectively nullify their punishment.
[Historical] When the US Congress votes on whether to give final approval to the sprawling Trans-Pacific Partnership, which President Barack Obama staunchly supports, it will be deciding on a massive expansion of ISDS. Donald Trump and Hillary Clinton oppose the overall treaty, but they have focused mainly on what they say would be the loss of American jobs.
Clinton’s running mate, Tim Kaine, has voiced concern about ISDS in particular, and Sen. Elizabeth Warren has lambasted it. Last year, members of both houses of Congress tried to keep it out of the Pacific trade deal. They failed.
ISDS is basically binding arbitration on a global scale, designed to settle disputes between countries and foreign companies that do business within their borders. Different treaties can mandate slightly different rules, but the system is broadly the same.
When companies sue, their cases are usually heard in front of a tribunal of three arbitrators, often private attorneys. The business appoints one arbitrator and the country another, then both sides usually decide on the third together.
Conceived of in the 1950s, the system was intended to benefit both developing nations and the foreign companies that sought to invest in them.
The companies would gain a fair, neutral referee if a rogue regime seized their property or discriminated against them in favor of domestic companies. And the countries would gain the roads or hospitals or industries that those foreign corporations would, as a result, feel confident building.
“It works,” said Charles Brower, a longtime ISDS arbitrator. “Like any system of law, there will be disappointments; you’re dealing with human systems. But this system fundamentally produces as good justice as the federal courts of the United States.” [Not a benchmarch which should be aspired to.]
Charles Brower
He defended the lawyers who often serve as arbitrators, saying they:
"Are very aware of their responsibilities. Unlike politicians, we are up for election every minute of every day - somewhere in the world, somebody is trying to figure out whom to appoint in a case. We’re only as good as our reputations.”
As proof that ISDS delivers justice, Brower pointed to a wave of nationalizations by the Venezuelan government, many while Hugo Chávez was in charge, that led to:
"Huge awards against them for uncompensated expropriation.”
ISDS has not only put rapacious leaders on notice, its defenders say, but it has also encouraged investment, especially in poor countries, helping to raise overall economic development.
Some even say that it helps avoid gunboat diplomacy and tense international showdowns because countries have agreed on a forum where they can resolve disputes involving major investments.
But over the last two decades, ISDS has morphed from a rarely used last resort, designed for egregious cases of state theft or blatant discrimination, into a powerful tool that corporations brandish ever more frequently, often against broad public policies that they claim crimp profits.
Because the system is so secretive, it is not possible to know the total number of ISDS cases, but lawyers in the field say it is skyrocketing. Indeed, of the almost 700 publicly known cases across the last half century, more than a tenth were filed just last year.
Driving this expansion are the lawyers themselves. They have devised new and creative ways to deploy ISDS, and in the process bill millions to both the businesses and the governments they represent. At posh locales around the globe, members of The Club meet to swap strategies and drum up potential clients, some of which are household names, such as ExxonMobil or Eli Lilly, but many more of which are much lower profile.
In specialty publications, the lawyers suggest novel ways to use ISDS as leverage against governments. It’s a sort of sophisticated, international version of the plaintiff’s attorney TV ad or billboard: Has your business been harmed by an increase in mining royalties in Mali? Our experienced team of lawyers may be able to help.
A few of their ideas: Sue Libya for failing to protect an oil facility during a civil war. Sue Spain for reducing solar energy incentives as a severe recession forced the government to make budget cuts. Sue India for allowing a generic drug company to make a cheaper version of a cancer drug.
In a little-noticed 2014 dissent, US Chief Justice John Roberts warned that ISDS arbitration panels hold the alarming power to review a nation’s laws and “effectively annul the authoritative acts of its legislature, executive, and judiciary.” ISDS arbitrators, he continued, “can meet literally anywhere in the world” and “sit in judgment” on a nation’s “sovereign acts.”
That fate has not yet befallen the United States - but largely because of sheer luck, former government lawyers said.
In theory, ISDS arbitrators must follow the rules laid down in trade pacts.
But in practice, they have interpreted the vague language of many treaties as enshrining broad, unwritten rights far beyond protections against property seizures and blatant discrimination - even finding, in one case, a right to a “reasonable rate of return.”
Some entrepreneurial lawyers scout for ways to make money from ISDS.
Selvyn Seidel, an attorney who represented clients in ISDS suits, now runs a specialty firm, one that finds investors willing to fund promising suits for a cut of the eventual award.
Some lawyers, he said, monitor governments around the world in search of proposed laws and regulations that might spark objections from foreign companies.
"Huge awards against them for uncompensated expropriation.”
“You know it’s coming down the road,” he said, “so, in that year before it’s actually changed, you can line up the right claimants and the right law firms to bring a number of cases.”
The US officials who negotiated the Trans-Pacific Partnership have argued that it contains new ISDS safeguards, including opening up hearings and legal filings to the public.
The changes, however, have loopholes, and lawyers at some big firms are already advising clients how they might use the new deal to their benefit.
Opposition to ISDS is spreading across the political spectrum, with groups on the left and right attacking the system.
Around the world, a growing number of countries are pushing for reforms or pulling out entirely.
But most of the alarm has been focused on the potential use of ISDS by corporations to roll back public-interest laws, such as those banning the use of hazardous chemicals or raising the minimum wage.
The system’s usefulness as a shield for the criminal and the corrupt has remained virtually unknown.
Reviewing publicly available information for about 300 claims filed during the past five years, BuzzFeed News found more than 35 cases in which the company or executive seeking protection in ISDS was accused of criminal activity, including money laundering, embezzlement, stock manipulation, bribery, war profiteering, and fraud.
Among them: a bank in Cyprus that the US government accused of financing terrorism and organized crime, an oil company executive accused of embezzling millions from the impoverished African nation of Burundi, and the Russian oligarch known as “the Kremlin’s banker.”
Some are at the center of notorious scandals, from the billionaire accused of orchestrating a massive Ponzi scheme in Mauritius to multiple telecommunications tycoons charged in the ever-widening “2G scam” in India, which made it into Time magazine’s top 10 abuses of power, alongside Watergate.
The companies or executives involved in these cases either denied wrongdoing or did not respond to requests for comment.
Most of the 35-plus cases are still ongoing. But in at least eight of the cases, bringing an ISDS claim got results for the accused wrongdoers, including a multimillion-dollar award, a dropped criminal investigation, and dropped criminal charges. In another, the tribunal has directed the government to halt a criminal case while the arbitration is pending.
Of course, there are governments that don’t have clean hands themselves, and some claims by businesses have been justified. The legal systems of some countries are flagrantly unfair or riddled with corruption.
Moreover, authoritarian or kleptocratic regimes sometimes do use their justice systems as political weapons. For example, arbitrators ordered Russia to pay compensation after finding that Vladimir Putin and his administration had used criminal and tax proceedings to destroy his political rival Mikhail Khodorkovsky’s oil company.
Lawyers say that some governments, faced with a legitimate ISDS claim, will even trump up a criminal charge to deflect from their own wrongdoing. For example, arbitrators found there was evidence suggesting that Bolivia had launched a fraud case against mining-company executives as a ploy to get the company’s ISDS claim thrown out.
But even some members of The Club said they were concerned by how often credible allegations of criminality arise. Many ISDS lawyers say that the system helps promote the rule of law around the world.
If ISDS is seen as protecting criminals, they fear, it could delegitimize a system that is working well for many others.
One lawyer who regularly represents governments said he’s seen evidence of corporate criminality that he “couldn’t believe.”
Speaking on the condition that he not be named because he’s currently handling ISDS cases, he said;
“You have a lot of scuzzy sort-of thieves for whom this is a way to hit the jackpot.”
Read the full accounts of what happened in the cases of Egypt, El Salvador and Indonesia at: Buzzfeed
Be advised: If the TPPA / TTIP et al were ratified, it would be these pricks coming to rape our countries.
“We Are The Death Merchant Of The World”: Ex-Bush Official Lawrence Wilkerson Condemns Military-Industrial Complex
February 25 2023 | From: Salon / Various The military-industrial complex "is much more pernicious than Eisenhower ever thought," says the retired US colonel.
Col. Lawrence Wilkerson is tired of “the corporate interests that we go abroad to slay monsters for.”
As the former chief of staff to Secretary of State Colin Powell, Wilkerson played an important role in the George W. Bush administration. In the years since, however, the former Bush official has established himself as a prominent critic of U.S. foreign policy.
“I think Smedley Butler was onto something,” explained Lawrence Wilkerson, in an extended interview with Salon.
In his day, in the early 20th century, Butler was the highest ranked and most honored official in the history of the U.S. Marine Corps. He helped lead wars throughout the world over a series of decades, before later becoming a vociferous opponent of American imperialism, declaring “war is a racket.”
Wilkerson spoke highly of Butler, referencing the late general’s famous quote:
“Looking back on it, I might have given Al Capone a few hints. The best he could do was to operate his racket in three districts. I operated on three continents.”
“I think the problem that Smedley identified, quite eloquently actually,” Wilkerson said, “especially for a Marine - I had to say that as a soldier,” the retired Army colonel added with a laugh;
“I think the problem is much deeper and more profound today, and much more subtle and sophisticated.”
Today, the military-industrial complex “is much more pernicious than Eisenhower ever thought it would be,” Wilkerson warned.
In his farewell address in 1961, former President Dwight D. Eisenhower famously cautioned Americans that the military and corporate interests were increasingly working together, contrary to the best interests of the citizenry. He called this phenomenon the military-industrial complex.
As a case study of how the contemporary military-industrial complex works, Wilkerson pointed to leading weapons corporations like Lockheed Martin, and their work with draconian, repressive Western-allied regimes in the Gulf, or in inflaming tensions in Korea.
“Was Bill Clinton’s expansion of NATO - after George H. W. Bush and [his Secretary of State] James Baker had assured Gorbachev and then Yeltsin that we wouldn’t go an inch further east - was this for Lockheed Martin, and Raytheon, and Boeing, and others, to increase their network of potential weapon sales?” Wilkerson asked.
“You bet it was,” he answered.
“Is there a penchant on behalf of the Congress to bless the use of force more often than not because of the constituencies they have and the money they get from the defense contractors?” Wilkerson continued.
Again, he answered his own question: “You bet.”
“It’s not like Dick Cheney or someone like that went and said let’s have a war because we want to make money for Halliburton, but it is a pernicious on decision-making,” the former Bush official explained.
“And the fact that they donate so much money to congressional elections and to PACs and so forth is another pernicious influence.”
“Those who deny this are just being utterly naive, or they are complicit too,” Wilkerson added.
“And some of my best friends work for Lockheed Martin,” along with Raytheon, Boeing and Halliburton, he quipped.
Wilkerson - who in the same interview with Salon defended Edward Snowden, saying the whistle-blower performed an important service and did not endanger U.S. national security - was also intensely critical of the growing movement to “privatize public functions, like prisons.”
Col. Lawrence Wilkerson
“I fault us Republicans for this majorly,” he confessed - although a good many prominent Democrats have also jumped on the neoliberal bandwagon.
In a 2011 speech, for instance, Secretary of State Hillary Clinton declared, “It’s time for the United States to start thinking of Iraq as a business opportunity” for U.S. corporations.
Wilkerson lamented, “We’ve privatized the ultimate public function: war.”
“In many respects it is now private interests that benefit most from our use of military force,” he continued.
“Whether it’s private security contractors, that are still all over Iraq or Afghanistan, or it’s the bigger-known defense contractors, like the number one in the world, Lockheed Martin.”
Journalist Antony Loewenstein detailed how the U.S. privatized its wars in Iraq and Afghanistan in another interview with Salon. There are an estimated 30,000 military contractors working for the Pentagon in Afghanistan today; they outnumber U.S. troops three-to-one. Thousands more are in Iraq.
Lockheed Martin simply “plans to sell every aspect of missile defense that it can,” regardless of whether it is needed, Wilkerson said. And what is best to maximize corporate interest is by no means necessarily the same as what is best for average citizens.
“We dwarf the Russians or anyone else who sells weapons in the world,” the retired Army colonel continued.
The World’s Top Five ‘Most Evil’ Corporations
February 24 2023 | From: RT / Various Most companies become successful thanks to their stellar reputations. But not always.
RT Business scraped the bottom of the barrel to find the most hated companies trending on the internet.
Monsanto’s herbicides have been blamed for killing millions of crop acres, while its chemicals were added to blacklists of products causing cancer and many other health problems.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Once the darling of Microsoft-hating gadget lovers, Apple more recently has been accused of mistreating or underpaying their employees, hiding money offshore, and not paying taxes.
It has also been accused of violating health or environmental legislation, and misusing its position where they have a monopoly in the market.
And, oh yes, deliberately slowing older iPhones and overcharging for its products to boot.
The world's largest food and beverage company Nestle says it is committed to enhancing quality of life and contributing to a healthier future.
However, it has been dragged through numerous scandals involving slave labor.
The multinational is one of the most boycotted corporations in the world, as violations of labor rights have been reported at its factories in different countries.
The products of the American multinational cigarette and tobacco manufacturing company are sold in over 180 countries outside the United States.
Philip Morris owns Marlboro, one of the world's biggest brands.
Back in 1999, Philip Morris courted officials of the Czech Republic by explaining how smoking would in fact help their economy, due to the reduced healthcare costs from its citizens dying early.
American fast-food company McDonald's was founded in 1940. The company serves more customers each day than the entire population of Great Britain, but has a long history of terrible labor practices.
Dealing With “Waking Up.” How To Handle Discovering More Than Just The Tip Of the Iceberg February 23 2023 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various A look at our current world might bring about emotions or observations linked to feelings of chaos.
With the incredible divide happening in the US due to the upcoming presidential elections, the manufactured gender, race and sexual orientation divides taking place all over, it’s easy to feel like there are ‘bad’ things happening all the time.
People often look at the media and say it’s there to ruin or shift your perception of the world negatively, and I would partly agree with this for sure.
In Brief:
The Facts: An evolution in the way we view our world and the systems within it is necessary to create meaningful change at this stage in humanity's journey. This starts with an evolution in media.
Reflect On: Can we truly change our world if we don't know where we are truly at? Can we expect to see change in our world if we don't change ourselves?
After all, that’s what inspired me to create a news source that took a different approach. But the reality is, we’re in a time where we have to look at some of the tough things going on in our world in order to understand why they are happening, where we are at and how we can shift.
The difference in the way we like to do that here at CE is, we might talk about some of the ‘darker’ stuff, but we’ll always help in moving through it vs leaving a reader hanging.
This is done through an important process I built called The CE Protocol. This is partly how we have been creating an evolution in media for the past 10 years.
My feeling is that we must combine an observation of what we are actively creating in our world with personal transformation so that we can truly change the challenges we face at the core, versus simply throwing bandaids at the situation.
For example, we might want people to unite and be more peaceful with one another, yet we’ll actively attack, mischaracterize others and divide ourselves simply based on something like political orientation.
Why do we do that? Because we don’t know who we are deep down, and we actively get caught up in the illusion of politics that has been manufactured to prey on our programmings.
Therefore, the more we wake up and see the illusion that politics is by consuming different media, the more we begin to see truth and are inspired to make new choices.
This turns us inward where we make changes within ourselves and this then leads us to interact within our world differently because now we are operating from a different state of consciousness.
Many people feel we can simply change our world by working only on ourselves, without having to see the truth of our world.
Often times that changes a person slightly, but they will still support the systems in our world because they still believe in them, thus things don’t change.
In the four short videos below, I will guide you by explaining exactly what this protocol is and how it encompasses the totality of what’s needed to create a shift in inward consciousness and our physical world.
The basic steps are: 1. Breaking The Illusion 2. Awakening Neutrality 3. Deprogramming Limits 4. Living Aligned
1: Breaking The Illusion
2: Awakening Neutrality
3: Deprogramming Limits
4. Living Aligned
Due to the pressure of mass censorship, we now have our own censorship-free, and ad-free on demand streaming network!
It is the world's first and only conscious media network streaming mind-expanding interviews, news broadcasts, and conscious shows.
Click here to start a Free 7-Day Trial and watch 100's of hours of conscious media videos, that you won't see anywhere else.
A Textbook Case Of Treason + Trump: A Threat To The Deep State February 21 2023 | From: Zerohedge / TranceFormation / a / Various
“A nation can survive its fools, and even the ambitious. But it cannot survive treason from within. An enemy at the gates is less formidable, for he is known and carries his banner openly.
But the traitor moves amongst those within the gate freely, his sly whispers rustling through all the alleys, heard in the very halls of government itself.” - Marcus Tullius Cicero
The Transition Integrity Project (TIP) is a shadowy group of government, military and media elites who have concocted a plan to spread mayhem and disinformation following the November 3 presidential elections.
The strategy takes advantage of the presumed delay in determining the winner of the upcoming election, (due to the deluge of mail-in votes.)
The interim period is expected to intensify partisan warfare creating the perfect environment for disseminating propaganda and inciting street violence.
The leaders of TIP believe that a mass mobilization will help them to achieve what Russiagate could not, that is, the removal Donald Trump via an illicit coup conjured up by behind-the-scenes powerbrokers and their Democrat allies.
Here’s a little more background from an article by Chris Farrell at the Gatestone Institute:
"In one of the greatest public disinformation campaigns in American history - the Left and their NeverTrumper allies (under the nom de guerre: “Transition Integrity Project”) released a 22-page report in August 2020 “war gaming” four election crisis scenarios:...
The outcome of each TIP scenario results in street violence and political impasse.
... Is it possible that the leadership of the American Left, along with their NeverTrumper allies, are busy talking themselves into advocating and promoting street violence as a response to a presidential election?
The answer is: Yes…. expect violence in the aftermath of the election, because now that is the new ‘normal.”
Farrell is right. As we can see from the many articles that have recently popped up in the media, the American people are being prepared for a contested election that will fuel public anxiety and revolt.
This all fits with the overall strategy of the TIP.
Selected journalists will be used to provide bits of information that serve the interests of the group while the people will be told to expect a long and drawn-out constitutional crisis.
Judicial Watch Statement on the Acquittal of President Donald Trump
(Washington, DC) – Judicial Watch President Tom Fitton made the following statement regarding the Senate’s vote to acquit President Donald Trump:
"Congratulations to President Trump on the overwhelming vote by the U.S. Senate to acquit him and reject the baseless impeachment charges against him.
Thankfully, the U.S. Senate rejected this act of tyranny by the Pelosi-Schiff coup cabal that controls the House of Representatives. Today is “Vindication Day” for the President, the rule of law and the Constitution.
Senate Majority Leader McConnell and the President’s defense team deserve thanks for limiting the damage to our Republic by successfully combating efforts to expand the trial to further abuse President Trump and the rule of law.
There must be accountability for this unprecedented abuse of power that targeted not only President Trump, but the Constitution. We have little doubt the President’s opponents will corruptly continue to abuse and harass him.
That’s why Judicial Watch will continue to investigate and pursue its dozens of lawsuits on the Biden-Ukraine scandal, details about Schiff’s misconduct as well the illegal spying on President Trump and other innocent Americans.”
Meanwhile, the media, the Democrat leadership, trusted elites and elements in the Intelligence Community will put pressure on Trump to step down while firing up their political base to take to the streets.
TIP’s 22-page manifesto makes it clear that mass mobilization will be key to any electoral victory. Here’s an excerpt from the text:
“A show of numbers in the streets-and actions in the streets-may be decisive factors in determining what the public perceives as a just and legitimate outcome.”
In other words, the authors fully support demonstrations and political upheaval to achieve their goal of removing Trump.
Clearly, this scorched earth approach did not originate with Joe Biden, but with the cynical and bloodthirsty puppetmasters who operate behind the curtain and who will do anything to advance their agenda.
This is a full-blown color revolution authored and supported by the same oligarchs and deep-state honchoes that have opposed Trump from the very beginning.
They’re not going to back down or call off the dogs until the job is done and Trump is gone. And when the dust settles, Trump will [NOT] likely be charged, tried, sentenced and imprisoned.
His fortune will be seized, his family will be financially ruined, and his closest advisors and allies will be prosecuted on fabricated charges.
There’s not going to be a “graceful transition” of power if Trump loses. He will face the full wrath of the scheming mandarins he has frustrated for the last 4 years.
These are the men who applauded when Saddam and Ghaddafi were savagely butchered. Will Trump face the same fate as them?
Trump has less than one month to rally his supporters, draw attention to the conspiracy that has is presently underway, and figure out a way to defend himself against the coup plotters. If he is unable to derail the impending junta, his goose is cooked.
It’s worth noting, that the Transition Integrity Project (TIP) has no legal authority to meddle in the upcoming election.
They were not appointed by any congressional committee nor did any government entity approve their intrusive activities.
This is entirely a “lone wolf” operation designed to exploit loopholes in campaign laws in order to undermine public confidence in our elections and to express their unbridled hostility towards Donald Trump.
This short statement provides the basic justification for the group’s existence.
It presents the participants as impartial observers performing their civic duty by objectively analyzing exercises (war games?) that indicate that Trump will challenge the election results in a desperate attempt to hold on to power.
Not surprisingly, the group provides no evidence that the president would react the way they think he would.
In fact, their hypothesis seems extremely far-fetched given the fact that Trump has no militia, no private army, and very few allies among the political class, the Intelligence Community, the FBI, the military or the deep state.
Who exactly does the group think would help Trump hold on to power: Bill Barr, Larry Kudlow, Melania?
There is nothing “impartial” about this analysis. It is partisan gibberish aimed at discrediting Trump while creating a pretext for launching a coup against him. Here is another sample of TIP’s “objective analysis” from page 1 of the manuscript:
"The Transition Integrity Project (TIP) was launched in late 2019 out of concern that the Trump Administration may seek to manipulate, ignore, undermine or disrupt the 2020 presidential election and transition process.
TIP takes no position on how Americans should cast their votes, or on the likely winner of the upcoming election; either major party candidate could prevail at the polls in November without resorting to “dirty tricks.”
However, the administration of President Donald Trump has steadily undermined core norms of democracy and the rule of law and embraced numerous corrupt and authoritarian practices.
This presents a profound challenge for those –from either party –who are committed to ensuring free and fair elections, peaceful transitions of power, and stable administrative continuity in the United States.”
Got that? In other words (to paraphrase) “Trump is a corrupt dictator who hates democracy and the rule of law, but that is just our unbiased opinion. Please, don’t let that influence your vote. We just want to make sure the election goes smoothly.”
As we noted, the hatred for Trump permeates the entire 22-page document and that, in turn, undermines the credibility of the author to portray his project as an impartial examination of potential problems in the upcoming election.
There is nothing evenhanded in the approach to these issues or in the remedies that are recommended. This is a partisan project concocted by malicious elites who despise Trump and who plan to remove him from office by hook or crook.
Tucker Warns America: Democrats Fighting for “Complete Control” of United States
So, do we know who the leaders of this (TIP) group are?
Well, we know who their two main spokesmen are: Rosa Brooks - Georgetown law professor and co-founder of the Transition Integrity Project, and Ret. Col. Lawrence Wilkerson, Distinguished Adjunct Professor of Government and Public Policy at the College of William & Mary, and chief of staff to former Secretary of State Colin Powell.
According to an article by Whitney Webb:
"(Rosa) Brooks… was an advisor to the Pentagon and the Hillary Clinton-led State Department during the Obama administration.
She was also previously the general counsel to the President of the Open Society Institute, part of the Open Society Foundations (OSF), a controversial organization funded by billionaire George Soros.Zoe Hudson, who is TIP’s director, is also a former top figure at OSF, serving as senior policy analyst and liaison between the foundations and the U.S. government for 11 years.
OSF ties to the TIP are a red flag for a number of reasons, namely due to the fact that OSF and other Soros-funded organizations played a critical role in fomenting so-called “color revolutions” to overthrow non-aligned governments, particularly during the Obama administration. Examples of OSF’s ties to these manufactured “revolutions” include Ukraine in 2014 and the “Arab Spring”...
In addition to her ties to the Obama administration and OSF, Brooks is currently a scholar at West Point’s Modern War Institute, where she focuses on “the relationship between the military and domestic policing” and also Georgetown’s Innovative Policing Program.
She is a currently a key player in the documented OSF-led push to “capitalize” off of legitimate calls for police reform to justify the creation of a federalized police force under the guise of defunding and/or eliminating local police departments.
Brooks’ interest in the “blurring line” between military and police is notable given her past advocacy of a military coup to remove Trump from office and the TIP’s subsequent conclusion that the military “may” have to step in if Trump manages to win the 2020 election, per the group’s “war games” described above.
Brooks is also a senior fellow at the think tank New America. New America’s mission statement notes that the organization is focused on “honestly confronting the challenges caused by rapid technological and social change, and seizing the opportunities those changes create.”
It is largely funded by Silicon Valley billionaires, including Bill Gates (Microsoft), Eric Schmidt (Google), Reid Hoffman (LinkedIn), Jeffrey Skoll and Pierre Omidyar (eBay).
In addition, it has received millions directly from the U.S. State Department to research “ranking digital rights.” Notably, of these funders, Reid Hoffman was caught “meddling” in the most recent Democratic primary to undercut Bernie Sanders’ candidacy during the Iowa caucus and while others, such as Eric Schmidt and Pierre Omidyar, are known for their cozy ties to the Clinton family and even ties to Hillary Clinton’s 2016 campaign.”
Is it safe to say that Rosa Brooks is a Soros stooge overseeing a color revolution in the United States aimed at toppling Trump and replacing him with a dementia-addled, meat-puppet named Joe Biden?
President Trump signaled his support of fighting the Satanic New World Order and the pedophiles that run it when asked by a reporter if he supported the Q Anon movement.
Political analyst Paul Craig Roberts seems to think so. Here’s what he said in a recent post at his website:
“I have provided evidence that the military/security complex, using the media and the Democrats, intends to turn the November election into a color revolution…
The evidence of a color revolution in the works is abundantly supplied by CNN, MSNBC, New York Times, NPR, Washington Post and numerous Internet sites funded by the CIA and the foundations and corporations through which it operates...
All of these media organizations are establishing the story in the mind of Americans that Trump will not leave office when he loses or steals the election and must be driven out.
…With Antifa and Black Lives Matter now experienced in violent protests, they will be unleashed anew on American cities when there is news of a Trump election victory.
The media will explain the violence as necessary to free us from a tyrant and egg on the violence, as will the Democrat Party. The CIA will be certain that the violence is well funded….
… What is a reelected President Trump going to do when the Secret Service refuses to repel Antifa and Black Lives Matter when they breach White House Security? …
American Democracy is on the verge of being ended for all times, and the world media will herald the event as the successful overthrowing of a tyrant.”
Another of the leading spokesmen for TIP is Retired Colonel Lawrence Wilkerson who made this revealing statement in a recent interview:
“Let me just say some of the things that we’re putting out there. Among those things, one that is very important is the media, particularly the mainstream media.
They cannot act as they usually act with regard to elections. They have to play a coup on election night.
They can’t be declaring some state like Pennsylvania for one candidate or the other. When Pennsylvania probably has thousands upon thousands of votes yet to come in and count.
So, the media has to get its act in order and it has to act very differently than it normally does.”
(NOTE: In other words, Wilkerson does not want the media to follow the normal protocols for covering an election, but to adjust their reporting to accommodate the aims of the coup-plotters.
Does that sound like someone who is committed to evenhanded coverage of events, or someone who wants reporters to shape the news to meet the specifications of his own particular agenda? Here’s more from Wilkerson:)
“Second, ...we also have learned that poll workers have to be younger. And we’ve started a movement all across the country to train young people. And we’ve had really good luck with the volunteers to do so, to be poll workers.
Because we found out in Wisconsin, for example, poll workers are mostly over 60. And many of them didn’t show up because they were afraid of COVID-19.
While the Media Schmucks have been standing around snarking and stuffing people’s heads full of lies, omissions, deceits, and nonsense - this is just a partial list sent by a friend of what Donald Trump and his Administration has accomplished while you slept.
Doesn’t that sound a bit fishy, especially from a dyed-in-the-wool partisan who’s mixed up with a group whose sole aim is to beat Trump? And why are the authors of the TIP manifesto so eager to reveal their true intentions.
Take a look:
“There will likely not be an “election night” this year; unprecedented numbers of voters are expected to use mail-in ballots, which will almost certainly delay the certified result for days or weeks.
A delay provides a window for campaigns, the media, and others to cast doubt on the integrity of the process and for escalating tensions between competing camps.
As a legal matter, a candidate unwilling to concede can contest the election into January.”
The coup plotters want a contested election that drags on for weeks, deepens divisions among the population, undermines confidence in the electoral system, instigates ferocious street fighting in cities across the country, and gives the Biden camp time to mobilize its political resources in Congress to mount a Constitutional attack on Trump.
Can we at least call this treachery by its proper name: Treason - “The crime of betraying one’s country by trying to overthrow the government?”
Saying someone is ‘not one of us’ was common trigger phraseology that forbid I should have ‘any contact any time anywhere with anyone’ outside the cabal of New World Order Deep State perpeTraitors.
A Threat To The Deep State
Donald Trump was of deep concern to those shadow government criminals in control of my mind, our media, information, education, and justice system.
I had no ability to question or reason under mind control, or I would have wondered what it was about Trump that intimidated them so much that he was ‘forbidden’.
Maybe they feared he had eyes to see, ears to hear, and soul to know that their criminal activity was draining our country and, in turn, was fully capable of draining their Wash DC swamp.
Today, people often ask me what I knew about Trump. Having never met him, perpeTraitors’ deep stated fear that ‘he’s not one of us’ says it all.
He is the only person brave enough to call out The Establishment which is every bit as evil and against you as Trump says.
You can elect Trump or The Establishment. Trump is our last chance. If he goes down, there will never ever again be another challenger to The Establishment.
Like everyone else, I am experiencing our President and his Administration’s accomplishments as we live through these pivotal times in history.
I never thought I’d live to see the deeply entrenched swamp being drained, exposing the vast array of swamp creatures lurking in the murk.
Mark and I often pondered how dismantling the New World Order could possibly be accomplished and realized it would have to be a concerted effort on local, state, federal, and global levels.
This would require a Great Awakening of biblical proportions since awareness is the first step toward positive necessary change.
Analyze Reality
People also ask if I support Trump. Mark’s retort to such questions was always, “It’s not important who I support, it is who supports me that matters.”
In view of healing from my past, I know who to trust because I know how to trust, which means I scrutinize political actions, integrity of promises kept, and support positive changes on their own merits.
Controlled media, contrived polls, and rigged elections have finally been exposed, which empowers u.s. to vigilantly maintain free thought integrity of elections we reclaimed in 2016.
I’ve blown the whistle on global education for 30 years, and now I’m seeing this Administration address the issue on a federal level while empowering we-the-people to reclaim our local schools.
Parents weary of seeing their precious children schooled and programmed to embrace socialism and gender confusion are demanding free choice in education, and it, too, has been granted.
Our criminal justice system is being restored to uphold our sacred Constitution through the appointment of Judges, while awareness empowers communities to secure justice on local levels.
Wisdom out-thinks a criminal mind every time, and we are witnessing and participating in the greatest display of good triumphing over evil in history.
What I Think of Trump
People who still wonder what I think of Trump need only to read my testimony inTRANCE for their own answers and insight into the magnitude of what is being accomplished today.
Human trafficking is now being effectively addressed rather than sanctioned on federal levels, while we-the-people are empowered to take vigilant action in our own communities.
Elections In New Zealand, Australia, Canada, England, Germany, The Netherlands
& Exposed: Proof NZ Prime Ministers Are Globalists February 21 2023 | From: JonRappoport / VinnyEastwood / Various “National election campaigns are media events. Media run them. Media pump ratings. They produce the soap opera. They construct the illusion. Many people hate hearing this, because they prefer to believe the few candidates who can actually win are real. No one with that much face time on national television is real.” - The Underground, Jon Rappoport
I’ve just completed a flurry of articles on how elections work as media events in the US (archived here, under “elections”). But why leave out other countries, where the process is essentially the same?
You have to look at these major election seasons as television series produced by the major networks.
Then it begins to make sense.
The casting of characters tends to follow the same pattern, over and over. You have two major candidates (for president, premier, prime minister). Writing their parts is a bit of a challenge, because any intelligent person can see there is really not much to choose between them.
That’s a ratings killer. The networks need opposition and sharp differences. So while both of these “leaders,” behind the scenes, are Globalists and favor huge corporations and huge government bureaucracies, “free trade,” sending jobs overseas where workers will toil for virtually no pay in execrable conditions, etc., the networks will find issues on which they disagree.
Then you have a cast of minor characters running for the top office in the land. A couple of them are fiery and feisty, more “radical” or “radically conservative” in their views. They’ll never make it, but hope springs eternal, and a significant proportion of the population is drawn to them - for a while.
The television networks, as usual, adopt the horse race mode of reporting. Because, when all is said and done, that’s the main theme: who is going to win? Who really cares about exploring the issues in depth? There’s no juice or excitement there.
But watching two creatures gallop along a track toward the finish line moves the adrenaline.
And the networks, day after day, can point to what the candidates are doing or wearing or saying that is affecting their position in the race.
Did candidate A just utter a possibly politically incorrect phrase? Let’s interview three experts and find out.
Did candidate B once have dinner with a financier who cheated investors out of their life savings? No? It was lunch? A brief breakfast? Hmm. A professor of statistics explains how long a brief breakfast averages out to be.
Why has candidate A shifted from wearing blue to red?
To bolster all this, we have the polls, which seem to be taking place three times a day. Numbers to report. Breakdowns of the numbers in key voter areas of the country.
Meanwhile, the networks keep searching out differences between candidates A and B. A’s wet dream is wholescale bombing missions. B prefers thousands of drone strikes. Of course, this difference isn’t presented that way. B is a “peace candidate.” A is a “hawk.”
Jacinda Ardern Exposed in 7 Minutes - Vinny Eastwood
A wants the “free market.” B wants government to create millions of new jobs. On closer inspection, they’re both pushing the dominance of mega-corporations. But there is no closer inspection in the television series called Election.
At the root of all this insanity is the fact that television networks produce the series. As long as the viewing audience tunes in, as long as the ratings are respectable, the illusion continues.
The viewer, the voter, projects his hopes and dreams on to the television image of a candidate. It never occurs to him that:
a) he is now a fan of a soap opera and
b) his adored candidate is part of an immense political system in which only minor deviations from the norm are permitted.
Entering that system and participating in it is like walking into a tailor’s shop where, by magic, the customer (participant, candidate) automatically shrinks to half his former size in an instant. And from there it only gets worse.
Television is there to obscure the actual size of the political system and its culture. The soap opera highlights the two major characters (candidates), as if they alone can work great changes in the direction the oil tanker called Politics takes.
Television relies on the fact that a majority of the population favors watching competition - rather than learning about the collaboration, behind the scenes, between characters who seem to be on opposing sides.
The election IS television. Why is that not understood?
Perhaps for the same reason people can sit in a dark movie theater and look up at a large screen and forget, for a few moments, that they are sitting in a movie theater.
They are captured by the story and the images and the characters. And they want to be captured and taken away.
They want to believe, in the case of elections, that they are participating in something important simply by watching television.
You might say election campaigns are the original reality-shows. They’re soap opera, but the main characters are not actors. (Of course, they are actors.)
Perhaps you remember the 1972 American film, The Candidate, starring Robert Redford. The key moment occurs as Redford, who is running for a seat in the US Senate, watches a commercial he claims to favor, one that expresses his real convictions.
Within moments he realizes it’s a dud. He comes across as a stammering lightweight. No, from now on, he’ll have to accept ads in which he appears authoritative (but vague), on top of his game, and handsome. The die is cast. He is now an artifact of television.
And then there is the best film ever made about television: Network (1976), written by Paddy Chayefsky. The embittered, half-mad, disintegrating news anchor, Howard Beale, assaults his viewing audience:
“We deal in illusions, man… We’re all you know. You’re beginning to believe the illusions we’re spinning here. You’re beginning to think that the tube is reality and that your own lives are unreal. In God’s name, you people are the real thing. We are the illusion.”
Unfortunately, the television audience is insulted if someone tells them the characters they’re watching are synthetic and artificial.
Something strange is happening here. It’s more than the flicker of the images or the frequency or the brain wave-states television induces. It’s a counterpart to what people dream when they’re asleep.
The story lines of dreams, the vividness, the intimate proximity to characters.
At the extreme edge, it’s what makes people who watch candidates on television write them adoring fan letters (just as they write letters to convicted killers in prison). It’s what makes people dress up at night to sit in front of their sets and watch late-night talk-show hosts - as if the hosts could see them in their living rooms.
Truth may be stranger than fiction, but fiction is more compelling.
The whole television exhibition called Election is, in every moment, a living rolling artifice of melodrama. Staged from end to end.
Consider this exchange, in the 1997 film, Wag the Dog, between movie producer, Stanley Motss, and the shadowy White House agent, Conrad Brean:
Motss: What do you think about lining the President up for the Peace Prize?
Brean: Our job’s over come election day.
Motss: Yeah, but c’mon…
Brean: What, just for the symmetry of the thing? [Motss nods] Well, if Kissinger can win the Peace Prize, I wouldn’t be surprised if I woke up and found I’d won the Preakness.
Motss: Yeah, but our guy did bring peace.
Brean: There was never a war.
Motss: All the greater accomplishment.
The believable political face of the candidate is turned toward the camera, and television records it and sends it out to the millions.
The other face, the secret face, is never shown on television; or if it is, the audience misses it, because they are trained to think only good political intentions are displayed on the screen.
And they believe these intentions are the substance of election campaigns; the things worth voting for; the things the winners will try to bring into being in the world.
The audience believes television is democratic. Therefore, how could it deceive? Democracy is the only fair system ever devised.
Such illusions pile up and up. When one fades, another takes its place.
Exposed: Proof NZ Prime Ministers Are Globalists
New Zealand Elections: Does Your Vote Really Count?
How ‘Science’ Is Used To Deceive The Public
February 20 2023 | From: NexusNewsFeed Did you know that there was a shocking study published in the Public Library of Science Journal, that found“up to 72%” of scientists admitted their colleagues were engaged in “questionable research practices,” and that just over 14% of them were engaged in outright “falsification”?
If that’s not bad enough, between 1977 and 1990 the FDA found scientific flaws in 10–20% of all the studies they audited.
What they found was shocking; only 6 of the 53 studies could be proven valid. That means almost 90% were flawed, yet passed off to the public as fact. [3]
In other words, there’s a lot of scientific bullshit floating around my friends.
This becomes especially concerning when we consider how “science” seems to have replaced organized religion as the new authority that should blindly be obeyed in many ways.
People speak of it as if it is infallible, and anyone who questions the high priests of science are generally attacked, degraded, and dismissed as modern day heretics.
But science, just like any religion, is not a god that only speaks unadulterated Truth.
It is far from being infallible and is constantly in need of being updated, upgraded, challenged, revised, and changed, for the simple fact that science is subject to the narrow confines of mankind’s tiny flawed human perception; which is forever growing and expanding - and easily skewed by things like prejudice, pride, and corruption.
In and of itself, science is obviously inanimate and can do neither good nor bad because it has no mind of its own.
It is not a person, so we need to stop talking about science like it is a super hero. It is simply a vehicle that requires a driver, and the destination obviously differs from one driver to the next.
While some may have the earnest pursuit of objective Truth in mind, most can be corrupted by the pursuit of money (such as Iowa State University professor Dong-Pyou Han who is now sitting in jail for his AIDS vaccine fraud), the want of fame, or simply personal prejudice and egotistical pride.
Pioneering anesthesiologist Scott Reuben, who helped revolutionize orthopedic surgery, faked data in more than 20 studies, and German physicist Jan Hendrik Schön, who won multiple awards for his work, falsified his research as well.
These individuals were able to pass what common folks often consider to be the “foolproof” test of peer review, and that’s because it is not actually foolproof.
In fact, a blogger submitted a satirical paper about “Midi Chlorians” from the science fiction story Star Wars and 4 scientific journals published it!
In an effort to help remind people why they should not blindly trust “science” - or any other body of purported knowledge for that matter - I decided to write this short article on how scientific bullshit has been used throughout history to manipulate our perceptions and beliefs.
Big Tobacco & The Sugar Industry
More than half a century ago, big tobacco used science as a weapon to convince the naive and gullible about the safety of their cigarettes.
A number of different medical organizations and journals, including the New England Journal of Medicine and the Journal of the American Medical Association (JAMA), were indeed on the payroll of Big Tobacco and helped to promote their agenda through the promotion of flawed “science”.
Notice the key persuading phrase in the above advertisement;
“…the final results, published in authoritative medical journals, proved conclusively that when smokers changed to Philip Morris, every case of irritation cleared completely or definitely improved.”
This is something we all need to understand my friends; our global society is run as a business, not as a non profit organization that values human life.
And this means that any line of profession can easily be corrupted by money. Unfortunately our problems are systemic and have their roots in this painfully flawed paradigm.
Merck was taken to court by two scientists that claimed the Big Pharma giant manipulated tests concerning their mumps vaccine’s efficacy.
Coca Cola was also caught paying scientists (to the tune of $132.8 million) to downplay the severity of consuming their sugary drinks, and other unhealthy products. In fact, corporations do this all the time.
A perfect example, is a study conducted by the University of Colorado that claimed that diet soda was better at promoting healthy weight loss than water.
Today, a number of questionable practices in the name of science continue. Sadly, the manipulation (or incompetence) of science is something that most likely will never be truly eliminated from society because it is rooted in human fallibility and corruption.
In fact, Richard Hortin, the editor in chief of the medical journal The Lancet, has gone on record as stating that, “much of the scientific literature, perhaps half, may simply be untrue.”
This is not to say that the concept of science does not serve an important purpose, because it certainly does; I personally use scientific methods and principles daily in my life, and even relied on scientific research to highlight corruption within the scientific community in this blog.
But this was written specifically to remind us all that “science” can be used to deceive us - has been used to deceive us - and should always be questioned as a result.
Scientists obviously need money to conduct their research, and corporations who place material profit above human life have plenty of it. The hand that gives usually controls the hand that takes.
Until we design a system that promotes unadulterated education, more than it does propaganda and ignorance; and rewards integrity more than the willingness to do anything for “money,” this type of pathetic human behavior will persist for obvious reasons.
They Live, We Sleep: Beware The Growing Evil In Our Midst
February 19 2023 | From: TheRutherfordInstitute / Various “You see them on the street. You watch them on TV. You might even vote for one this fall. You think they’re people just like you. You’re wrong. Dead wrong.” - They Live
There’s the world we see (or are made to see) and then there’s the one we sense (and occasionally catch a glimpse of), the latter of which is a far cry from the propaganda-driven reality manufactured by the government and its corporate sponsors, including the media.
Indeed, what most Westerners perceive as life in America - privileged, progressive and free - is a far cry from reality, where economic inequality is growing, real agendas and real power are buried beneath layers of Orwellian doublespeak and corporate obfuscation, and “freedom,” such that it is, is meted out in small, legalistic doses by militarized police armed to the teeth.
All is not as it seems.
This is the premise of John Carpenter’s film They Live, which was released more than 30 years ago, and remains unnervingly, chillingly appropriate for our modern age.
Best known for his horror film Halloween, which assumes that there is a form of evil so dark that it can’t be killed, Carpenter’s larger body of work is infused with a strong anti-authoritarian, anti-establishment, laconic bent that speaks to the filmmaker’s concerns about the unraveling of our society, particularly our government.
Time and again, Carpenter portrays the government working against its own citizens, a populace out of touch with reality, technology run amok, and a future more horrific than any horror film.
In Escape from New York, Carpenter presents fascism as the future of America. In The Thing, a remake of the 1951 sci-fi classic of the same name, Carpenter presupposes that increasingly we are all becoming dehumanized.
In Christine, the film adaptation of Stephen King’s novel about a demon-possessed car, technology exhibits a will and consciousness of its own and goes on a murderous rampage.
In In the Mouth of Madness, Carpenter notes that evil grows when people lose “the ability to know the difference between reality and fantasy.”
And then there is Carpenter’s They Live, in which two migrant workers discover that the world is not as it seems.
In fact, the population is actually being controlled and exploited by aliens working in partnership with an oligarchic elite.
All the while, the populace - blissfully unaware of the real agenda at work in their lives - has been lulled into complacency, indoctrinated into compliance, bombarded with media distractions, and hypnotized by subliminal messages beamed out of television and various electronic devices, billboards and the like.
It is only when homeless drifter John Nada (played to the hilt by the late Roddy Piper) discovers a pair of doctored sunglasses - Hoffman lenses - that Nada sees what lies beneath the elite’s fabricated reality: control and bondage.
When viewed through the lens of truth, the elite, who appear human until stripped of their disguises, are shown to be monsters who have enslaved the citizenry in order to prey on them.
Likewise, billboards blare out hidden, authoritative messages: a bikini-clad woman in one ad is actually ordering viewers to “MARRY AND REPRODUCE.” Magazine racks scream “CONSUME” and “OBEY.” A wad of dollar bills in a vendor’s hand proclaims, “THIS IS YOUR GOD.”
When viewed through Nada’s Hoffman lenses, some of the other hidden messages being drummed into the people’s subconscious include: NO INDEPENDENT THOUGHT, CONFORM, SUBMIT, STAY ASLEEP, BUY, WATCH TV, NO IMAGINATION, and DO NOT QUESTION AUTHORITY.
This indoctrination campaign engineered by the elite in They Live is painfully familiar to anyone who has studied the decline of American [ Western ] culture.
A citizenry that does not think for themselves, obeys without question, is submissive, does not challenge authority, does not think outside the box, and is content to sit back and be entertained is a citizenry that can be easily controlled.
In this way, the subtle message of They Live provides an apt analogy of our own distorted vision of life in the American police state, what philosopher Slavoj Žižek refers to as dictatorship in democracy, “the invisible order which sustains your apparent freedom.”
We’re being fed a series of carefully contrived fictions that bear no resemblance to reality.
The powers-that-be want us to feel threatened by forces beyond our control (terrorists, shooters, bombers).
They want us afraid and dependent on the government and its militarized armies for our safety and well-being.
They want us distrustful of each other, divided by our prejudices, and at each other’s throats.
Most of all, they want us to continue to march in lockstep with their dictates.
Tune out the government’s attempts to distract, divert and befuddle us and tune into what’s really going on in this country, and you’ll run headlong into an unmistakable, unpalatable truth: the moneyed elite who rule us view us as expendable resources to be used, abused and discarded.
Instead, the study found that the government is ruled by the rich and powerful, or the so-called “economic elite.” Moreover, the researchers concluded that policies enacted by this governmental elite nearly always favor special interests and lobbying groups.
In other words, we are being ruled by an oligarchy disguised as a democracy, and arguably on our way towards fascism - a form of government where private corporate interests rule, money calls the shots, and the people are seen as mere subjects to be controlled.
As CBS News reports, “Once in office, members of Congress enjoy access to connections and information they can use to increase their wealth, in ways that are unparalleled in the private sector. And once politicians leave office, their connections allow them to profit even further.”
In denouncing this blatant corruption of America’s political system, former president Jimmy Carter blasted the process of getting elected - to the White House, governor’s mansion, Congress or state legislatures - as;
“Unlimited political bribery… a subversion of our political system as a payoff to major contributors, who want and expect, and sometimes get, favors for themselves after the election is over.”
Rest assured that when and if fascism finally takes hold in America, the basic forms of government will remain: Fascism will appear to be friendly. The legislators will be in session.
There will be elections, and the news media will continue to cover the entertainment and political trivia. Consent of the governed, however, will no longer apply. Actual control will have finally passed to the oligarchic elite controlling the government behind the scenes.
Sound familiar?
Clearly, we are now ruled by an oligarchic elite of governmental and corporate interests.
We have moved into “corporatism” (favored by Benito Mussolini), which is a halfway point on the road to full-blown fascism.
Corporatism is where the few moneyed interests - not elected by the citizenry - rule over the many. In this way, it is not a democracy or a republican form of government, which is what the American government was established to be.
It is a top-down form of government and one which has a terrifying history typified by the developments that occurred in totalitarian regimes of the past: police states where everyone is watched and spied on, rounded up for minor infractions by government agents, placed under police control, and placed in detention (a.k.a. concentration) camps.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
For the final hammer of fascism to fall, it will require the most crucial ingredient: the majority of the people will have to agree that it’s not only expedient but necessary.
But why would a people agree to such an oppressive regime?
Fear is the method most often used by politicians to increase the power of government. And, as most social commentators recognize, an atmosphere of fear permeates modern America: fear of terrorism, fear of the police, fear of our neighbors and so on.
The propaganda of fear has been used quite effectively by those who want to gain control, and it is working on the American populace.
Despite the fact that we are 17,600 times more likely to die from heart disease than from a terrorist attack; 11,000 times more likely to die from an airplane accident than from a terrorist plot involving an airplane; 1,048 times more likely to die from a car accident than a terrorist attack, and 8 times more likely to be killed by a police officer than by a terrorist , we have handed over control of our lives to government officials who treat us as a means to an end—the source of money and power.
As the Bearded Man in They Live warns, “They are dismantling the sleeping middle class. More and more people are becoming poor. We are their cattle. We are being bred for slavery.”
In this regard, we’re not so different from the oppressed citizens in They Live.
From the moment we are born until we die, we are indoctrinated into believing that those who rule us do it for our own good. The truth is far different.
Despite the truth staring us in the face, we have allowed ourselves to become fearful, controlled, pacified zombies.
We live in a perpetual state of denial, insulated from the painful reality of the American police state by wall-to-wall entertainment news and screen devices.
Most everyone keeps their heads down these days while staring zombie-like into an electronic screen, even when they’re crossing the street. Families sit in restaurants with their heads down, separated by their screen devices and unaware of what’s going on around them.
Young people especially seem dominated by the devices they hold in their hands, oblivious to the fact that they can simply push a button, turn the thing off and walk away.
Indeed, there is no larger group activity than that connected with those who watch screens—that is, television, lap tops, personal computers, cell phones and so on. In fact, a Nielsen study reports that American screen viewing is at an all-time high. For example, the average American watches approximately 151 hours of television per month.
The question, of course, is what effect does such screen consumption have on one’s mind?
Psychologically it is similar to drug addiction. Researchers found that “almost immediately after turning on the TV, subjects reported feeling more relaxed, and because this occurs so quickly and the tension returns so rapidly after the TV is turned off, people are conditioned to associate TV viewing with a lack of tension.”
Research also shows that regardless of the programming, viewers’ brain waves slow down, thus transforming them into a more passive, nonresistant state.
Historically, television has been used by those in authority to quiet discontent and pacify disruptive people. “Faced with severe overcrowding and limited budgets for rehabilitation and counseling, more and more prison officials are using TV to keep inmates quiet,” according to Newsweek.
Given that the majority of what Westerners watch on television is provided through channels controlled by six mega corporations, what we watch is now controlled by a corporate elite and, if that elite needs to foster a particular viewpoint or pacify its viewers, it can do so on a large scale.
If we’re watching, we’re not doing.
The powers-that-be understand this. As television journalist Edward R. Murrow warned in a 1958 speech:
But unless we get up off our fat surpluses and recognize that television in the main is being used to distract, delude, amuse, and insulate us, then television and those who finance it, those who look at it, and those who work at it, may see a totally different picture too late.”
This brings me back to They Live, in which the real zombies are not the aliens calling the shots but the populace who are content to remain controlled.
When all is said and done, the world of They Live is not so different from our own. As one of the characters points out:
“The poor and the underclass are growing.
Racial justice and human rights are nonexistent. They have created a repressive society and we are their unwitting accomplices. Their intention to rule rests with the annihilation of consciousness. We have been lulled into a trance.
They have made us indifferent to ourselves, to others. We are focused only on our own gain.”
We, too, are focused only on our own pleasures, prejudices and gains. Our poor and underclasses are also growing. Racial injustice is growing. Human rights is nearly nonexistent. We too have been lulled into a trance, indifferent to others.
Oblivious to what lies ahead, we’ve been manipulated into believing that if we continue to consume, obey, and have faith, things will work out. But that’s never been true of emerging regimes. And by the time we feel the hammer coming down upon us, it will be too late.
So where does that leave us?
The characters who populate Carpenter’s films provide some insight.
Underneath their machismo, they still believe in the ideals of liberty and equal opportunity. Their beliefs place them in constant opposition with the law and the establishment, but they are nonetheless freedom fighters.
When, for example, John Nada destroys the alien hyno-transmitter in They Live, he restores hope by delivering America a wake-up call for freedom.
Stop allowing yourselves to be easily distracted by pointless political spectacles and pay attention to what’s really going on in the West.
The real battle for control of this nation is not being waged between Republicans and Democrats in the ballot box.
As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the real battle for control of this nation is taking place on roadsides, in police cars, on witness stands, over phone lines, in government offices, in corporate offices, in public school hallways and classrooms, in parks and city council meetings, and in towns and cities across this country.
The real battle between freedom and tyranny is taking place right in front of our eyes, if we would only open them.
All the trappings of the American [Western] police state are now in plain sight.
Wake up, Western World.
If they live (the tyrants, the oppressors, the invaders, the overlords), it is only because “we the people” sleep.
I Am A Trans Woman – But I Think This Woke World Has Gone Too Far
February 18 2023 | From: RT / Various Trans people have lost the plot. Every day, an increasing amount of absurdity floods in as they do more harm than good.
They scream for acceptance without realizing that the ones damaging their image aren't bigots, but themselves.
From anger directed at celebrities for the rational belief that parents shouldn't decide whether their three-year-old is trans, to a culture of outrage that freaks out at the most minor of offenses, transgender activists have become detrimental to my, and others', very existence.
Not helping matters is the fact that these people are laying bombs within our language in the hope they trigger, so they themselves can become triggered. Saying 'transgendered' instead of 'transgender' can see you labeled as transphobic, as can saying 'transwomen' instead of 'trans (notice the space) women.'
Important Note: Historically there are people who have truly felt that they were born into a body of the wrong gender.
The problem we are faced with today is that, in line with stated objectives of the 'New World Order' doctrines - they have clearly stated that they want to destroy the family unit, encourage sexual promiscuity and basically confuse and debase society as a whole:
"In order to achieve their aims [the Cabal] they are corrupting societies across the globe: Breakdown the family unit, breakdown national pride, destroy the educational system with common core, promote sexual promiscuity, deviance, pedophilia, abortion, a drug culture.
Co-opt and corrupt political leaders with bribes. Set hybrid wars and color revolutions in place in all countries that are not towing the line. Undermine and discredit the values, morals and teachings of all religions and where possible turn believers into murderous intolerant fanatics who go on genocide missions.”
"The hidden goal of feminism is to destroy the family, which interferes with state brainwashing of the young. Side benefits include depopulation and widening the tax base. Displacing men in the role of providers also destabilizes the family."
The merging of sexes and sexuality also plays into the transhumanist agenda of the cabal. It has been discovered that specific toxins and chemical agents have been introduced into the environment and everyday products that contribute specifically towards the rise in sexual confusion and 'transgenderism' that we see happening all around is every day.
This is a linguistic minefield with the sole intent of catching people off guard. And those who are caught in its blast are branded as bigots.
This concept is nonsensical, as it's one thing to correct someone who made a grammatical mistake, but another thing altogether to get outright offended when someone makes a simple error, and that's what is occurring.
A turn of events which only pushes people away as no one wants to associate with a group of people who become so easily upset.
Hampering things even further is the fact that the once-radical portion of the left has seemingly taken control, and now no one can speak up lest they become a target for the vitriol and abuse of which this conglomerate is composed.
How do I know this? Because I'm a trans person myself, and my reward for speaking with rationality is to be labeled a 'self-loathing, bootlicking, trans-misogynistic terf.'
And if I can be called a transphobe, then your normal human being doesn't stand a chance – especially in an era when people are pushing an agenda that suggests you better suck d**k or you're a bigot.
I desperately wish I was making that last bit up.
In late August, journalist – or, let's be real – outrage merchant, Ana Valens, went on a tirade over at the Daily Dot about how it was transphobic to decline sex with a trans person on the basis that they are trans.
Likewise, just last week, women's competitive cyclist Rachel McKinnon made multiple claims that are outright audacious. In one instance, she said"genital preferences are transphobic," and in another she boldly expressed that any sexual orientation other than pansexuality is immoral.
The media warned us that the recent release of 'Joker' was going to lead to an incel uprising, but I don't think they meant it quite like this.
Trans people want all the compassion and acceptance in the world, yet in many cases they're not willing to be equally as understanding. Last year, the flames of fury flared up when a woman named Kristi Hanna filed a human rights complaint against a women's shelter after she was forced to share a room with a transgender woman in Toronto.
Many people took it at face value and levied all sorts of hate at her, but the actual situation is more complex. Hanna is a rape victim, and her roommate was a pre-op trans woman who wasn't yet far enough into their transition to be passable, or even fully presentable. As was described by Ms Hanna, her roommate was male-bodied with facial and chest hair.
Now maybe it's because I'm a rape victim who battles my own forms of PTSD, but I too would be triggered by sharing a room with a complete stranger who looks like a man. I don't care what they identify as. In regards to Kristi Hanna, that's exactly what happened.
As was reported by the National Post, the sharing of a room with someone who looked like a man caused her "stress, anxiety, rape flashbacks, symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder, and sleep deprivation."
When she reported this to the shelter staff, they offered to move her to a new room, but it lacked a door, therefore allowing no privacy, so she left the shelter altogether.
Yet to the trans community, none of that mattered, and Kristi was raked over the coals. Even I was attacked for trying to defend her. Worse still is the fact that shelters which exclude trans women are now being vandalized. Never mind that they help women who need it.
To the petulant children who make up what I call the 'pronoun police,' all they can think of is their own selfish and self-centric world views.
Few in this 'community,' to which I've been forcefully tied, seem to have any basic understanding of the various reasons why our presence may be triggering to some, especially in a women's shelter that houses rape victims.
It shouldn't take a big brain to see why a male-looking individual with a floppy penis may not be the best fit.
A fact of reality is that I was born a boy. Even now, post-hormone replacement therapy, I have masculine traits that will never go away. When I die, if far off into the future I'm dug up, my bones will have archeologists pegging me as male, not female.
I bring that analogy up because many trans people seem to deny they were born as the gender opposite of what they identify as. But I am not 100 percent female, and I never will be.
I'll never have a period, although some smooth-brained idiots like to argue that "some women have issues that prevent them from having periods, so does that mean you're saying they're not women too?"
No, that's not what that means. It means I have a d**k and no potential even exists for me to have a period. Because, unlike biological women who may have conditions that effect how their bodies work, they still have the proper bodies of the sex it happens to be.
I don't. My chromosomes are XY, and I was born a boy. I'll never have to worry about cervical cancer, though when I'm older I will want to have my prostate checked.
None of this means trans people shouldn't be respected as the gender they present themselves as. We are anomalies in that our brains for some reason developed on a course which differs from what our chromosomes dictate.
I'm not going to call being trans a mental illness, but it is an issue that stems from the brain. Even scans of that organ reveal people like me have brains more closely resembling the gender we present ourselves to be, and due to that, I'm a proponent of supporting transitioning, but that support comes with some caveats.
I, for one, don't think trans women should be competing against cis women in competitive sports. At least, not outside of specialized leagues where everyone consents to trans women being allowed.
In normal events, we are seeing trans people destroy records in track, weightlifting, and other events, and that is not fair to biological females.
I'm also opposed to letting kids take various meds. By all means, if your child is trans, it's for the best to support and love them, but growing up is a confusing time, and it's maybe not a good idea to let them begin a full-on transition.
These days it's simply too easy to get a diagnosis of gender dysphoria, and I fear the repercussions.
I have zero doubts in my mind that soon enough we will have teens and adults stepping forward who were convinced they were trans at a young age, only to grow up and realize they aren't.
Some boys are just effeminate and some girls are just a bit masculine, but today, society is going out of its way to tell them they're trans.
A scary thought for a community that seems to already run on fear.
In 2017, the Southern Poverty Law Center sent out a tweet linking an article about transgender hate murders. In a follow up tweet, they listed names of all the trans people who had been murdered that year.
The placement of the names below an article about hate murders seems to imply all of the listed names were the victims of hate crimes.
As is so often the case, this isn't true. Of the names listed, three stand out. Sean Hake, Kiwi Herring, and Scout Schultz. What's important about these people is that they weren't killed for anything related to their gender identities.
All three were shot by police in different states after charging at law enforcement with knives. That same year, multiple non-trans people were killed by police for the very same reason.
Yet the trans individuals' deaths are tallied and used as examples of a rising trend in the murder of transgender people – a trend that has been occurring for years.
What's most disingenuous is that, in many cases, there's little to no proof that their murders are linked to their status of being trans. Some are sex workers in dangerous areas where cis women are also found murdered each year, or they're just victims of normal everyday violence.
It sucks, but a lot of people just happen to get shot in the United States, and for a myriad of reasons.
Just this year, Claire Legato, a trans woman in Ohio, was shot dead after her mother got into an altercation with a man in their yard about an issue relating to theft. Jordan Cofer, also from Ohio, was tragically killed when a gunman went on a mass shooting in Dayton.
These two deaths are included on the Human Rights Campaign's list of "violence against the transgender community."The list ends with this sentence: "HRC has been tracking reports of fatal anti-transgender violence for the past several years."
"Anti-transgender" violence. Hmm, weird, I didn't know the Dayton, Ohio gunman did all that for a single person.
Even in cases where a transgender person kills themselves, if an agenda can be pushed, this community will immediately take a still-warm corpse and bludgeon people with it.
This week, comedian and actress Daphne Dorman took her own life. She was cited by Dave Chappelle in his most recent Netflix standup as the person who "was laughing the hardest" at his trans jokes. In case you're unaware, this is the standup special that caused many in the media to cry foul and call Chapelle 'transphobic.'
Daphne, on the other hand, thought he was hilarious, and would go on to tweet in support of her friend. Her words don't matter anymore though, because now that she can't defend herself, her existence has been retconned and it is now Dave Chappelle's fault she died; a frankly just sickening and frustrating turn of events. Although it is one that makes sense when you look a bit deeper.
In 2017, at the HRC National Dinner, president Chad Griffin gave an eye-opening speech. He began by thanking Hillary Clinton who had a speaking role that year, before then repeatedly emphasizing how things for LGBT individuals were much brighter under Obama. This is important because the HRC is a major supporter of Democratic candidates and politicians.
He eventually went on to discuss 'HRC Rising,' or what he labeled as the single largest grassroots expansion in the organization's history.
This was important to him, as he proceeded to say: "It's critical we organize and mobilize the 10 million-plus LGBTQ voters in this country. Which by the way, is a voting bloc that is larger than the margin of victory of every presidential election since 1984."
For a couple years now, this speech hasn't sat well with me. I look at our media landscape and watch as fearmongering rules the day. A narrative has been created which paints anyone on the right as a hateful bigot, and has gay and trans people fearful that they're going to die.
Trans lists over-conflate and simplify the reasons people are murdered. Comedians are blamed for suicides that have nothing to do with anything they've done.
And anyone who so much as questions the absurdity of what's happening is torn down, and labeled every negative thing that will stick.
Why this keeps happening is clear. An environment has been created that is pushing people to conform to a particular mindset by brute-force scare tactics, and this is inevitably convincing them to vote a certain way.
The left is ruling by division and fear. Browse social media and the trans-death stat is cited ad nauseam.
These people legitimately believe they're going to die. All the while, the actual issues that caused those deaths aren't being discussed.
Inner city crime and prostitution are big factors, as is poor mental health. I mean, sane people don't go charging at police with knives.
Yet those issues don't get blamed, nor are they being adequately discussed. Daphne Dorman, in these people's eyes, didn't join the 41 percent because she had deep-rooted issues. No, it's Chappelle's fault. It's the right's fault. It's the bigot's fault.
And as a right-leaning individual myself, who also happens to be trans, I know this to be false. I'm embraced by my community. They aren't transphobic, they don't want me dead; they just have issues with much of the same stuff I do.
A lot of trans people call me a self-loather, but I don't loathe myself, nor do I loathe the fact that I'm trans.
I just loathe the community I've been forcefully grouped into, and I think it's understandable why a lot of other people do too.
Trannies and their allies are now their own worst enemies, but unlike them, I refuse to shoot myself in the foot.
Freemasonry: Mankind’s Death Wish
February 17 2023 | From: VeteransToday / Various The source of the world's problems: The Gentile "leadership" has been chosen for its willingness to sell its soul to Cabalist central bankers by joining Freemasonry, which is Judaism for Gentiles.
As we have demonstrated in the past, any categorical and metaphysical denial of the moral order will inexorably lead to radical deceptions and sometimes covert operations.
Freemasonry, as a secret society and judaizing movement, is not only part of those deceptions but is congruent with Jewish magic and mysticism.
Only those in the upper echelon actually know what is exactly going on. As Jones documents:
“The deeper the adept penetrates, the more Talmudic are the mysteries revealed to him. The Rosicrusian, for example, is taught the inscription INRI which was nailed to the Cross means not Iesus Nazarensis Rex Iudeorum, but rather the ‘Iew of Nazareth Led into Iudea,’ a reading which deprives Christ of his divinity and reasserts the Talmudic calumny that Christ was a common criminal who deserved to be executed:
“‘As soon as the candidate has proved that he understands the Masonic meaning of this inscription INRI, the Master exclaims, My dear Brethren, the word is found again, and all present applaud this luminous discovery, that - He whose death was the consummation and the grand mystery of the Christian Religion was no more than a common Jew crucified for his crimes.’
“To be initiated into the higher degrees of Freemasonry, the adept must agree to become an assassin of the assassin of Adoniram. He must be willing to assassinate Christ and his representatives on earth. The revolutionary intent of Freemasonry becomes clear when the adept is informed that he must be willing to kill the king. Mystical Masonry is synonymous with Revolution. ”
Quoting Barruel, Jones writes:
“When the adept sallies forth from the cavern with the reeking head, he cries Nekom (I have killed him)….
“The adept is informed that till now he has only been partially admitted to the truth; that Equality and Liberty, which had constituted the first secret on his admission into Masonry, consisted in recognizing no superior on earth, and in viewing Kings and Pontiffs in another light than as men on a level with their fellow men, having no rights to sit on the throne, or to serve at the altar, but what the people had granted them.”
What a coincidence that Aleister Crowley, a 33rd degree mason who ended up having a master effect on pop music, who held “group orgies” as part of his regular rituals (including small children), and who ended up influencing sex perverts such as Alfred Kinsey, also performed similar rituals.
Some scholars would point out that “Rosicrucianism played an important role in the formation of Freemasonry.”
If that is the case, then we have another piece of evidence on our hands which clearly indicates that a marriage between Freemasonry and Rosicrucianism is almost unavoidable.
Both Freemasonry and Rosicrucianism, at their eventual root, sought to denigrate and attack Logos and this was very important during the French Revolution.
Since that was the case, again the marriage between the French Revolution and Jewish movements were two sides of the same coin. Isaac M. Wise wrote in 1866 that “Masonry is a Jewish institution, whose history, degrees, charges, passwords and explanations are Jewish from beginning to end.”
Henry Makow will enlighten us more on this issue.
Henry Makow: The source of the world’s problems: The Gentile “leadership” has been chosen for its willingness to sell its soul to Cabalist central bankers by joining Freemasonry, which is Judaism for Gentiles.
Architects of Deception, (2004) a 600-page history of Freemasonry by Estonian writer Jyri Lina offers profound insight into the true character of modern history.
Essentially, a dominant segment of Western society has joined the Khazarian financial elite in embracing Freemasonry, a satanic philosophy that represents a death wish for civilization.
They imagine somehow they will profit from the oppression, lies and suffering caused by their Communist “New World Order.”
Incredible, bizarre and depressing as it sounds, Lina writes that 300 mainly Jewish banking families have used Freemasonry as an instrument to subvert, control and degrade the Western world.
This view is consistent with the 1938 NKVD interrogation of an illuminati member who names many of these banking families and confirms that Freemasons are expendable tools.
Based on the archives of the powerful French Grand Orient Lodge, captured in June 1940 and later made public by the Russians, Lina details how Freemasonry has conspired for world domination and orchestrated all major revolutions and wars in the modern era. (Lina, p.332)
Masons, often Jewish, are responsible for communism, Zionism, socialism, liberalism (and feminism.) They love big government because it is the ultimate monopoly. “World government” (dictatorship) is the final trophy.
These “world revolutionary” “progressive” movements all mirror Lucifer’s rebellion against the laws of God and nature which is at the heart of Freemasonry.
They ensnare millions of gullible idealists by promising a utopia based on materialism and “reason” and dedicated to “liberty, equality and fraternity,” “public ownership” or some other idealistic sounding claptrap. It’s called bait-and-switch.
According to Lina: “The primary aim of modern freemasonry is to build the New World Order, a spiritual Temple of Solomon, where non-members are nothing but slaves [and] …where human beings would be sacrificed to Yahweh.” (52)
Lina cites numerous Jewish sources that claim Freemasonry is based on Judaism and is “the executive political organ of the Jewish financial elite.” (81-83)
The common goal of these Masonic inspired movements is to undermine religion, nation and family by promoting social division, self-indulgence and “tolerance” i.e. nihilism, globalism, sexual “liberation” and homosexuality thereby reducing humanity to a uniform dysfunctional and malleable mush.
Lina and others who attempt to alert humanity to its real condition are routinely slandered as anti-Semitic, fascist, and right wing “haters” by people indirectly employed by the bankers.
This tactic shields the conspirators from scrutiny and makes discussion of our grim predicament impossible.
I am a Jew. I am not part of this banking monopoly, nor is the majority of Jews. By way of analogy, the mafia is considered mostly Italian but most Italians do not belong to the mafia.
On the other hand, Italians don’t viciously attack opponents of organized crime and call them “racists” and “hate mongers”. That would look awfully suspicious. Jews compromise themselves by their defense of the Masonic Jewish bankers and their perverse vision for humanity.
The Khazarian Ideology
We cannot understand the modern world unless we appreciate that it is the result of the Masonic conspiracy. People scoff yet the evidence stares them in the face every day.
Lina believes, “Freemasonry plays the same role in Western society as the Communist Party did in the Soviet Union. Without belonging to the freemasonry there is no chance of a fast career, regardless of how talented one is.”
Keep in mind that Communism was a Masonic enterprise and the puzzle starts to take shape.
Lina says Freemasons not only control politics but also virtually every sector of Western society, including science and culture. “The present cultural life has become virtually unconscious,” he writes. “We have witnessed the beginning of cultural senility.” (333)
In his pamphlet “The Open Conspiracy: Blueprint for a World Revolution” (1929) the Freemason H.G. Wells describes an “open secret society” consisting of society’s leading men operating as a hidden force to secure world resources, reduce population through war and replace the nation state with world dictatorship. (340)
Masonic Ideology
Human beings are naturally attracted to good and repulsed by evil. Thus evil always represents itself as good.
To the public, and its own lower ranks, Freemasonry pretends to be dedicated to “making good men better”, humanism, tolerance, and you-name-it.
If this were true, would they have to extract vows of secrecy from members on pain of slitting their throat? Would they have been condemned by many Popes and banned from numerous countries? (84)
I do not wish to impugn the many good and decent men in the lower “Blue Degrees” who are unaware of Freemasonry’s true function and character.
But there is abundant evidence and testimony that Freemasonry is a satanic cult dedicated to the worship of death. (134-138)
For example, when the Italian Grand Orient Lodge was evicted from the Palazzio Borghese in Rome in 1893, the owner found a shrine dedicated to Satan.
The Italian freemasons published a newspaper in the 1880s where they admitted time and again, “Our leader is Satan!” (135)
The Masons also admit to having a revolutionary political agenda.
Typical of statements Lina cites from Masonic publications is the following from a German magazine in 1910: “The driving thought is at all times focused on destruction and annihilation, because the power of this great secret society can only rise from the ruins of the existing order of society.” (272)
Conclusion
The Illuminist Conspiracy is the brake responsible for humanity’s arrested development. Mankind resembles a person suffering from a serious disease and sinking into a coma.
Juri Lina, left, has written a courageous book to revive us. He says we face “the largest spiritual crisis in the history of mankind…They have taken our history, our dignity, our wisdom and our honor, sense of responsibility, spiritual insights and our traditions.”
We are partly to blame, he says: “We have failed to act against the Masonic madness due to our enormous gullibility. We have been totally fooled and ignored the warning signals.”(274)
He ends on a hopeful note, saying evil is dysfunctional and inevitably destroys itself. “Freemasonry carries within it the seeds of its own destruction.” (563)
Wars, revolutions and depressions are all part of a “revolutionary” process designed to frogmarch humanity to “world government” under the rubric of Freemasonry which may be a surrogate for an alliance of occult Khazarian and gentile financial elites.
Their “self-destruction” seems to be our best hope since the public is too feckless and weak to resist.
The Origins Of Political Correctness
February 16 2023 | From: Academia / Various Where does all this stuff that you’ve heard about this morning – the victim feminism, the gay rights movement, the invented statistics, the rewritten history, the lies, the demands, all the rest of it – where does it come from?
For the first time in our history, westerners have to be fearful of what they say, of what they write, and of what they think. They have to be afraid of using the wrong word, a word denounced as offensive or insensitive, or racist, sexist, or homophobic.
We have seen other countries, particularly in this century, where this has been the case. And we have always regarded them with a mixture of pity, and to be truthful, some amusement, because it has struck us as so strange that people would allow a situation to develop where they would be afraid of what words they used.
But we now have this situation in this country. We have it primarily on college campuses, but it is spreading throughout the whole society. Were does it come from? What is it?
We call it “Political Correctness.” The name originated as something of a joke, literally in a comic strip, and we tend still to think of it as only half-serious. In fact, it’s deadly serious.
It is the great disease of our century, the disease that has left tens of millions of people dead in Europe, in Russia, in China, indeed around the world. It is the disease of ideology. PC is not funny. PC is deadly serious.
If we look at it analytically, if we look at it historically, we quickly find out exactly what it is. Political Correctness is cultural Marxism. It is Marxism translated from economic into cultural terms.
It is an effort that goes back not to the 1960s and the hippies and the peace movement, but back to World War I. If we compare the basic tenets of Political Correctness with classical Marxism the parallels are very obvious.
First of all, both are totalitarian ideologies.
The totalitarian nature of Political Correctness is revealed nowhere more clearly than on college campuses, many of which at this point are small ivy covered North Koreas, where the student or faculty member who dares to cross any of the lines set up by the gender feminist or the homosexual-rights activists, or the local black or Hispanic group, or any of the other sainted “victims” groups that PC revolves around, quickly find themselves in judicial trouble.
Within the small legal system of the college, they face formal charges – some star-chamber proceeding – and punishment. That is a little look into the future that Political Correctness intends for the nation as a whole.
Indeed, all ideologies are totalitarian because the essence of an ideology (I would note that conservatism correctly understood is not an ideology) is to take some philosophy and say on the basis of this philosophy certain things must be true – such as the whole of the history of our culture is the history of the oppression of women.
Since reality contradicts that, reality must be forbidden. It must become forbidden to acknowledge the reality of our history.
People must be forced to live a lie, and since people are naturally reluctant to live a lie, they naturally use their ears and eyes to look out and say, “Wait a minute. This isn’t true. I can see it isn’t true,” the power of the state must be put behind the demand to live a lie.
That is why ideology invariably creates a totalitarian state.
Second, the cultural Marxism of Political Correctness, like economic Marxism, has a single factor explanation of history. Economic Marxism says that all of history is determined by ownership of means of production.
Cultural Marxism, or Political Correctness, says that all history is determined by power, by which groups defined in terms of race, sex, etc., have power over which other groups. Nothing else matters. All literature, indeed, is about that. Everything in the past is about that one thing.
Third, just as in classical economic Marxism certain groups, i.e. workers and peasants, are a priori good, and other groups, i.e., the bourgeoisie and capital owners, are evil. In the cultural Marxism of Political Correctness certain groups are good – feminist women, (only feminist women, non-feminist women are deemed not to exist) blacks, Hispanics, homosexuals.
These groups are determined to be “victims,” and therefore automatically good regardless of what any of them do. Similarly, white males are determined automatically to be evil, thereby becoming the equivalent of the bourgeoisie in economic Marxism.
Fourth, both economic and cultural Marxism rely on expropriation. When the classical Marxists, the communists, took over a country like Russia, they expropriated the bourgeoisie, they took away their property. Similarly, when the cultural Marxists take over a university campus, they expropriate through things like quotas for admissions.
When a white student with superior qualifications is denied admittance to a college in favor of a black or Hispanic who isn’t as well qualified, the white student is expropriated. And indeed, affirmative action, in our whole society today, is a system of expropriation.
White owned companies don’t get a contract because the contract is reserved for a company owned by, say, Hispanics or women. So expropriation is a principle tool for both forms of Marxism.
And finally, both have a method of analysis that automatically gives the answers they want. For the classical Marxist, it’s Marxist economics. For the cultural Marxist, it’s deconstruction.
Deconstruction essentially takes any text, removes all meaning from it and re-inserts any meaning desired. So we find, for example, that all of Shakespeare is about the suppression of women, or the Bible is really about race and gender.
All of these texts simply become grist for the mill, which proves that “all history is about which groups have power over which other groups.”
So the parallels are very evident between the classical Marxism that we’re familiar with in the old Soviet Union and the cultural Marxism that we see today as Political Correctness.
But the parallels are not accidents. The parallels did not come from nothing. The fact of the matter is that Political Correctness has a history, a history that is much longer than many people are aware of outside a small group of academics who have studied this.
And the history goes back, as I said, to World War I, as do so many of the pathologies that are today bringing our society, and indeed our culture, down.
Marxist theory said that when the general European war came (as it did come in Europe in 1914), the working class throughout Europe would rise up and overthrow their governments – the bourgeois governments – because the workers had more in common with each other across the national boundaries than they had in common with the bourgeoisie and the ruling class in their own country. Well, 1914 came and it didn’t happen.
Throughout Europe, workers rallied to their flag and happily marched off to fight each other. The Kaiser shook hands with the leaders of the Marxist Social Democratic Party in Germany and said there are no parties now, there are only Germans. And this happened in every country in Europe. So something was wrong.
Marxists knew by definition it couldn’t be the theory. In 1917, they finally got a Marxist coup in Russia and it looked like the theory was working, but it stalled again.
It didn’t spread and when attempts were made to spread immediately after the war, with the Spartacist uprising in Berlin, with the Bela Kun government in Hungary, with the Munich Soviet, the workers didn’t support them.
So the Marxists’ had a problem. And two Marxist theorists went to work on it: Antonio Gramsci in Italy and Georg Lukacs in Hungary.
Gramsci said the workers will never see their true class interests, as defined by Marxism, until they are freed from Western culture, and particularly from the Christian religion – that they are blinded by culture and religion to their true class interests.
Lukacs, who was considered the most brilliant Marxist theorist since Marx himself, said in 1919, “Who will save us from Western Civilization?” He also theorized that the great obstacle to the creation of a Marxist paradise was the culture: Western civilization itself.
Lukacs gets a chance to put his ideas into practice, because when the home grown Bolshevik Bela Kun government is established in Hungary in 1919, he becomes deputy commissar for culture, and the first thing he did was introduce sex education into the Hungarian schools.
This ensured that the workers would not support the Bela Kun government, because the Hungarian people looked at this aghast, workers as well as everyone else. But he had already made the connection that today many of us are still surprised by, that we would consider the “latest thing.”
In 1923 in Germany, a think-tank is established that takes on the role of translating Marxism from economic into cultural terms, that creates Political Correctness as we know it today, and essentially it has created the basis for it by the end of the 1930s.
This comes about because the very wealthy young son of a millionaire German trader by the name of Felix Weil has become a Marxist and has lots of money to spend. He is disturbed by the divisions among the Marxists, so he sponsors something called the First Marxist Work Week, where he brings Lukacs and many of the key German thinkers together for a week, working on the differences of Marxism.
And he says, “What we need is a think-tank.” Washington is full of think tanks and we think of them as very modern. In fact they go back quite a ways.
He endows an institute, associated with Frankfurt University, established in 1923, that was originally supposed to be known as the Institute for Marxism.
But the people behind it decided at the beginning that it was not to their advantage to be openly identified as Marxist. The last thing Political Correctness wants is for people to figure out it’s a form of Marxism. So instead they decide to name it the Institute for Social Research.
Weil is very clear about his goals. In 1917, he wrote to Martin Jay the author of a principle book on the Frankfurt School, as the Institute for Social Research soon becomes known informally, and he said, “I wanted the institute to become known, perhaps famous, due to its contributions to Marxism.”
Well, he was successful. The first director of the Institute, Carl Grunberg, an Austrian economist, concluded his opening address, according to Martin Jay, “by clearly stating his personal allegiance to Marxism as a scientific methodology.” Marxism, he said, would be the ruling principle at the Institute, and that never changed.
The initial work at the Institute was rather conventional, but in 1930 it acquired a new director named Max Horkheimer, and Horkheimer’s views were very different. He was very much a Marxist renegade. The people who create and form the Frankfurt School are renegade Marxists.
They’re still very much Marxist in their thinking, but they’re effectively run out of the party. Moscow looks at what they are doing and says, “Hey, this isn’t us, and we’re not going to bless this.”
Horkheimer’s initial heresy is that he is very interested in Freud, and the key to making the translation of Marxism from economic into cultural terms is essentially that he combined it with Freudism.
Again, Martin Jay writes:
“If it can be said that in the early years of its history, the Institute concerned itself primarily with an analysis of bourgeois society’s socio-economic sub-structure,” – and I point out that Jay is very sympathetic to the Frankfurt School, I’m not reading from a critic here – “in the years after 1930 its primary interests lay in its cultural superstructure.
Indeed the traditional Marxist formula regarding the relationship between the two was brought into question by Critical Theory.”
The stuff we’ve been hearing about – the radical feminism, the women’s studies departments, the gay studies departments, the black studies departments – all these things are branches of Critical Theory.
What the Frankfurt School essentially does is draw on both Marx and Freud in the 1930s to create this theory called Critical Theory. The term is ingenious because you’re tempted to ask, “What is the theory?” The theory is to criticize.
The theory is that the way to bring down Western culture and the capitalist order is not to lay down an alternative. They explicitly refuse to do that. They say it can’t be done, that we can’t imagine what a free society would look like (their definition of a free society).
As long as we’re living under repression – the repression of a capitalistic economic order which creates (in their theory) the Freudian condition, the conditions that Freud describes in individuals of repression – we can’t even imagine it.
What Critical Theory is about is simply criticizing. It calls for the most destructive criticism possible, in every possible way, designed to bring the current order down.
And, of course, when we hear from the feminists that the whole of society is just out to get women and so on, that kind of criticism is a derivative of Critical Theory. It is all coming from the 1930s, not the 1960s.
Other key members who join up around this time are Theodore Adorno, and, most importantly, Erich Fromm and Herbert Marcuse.
Fromm and Marcuse introduce an element which is central to Political Correctness, and that’s the sexual element. And particularly Marcuse, who in his own writings calls for a society of “polymorphous perversity,” that is his definition of the future of the world that they want to create.
Marcuse in particular by the 1930s is writing some very extreme stuff on the need for sexual liberation, but this runs through the whole Institute. So do most of the themes we see in Political Correctness, again in the early 30s. In Fromm’s view, masculinity and femininity were not reflections of ‘essential’ sexual differences, as the Romantics had thought.
They were derived instead from differences in life functions, which were in part socially determined. Sex is a construct; sexual differences are a construct.
Another example is the emphasis we now see on environmentalism.
“Materialism as far back as Hobbes had led to a manipulative dominating attitude toward nature.” That was Horkhemier writing in 1933 in Materialismus und Moral.
“The theme of man’s domination of nature,” according to Jay, ” was to become a central concern of the Frankfurt School in subsequent years.”
“Horkheimer’s antagonism to the fetishization of labor, (here’s were they’re obviously departing from Marxist orthodoxy) expressed another dimension of his materialism, the demand for human, sensual happiness.”
In one of his most trenchant essays, Egoism and the Movement for Emancipation, written in 1936, Horkeimer “discussed the hostility to personal gratification inherent in bourgeois culture.”
And he specifically referred to the Marquis de Sade, favorably, for his “protest…against asceticism in the name of a higher morality.”
How does all of this stuff flood in here? How does it flood into our universities, and indeed into our lives today?
The members of the Frankfurt School are Marxist, they are also, to a man, Jewish. In 1933 the Nazis came to power in Germany, and not surprisingly they shut down the Institute for Social Research. And its members fled.
KGB Defector Yuri Bezmenov's Warning to America
29 years ago, Soviet defector and KGB operative Yuri Bezmenov, specializing in the fields of Marxist-Leninist propaganda and ideological subversion; warned us about the silent war being waged against America as part of a long term plan to take over and destroy the American system and way of life.
Watch this clip in amazement as you realize he is describing exactly what's happening in America today, where by Obama and his gang of Marxist usurpers [this part is historical, obviously] who now have control of your government are just the culmination of a very long term plan, but are the ones who are about to bring it into fruition.
Bezmenov was born in 1939 in Mytishchi, near Moscow to a high ranking Soviet Army officer. At the age of seventeen, he entered the Institute of Oriental Languages, a part of the Moscow State University which was under the direct control of the KGB and the Communist Central Committee. In addition to languages, he studied history, literature, and music, and became an expert on Indian culture.
During his second year, Bezmenov sought to look like a person from India; his teachers encouraged this because graduates of the school were employed as diplomats, foreign journalists, or spies.
As a Soviet student, he was also required to take compulsory military training in which he was taught how to play "strategic war games" using the maps of foreign countries, as well as how to interrogate prisoners of war.
They fled to New York City, and the Institute was reestablished there in 1933 with help from Columbia University. And the members of the Institute, gradually through the 1930s, though many of them remained writing in German, shift their focus from Critical Theory about German society, destructive criticism about every aspect of that society, to Critical Theory directed toward American society.
There is another very important transition when the war comes. Some of them go to work for the government, including Herbert Marcuse, who became a key figure in the OSS (the predecessor to the CIA), and some, including Horkheimer and Adorno, move to Hollywood.
These origins of Political Correctness would probably not mean too much to us today except for two subsequent events. The first was the student rebellion in the mid-1960s, which was driven largely by resistance to the draft and the Vietnam War.
But the student rebels needed theory of some sort. They couldn’t just get out there and say, “Hell no we won’t go,” they had to have some theoretical explanation behind it. Very few of them were interested in wading through Das Kapital.
Classical, economic Marxism is not light, and most of the radicals of the 60s were not deep. Fortunately for them, and unfortunately for our country today, and not just in the university, Herbert Marcuse remained in America when the Frankfurt School relocated back to Frankfurt after the war.
And whereas Mr. Adorno in Germany is appalled by the student rebellion when it breaks out there – when the student rebels come into Adorno’s classroom, he calls the police and has them arrested – Herbert Marcuse, who remained here, saw the 60s student rebellion as the great chance.
He saw the opportunity to take the work of the Frankfurt School and make it the theory of the New Left in the United States.
One of Marcuse’s books was the key book. It virtually became the bible of the SDS and the student rebels of the 60s. That book was Eros and Civilization. Marcuse argues that under a capitalistic order (he downplays the Marxism very strongly here, it is subtitled, A Philosophical Inquiry into Freud, but the framework is Marxist), repression is the essence of that order and that gives us the person Freud describes – the person with all the hang-ups, the neuroses, because his sexual instincts are repressed.
We can envision a future, if we can only destroy this existing oppressive order, in which we liberate eros, we liberate libido, in which we have a world of “polymorphous perversity,” in which you can “do you own thing.” And by the way, in that world there will no longer be work, only play.
What a wonderful message for the radicals of the mid-60s! They’re students, they’re baby-boomers, and they’ve grown up never having to worry about anything except eventually having to get a job.
And here is a guy writing in a way they can easily follow. He doesn’t require them to read a lot of heavy Marxism and tells them everything they want to hear which is essentially, “Do your own thing,” “If it feels good do it,” and “You never have to go to work.”
By the way, Marcuse is also the man who creates the phrase, “Make love, not war.”
Coming back to the situation people face on campus, Marcuse defines “liberating tolerance” as intolerance for anything coming from the Right and tolerance for anything coming from the Left. Marcuse joined the Frankfurt School, in 1932 (if I remember right). So, all of this goes back to the 1930s.
In conclusion, America [the West] today is in the throes of the greatest and direst transformation in its history. We are becoming an ideological state, a country with an official state ideology enforced by the power of the state.
In “hate crimes” we now have people serving jail sentences for political thoughts.
And the Congress is now moving to expand that category ever further. Affirmative action is part of it.
The terror against anyone who dissents from Political Correctness on campus is part of it. It’s exactly what we have seen happen in Russia, in Germany, in Italy, in China, and now it’s coming here.
And we don’t recognize it because we call it Political Correctness and laugh it off.
My message today is that it’s not funny, it’s here, it’s growing and it will eventually destroy, as it seeks to destroy, everything that we have ever defined as our freedom and our culture.
Conspireality: Is It Time For A Serious Conversation?
Febryary 16 2023 | From: ConsciousEvolution / Various One thing I’m noticing now more than ever before in my experience as a journalist and researcher, and as a human in general, is that people are hungry for information that is deeper than what they are getting through the mainstream media.
It feels as though people are beginning to recognize that there is a degree of corruption involved in our world and that politicians and traditional media outlets have been compromised in the process.
How can you weed through the confusion? What media can I trust? What is the truth? These are all big questions many are now having.
In Brief:
The Facts: The mainstream and traditional media seem to be failing to have important conversations that are controversial, while at the same time perhaps there isn't enough rigor and critical thinking in alternative media communities.
Reflect On: Given we are deeply feeling the need to make sense of our world, is it time we begin to look at developing the inner faculties necessary to move beyond ideology, limited thinking patterns and truly begin looking at what evidence around us says?
Further, there is a lack of trust in many professional or societal experts due to a felt sense that they have been compromised as well. In an attempt to get answers to these questions, people have been looking for alternative information or perspectives about many current events in an attempt to make sense of the world.
I’ve worked 11 years in independent media now. I founded Collective Evolution in 2009 for the purposes of having conversations I felt were important but perhaps not widely available.
Initially beginning as a platform for exploring consciousness awakening, CE ventured into current events, as I felt they often reflect the inner aspect of who we are as people – and as a collective.
That said, for most of the time CE has been around, we’ve covered some sort of alternative perspective on current events as part of our job.
Our commitment was to do this in a way that was as open, transparent, and unbiased as possible. Improving in our style and quality over the years, we often get feedback from a wide audience feeling that we do a pretty good job of staying neutral and open to various possibilities, while still covering what might be considered controversial subjects.
Things people call ‘conspiracies.’
Calling these sometimes controversial subjects ‘conspiracy theories’ is a bit unfortunate as it’s a loaded term that brings about many connotations and a general lack of clarity.
Does ‘conspiracy theory’ mean there is no evidence? It is not probable? It is not to be believed? Only crazy people who don’t think critically look at them? Was the fact that the NSA spied on US citizens illegally a conspiracy theory before Edward Snowden revealed the truth about that to the world? It was.
The idea that ‘big brother’ is watching was considered a paranoid delusion by many, yet they were in fact watching and recording almost everything people in the US did.
Thus, the title of this piece includes the term ‘conspireality’ as it is my feeling that some things we often call conspiracy theories are in fact true, we just don’t know it yet or haven’t accepted it.
In that same token, there is an observation I’m seeing within the space of ‘conspiracies’ that is truly important to discuss and reflect on.
Note: much of what I want to share will be written here, more will be in the video at the bottom.
The Rise of The Alternative
For decades people have felt that there is more to mainstream media narratives when it comes to current events. The JFK assassination, UFOs, MK Ultra, the real cause of wars, powerful people who control aspects of society, etc.
Typically, much of these conversations remained on the fringe and were had on late night radio shows or unpopular books few knew about.
But the advent of the internet and it’s subsequent popularity birthed an opportunity for these ideas and conversations to spread more easily. As time went on, people began to feel ‘alternative’ history or facts about events that happen in our world are increasingly important.
While it might be common to chalk this up to some form of mental illness or misstep in thought, there is actually a large number of intelligent and well-read people who are actively exploring very credible information that tells a different, and credible, story about widely accepted mainstream narratives.
A recent podcast on The Joe Rogan Experience with guest Tom O’Neil is a perfect example. Tom has spent the last 20 years of his life investigating and writing a book called Chaos: Charles Manson, the CIA, and the Secret History of the Sixties which was published by Little, Brown in the summer of 2019.
As the description of his book reads:
“Twenty years ago, when journalist Tom O’Neill was reporting a magazine piece about the murders, he worried there was nothing new to say.
Then he unearthed shocking evidence of a cover-up behind the “official” story, including police carelessness, legal misconduct, and potential surveillance by intelligence agents.
When a tense interview with Vincent Bugliosi - prosecutor of the Manson Family and author of Helter Skelter - turned a friendly source into a nemesis, O’Neill knew he was onto something. But every discovery brought more questions.
O’Neill’s quest for the truth led him from reclusive celebrities to seasoned spies, from San Francisco’s summer of love to the shadowy sites of the CIA’s mind-control experiments, on a trail rife with shady cover-ups and suspicious coincidences.
The product of two decades of reporting, hundreds of new interviews, and dozens of never-before-seen documents from the LAPD, the FBI, and the CIA, Chaos mounts an argument that could be, according to Los Angeles Deputy District Attorney Steven Kay, strong enough to overturn the verdicts on the Manson murders. This is a book that overturns our understanding of a pivotal time in American history.”
As I listened to the podcast episode, many of the subjects discussed, including the United State’s government mind control program MK Ultra, and the JFK Assassination were explored with undeniable evidence and important lines of questioning.
Contrary to the belief that many of these subjects are mere conspiracy theories brought on by people who only deal in circumstantial evidence and who believe anything that sounds like an entertaining theory, we’re seeing some real truth here.
Truth that would completely change the public’s perspective on government and the intelligence community. The implications are huge when you really start to look at it and what the evidence clearly indicates.
This is not the only event that evidently shows coverups. Recent admissions by the US Navy has clearly indicated that government and intelligence communities have been keeping the public in the dark about UFOs for a long time.
Looking at government documents and whistleblowers that have been available for decades, you can find out very quickly that much more is going on behind the scenes than people realize, and the discussion of UFOs is really nothing to be gawked at as it often is.
Before public admission of the reality of UFOs, the media and many academics made fun of people who believed in UFOs as if they were crazy. Now that same media is telling you they’re real.
While they aren’t necessarily saying who is manning these UFOs, the conversation is quickly turning towards admitting to so many of the things ‘conspiracy theorists’ have discussed.
One could say that UFOs as a conspiracy theory became reality when the NAVY admitted to the validity of the video evidence that emerged. Do we know exactly what is going on? No, but we know a lot more.
Likewise with the NSA’s ‘big brother spying’ program – it’s no longer a conspiracy theory thanks to Edward Snowden. In that sense, you can see where I’m getting my ‘conspireality’ term from – conspiracies that have become reality.
The question now is, how do we have conversations about remaining ‘conspiracies’ seriously? Where we look at the evidence with an open mind and truly see what it says.
Alternative media has been covering these topics for years prior to mainstream media even opening up to the idea. Alt media has been filling a void in media that aligns with a correct intuition people have that there is more to what we’re being told – and it involves some highly controversial topics.
Hence the rise in alternative media. Popularity grew because it was feeding something deep within people that they felt but could not get from the mainstream.
In return, the mainstream culture seems to have taken issue with the rise of alternative media as it represents a loss of having a monopoly on narratives.
Before I continue I want to be clear that this is a complex and nuanced conversation, and the themes I’m going to discuss don’t apply to all people, but seem to be a big part of ‘alternative’ thinking culture.
As mainstream or traditional media continues to fail to ask the right questions about what is going on in our world (whether it was due to a lack of interest in the part of journalists, direction from media directors, or perhaps a gag order from someone ‘higher up’), it can be said that alternative media may not always carry the necessary standards in reporting and conversation to be taken seriously.
Yet these emerging conversations are incredibly important and needed.
One other aspect of this I want to mention, that can be founding both mainstream/traditional media and some alternative media, is the lack of ‘spiritual’ context within current events.
Meaning, there are deeper questions about who we are, why we’re here and what life is about that many who are ‘waking up’ are asking and feeling – processing even, yet mainstream media doesn’t have the context to understand this nor empathetically report on it.
It can be said that some of alternative media fits in this boat as well.
Lately, I’ve been grappling with this difficult topic, and I sometimes find it a bit tough to even put into words. It is something I’ve loosely discussed for years now, but am now really moving to open up a dialogue about it as I believe we’ve reached an absolutely critical juncture in time where we must begin to explore themes I’m about to present.
Themes that involve anything from free speech to societal decline, division, and our potential to create a world where we can thrive. I believe much of what we’ll discuss here is critical to all that and more.
The topic I’ve struggled with lately is that I feel many people in the ‘alternative’ or ‘conspiracy’ community, defined contextually for this article as those who are often well-intended in seeking alternative narratives the mainstream does not offer, seem to have become very ideological, absolute, and extreme about their positions.
The conversations being had often jump to conclusions even without evidence, and attack anyone who doesn’t agree with them as being ‘sheeple’ or brain dead. It’s creating huge divides, yet very few want to admit it.
Most importantly, it’s making it very hard to have these important conversations about controversial topics that need to be had at this moment. Further, and as I foresaw years ago, it’s also inviting censorship.
Let’s get clear here. You might see a meme that shows a picture with Bill Gates and Jeffrey Epstein, and thus it automatically means we now have proof Gates is a pedophile.
‘The Deep State mass arrests are coming any day now.’ Just as they have been for the last 10 years. Yet still, if you don’t understand that these mass arrests are coming, you’re asleep.
The key distinction here is the sense of certainty, the sense that it’s all so obvious, even when it’s not. The use of poor evidence, circumstantial evidence, or none at all, to ‘prove’ what’s going on has overtaken critical thinking.
It almost seems like people have become more interested in the entertainment value of this controversial information as opposed to how true it actually might be or how much evidence there truly is.
Take the X22 report for example. He pulls together a ton of circumstantial evidence, matches it with Q posts and then offers an analysis. Many believe his work clearly shows facts in drawing conclusions, but in reality, it’s mere speculation.
This is perfectly fine, but people are getting lost in seeing this as unequivocal fact, as opposed to mere speculation. X22 has suggested for example that Julian Assange is safe and sound and his arrest is nothing but ‘part of the plan’ by the Q patriots to save America from the Deep State.
In his video, you can follow all of the evidence he proposes, why Assange had a book in his hand, what that book meant, and how it was a code for people to look deeper.
This, while those close to Assange, including independent reporters and family, have been saying he is being tortured and suffering deeply in prison. So on one hand you have ‘truthers’ saying he’s fine, don’t worry, part of the plan.
And then you have those who actually know him and have access to him saying the situation is bad and people need to help do something about it. Those same truthers have then said “don’t worry, those reporters and family are part of the plan too… it’s all optics.” You can see the issue here.
What I’m getting at is many popular voices in alternative media approach ‘conspiracy theories’ in a way that turns circumstantial evidence into unquestionable truth. Delivered with a sense of certainty or sweeping generalizations.
They can often lack critical thinking because they match their circumstantial evidence with the overarching story they have chosen to believe as fact. In turn, many viewers of alternative media seem to have begun believing these ideas as pure truth, without applying the same critical thinking rigor to alt narratives as they would have to mainstream narratives.
This by no means is everyone who watches alternative media. In fact, I have often stated and observed that many who do view alternative media do so because they have developed great critical thinking skills and have realized that there is not much value these days out in watching mainstream or traditional media.
That said, there is still a large group of presenters and viewers who make up a culture within the alternative space that does contribute to undermining these conversations.
Take Jeffrey Epstein for example. A huge case that began to connect underage sex/pedophile rings to powerful people in the world. An idea that has been around for a long time thanks to survivors and whistleblowers who have told their story.
The mainstream media has never done a good job of covering this, and traditional journalists have often shied away from it. Now though, this conversation is huge and ready to be had – people are listening.
Then comes the part I’m trying to raise awareness about here: some people in the alternative community will undermine these conversations by aggressively positing that every politician pictured with Epstein is automatically a pedophile and involved.
This among other assertions that are easy to debunk of course. This makes it easy for mainstream media or fact-checkers to begin easily debunking ‘conspiracy theories’ related to Jeffrey Epstein as bogus – and in a lot of cases, they are right.
Yet, there is actually a meaningful conversation to be had here, there is truth to explore, but if people are not more careful, these conversations won’t be had because their lack of critical thinking and completely certain positions close the door for other onlookers and make it easy to bury this information as unfounded and delusional conspiracies.
After all, a quick Google search will return plenty of mainstream media positions analyzing the psychological nature of ‘those who believe in conspiracy theories’ as if there is no real truth to any of them, and that people are just ‘out of their minds’ of sorts.
For myself personally in doing this work for the last 11 years, it is extremely common to have our work lumped in all other “baseless conspiracy theories” due to the fact that we’re often covering the same topics that are considered baseless conspiracy theories because they were covered poorly by others or simply because they sound similar.
We become guilty by association and part of a culture of people who seem to simply believe everything without any real evidence, this, regardless of the fact that we approach these important conversations with evidence and rigor.
Perhaps you’ve had the experience where you suggest in conversation “I don’t feel Jeffrey Epstein killed himself.” And right away a friend says “oh, you sound like a conspiracy theorist.”
One might assume it’s because that friend is not open-minded or was convinced by mainstream media it’s all a conspiracy, when in reality that friend may have witnessed a ton of laughable and paranoid content with weak evidence and harshly stated ‘facts’ that when researched, returned no real results.
Thus the question becomes, is the ‘conspiracy’ community actually digging their own grave and just blaming mainstream media for why people don’t listen?
How Can We Adjust?
11 years ago I had a vision of creating media that approaches understanding our world in a different way. As our About Us page on CE states:
“We live in a time where virtually every aspect of our society is changing or crumbling. Power is shifting and old ways of looking at and understanding our world are no longer working. New voices and ideas are emerging that encourage us to look more deeply at why our world is the way it is, and what about us creates it to be this way.
Collective Evolution is a news-media and education company that creates content to explore how humanity can shift our consciousness and way of being to evolve beyond the personal and global challenges we face.
We help encourage the development of inner faculties to explore more about how we can arrive at truth as opposed to just saying what truth is. Our work encourages a greater connection to self, an increase of self-awareness and being aware of what’s around us. We encourage others to let information be as opposed to it defining who we are and developing ideology.
What do our current events say about how we operate as people? What do our societal structures and common issues say about our level of thinking (consciousness) and what type of ideas we’re bringing to the table? What if the solution to the many challenges we feel we face today is actually in changing how we think, relate to one another, and even relate to our world?
We feel this is one of the key missing factors in mainstream media, alternative media and traditional societal discussions today, and therefore we create our content to inspire personal transformation and the expansion of collective consciousness through two key avenues: news media and personal transformation content."
We’ve always felt that bringing the inner work, inner transformation aspect into making sense of our world was key as it is empowering and actually allows each person to take responsibility for what they are creating in their life and in the world. By developing inner faculties like critical thinking, presence, self-awareness, and intuition, we can better understand our world and why it is the way it is.
We can also begin to become aware of an expanded state of who we are, which may choose to create society from a completely different mindset than simply believing we are a cog in the wheel with beliefs and ideologies that are outdated and don’t resonate with us.
Thus I’m putting forth a call here, firstly, perhaps it’s time we move on from this whole idea of calling things a “conspiracy theory.” We have learned by now that if we apply critical thinking and proper journalism to many of these controversial ideas, what’s worth exploring further becomes clear quickly.
I discuss these ideas much more deeply in a video I produced on this subject in relation to a few early statements made by David Icke during a London Real interview about COVID-19. David assertively states that “COVID-19 does not exist” and then proceeds to make a strong link between COVID-19 and 5G.
I’m not saying David is a bad researcher or anything of that fashion, on the contrary, I believe some of his work is solid, and asks some great questions.
But what I’m saying is, if you look at the aftermath of that conversation, whereby assertions are made that are certainly nothing more than speculation but not presented as such, we can clearly see what shifts need to be made in how these conversations are approached so we can do a better job of having them seriously and uniting people.
5G as a conversation was deeply undermined as mainstream media had an easy time stating there is no evidence linking 5G to COVID, and now those who look into 5G safety might be highly skeptical because the ‘crazy conspiracy’ was that 5G created COVID.
Further, there are serious discussions to be had around the origins of COVID-19 and whether or not the authoritarian measures are truly necessary, yet how can we easily have those conversations when such a large portion of the community is simply saying COVID is a hoax and that it doesn’t exist?
This isn’t to say that these ideas should not be explored, this is the piece many seem to miss. They want it to be a black and white conversation – who are the good guys? Who are the bad guys? Should I do this, or that?
When in reality, this is a conversation about making sense of a situation that is extremely complex, and if we try and put forth one all-encompassing theory that is certain about what’s going on right now, we can’t possibly be accurate in that as we simply don’t know everything.
So why assert it as such? It is virtually impossible. Yet those who don’t agree with this all-encompassing and obvious agenda... asleep.
This is the issue I want to talk about more in the video below. I also offer what I feel are some solutions and realizations people could reflect on to see how they feel for them.
The Trap Of Romantic Love February 14 2023 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
The Search for Romantic Love: Most people - especially those brought up in the West - have been conditioned to believe that so-called romantic love is the most important pursuit in life and that only the ones who’ve found it are fulfilled.
From the tender age of one or two, we are told of fairy tales that end with two people of the opposite sex living “happily ever after”. As we age, novels, magazines, pop songs, television, Hollywood scripts, and self-help workshops reinforce the idea that romantic love is the ideal form of love.
We are led to believe that our happiness heavily depends on romantic love, and that our personal worth is reflected in how good we are with our romantic relationships. Not surprisingly, when we’re single or we don’t experience love as it’s usually portrayed, we wonder if there’s something wrong with us.
We think that we’re missing out on true love and are anxiously praying for that moment when the fair maiden or prince will save us from our desperate situation.
As we are, we feel emotionally empty - something is lacking within our psyche that needs to be filled, yet we can’t do that on our own. Only another person can do it, and unless we are lucky enough to connect with him or her, we won’t ever discover pure joy and lasting contentment.
The belief that we’re not complete as we are and that we need someone else to fill in our sense of existential emptiness isn’t a modern one. In fact, it’s ancient.
In Plato’s ~2,500 year-old philosophical text Symposium, the comic playwright Aristophanes describes the origins of humanity. As he points out, the original form of man was a four-legged, four-armed, double-sexed entity.
Zeus, however, was afraid that humans might steal the power of the gods, so he decided to take away their power by having them sliced in half. According to Aristophanes, their heads turned “towards the wound, so that each person would see that he’d been cut and keep better order.”
This, he explains, is why each human being is craving for a significant other to complete them. In his own words: “Now, since their natural form had been cut in two, each one longed for its own other half, and so they would throw their arms about each other, weaving themselves together, wanting to grow together.”
If taken literally, Aristophanes’ recount is total nonsense, yet metaphorically it shows the central role that romantic love plays in our lives: We are in an endless search for that “special someone” - the soulmate - the universe created just for us, and we are willing to give up anything to “lose ourselves” in his or her embrace.
Romantic Love as Addiction
The moment we fall in love, the world turns into a magical place. Suddenly, life becomes more beautiful, adventurous, meaningful… in short, life becomes worth-living again.
The only problem is that, having experienced the emotional high of romantic love, we want more of it, yet no matter how much of it we get, our thirst for it is never quenched.
In other words, romantic love is addictive. In fact, research has shown that falling in love can have a similar impact on the brain as cocaine. To study the brain function of people engaged in romantic love relationships, biological anthropologist Helen Fisher put a group of participants through MRI brain scans.
Interestingly, what she found was that they behaved just like addicts: They had obsessive thoughts, participated in risk-taking activities and found it hard to deal with withdrawals.
The brain of people in love secretes an ample amount of hormones like dopamine, norepinephrine and serotonin — hormones that boost their pleasure and confidence levels. Feeling the exhilarating psychological effects of this hormonal boost, everything seems perfect to the romantic love addict.
The promises of fairy tales have come true. At last, life is as it’s supposed to be. Yet, once the initial high fades, everything changes. Life becomes mundane, ordinary, boring once again.
This return to “normal” reality is usually enough to bring a relationship to an end. Once that happens, the romantic love addict will soon come face-to-face with that sense of inner emptiness which has forever been torturing his/her psyche. Then, to deal with his/her withdrawal symptoms, the romantic love addict will go off in search of a new hit, and the story will repeat itself one more time.
Romantic Love: A Dangerous Self-Delusion
As you can understand, romantic love is temporary - it comes quickly and goes away just as fast. No matter how strong the feelings of lust and passion in new relationships might be, they are soon bound to disappear into thin air, as the power of romantic love loses grip over our emotional world.
But while we’re possessed by romantic love, it’s so overwhelming that it distorts our perception and often leads us into making choices that we will later regret.
For example, projecting their long-yearned fantasies upon their “other half”, it’s a common phenomenon for people in fresh romantic love relationships to exaggerate the positive traits of their partner and reduce or deny the negative ones.
This illusion makes them believe they’ve found their one and only perfect match. Feeling a sense of total acceptance and adoration for their partner, they are under the impression that their love is going to last forever. As a result, they tend to make quick, immature choices, such as hurrying to marry, only to find years later that they resent their partner for failing to meet their expectations.
Romantic love is a blind self-delusion - it only exists in the realm of fantasy, an imaginary world that we’ve cultivated with the help of the romantic tradition, mainly through media programming. Just like pornography fools us into believing that perfect sex exists, the romantic tradition fools us into believing that perfect relationships exist.
Yet, romantic love isn’t just delusional - it can also be dangerous once we’ve fallen into its trap. Not just because of the wrong choices it can urge us to make, as mentioned earlier, but first and foremost because it creates an ideal out of love that nobody can possibly reach (because it doesn’t exist in the first place - in fact, that’s the very reason why it’s called ideal).
Hence, no matter how nice, compatible people we date, the yearning for the perfect romantic relationship with the fairy tale Dream Lover will always lead us to disappointment. Obsessed with a fantasy world, we can’t enjoy reality.
Escaping the Trap of Romantic Love
To escape the trap of romantic love is quite difficult, considering that we have a billion-dollar industry that is day in and day out promoting a misrepresentation of actual love relationships, in effect making a profit from the exploitation of our deep-rooted emotional need to love and be loved.
You see, capitalism doesn’t give a damn about love. In fact, the less we love one another, the better it is for capitalism. From the market’s standpoint, it’s good that we’re unhappy with our relationships, because then happiness can be sold to us through products and services that promise to substitute for the loss of connection that we long for.
Unfortunately, we’re so desperate that we’ve bought into those promises. This is reflected in our efforts to show our partners love through the act of buying stuff. Take, for example, Valentine’s day, when couples have been persuaded to blindly consume things, thinking that this will elevate their relationship.
But how can an expensive ring substitute for a tight, filled-with-loving-warmth hug? And how can a ready-made meal in a high-class gourmet restaurant substitute for a sincere, intimate look into the beloved’s eye?
What we need isn’t more stuff, just like we don’t need more romantic movies. Neither, of course, do we need the Ideal Lover from the dreamworld. All of these offer us nothing of what we need, and only mess up with our hearts.
What we actually need is more understanding.
We need to understand that there’s no person out there who will complete us.
If we feel a sense of emptiness within, we’re going to keep on experiencing it no matter how many romantic love partners we spend our time with. That’s because our inner emptiness is nothing but a lack of self-love.
Therefore, unless we’re able to love and accept ourselves, we’ll always feel incomplete, regardless of how much love is shown to us.
We need to understand that we can’t love another unless we first love ourselves.
Healthy love relationships can only exist between two already complete, fulfilled people who decide to enrich their lives by sharing their overflowing-with-love hearts.
Unfortunately, most of us are emotional beggars seeking for completion in another person, only to find that our emptiness is actually deepening once we wake up to the fact that our partner is just as empty as we are.
We need to understand that love relationships are based on freedom.
Normally, partners are trying to fit each other into their fantasy image of how the Ideal Lover should look and behave like, not realizing that by doing so they’re depriving them of their freedom to be themselves.
This inevitably results in a constant state of conflict that ultimately turns relationships into prisons of emotional torture.
Just like birds need freedom of space so that they can soar into the skies, partners in an intimate relationship need the freedom to be themselves so they can spread their wings of love and fly to the peaks of consciousness.
We need to understand that healthy relationships require a lot of work.
There’s no great relationship without a lot of work behind it. In other words, great relationships don’t happen to be - they are slowly built with care and effort.
No matter how special a relationship might be, hardships to one degree or another are going to be a natural of part it, and the important question is how you deal with them: Is it through discussion and understanding or through fighting and judging?
Lastly, we need to understand that the Perfect Relationship doesn’t exist.
Contrary to what the romantic tradition has made us believe, the Perfect Relationship doesn’t exist other than in our imagination.
No actual living person is without flaws, we need to stop projecting our fairy tale fantasies on our partners, if we actually want to build genuine love relationships on the foundation of honesty, understanding and acceptance.
In addition, love relationships aren’t all passionate sex and romantic walks on sandy beaches under the filled-with-stars night sky. They’re not forever-lasting, either. In fact, they’re usually quite ephemeral. So let’s not make promises of perfect and eternal love.
Let’s be honest to one another, and keep our love real. I know, this is not the stuff movies and books are made of, but the reality nonetheless, and we better accept it before we’re slapped by it hard in the face.
Love relationships can’t be perfect, but they can still be amazingly beautiful. So let’s make the most of them, by celebrating what we do have, instead of worrying about what we don’t.
The Secret Meeting That Changed Rap Music And Destroyed A Generation & The Troubling Case Of Paz de la Huerta And Her (Now Deleted) Instagram Account
February 13 2023 | From: HipHopIsRead / VigilantCitizen / Various After more than 20 years, I've finally decided to tell the world what I witnessed in 1991, which I believe was one of the biggest turning point in popular music, and ultimately American [Western] society.
I have struggled for a long time weighing the pros and cons of making this story public as I was reluctant to implicate the individuals who were present that day.
So I've simply decided to leave out names and all the details that may risk my personal well being and that of those who were, like me, dragged into something they weren't ready for.
Between the late 80's and early 90’s, I was what you may call a “decision maker” with one of the more established company in the music industry. I came from Europe in the early 80’s and quickly established myself in the business.
The industry was different back then. Since technology and media weren’t accessible to people like they are today, the industry had more control over the public and had the means to influence them anyway it wanted.
This may explain why in early 1991, I was invited to attend a closed door meeting with a small group of music business insiders to discuss rap music’s new direction.
Little did I know that we would be asked to participate in one of the most unethical and destructive business practice I’ve ever seen. The meeting was held at a private residence on the outskirts of Los Angeles. I remember about 25 to 30 people being there, most of them familiar faces.
Speaking to those I knew, we joked about the theme of the meeting as many of us did not care for rap music and failed to see the purpose of being invited to a private gathering to discuss its future.
Among the attendees was a small group of unfamiliar faces who stayed to themselves and made no attempt to socialize beyond their circle. Based on their behavior and formal appearances, they didn't seem to be in our industry.
Our casual chatter was interrupted when we were asked to sign a confidentiality agreement preventing us from publicly discussing the information presented during the meeting. Needless to say, this intrigued and in some cases disturbed many of us. The agreement was only a page long but very clear on the matter and consequences which stated that violating the terms would result in job termination.
We asked several people what this meeting was about and the reason for such secrecy but couldn't find anyone who had answers for us. A few people refused to sign and walked out. No one stopped them. I was tempted to follow but curiosity got the best of me. A man who was part of the “unfamiliar” group collected the agreements from us.
Quickly after the meeting began, one of my industry colleagues (who shall remain nameless like everyone else) thanked us for attending. He then gave the floor to a man who only introduced himself by first name and gave no further details about his personal background. I think he was the owner of the residence but it was never confirmed.
He briefly praised all of us for the success we had achieved in our industry and congratulated us for being selected as part of this small group of “decision makers”.
At this point I begin to feel slightly uncomfortable at the strangeness of this gathering. The subject quickly changed as the speaker went on to tell us that the respective companies we represented had invested in a very profitable industry which could become even more rewarding with our active involvement.
He explained that the companies we work for had invested millions into the building of privately owned prisons and that our positions of influence in the music industry would actually impact the profitability of these investments. I remember many of us in the group immediately looking at each other in confusion. At the time, I didn’t know what a private prison was but I wasn't the only one.
Sure enough, someone asked what these prisons were and what any of this had to do with us. We were told that these prisons were built by privately owned companies who received funding from the government based on the number of inmates.
The more inmates, the more money the government would pay these prisons. It was also made clear to us that since these prisons are privately owned, as they become publicly traded, we’d be able to buy shares. Most of us were taken back by this.
Again, a couple of people asked what this had to do with us. At this point, my industry colleague who had first opened the meeting took the floor again and answered our questions. He told us that since our employers had become silent investors in this prison business, it was now in their interest to make sure that these prisons remained filled.
Our job would be to help make this happen by marketing music which promotes criminal behavior, rap being the music of choice.
He assured us that this would be a great situation for us because rap music was becoming an increasingly profitable market for our companies, and as employee, we’d also be able to buy personal stocks in these prisons.
Immediately, silence came over the room. You could have heard a pin drop. I remember looking around to make sure I wasn't dreaming and saw half of the people with dropped jaws.
My daze was interrupted when someone shouted, “Is this a f****** joke?” At this point things became chaotic.
Two of the men who were part of the “unfamiliar” group grabbed the man who shouted out and attempted to remove him from the house. A few of us, myself included, tried to intervene. One of them pulled out a gun and we all backed off.
They separated us from the crowd and all four of us were escorted outside. My industry colleague who had opened the meeting earlier hurried out to meet us and reminded us that we had signed agreement and would suffer the consequences of speaking about this publicly or even with those who attended the meeting.
I asked him why he was involved with something this corrupt and he replied that it was bigger than the music business and nothing we’d want to challenge without risking consequences.
We all protested and as he walked back into the house I remember word for word the last thing he said, “It’s out of my hands now. Remember you signed an agreement.” He then closed the door behind him.
The men rushed us to our cars and actually watched until we drove off.
A million things were going through my mind as I drove away and I eventually decided to pull over and park on a side street in order to collect my thoughts. I replayed everything in my mind repeatedly and it all seemed very surreal to me.
I was angry with myself for not having taken a more active role in questioning what had been presented to us. I'd like to believe the shock of it all is what suspended my better nature. After what seemed like an eternity, I was able to calm myself enough to make it home.
I didn't talk or call anyone that night. The next day back at the office, I was visibly out of it but blamed it on being under the weather. No one else in my department had been invited to the meeting and I felt a sense of guilt for not being able to share what I had witnessed.
I thought about contacting the 3 others who wear kicked out of the house but I didn't remember their names and thought that tracking them down would probably bring unwanted attention.
I considered speaking out publicly at the risk of losing my job but I realized I’d probably be jeopardizing more than my job and I wasn't willing to risk anything happening to my family. I thought about those men with guns and wondered who they were?
I had been told that this was bigger than the music business and all I could do was let my imagination run free. There were no answers and no one to talk to. I tried to do a little bit of research on private prisons but didn’t uncover anything about the music business’ involvement.
However, the information I did find confirmed how dangerous this prison business really was. Days turned into weeks and weeks into months. Eventually, it was as if the meeting had never taken place. It all seemed surreal.
I became more reclusive and stopped going to any industry events unless professionally obligated to do so. On two occasions, I found myself attending the same function as my former colleague. Both times, our eyes met but nothing more was exchanged.
As the months passed, rap music had definitely changed direction. I was never a fan of it but even I could tell the difference. Rap acts that talked about politics or harmless fun were quickly fading away as gangster rap started dominating the airwaves.
Only a few months had passed since the meeting but I suspect that the ideas presented that day had been successfully implemented. It was as if the order has been given to all major label executives.
The music was climbing the charts and most companies when more than happy to capitalize on it. Each one was churning out their very own gangster rap acts on an assembly line.
Everyone bought into it, consumers included. Violence and drug use became a central theme in most rap music. I spoke to a few of my peers in the industry to get their opinions on the new trend but was told repeatedly that it was all about supply and demand.
Sadly many of them even expressed that the music reinforced their prejudice of minorities.
I officially quit the music business in 1993 but my heart had already left months before. I broke ties with the majority of my peers and removed myself from this thing I had once loved.
I took some time off, returned to Europe for a few years, settled out of state, and lived a “quiet” life away from the world of entertainment. As the years passed, I managed to keep my secret, fearful of sharing it with the wrong person but also a little ashamed of not having had the balls to blow the whistle.
But as rap got worse, my guilt grew. Fortunately, in the late 90’s, having the internet as a resource which wasn't at my disposal in the early days made it easier for me to investigate what is now labeled the prison industrial complex.
Now that I have a greater understanding of how private prisons operate, things make much more sense than they ever have.
I see how the criminalization of rap music played a big part in promoting racial stereotypes and misguided so many impressionable young minds into adopting these glorified criminal behaviors which often lead to incarceration.
Twenty years of guilt is a heavy load to carry but the least I can do now is to share my story, hoping that fans of rap music realize how they’ve been used for the past 2 decades.
Although I plan on remaining anonymous for obvious reasons, my goal now is to get this information out to as many people as possible.
Please help me spread the word.
Hopefully, others who attended the meeting back in 1991 will be inspired by this and tell their own stories. Most importantly, if only one life has been touched by my story, I pray it makes the weight of my guilt a little more tolerable.
The Troubling Case Of Paz de la Huerta And Her (Now Deleted) Instagram Account
Paz de la Huerta went from being tagged a “major Hollywood celebrity” to a “major nutjob” in a few short years. And things got worse after she accused Harvey Weinstein of multiple crimes.
However, a close look at her disturbing social media posts reveals another story: She been abused and controlled by the occult elite for decades.
Paz de la Huerta is an American actress and model who is mostly known for her role in the HBO series Broadwalk Empire and her countless magazine photoshoots.
Between 2005 and 2010, at the height of her career, de la Huerta worked with A-list celebrities and partied with Hollywood’s most powerful people. However, after a series of bizarre and traumatizing events, de la Huerta’s career came to a screeching halt.
Nowadays, de la Huerta is mostly known for appearing in paparazzi videos of her stumbling around while looking heavily intoxicated at social events. She’s also been a frequent subject of ridicule by celebrity gossip sites who have been documenting her erratic behavior for years.
While she was dismissed as “crazy” by mass media a long time ago, de la Huerta hundreds of posts on social media tell a darker story – one that sums up perfectly disgusting, hidden side of the occult elite and the entertainment industry.
Before looking that that (now deleted) Instagram account, here’s a quick look at her past.
Troubled Past
Paz de la Huerta’s parents are Ricardo Ignacio de la Huerta y Ozores (Spanish nobleman and 17th Duke of Mandas and Villanueva) and Judith Bruce (and authority on birth control in Third World countries and United Nations Consultant).
Paz obtained her first role at age 12 in the movie 1998 The Object of My Affection which starred Jennifer Aniston and Paul Rudd. She then steadily climbed the stairs to stardom until things took a horrible turn.
In 2011, de la Huerta was nearly killed by a speeding ambulance truck that was driven by a stunt driver on the set of the movie Nurse 3D. This event was highly suspicious, especially when one watches the video of it.
In this disturbing video, it appears that the ambulance actually steered left at the very last second to violently hit Paz. Furthermore, the ambulance was driven by a stunt driver who is literally trained to perform dangerous car stunts. Was it actually a murder attempt? As we’ll see later, the story surrounding this accident and its aftermaths is extremely bizarre.
No matter what the case may be, the accident nearly killed Paz. She filed a $55 million lawsuit against Liongate film claiming that the accident required her to undergo over 20 surgeries and left her unable to work. The case was dismissed.
In November 2018, de la Huerta filed a $60 million lawsuit against Harvey Weinstein, accusing the director of raping her on two separate occasions in 2010 and then embarking on a campaign of harassment that she contends damaged her career.
Paz de la Huerta with Harvey Weinstein at the Soho Grand Hotel in 2010
Contrarily to other 'Me Too' figureheads such as Rose McGowan, de la Huerta’s accusations generated little support and sympathy from mass media and the entertainment industry. Weinstein’s defense team has called her allegations “preposterous and, unfortunately, the product of an unstable personality with a vivid imagination.”
In May 2019, while de la Huerta was working on her lawsuit against Weinstein, she was hospitalized for “severe emotional distress”.
Throughout these difficult times, de la Huerta remained active on Instagram … and that account was terrifying. Indeed, most of her posts were actually calls for help as she accused “evil women” of abusing and torturing her while constantly pushing her to suicide.
For reasons unknown, that IG account was completed deleted in the past weeks. Luckily, since I was actually working on an article before the deletion happened, I’ve saved some screenshots and copied the contents of some captions.
Now, more than ever, I believe these need to be shared because they explain the “why” of de la Huerta’s behavior while shedding light on the dark and disturbing side of the entertainment industry.
At first glance, Paz de la Huerta’s Instagram account appeared to consist of hundreds of selfies mixed with some pics from her glory days.
However, when one took the time to read the captions associated with these pics, things got very dark. Nearly every picture was accompanied by a wall of text where Paz described her constant abuse and trauma at the hands of “evil women”.
A typical IG post by Paz combining a “beauty pic” with a troubling caption about evil women trying to destroy her
Although Paz’ captions often sounded like the ramblings of a crazy person, they actually told a coherent and precise story of systematic abuse at the hands of specific people – notably her own mother. In one post she writes:
“I’ve always been incredibly generous even to my evil mother who if she wanted me to be healthy and successful she wouldn’t have done the unconscionable thing she did to me in Spain that she had tried to do so many times before but my good karma always saved me if I survive this I’m writing a book about maunchhausen bi proxy.”
On several occasions, Paz accuses her mother of Munchausen syndrome by proxy. Here’s a definition of it:
Munchausen syndrome by proxy (MSBP) is a mental health problem in which a caregiver makes up or causes an illness or injury in a person under his or her care, such as a child, an elderly adult, or a person who has a disability. Because vulnerable people are the victims, MSBP is a form of child abuse or elder abuse.
Note: Since most cases of MSBP are between a caregiver (usually a mother) and a child, the rest of this topic will describe that relationship. But it is important to remember that MSBP can involve any vulnerable person who has a caregiver.
The caregiver with MSBP may:
Lie about the child’s symptoms.
Change test results to make a child appear to be ill.
Physically harm the child to produce symptoms.
Victims are most often small children. They may get painful medical tests they don’t need. They may even become seriously ill or injured or may die because of the actions of the caregiver.
Children who are victims of MSBP can have lifelong physical and emotional problems and may have Munchausen syndrome as adults. This is a disorder in which a person causes or falsely reports his or her own symptoms.
Although she was under the strict control of her mother since birth, Paz says that things got worse since the 2011 ambulance accident. In another post she wrote:
“Since my truck accident I’ve been surrounded by these evil women trying to convince me I was sick so they could lock me up for the rest of my life out of envy and fear for their reputations but when I met Mika that night it was a break from the psychological torture.”
In another post she wrote:
“I have been crying for months … it’s inhumane what these monsters have done to me. Because of them I didn’t get my justice against Lionsgate. I was going to marry a man and they messed that up to. My boyfriend of 15 years won’t talk to me because he says I’ve been so naive and he’s afraid I will take my life.
I had a career in Paris before they did the unconscionable. One old assistant of mine brave enough to step forward has saved all of their emails of their plans for me these last years since I had my truck accident.
They’ve been trying to have me committed for the rest of my life only because I hold secrets of years of unconscionable abuse .
I was never going to tell until what they did to me in Spain , the only country they could get away with it. All I did was cry after this one abuser said evil things to me and I was speaking to Micheal rebel the famous therapist that told me to run away from them years ago before they kill me.
They are trying to drive me to suicide, they have been doing it for years. They have gas lit me. (…)
I want my famous friends to read this and help me get away from these abusers who have gas lit me held me prisoner in a city. I have few loved ones and are trying to put me in a cage for the rest of my life because I know too much. I will speak to this assistant who was brave enough to step forward.”
As stated above, Paz claimed that she was abducted in Spain in 2018.
She reportedly spent six months “locked in a cage” while undergoing intense trauma at the hands of “evil women”.
A post about Paz being abducted
In another post she wrote:
“I was making money modeling and I was about to sign with the best agency until I stupidly got on that plane to Spain where evil I didn’t even know existed awaited me.
What can I say? Truck accident, rape, near fatal cuncussion, and I’ve never been a blamer and I’ve never even cared to sue because by heart I’m a very positive resilient woman but this is the greatest injustice I’ve ever endured in my life and never have a witnessed just how cruel humanity is.
I did nothing to warrant being locked up in a cage in a foreign country for six months they are still trying to keep me from having the proper medical care my evil mother has even voiced that she doesn’t want me working well than what am I supposed to be an invalid.”
In another post explained that what happened to her could only happen in Spain – perhaps due to her father’s connections.
“The only reason they got away with what they did was because in Spain my medications which they knew I needed one was illegal and I don’t know how they got away with keeping me there for so long it’s illegal to do that to someone Any where else in the world and because a judge put me there they made my evil abuser my custodian which I’ve had legally changed since and she forbade me from speaking to the two men my lawyer and best friend who had the power to get me out of that hell in a day.
I tried to commit suicide nine times when I was there.”
“do you know the story about the Kennedy girl we’ll she was very beautiful and sexy and vivacious the life of the party her mother was so deadly envious of her an ugly uptight prude like one of my main abusers and she basically did to her daughter what these to evil women tried to do to me lobotomize her the poor girl was robbed of her life and spent the rest of her life staring at a wall … extremely sad story and it almost happened to me I’ve never wanted to sue for any of the injustices I’ve endured until now and I have a killer lawyer share you’re stories with me and let’s support one another these evil women belong in jail.”
On several occasions, de la Huerta mentions an assistant who is willing to come forward and testify about the abuse she underwent in the past years.
In one Instagram post, the assistant wrote a long caption summing up the situation (you can tell that the text was written by another person due to the presence of actual sentences and punctuation).
“My name is Kimberly M., I am writing of behalf of Paz as I was friends with her in 2016-17, during that time witnessed some very bizarre treatment of her by her caretakers.
Before Paz left Los Angeles for Paris I became her assistant for a short period of time, in order to try and help her in a situation that seemed desperate. From the outside, it seemed that she was becoming increasingly frustrated with how her caretakers were handling her and was suspicious of their care.
From my point of view, she needed to be around more good role models, friends and people that cared for her in order for her to find her own stability and eventually start acting and modeling again.
When I started the job I thought this would be the intention of her caretakers as well, but soon found out this was not the case. My main interactions come in dealing with who was my boss for the job, Kimberly. The first signs that Kimberly had ill intentions for Paz came from the fact that she was trying very hard to discourage me taking the job of helping Paz.
Telling me I had no idea what I was getting into and repeatedly calling me to tell me negative things about Paz, often keeping me on the phone for hours at night, trying to convince me that Paz was not a good person and couldn’t be helped.
I could not figure out why she was trying to influence me in this way and soon began to ask questions because I was in disbelief. Some of the things I was told include that Paz was untreatable and too far gone for help.
She then told me that no treatment has worked on Paz in years, and that she has become more of a burden to them (Kimberly, Judith) than was worth putting actual effort into.
One day I still was not completely sold that Paz is untreatable, and confronted Kimberly who got very worked up and revealed to me that they think she is so untreatable, that they have given up and have been actively delaying or sabotaging some of the things Paz was asking for.
The most disturbing thing that was revealed was that they were trying to let her fail, so that she would go mad or cause enough altercations with the police/law to be put in an institution for life.
She also told me that because Paz’s godmother (her client) was the only one contributing to her financial stability, and that she had taken it upon herself to relay negative information to the godmother, sending bad reports (knowing that she had not attempted to facilitate a good report) and convincing her that Paz would be so much of a burden financially overtime, that she should accept her as a lost cause, and have her put away for life in order to save herself the money and trouble, even going as far to make her sound like a danger to others.
Never in my life did I think they would actually be able to follow through on such plans as I do not think Paz is insane, but a particular artist who’s been through a lot of trauma and needs adequate time to grow her own stability and find happiness in her own way.
I may not know the extent of what led to what in her situation, but I know what I witnessed was wrong on a moral level and believe that it may have contributed to their attempt to put Paz being put away in Spain.”
As the assistant wrote, Paz was subjected to “a lot of trauma”. And under details on her social media accounts point towards trauma-based mind control.
Trauma Based Mind Control?
To those who know about the dark side of the entertainment industry, Paz de la Huerta shows signs of trauma-based mind control.
Her early beginnings in the entertainment industry, her abuse at the hands of powerful people and her history of bizarre behavior (a typical result following MK breakdown) are all visible symptoms.
As explained in this article, trauma-based mind control (also known as Monarch programming) is about subjecting a slave to trauma so intense that it causes dissociation which leads to the programming of new alter personas.
In several Instagram posts, Paz actually refers to an alter-ego named Malificient.
An Instagram post about her alter-ego
Like many other victims of trauma-based mind control (such as Kim Noble), Paz also has a penchant for creating extremely symbolic paintings.
A painting by Paz de la Huerta that is replete with MK imagery. It depicts a Virgin-Mary-like figure with a blindfolded child who appears to be subjected to all kinds of foul treatments. Strange fact: In one of her posts, Paz wrote that she replaced memories of her mother by the Virgin Mary
In Conclusion
Although she can be easily dismissed as a crazy person who says crazy things (media has been doing it for years), Paz de la Huerta has actually been documenting her story of abuse and control in great detail.
Through her numerous social media posts (the only outlet she had until very recently), de la Huerta provided a first-person account of her systematic destruction at the hands of the people closest to her.
Is she actually crazy or did the abuse make that way? In an infamous interview about Hollywood, Dave Chappelle once said:
“The worst thing to call somebody is crazy. It’s dismissive. I don’t understand this person so they’re crazy.
That’s bullsh*t. These people are not crazy, they’re strong people. Maybe that environment (Hollywood) is a little sick.”
Hollywood is not only “a little sick”. It is very sick. It completely destroys minds, bodies, and souls. It turns strong, intelligent and talented people into spaced-out zombies who appear to be completely out of it.
It takes an incredible amount of strength to come back from mind control at the hands of the occult elite – and many don’t come back from it.
In short, if something suspicious ever happens to Paz de la Huerta, the true cause of it is most likely contained in this article.
How Much Of This Junk Are You Exposed To?
February 12 2023 | From: Inquisitr / Sott / NaturalNews / GreenMedInfo We all know about toxins and poisons in the environment - the slow kill. Keep the populace sick while the globalist corporatocracy bleeds us dry of money for power whilst they get off on their depopulation Eugenics agenda.
Awareness of 'environmental toxins' that are literally all around us helps you keep some of the crap out of your system...
Antibacterial Soap Banned By FDA, Commonly Used Chemicals May Do More Harm Than Good
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has banned antibacterial soap sales in the United States, and the reason why is incredibly disturbing.
Many people have turned to antibacterial soap for years, believing them to be a safe and effective way to remove dirt and germs from the body and hands, and more effective than traditional soap and water. However, when the FDA banned the popular soaps, they informed the public that they might not be so effective after all.
What’s more and infinitely more disturbing, according to the FDA, the chemicals most commonly used in antibacterial soaps may not even be safe.
A total of 19 chemicals often used in antibacterial soaps have been targeted by the FDA, and the agency has given manufacturers only a year to remove them all from the products they are selling (and marketing as safe and effective) to the public.
As The New York Times reports, while nearly 20 chemicals were involved in the decision that led to the antibacterial soap being banned by the FDA, two are the primary culprits. Triclosan and triclocarban are used in both bar and liquid antibacterial soap, and they are almost everywhere.
When the FDA banned antibacterial soap this week based on the risks of using the product often outweighing the benefits, they didn’t ban the questionable chemicals from all products.
Reportedly, at least one toothpaste uses a now-banned chemical, but according to the FDA, in that product it’s risks are less than the benefits it provides to consumers.
While the news that antibacterial soap has been banned by the FDA may be shocking and sudden to some, the truth of the matter is that there have been questions about its safety for years and years.
As Smithsonian Magazine reports, the FDA has been threatening to ban antibacterial soap for years. In the article, published in 2014, cited questions that the FDA had about the safety and effectiveness of antibacterial soap.
Even then, the FDA warned that antibacterial soap would be banned if manufacturers didn’t prove that it was both safe and more effective than using soap and water.
Apparently, the industry was unable to prove that antibacterial soap is safe or provides a public benefit that outweighs the potential risk of exposure of the chemicals used in the product.
At the time of the Smithsonian Magazine article, triclosan (with is banned as part of the FDA’s sweeping decision on antibacterial soap) was used in roughly 30 percent of all bar soap and 75 percent of liquid antibacterial soap. In 2014, the antibacterial soap industry, now banned by the FDA, was worth about $1 billion.
In 2014, the antibacterial soap industry was put on notice by the FDA. They were told to prove the safety of their product by 2016 or see their product banned. Despite the fact that manufacturers had turned antibacterial soap into a $1 billion industry and were given two years, they chose not to put together the required proof that they were selling a product that is safe and effective.
And plenty of people are speculating that the reason that the antibacterial soap industry didn’t prove to the FDA that their product is safe is that they know that it isn’t.
But rather than simply removing it from the market themselves (or demonstrate its safety), the antibacterial soap industry continued to use the questionable chemicals and sell personal hygiene products that may not be safe until the FDA announced that the products were banned.
Even now, antibacterial soap can be legally sold, despite questions about its safety.
In the aftermath of the announcement that the FDA had banned antibacterial soap, public health professionals have overwhelmingly supported the decision, adding that the chemicals in antibacterial soap can alter the hormones of children and even contribute to the problem of antibiotic-resistant superbugs.
“It has boggled my mind why we were clinging to these compounds, and now that they are gone I feel liberated They had absolutely no benefit but we kept them buzzing around us everywhere. They are in breast milk, in urine, in blood, in babies just born, in dust, in water.”
Recent studies into the chemicals found in antibacterial soap products have resulted in some very disturbing discoveries regarding the harm they can do to animals and likely to humans, too.
Among the problems caused by the now-banned products include severe abnormalities having to do with metabolism and reproduction. According to the CDC, the chemicals found in FDA banned antibacterial soap have been found in the bodily waste of 75 percent of U.S. residents.
Kinder and Lindt Chocolate Bars Revealed to Contain Cancer-Causing Carcinogens
Tests carried out by a German watchdog revealed Kinder chocolate bars and two other brands tested positive for a hazardous cancer-causing substance. Surprise!
Foodwatch called for Ferrero's Kinder Riegel, Lindt's Fioretto Nougat Minis, and Sun Rice Classic Schokohappen by Rübezahl to be taken off the shelves on Monday after tests found "possible carcinogens."
The sweet treats had been contaminated with "so-called aromatic mineral oils (MOAH)," says Foodwatch, but the manufacturers are allegedly reluctant to recall their products.
"The manufacturer is guilty of gross negligence. Instead of clearing the dangerous candy from the shelves and alerting consumers, they [postulate]... that everything was undertaken legally," said Foodwatch's John Heeg.
Foodwatch tested more than 20 different kinds of potato chips and chocolate snacks and found saturated mineral oils (MOSH) which it warned can "accumulate in the human body and [cause] long term damage to organs" with children particularly at risk.
"There is no acceptable levels of mineral oils in food for consumption," Heeg told the German edition of The Local, citing the European Food Safety Authority (EFSA) who he says considers MOAHs "likely carcinogenic and mutagenic."
"You can't see it, you can't taste it, but it's in there," warned Hegg. "We recommend not purchasing these products because the levels are simply unacceptable for consumption."
Kinder Riegel, "one of the best-selling chocolate bars in Germany," had the worst MOSH and MOAH values. The chemicals are usually transferred to foods through recycled packaging that previously had been printed with inks which may contain oils.
Foodwatch is calling for strict limits on saturated mineral oils (MOSH) in food and a zero tolerance for aromatic mineral oils (MOAH).
Brain Damaging Heavy Metal Mercury Found in Grocery Products Made With High Fructose Corn Syrup (HFCS)
HFCS is ubiquitous in the modern processed food supply. It's added to pizza sauce, salad dressings, ketchup and "whole wheat" breads. Did you know it's often contaminated with the toxic heavy metal mercury?
High-fructose corn syrup (HFCS) is a highly processed sweetener made primarily from corn and found in a plethora of food and beverages on grocery store shelves.
The U.S. Department of Agriculture's Economic Research Service estimated in 2011 that the average consumer per capita consumes nearly 42 pounds of high fructose corn syrup per year. Not one, but two studies in 2009 found that HFCS commercially produced in America and American-bought HFCS products were tainted with mercury.
The first study published in the peer-reviewed journal Environmental Health found that, of twenty samples collected and analyzed from three different manufacturers, nine, or 45 percent, came back tainted with mercury.
The second study by watchdog group Institute for Agriculture and Trade Policy (IATP) purchased fifty-five food items from popular brands off grocery store shelves in the fall of 2008 -- items in which HFCS was the first or second principal ingredient -- and detected mercury in nearly a third of them.
The contamination may have been due to the fact that mercury cells are still used in the production of caustic soda, an ingredient used to make HFCS.
The HFCS mercury plot thickens, however. Online news outlet Grist reported that the lead researcher in the Environmental Health study, Renee Dufault, previously worked as an FDA researcher.
Dufault had apparently turned over the information contained in her HFCS mercury study to the agency back in 2005, but the FDA reportedly sat on it and did nothing, so Dufault went public with it after she retired in 2008.
How Big Food Cornered the Market with a Liquid Sweetener
Initial attempts to get corn syrup widely dispersed into the U.S. food supply in the 1970s didn't really take off because sugar was so cheap and abundant at the time. However, this changed, as U.S.- imposed tariffs decreased sugar imports throughout the 1970s and early 1980s, making sugar significantly more expensive in America than in other parts of the world.
The surface explanation for these tariffs was to protect American sugar farmers; behind the scenes, however, Big Agra interests had lobbied for the policy to promote what would become a new source of sugar - derived from corn - which soon emerged as a popular commodity that was sold at a price significantly cheaper than cane sugar or beet sugar.
Archer Daniels Midland opened the first large-scale plant in 1978 (before they acquired the Clinton Corn Processing Company) to produce 90 percent HFCS and 55 percent HFCS. By January 1980, Coca-Cola began allowing high fructose corn syrup to be used as a sweetener at 50 percent levels with regular sugar; Pepsi Cola followed suit by 1983.
By November 1984, both major soft drink brands had approved full sweetening with HFCS, and HFCS quickly captured 42 percent of the sweetener market. The rising dominance of HFCS allowed it to maintain commercial prices similar to sugar until the 1990s.
Government Money Subsidizing Corn Syrup
For the past several decades, the U.S. government has paid subsidies to American farmers to grow tons of corn (much of which -- nearly 90 percent -- is genetically modified) and shifted domestic agricultural policy to maximize corn crops. This made high-fructose corn syrup and other corn-derived processed ingredients much cheaper for industrial food manufacturers to use.
Today, HFCS is nearly ubiquitous on American grocery store shelves. It can be found in a wide range of items, including candy, ice cream, bread, chips, snacks, soups, soft drinks, fruit drinks and other beverages, condiments, jellies, deli meats, and much, much more.
Overall, Americans consume about fifty to sixty pounds of high fructose corn syrup per capita – an insane amount. HFCS has been linked in scientific research to obesity, diabetes, heart disease, fatty liver and other contributors of bad health and early death.
As the biggest dietary source of fructose, HFCS also promotes insulin resistance and increasing uric acid levels, which contribute to metabolic dysfunction and type 2 diabetes. Further, researchers in 2008 found a correlation between high fructose consumption and liver scarring in non-alcoholic fatty liver disease (NAFLD), which is present in nearly a third of American adults.
Corn Refiners Association Attempts to Hoodwink Consumers
On top of lobbying efforts, the Corn Refiners Association, an industry organization of which Archer Daniels Midland a is a key member, launched the website sweetsurprise.com as a media relations ploy to debunk "myths" about HFCS and clarify "The Facts about High Fructose Corn Syrup."
It also ran well-funded TV advertising starting in 2008 sticking up for the industry's favorite sweetener and asserting that "sugar is sugar," which prompted a lawsuit by sugar producers claiming false advertising in 2011. The FDA also demanded the corn industry stop using the term "corn sugar" without approval.
In 2012, the FDA rejected a petition filed by the Corn Refiners Association in 2010 to change the name of high-fructose corn syrup to "corn sugar" for the purposes of food labeling and advertising. The Corn Refiners Association claims that it wanted the name change to "educate consumers," the majority of whom are "confused about HFCS."
To keep reading, get my new book Food Forensics, available now for pre-order everywhere books are sold.
How Sucralose (Splenda) Affects Health [Artificial Sweeteners in General]
The emergence of sucralose came from the fight against obesity, but did we trade one problem for another?
This video was originally published on NutritionFacts.org and republished with permission.
In the United States, sucralose (the sweet tasting chemical in Splenda brand artificial sweeteners) was approved for use by the FDA in 1998. It was deemed safe, but we no have over a decade’s worth of research to prove that sucralose affects health in a very negative and very unique way.
The only effect they thought it would have on health was that it could potentially trigger migraines in a small percentage of people.
This, they decided, was a small enough issue that the FDA allowed the substance into the marketplace, citing obesity as a more pressing issue. They could not have been more wrong.
One of the major complications that can come from obesity is diabetes, where the body no longer responds to insulin properly. Originally meant to combat issues like obesity-caused diabetes, lab tests show that insulin resistance increases by as much as 20% after ingesting the sugar substitute.
The cause can be traced back to gut bacteria and how sucralose and other artificial sweeteners can alter their environments. For example; Aspartame is another type of artificial sweetener which studies have shown is metabolized in the body as formaldehyde, a known carcinogen.
Furthermore, alterations in gut bacteria are also very likely the culprit behind the rise in inflammatory bowel diseases like Crohn’s disease.
In every part of the world where sucralose has been approved, inflammatory bowel disease has increased. Clearly, there is a causal link between this substance and the health of our gut.
Though the alternative to sugar was created in an effort to combat obesity, with all of the complications and damage it can cause, it’s clear that how sucralose affects health – negatively. This just further proves that we can all do ourselves a service by sticking to natural foods whose benefits don’t have to be decided on by a committee.
How To Become Immune To Mind Control | How TV Affects Your Brain Chemistry For The Worse
February 11 2023 | From: StillnessInTheStorm / Various Television has been used as a medium for dispensing news, entertainment and information for over 90 years at this point.
The effects of this nearly pandemic device are little acknowledge by mainstream society, but within a growing population of inquisitive individuals the mind altering attributes of this seemingly benign device are well understood.
They call it tell-a-vision for a reason, because our minds at a certain level of consciousness, are unable to distinguish between the images on screen and reality itself. Additionally the unconscious mind becomes stimulated via focused attention on the items presented, generating a wealth of internal insights, ideas, and concepts.
If these are left unprocessed, if we do not analyze the internal generated products as a result of watching TV, they settle into our being, altering our perception and distorting our values.
And so, TV, like all things can be a powerful tool for expanding consciousness or it can create chaos and strife if the powers of our discernment are never used.
The All Seeing Attributes of the Unconscious Mind
In the below linked article on A.I. Robots, we discuss mirror neuron's and how they suggest a biological component to empathy; the basis of morality. This part of the brain receives information as if observed events are happening to us directly, in other words we are hard wired for empathy.
The unconscious mind is hardwired to receive all information from within and without, storing it as memories that alter our conscious mind's processes.
In other words there is an aspect of us that is literally all seeing, which provides us a wealth of data that can be consciously analyzed and distilled, eventually allowing us to gain knowledge of all things in our experience; if we but do the inner work of philosophy, contemplation and discernment.
Here is an excerpt from the article:
“Enter the AI drone or soldier debate. The military industrial complex has long desired a highly obedient yet adaptable soldier, able to execute commands without question and anticipate needs so as to change tactics of battle real time.
Human beings are programable, but human nature allows us to change, providing an unending source of risk and error for military activities.
For example, in the Civil War, 50% of soldiers froze when aiming at a living target, and in some cases instinctually missed. This was despite standard training and practice shooting. What was the problem? - empathy.
"Lt. Col. Dave Grossman, a psychologist and professor of military science, looked at this evidence and concluded “that there is within most men an intense resistance to killing their fellow man. A resistance so strong that, in many circumstances, soldiers on the battlefield will die before they can overcome it.”
In some ways this isn’t all that surprising. Very few people would seek out an opportunity to kill others. At the same time, you may find it hard to believe that it is sometimes impossible for soldiers to kill others even when their own lives are at risk." - The Psychology of Killing and the Origins of War
Empathy is 'hardwired' into living organisms, with increasing levels of actualization in higher order life. Modern science has acknowledged this in discovering the so called mirror neurons, which fires when an action is taken by an organism or when it is observed.
This is why when we watch another getting hurt we react as if we have been hurt. This subconscious and unavoidable process is the foundation for empathy processing, which concordantly is the basis for morality."
The brain is profoundly affected by what we experience, even if it comes from TV. As the below article discusses, the brainwave patterns of movie goers actually synchronizes from the hypnotic effects of watching images and sound on film.
In my view, the programing of one's mind using TV is due to lack of conscious processing. Often the worldviews, ideals and opinions offered are not questioned or contemplated, we do not engage in philosophy as a civilization any longer; thats what TV is for!
This also applies to any other source of information, such as school, literature, advertising and even mild conversation.
Anytime an idea enters the mind and it is not contemplated and reconciled with our knowledge base, it settles into the unconscious as is.
The Technique For Dispelling Suggestion and Mind Control
The mind has two primary modes of expression, conscious thought and unconscious absorption. The conscious mind is where two or more ideas can be compared, revealing patterns and inconsistencies.
The unconscious mind is a powerful observer, able to receive and store all information streaming in as insight and intuition (random thoughts), and without as sensory data.
Science has proven that even though we may not notice something consciously, the unconscious mind does, settling into the total consciousness; effecting our behavior.
Therefore, the key to undoing any form of mind control (unconsciously accepted suggestions) is through the conscious mind. Essentially a subliminal suggestion is an illusion or magic trick, it only fools us into thinking it's real so long as we never investigate it.
But once we know how the trick is done, we see the whole truth more clearly, and now we are conscious of the subtle suggestion, able to dismiss it with ease.
Ignorance is the foundation upon which all forms of mind control and subtle suggestion work, therefore dispelling it with knowledge - the conscious act of seeking the truth - is the primary tool for gaining freedom.
In my own experience, after researching these topics in earnest over the past five years, it is now clear how many suggestions are spread liberally into almost all media. For example, often in police dramas the cops show up at the door of a suspect or witness needing to conduct a search or look for someone inside.
When answering the door, rarely if ever do the police have a warrant. The person answering the door usually just lets the police in without a word of question; never asking to see a warrant.
This fictional story sends a subtle suggestion to the watcher, that most people don't ask for warrants.
And since the vast majority of people base their behavior on what everyone else does, they are effectively being programed to never ask for a warrant. Even if they do have the notion to ask for one, the social pressure from this suggestion will require a major act of will to overcome.
But all of this can only work on an unconscious mind; an unawake person. Once the sleeper has awakened, and we begin to consciously investigate the mind control all around us, it becomes very easy to spot subliminal suggestion when encountered.
Just like it can become easy to tell when someone is lying to us after we've passed through the initiative experience of being lied to, in this way, the efforts of our would-be masters to control the masses actually provides us with the information we need to become immune to such forms of control.
The solution to external control, therefore, is to become conscious, awaken and active. To use the power of philosophy - the exploration of meanings, to analyze and discern the suggestions constantly pouring into our minds.
A deception, illusion or fraud, once recognized, is forever dissolved by the now wise and discerning mind.
And these skills of self mastery and sovereignty can now be shared with others. In essence each of us who accepts the mission of facing these forms of control, can now become a force to counter them, an epicenter of awakened and active consciousness.
In my view, reviewing mainstream TV, especially news, is an essential part of training discernment and strengthening mental discipline. We can literally watch TV looking for suggestions. Try doing this with scenes in your favorite show, attempt to observe the events of the story and what they are implying about the characters in it.
Often there are flagrant examples of suggestion such as symbols or words flashed on the screen at a point in the story that when put together creates a subtle suggestion.
In any popular TV series or film there are many layers of suggestion to discover and gain mastery over by exercising these skills of internal discernment.
One final point on TV is the actual technology used. In our modern age Cathode Ray Tube televisions have been almost completely phased out. These devices produce an extremely intense electromagnetic field that disrupts the bodies delicate organic field.
These fields govern a huge amount of processes within our bodies and minds. It has been demonstrated that the minds ability to create a stable image or thought is significantly reduced after exposure to older TV's. But this effect also happens when viewing any imagery for prolonged periods of time, without also exercising the imagination using discernment.
Imagination Is Essential
It is during philosophy, contemplation, investigation, insight and meditation that these innate imaginative powers are exercised and honed.
The imagination is an essential aspect of our beingness, the foundation of holistic intelligence, balanced emotional states and even psi-abilities.
Any adverse affects of TV on the mind, by way of implantation of thought forms, belief systems and values, can be almost totally reversed by a dedicated and active process of mental activity.
We must think about what we're watching, sift through meanings and reveal insights, develop an appreciation for symbolism and the power of consciousness to explore ideas.
In this way TV becomes a powerful tool for expanding consciousness, so long as we learn to use the discerning powers of the mind and healing energy of the heart.
As I often like to say: "learn to use your mind, or someone else will."
'Trump Was Right': Evidence Of The Corrupt FBI (Cabal) Mission To Take Trump Down
February 10 2023 | From: TheFederalist / Various Collusion: Disclosed internal FBI notes and text messages detail the extent of the FBI's desire to take down Trump and his associates at any cost.
Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) agents tasked by fired former Director James Comey to take down Donald Trump during and after the 2016 election were so concerned about the agency’s potentially illegal behavior that they purchased liability insurance to protect themselves less than two weeks before Trump was inaugurated president, previously hidden FBI text messages show.
The explosive new communications and internal FBI notes were disclosed in federal court filings today from Sidney Powell, the attorney who heads Michael Flynn’s legal defense team.
“[W]e all went and purchased professional liability insurance,” one agent texted on January 10, 2017, the same day CNN leaked details that then-President-elect Trump had been briefed by Comey about the bogus Christopher Steele dossier.
That briefing of Trump was used as a pretext to legitimize the debunked dossier, which was funded by the Democratic National Committee and the Clinton campaign and compiled by a foreign intelligence officer who was working for a sanctioned Russian oligarch.
“Holy crap,” an agent responded. “All the analysts too?”
“Yep,” the first agent said. “All the folks at the Agency as well.”
“[C]an I ask who are the most likely litigators?” an agent responded. “[A]s far as potentially suing y’all[?]”
“[H]aha, who knows….I think [t]he concern when we got it was that there was a big leak at DOJ and the NYT among others was going to do a piece,” the first agent said.
While the names of the agents responsible for the texts are redacted, the legal filing from Powell, quoting communications from the Department of Justice (DOJ), states that the latest document production included handwritten notes and texts from Peter Strzok, Andrew McCabe, Lisa Page, and FBI analysts who worked on the FBI’s investigation of Flynn.
Agents also said they were worried about how a new attorney general might view the actions taken against Trump during the investigation.
Shortly after then-Sen. Jeff Sessions (R-Ala.) was confirmed to be Trump’s new attorney general, congressional Democrats, media, and Obama holdovers within DOJ immediately moved to force Sessions to recuse himself from overseeing the department’s investigations against Trump.
“[T]he new AG might have some questions… then yada yada yada… we all get screwed,” one agent wrote.
The FBI agents also discussed how the investigation’s leadership was consumed with conspiracy theories rather than evidence.
“I’m tellying [sic] man, if this thing ever gets FOIA’d, there are going to be some tough questions asked,” one agent wrote.
“[A]nd a great deal of those will be related to Brian having a scope way outside the boundaries of logic[.]”
“[REDACTED] is one of the worst offenders of the rabbit holes and conspiracy theories,” an agent texted.
“This guy traveled with that guy, who put down 3rd guy as his visa sponsor. 3rd guy lives near a navy base, therefore…[.]”
Several texts show that the order to close the criminal investigation against Flynn came as early as November 8, 2016, the same day as the 2016 presidential election. It was later re-opened in early January of 2017.
“We have some loose ends to tie up, and we all need to meet to discuss what to do with each case (he said shut down Razor),” one agent texted, referring to Crossfire Razor, the FBI’s internal code name for the investigation of Flynn.
“[S]o glad they’re closing Razor,” an agent responded.
The new disclosures made by DOJ also show that the FBI used so-called national security letters (NSLs) to spy on Flynn’s finances.
Unlike traditional subpoenas, which require judicial review and approval before authorities can seize an innocent person’s property and information, NSLs are never independently reviewed by courts.
One of the agents noted in a text message that the NSLs were just being used as a pretext by FBI leadership to buy time to find dirt on Flynn after the first investigation of him yielded no derogatory information.
“[T]he decision to NSL finances for Razor bought him time,” one agent said nearly two weeks after the initial order to shut down the anti-Flynn case. It is not known to whom the agent was referring in that text.
“What do we expect to get from an NSL[?]” an agent texted on Dec. 5, 2016. “We put out traces, tripwires to community and nothing.”
“[B]ingo,” another FBI agent responded. “[S]o what’s an NSL going to do – no content.”
“Hahah this is a nightmare,” an agent said.
“If we’re working to close down the cases, I’m not sure what NSL results would do to help,” one agent wrote.
“[E]xactly that makes no sense,” an agent wrote back.
The explosive new text messages also show agents believed the investigation was being run by FBI officials who were in the tank for Hillary Clinton.
“[D]oing all this election research – I think some of these guys want a [C]linton presidency,” one agent wrote on Aug. 11, shortly after the FBI opened the Crossfire Hurricane investigation against Trump.
In one series of texts sent the same day as the infamous January 5 Oval Office meeting between Obama, Biden, Comey, Sally Yates, and Susan Rice, one agent admits that “Trump was right” when he tweeted that the FBI was delaying his briefings as incoming president so they could cook up evidence against him.
“The ‘Intelligence’ briefing on so-called ‘Russian hacking’ was delayed until Friday, perhaps more time needed to build a case,” Trump tweeted on January 3. “Very strange!”
200,000 unnecessary deaths because a scared, self serving, amoral person was our president at a time when putting the welfare of others over his fear of failure was necessary, but he is forever incapable of empathy or honor. #VoteHimOut
A week later, the FBI agents also wrote that they suspected that the illegal leak of top secret information about Flynn’s phone calls with Russian ambassador to the U.S. Sergei Kislyak to the news media came directly from the White House.
“FYI – someone leaked the Flynn calls with Kislyak to the WSJ,” the agent wrote.
“I’m sorry to hear that,” another FBI agent responded sarcastically. “I’ll resume my duties as Chief Morale Officer and rectify that.”
“Published this morning by Ignatius,” an agent said, referencing the January 12 column from Washington Post writer David Ignatius that included leaked top-secret information about Flynn’s calls with Kislyak.
“It’s got to be someone on staff,” an agent wrote. “[Presidential Daily Briefing] staff. Or WH seniors.”
To date, not a single person has been charged with illegally leaking that information to the Washington Post as a way of damaging Flynn and the incoming Trump administration.
Following a review of the federal government’s investigation by U.S. Attorney Jeff Jensen, which was ordered by Attorney General William Barr, the government moved to dismiss all charges against Flynn that had been previously brought by former Special Counsel Robert Mueller.
Jensen’s review of Flynn’s case file also revealed handwritten notes from the FBI’s top counterintelligence official that admitted a primary goal of the FBI’s anti-Flynn operation was “to get him to lie so we can prosecute him or get him fired.”
Despite the overwhelming evidence that Flynn did not lie to agents, the FBI had no legal basis to interview him, that the FBI later hid exculpatory documents from Flynn’s defense team, Flynn did not discuss financial sanctions during his phone calls with Kislyak, and the FBI agents who interviewed Flynn did not believe he lied, federal trial Judge Emmet G. Sullivan has refused to dismiss the case against Flynn.
Instead, Sullivan personally appointed a left-wing shadow prosecutor, whose partners represent former DOJ official Yates, to smear Flynn and attempt to continue the baseless criminal case against him.
Sullivan, who called Flynn a traitor during court proceedings and suggested that Flynn - a decorated Army combat veteran - be charged with treason, has refused to recuse himself from the case despite his obvious personal animosity toward Flynn.
The Federal Reserve Cartel: The Eight Families + 7 Not-So-Secret Homes Of Super Secret Societies
February 9 2023 | From: GlobalResearch / AtlasObscura
The Four Horsemen of Banking (Bank of America, JP Morgan Chase, Citigroup and Wells Fargo) own the Four Horsemen of Oil (Exxon Mobil, Royal Dutch/Shell, BP and Chevron Texaco); in tandem with Deutsche Bank, BNP, Barclays and other European old money behemoths. But their monopoly over the global economy does not end at the edge of the oil patch.
According to company 10K filings to the SEC, the Four Horsemen of Banking are among the top ten stock holders of virtually every Fortune 500 corporation.
So who then are the stockholders in these money center banks?
This information is guarded much more closely. My queries to bank regulatory agencies regarding stock ownership in the top 25 US bank holding companies were given Freedom of Information Act status, before being denied on “national security” grounds. This is rather ironic, since many of the bank’s stockholders reside in Europe.
One important repository for the wealth of the global oligarchy that owns these bank holding companies is US Trust Corporation – founded in 1853 and now owned by Bank of America.
A recent US Trust Corporate Director and Honorary Trustee was Walter Rothschild. Other directors included Daniel Davison of JP Morgan Chase, Richard Tucker of Exxon Mobil, Daniel Roberts of Citigroup and Marshall Schwartz of Morgan Stanley.
J. W. McCallister, an oil industry insider with House of Saud connections, wrote in The Grim Reaper that information he acquired from Saudi bankers cited 80% ownership of the New York Federal Reserve Bank- by far the most powerful Fed branch - by just eight families, four of which reside in the US.
They are the Goldman Sachs, Rockefellers, Lehmans and Kuhn Loebs of New York; the Rothschilds of Paris and London; the Warburgs of Hamburg; the Lazards of Paris; and the Israel Moses Seifs of Rome.
CPA Thomas D. Schauf corroborates McCallister’s claims, adding that ten banks control all twelve Federal Reserve Bank branches.
He names N.M. Rothschild of London, Rothschild Bank of Berlin, Warburg Bank of Hamburg, Warburg Bank of Amsterdam, Lehman Brothers of New York, Lazard Brothers of Paris, Kuhn Loeb Bank of New York, Israel Moses Seif Bank of Italy, Goldman Sachs of New York and JP Morgan Chase Bank of New York.
Schauf lists William Rockefeller, Paul Warburg, Jacob Schiff and James Stillman as individuals who own large shares of the Fed. The Schiffs are insiders at Kuhn Loeb. The Stillmans are Citigroup insiders, who married into the Rockefeller clan at the turn of the century.
The Federal Reserve Board 1913
Eustace Mullins came to the same conclusions in his book The Secrets of the Federal Reserve, in which he displays charts connecting the Fed and its member banks to the families of Rothschild, Warburg, Rockefeller and the others.
The control that these banking families exert over the global economy cannot be overstated and is quite intentionally shrouded in secrecy. Their corporate media arm is quick to discredit any information exposing this private central banking cartel as “conspiracy theory”. Yet the facts remain.
The House of Morgan
The Federal Reserve Bank was born in 1913, the same year US banking scion J. Pierpont Morgan died and the Rockefeller Foundation was formed. The House of Morgan presided over American finance from the corner of Wall Street and Broad, acting as quasi-US central bank since 1838, when George Peabody founded it in London.
J.P. Morgan
Peabody was a business associate of the Rothschilds. In 1952 Fed researcher Eustace Mullins put forth the supposition that the Morgans were nothing more than Rothschild agents. Mullins wrote that the Rothschilds;
“…preferred to operate anonymously in the US behind the facade of J.P. Morgan & Company”.
Author Gabriel Kolko stated; “Morgan’s activities in 1895-1896 in selling US gold bonds in Europe were based on an alliance with the House of Rothschild.”
The Morgan financial octopus wrapped its tentacles quickly around the globe. Morgan Grenfell operated in London. Morgan et Ce ruled Paris. The Rothschild’s Lambert cousins set up Drexel & Company in Philadelphia.
The House of Morgan catered to the Astors, DuPonts, Guggenheims, Vanderbilts and Rockefellers. It financed the launch of AT&T, General Motors, General Electric and DuPont. Like the London-based Rothschild and Barings banks, Morgan became part of the power structure in many countries.
By 1890 the House of Morgan was lending to Egypt’s central bank, financing Russian railroads, floating Brazilian provincial government bonds and funding Argentine public works projects. A recession in 1893 enhanced Morgan’s power. That year Morgan saved the US government from a bank panic, forming a syndicate to prop up government reserves with a shipment of $62 million worth of Rothschild gold.
It's a little known fact the the Monopoly man was based on J.P. Morgan
Morgan was the driving force behind Western expansion in the US, financing and controlling West-bound railroads through voting trusts. In 1879 Cornelius Vanderbilt’s Morgan-financed New York Central Railroad gave preferential shipping rates to John D. Rockefeller’s budding Standard Oil monopoly, cementing the Rockefeller/Morgan relationship.
The House of Morgan now fell under Rothschild and Rockefeller family control. A New York Herald headline read, “Railroad Kings Form Gigantic Trust”. J. Pierpont Morgan, who once stated;
“Competition is a sin”, now opined gleefully, “Think of it. All competing railroad traffic west of St. Louis placed in the control of about thirty men."
Morgan and Edward Harriman’s banker Kuhn Loeb held a monopoly over the railroads, while banking dynasties Lehman, Goldman Sachs and Lazard joined the Rockefellers in controlling the US industrial base.
In 1903 Banker’s Trust was set up by the Eight Families. Benjamin Strong of Banker’s Trust was the first Governor of the New York Federal Reserve Bank.
The 1913 creation of the Fed fused the power of the Eight Families to the military and diplomatic might of the US government. If their overseas loans went unpaid, the oligarchs could now deploy US Marines to collect the debts. Morgan, Chase and Citibank formed an international lending syndicate.
The House of Morgan was cozy with the British House of Windsor and the Italian House of Savoy. The Kuhn Loebs, Warburgs, Lehmans, Lazards, Israel Moses Seifs and Goldman Sachs also had close ties to European royalty. By 1895 Morgan controlled the flow of gold in and out of the US.
The first American wave of mergers was in its infancy and was being promoted by the bankers. In 1897 there were sixty-nine industrial mergers. By 1899 there were twelve-hundred. In 1904 John Moody – founder of Moody’s Investor Services – said it was impossible to talk of Rockefeller and Morgan interests as separate.
Public distrust of the combine spread. Many considered them traitors working for European old money. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil, Andrew Carnegie’s US Steel and Edward Harriman’s railroads were all financed by banker Jacob Schiff at Kuhn Loeb, who worked closely with the European Rothschilds.
Several Western states banned the bankers. Populist preacher William Jennings Bryan was thrice the Democratic nominee for President from 1896 -1908. The central theme of his anti-imperialist campaign was that America was falling into a trap of “financial servitude to British capital”.
Teddy Roosevelt defeated Bryan in 1908, but was forced by this spreading populist wildfire to enact the Sherman Anti-Trust Act. He then went after the Standard Oil Trust.
In 1912 the Pujo hearings were held, addressing concentration of power on Wall Street. That same year Mrs. Edward Harriman sold her substantial shares in New York’s Guaranty Trust Bank to J.P. Morgan, creating Morgan Guaranty Trust. Judge Louis Brandeis convinced President Woodrow Wilson to call for an end to interlocking board directorates. In 1914 the Clayton Anti-Trust Act was passed.
Jack Morgan – J. Pierpont’s son and successor – responded by calling on Morgan clients Remington and Winchester to increase arms production. He argued that the US needed to enter WWI. Goaded by the Carnegie Foundation and other oligarchy fronts, Wilson accommodated.
As Charles Tansill wrote in America Goes to War;
“Even before the clash of arms, the French firm of Rothschild Freres cabled to Morgan & Company in New York suggesting the flotation of a loan of $100 million, a substantial part of which was to be left in the US to pay for French purchases of American goods.”
The House of Morgan financed half the US war effort, while receiving commissions for lining up contractors like GE, Du Pont, US Steel, Kennecott and ASARCO. All were Morgan clients.
Morgan also financed the British Boer War in South Africa and the Franco-Prussian War. The 1919 Paris Peace Conference was presided over by Morgan, which led both German and Allied reconstruction efforts.
In the 1930’s populism resurfaced in America after Goldman Sachs, Lehman Bank and others profited from the Crash of 1929. House Banking Committee Chairman Louis McFadden (D-NY) said of the Great Depression;,
“It was no accident. It was a carefully contrived occurrence…The international bankers sought to bring about a condition of despair here so they might emerge as rulers of us all”.
Sen. Gerald Nye (D-ND) chaired a munitions investigation in 1936. Nye concluded that the House of Morgan had plunged the US into WWI to protect loans and create a booming arms industry. Nye later produced a document titled The Next War, which cynically referred to “the old goddess of democracy trick”, through which Japan could be used to lure the US into WWII.
In 1937 Interior Secretary Harold Ickes warned of the influence of “America’s 60 Families”. Historian Ferdinand Lundberg later penned a book of the exact same title. Supreme Court Justice William O. Douglas decried;
“Morgan influence…the most pernicious one in industry and finance today.”
Jack Morgan responded by nudging the US towards WWII. Morgan had close relations with the Iwasaki and Dan families – Japan’s two wealthiest clans – who have owned Mitsubishi and Mitsui, respectively, since the companies emerged from 17th Century shogunates.
When Japan invaded Manchuria, slaughtering Chinese peasants at Nanking, Morgan downplayed the incident. Morgan also had close relations with Italian fascist Benito Mussolini, while German Nazi Dr. Hjalmer Schacht was a Morgan Bank liaison during WWII. After the war Morgan representatives met with Schacht at the Bank of International Settlements (BIS) in Basel, Switzerland.
The House of Rockefeller
BIS is the most powerful bank in the world, a global central bank for the Eight Families who control the private central banks of almost all Western and developing nations. The first President of BIS was Rockefeller banker Gates McGarrah - an official at Chase Manhattan and the Federal Reserve.
McGarrah was the grandfather of former CIA director Richard Helms. The Rockefellers - like the Morgans - had close ties to London. David Icke writes in Children of the Matrix, that the Rockefellers and Morgans were just “gofers” for the European Rothschilds.
BIS is owned by the Federal Reserve, Bank of England, Bank of Italy, Bank of Canada, Swiss National Bank, Nederlandsche Bank, Bundesbank and Bank of France.
Historian Carroll Quigley wrote in his epic book Tragedy and Hope that BIS was part of a plan;
“to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole…to be controlled in a feudalistic fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert by secret agreements.”
The US government had a historical distrust of BIS, lobbying unsuccessfully for its demise at the 1944 post-WWII Bretton Woods Conference. Instead the Eight Families’ power was exacerbated, with the Bretton Woods creation of the IMF and the World Bank. The US Federal Reserve only took shares in BIS in September 1994.
BIS holds at least 10% of monetary reserves for at least 80 of the world’s central banks, the IMF and other multilateral institutions. It serves as financial agent for international agreements, collects information on the global economy and serves as lender of last resort to prevent global financial collapse.
BIS promotes an agenda of monopoly capitalist fascism. It gave a bridge loan to Hungary in the 1990’s to ensure privatization of that country’s economy. It served as conduit for Eight Families funding of Adolf Hitler- led by the Warburg’s J. Henry Schroeder and Mendelsohn Bank of Amsterdam. Many researchers assert that BIS is at the nadir of global drug money laundering.
The Bank for International Settlements is the Mac Daddy at the top of the Worldwide Reserve Banking System, not just the US Federal Reserve
It is no coincidence that BIS is headquartered in Switzerland, favorite hiding place for the wealth of the global aristocracy and headquarters for the P-2 Italian Freemason’s Alpina Lodge and Nazi International. Other institutions which the Eight Families control include the World Economic Forum, the International Monetary Conference and the World Trade Organization.
Bretton Woods was a boon to the Eight Families. The IMF and World Bank were central to this “new world order”. In 1944 the first World Bank bonds were floated by Morgan Stanley and First Boston.
The French Lazard family became more involved in House of Morgan interests. Lazard Freres - France’s biggest investment bank- is owned by the Lazard and David-Weill families - old Genoese banking scions represented by Michelle Davive. A recent Chairman and CEO of Citigroup was Sanford Weill.
In 1968 Morgan Guaranty launched Euro-Clear, a Brussels-based bank clearing system for Eurodollar securities. It was the first such automated endeavor. Some took to calling Euro-Clear “The Beast”. Brussels serves as headquarters for the new European Central Bank and for NATO.
In 1973 Morgan officials met secretly in Bermuda to illegally resurrect the old House of Morgan, twenty years before Glass Steagal Act was repealed. Morgan and the Rockefellers provided the financial backing for Merrill Lynch, boosting it into the Big 5 of US investment banking. Merrill is now part of Bank of America.
John D. Rockefeller used his oil wealth to acquire Equitable Trust, which had gobbled up several large banks and corporations by the 1920’s.
The Great Depression helped consolidate Rockefeller’s power. His Chase Bank merged with Kuhn Loeb’s Manhattan Bank to form Chase Manhattan, cementing a long-time family relationship.
The Kuhn-Loeb’s had financed – along with Rothschilds – Rockefeller’s quest to become king of the oil patch. National City Bank of Cleveland provided John D. with the money needed to embark upon his monopolization of the US oil industry.
The bank was identified in Congressional hearings as being one of three Rothschild-owned banks in the US during the 1870’s, when Rockefeller first incorporated as Standard Oil of Ohio.
One Rockefeller Standard Oil partner was Edward Harkness, whose family came to control Chemical Bank. Another was James Stillman, whose family controlled Manufacturers Hanover Trust.
Both banks have merged under the JP Morgan Chase umbrella. Two of James Stillman’s daughters married two of William Rockefeller’s sons. The two families control a big chunk of Citigroup as well.
In the insurance business, the Rockefellers control Metropolitan Life, Equitable Life, Prudential and New York Life. Rockefeller banks control 25% of all assets of the 50 largest US commercial banks and 30% of all assets of the 50 largest insurance companies.
Insurance companies - the first in the US was launched by Freemasons through their Woodman’s of America - play a key role in the Bermuda drug money shuffle.
Companies under Rockefeller control include Exxon Mobil, Chevron Texaco, BP Amoco, Marathon Oil, Freeport McMoran, Quaker Oats, ASARCO, United, Delta, Northwest, ITT, International Harvester, Xerox, Boeing, Westinghouse, Hewlett-Packard, Honeywell, International Paper, Pfizer, Motorola, Monsanto, Union Carbide and General Foods.
The Rockefeller Foundation has close financial ties to both Ford and Carnegie Foundations. Other family philanthropic endeavors include Rockefeller Brothers Fund, Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research, General Education Board, Rockefeller University and the University of Chicago - which churns out a steady stream of far right economists as apologists for international capital, including Milton Friedman.
The family owns 30 Rockefeller Plaza, where the national Christmas tree is lighted every year, and Rockefeller Center.
David Rockefeller was instrumental in the construction of the World Trade Center towers. The main Rockefeller family home is a hulking complex in upstate New York known as Pocantico Hills.
They also own a 32-room 5th Avenue duplex in Manhattan, a mansion in Washington, DC, Monte Sacro Ranch in Venezuela, coffee plantations in Ecuador, several farms in Brazil, an estate at Seal Harbor, Maine and resorts in the Caribbean, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
Allen Dulles
The Dulles and Rockefeller families are cousins. Allen Dulles created the CIA, assisted the Nazis, covered up the Kennedy hit from his Warren Commission perch and struck a deal with the Muslim Brotherhood to create mind-controlled assassins.
Brother John Foster Dulles presided over the phony Goldman Sachs trusts before the 1929 stock market crash and helped his brother overthrow governments in Iran and Guatemala.
Both were Skull & Bones, Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) insiders and 33rd Degree Masons.
The Rockefellers were instrumental in forming the depopulation-oriented Club of Rome at their family estate in Bellagio, Italy.
Their Pocantico Hills estate gave birth to the Trilateral Commission. The family is a major funder of the eugenics movement which spawned Hitler, human cloning and the current DNA obsession in US scientific circles.
John Rockefeller Jr. headed the Population Council until his death. His namesake son is a Senator from West Virginia. Brother Winthrop Rockefeller was Lieutenant Governor of Arkansas and remains the most powerful man in that state.
In an October 1975 interview with Playboy magazine, Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller- who was also Governor of New York- articulated his family’s patronizing worldview;
“I am a great believer in planning- economic, social, political, military, total world planning.”
But of all the Rockefeller brothers, it is Trilateral Commission (TC) founder and Chase Manhattan Chairman David who has spearheaded the family’s fascist agenda on a global scale. He defended the Shah of Iran, the South African apartheid regime and the Chilean Pinochet junta.
He was the biggest financier of the CFR, the TC and (during the Vietnam War) the Committee for an Effective and Durable Peace in Asia- a contract bonanza for those who made their living off the conflict.
Nixon asked him to be Secretary of Treasury, but Rockefeller declined the job, knowing his power was much greater at the helm of the Chase. Author Gary Allen writes in The Rockefeller File that in 1973;
“David Rockefeller met with twenty-seven heads of state, including the rulers of Russia and Red China.”
Following the 1975 Nugan Hand Bank/CIA coup against Australian Prime Minister Gough Whitlam, his British Crown-appointed successor Malcolm Fraser sped to the US, where he met with President Gerald Ford after conferring with David Rockefeller.
7 Not-So-Secret Homes Of Secret Societies
In clandestine corners of the world, the elite come together in secrecy. Some of them don’t mind that we know of these society meetings, while others maintain that they do not organize at all.
Illustration by Miss Alice Heighes Donlevy of the "Secret Society Buildings of New Haven," with the former Skull & Bones headquarters at left center (circa 1869-1903)
Yet doormen speak to their friends, initiation rites are leaked, people peek in windows, chanting in far underground lairs can be heard by a passerby. Conspiracy theorists have long held that someone, and not the Fates, is manipulating our world, and perhaps in these secret societies the strings are being pulled.
Ivy league Yale University is considered to be one of the most selective higher educational institutions in the United States, if not the world. Its motto lux et veritas translates to "light and truth." On the historic campus in New Haven, Connecticut, there is a building where "light and truth" are reserved for carefully selected members and alumni.
What is known about the Skull and Bones secret society is minimal. The organization started in 1832. An official roster of its members was published up until 1971. Bonesmen, as members are called, have been heads of corporations, senior government officials, Supreme Court justices, and even presidents.
Theories about what the Skull and Bones actually do range from its members controlling the Central Intelligence Agency, being a part of a global network aimed at world domination, to being a branch of the Illuminati.
It’s also unknown exactly what happens in The Tomb, the group's headquarters, but there are strange rumors of what is contained in the windowless sandstone building. The Egypto-Doric style of the structure makes it appear as an immense sepulcher.
The tomb is thought to hold secret documents containing the roster of all members, ritual details, as well as multiple stolen relics. Some of the bones rumored to be in The Tomb include the skulls of Geronimo, Pancho Villa, Martin Van Buren, and the gravestone of Elihu Yale, the school's founder. Bonesmen are also known to take other societies' belongings in a show of thievery and cunning known as crooking.
In November of 1954, 50 delegates from 11 countries in Western Europe and 11 Americans spent three days in Oosterbeek, Netherlands, at the Hotel de Bilderberg.
The purpose of the meeting was said to foster conversations between Europe and North America. Those in attendance included a prince, a prime minster, and the head of the CIA. Since that meeting, each year a group of international leaders in the fields of politics, business, media, and communications have met to discuss… we’re not exactly sure.
There is no agenda, no resolutions are proposed, no voting of any kind is executed, and no positions or policy statements are issued.
The meetings are held in a different location each year and each year the topics of the meeting are up for the general public to theorize over.
The roster of attendees is never officially made public, but there have been leaks over the years. Conspiracy theories abound, especially because of the group’s intense level of secrecy. Many believe the group is conspiring to impose capital domination, a world government, or a planned economy. What is certain is that the more prominent you are, the more likely you’ll be to get an invitation to next year’s Bilderberg conference.
Scientology is most visible today because of celebrity members like Tom Cruise and John Travolta, yet the organization has been aggressive over the years in tackling critics and maintaining its secrets. One of the most controversial religious groups, some characterize the movement as a cult.
Basic Scientology belief holds that humans are immortal beings who have reincarnated and have lived on other planets before finding themselves now on Earth. One of the things that makes the religion controversial is its assertive nature, often turning to character assassination or litigation in dealing with skeptics and critics who question their practices. The church is also extremely secretive, holding many of its teachings from members until they have made it through multiple levels.
Scientology operates several churches called Celebrity Centres that are opened to the public, but are primarily meant for "anyone with the power and vision to create a better world.” The Church of the Spiritual Technology, or CST, is reserved for the most trusted of members.
Many of these members manage elaborate bases including the Trementina Base. The official word from the church is that the base is a location used to preserve Scientology founder L. Ron Hubbard’s writings, which are said to be engraved on steel sheets and encased in titanium cases. It’s thought that Trementina is more than just a location to archive Hubbard’s works, however.
Trementina contains underground dwellings and tunnels, but what’s most interesting about the base is what you see from the outside. Aerial photographs above the base show huge images dug into the Earth.
The images are that of the church’s logo. Former members have claimed that the symbols are to mark the return point for members when they travel into the future. Other members have stated that this is the place where Hubbard is supposed to go when he returns.
Established in 1776 in Bavaria, Germany, this group of freethinkers, humanists, and academics opposed superstition, prejudice, religion, and its influence over the public, and they supported the advancement of women.
The Illuminati were a shadowy group, believed capable of influencing movements in government and the arts. The group was infiltrated and shut down a decade after its founding, or so the official record goes. Conspiracy theorists have long been obsessed that the world has been controlled by the Illuminati for generations.
There are many modern groups that claim to be the descendants of the original Bavarian Illuminati; they go so far as to use the name “Illuminati” in their title, but there is no evidence that these recent organizations are tied to the original.
Besides its actions, what is a major mystery of this group is the location of its headquarters. Theorists have claimed many prominent locations are the headquarters of the Illuminati from Disney World in Orlando, Florida, the Mormon Temple in Salt Lake City, Utah, the Statue of Liberty in New York City, Big Ben in London, the Eiffel Tower in Paris, the Pentagon in Washington, D.C., and, among many others, the Vatican.
The theory that the Illuminati headquarters is located at the Vatican is especially interesting due to the group's opposition to the church. It's believed by conspiracy theorists that the church was long ago infiltrated by the society and so that would make its leader, the pope, one of the Illuminati's highest ranking members.
Today, the pope resides in a simple room at Domus Sanctae Marthae, a guest house adjacent to St. Peter's Basilica. The five-story building containing 106 suites and 22 single rooms is for clergy who are in town on official Holy See business, or perhaps for an Illuminati meeting or two.
The Order of the Temple of the East was founded between 1895 and 1906 in either Austria or Germany. It is believed wealthy industrialist, Carl Kellner, began the religious movement, but it was famed occultist Aleister Crowley whose name and additions to the group shrouded it in curiosity and mystery.
OTO was modeled somewhat after another secret society, Freemasonry. But Crowley added a layer, his own self-created belief system called Thelema. Thelema’s practices and beliefs are written out in a book titled The Book of Law and its core belief is: “Do what thou wilt shall be the whole of the Law.”
Ideas from occultism, and Eastern and Western mysticism, found their way into Thelema and thus OTO. The religion is highly secretive and members move through the order in a series of rites and rituals, moving up levels in the forms of initiations. Levels have curious names such as Minerval, Master Magician, Illustrious Knight, Grandmaster of Light, and so on.
There are two components at the core of OTO: magical rituals, which have been rumored to include tantric sex, the summoning of angels and demons, and astral projection.
Then there is the gnostic mass, reminiscent of a Catholic mass only because it contains a host and wine toward the end. The gnostic mass includes elaborate costumes, and at the climax of the mass it's believed that the host turns into the Body of God and the wine the Blood of God.
There are multiple locations of worship called camps, oases, or lodges. The majority of them keep their locations secretive to the greater public. The relatively small location in Oakland is an oasis. They hold a weekly gnostic mass in a temple decorated in candles and Egyptian imagery.
It’s unknown exactly what takes place during initiation ceremonies and what knowledge is shared during these events. According to Crowley's autobiography, The Confessions of Aleister Crowley: "the OTO is in possession of one supreme secret. The whole of its system [is] directed towards communicating to its members, by progressively plain hints, this all-important instruction.”
The secret of this secret society is that many people believe in its existence, but scholarly claims have repetitively stated the group is a complete myth, constructed by the imagination of a madman.
The myth begins that the Priory of Sion was a group charged with protecting the descendants of Jesus of Nazareth and Mary Magdalene who eventually went on to settle in France.
It was leaked in the 1970s that the Bibliothèque Nationale de France in Paris, the French National Library, was in possession of a file called Dossiers Secrets d'Henri Lobineau that pointed to the Priory of Sion being located in France.
The file contained an introduction, maps of France, genealogies, newspaper clippings, letters and a list of grand masters of the Priory of Sion that included Sir Isaac Newton, Victor Hugo, and Leonardo Da Vinci.
The authenticity of these files has been questioned ever since they were left at the library. Eventually, they were traced to Pierre Plantard. It is believed Plantard planted the document at the library in order to perpetuate an elaborate hoax. He himself claimed to be a descendant of Jesus' bloodline.
Academics went on to agree that the Priory of Sion was a hoax constructed by Plantard. Yet, books, articles, and movies continue to be made about this group. Whether or not there is a secret society dedicated to protecting a family descendant from biblical times we may never know.
Several manifestos were anonymously published in the early 17th century that told of legends, mysticism, alchemy, and the Order of the Temple of the Rosy Cross. One of these documents was the Fama Fraternitatis which was published in Cassel, Germany.
The Fama spoke of the 15th century German doctor and mystical philosopher Christian Rosenkreuz who traveled through parts of the Middle East where he learned esoteric wisdom, studying in places such as Turkey and Egypt.
There, he claimed to learn extensive knowledge regarding nature and the universe. When he returned, he attempted to share what he learned but he was dismissed. He then formed a like-minded group called the Fraternity of the Rose Cross.
The year of his birth and death remain shadowy, but some documents claim he lived over 106 years. The group upheld Christian beliefs, but strongly opposed Roman Catholicism, and was also said to have influenced Freemasonry along with hundreds of other groups, many of which have adopted titles with similar names throughout modern times.
At its simplest form, the group aimed to promote a “Universal Reformation of Mankind.” Some reports claim that the requirement for membership was that one must have been capable of using more than the average amount of brain power.
During Rosenkreuz’s life, the group was thought to have only consisted of a handful of members, each of whom was a doctor.
All members took an oath to remain bachelors, and also to treat the sick without payment and to find a replacement for themselves before they died. Interest in the group peaked between 1607 and 1616 with the appearances of the anonymous works that included the Fama Fraternitatis which ranged with content that included mysticism and apocalyptic warnings.
The Rosicricians were into their alchemy
Whether Rosenkreuz’s original idea continued is unknown. One of the hundreds of groups claiming to be tied to the original is the Ancient Mystical Order Rosea Crucis that has some connection to occultist Aleister Crowley. AMORC claims to be devoted to the “study of elusive mysteries of life and the universe.”
They utilize ideas from major philosophers, including Thales and Pythagoras, healing techniques, alchemy, symbolism, and mysticism. The group claims its history can be traced to pharaoh Thutmose III in 1477.
The AMORC headquarters is located at Rosicrucian Park in San Jose, California, which spans a city block and includes several structures. The park is home to elaborate gardens, a research library, a planetarium, a temple, and it houses the ashes of Harvey Spencer Lewis, founder of the secret society.
The Fibonacci Sequence: What Is The Golden Ratio? February 8 2023 | From: LiveScience / FractalEnlightenment / Various
The Golden ratio is a special number found by dividing a line into two parts so that the longer part divided by the smaller part is also equal to the whole length divided by the longer part.
It is often symbolized using phi, after the 21st letter of the Greek alphabet. In an equation form, it looks like this:
As with pi (the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter), the digits go on and on, theoretically into infinity. Phi is usually rounded off to 1.618. This number has been discovered and rediscovered many times, which is why it has so many names - the Golden mean, the Golden section, divine proportion, etc.
Historically, the number can be seen in the architecture of many ancient creations, like the Great Pyramids and the Parthenon.
In the Great Pyramid of Giza, the length of each side of the base is 756 feet with a height of 481 feet. The ratio of the base to the height is roughly 1.5717, which is close to the Golden ratio.
Phidias (500 B.C. - 432 B.C.) was a Greek sculptor and mathematician who is thought to have applied phi to the design of sculptures for the Parthenon.
Plato (428 B.C. - 347 B.C.) considered the Golden ratio to be the most universally binding of mathematical relationships. Later, Euclid (365 B.C. - 300 B.C.) linked the Golden ratio to the construction of a pentagram.
Around 1200, mathematician Leonardo Fibonacci discovered the unique properties of the Fibonacci sequence.
This sequence ties directly into the Golden ratio because if you take any two successive Fibonacci numbers, their ratio is very close to the Golden ratio. As the numbers get higher, the ratio becomes even closer to 1.618.
For example, the ratio of 3 to 5 is 1.666. But the ratio of 13 to 21 is 1.625. Getting even higher, the ratio of 144 to 233 is 1.618. These numbers are all successive numbers in the Fibonacci sequence.
These numbers can be applied to the proportions of a rectangle, called the Golden rectangle. This is known as one of the most visually satisfying of all geometric forms - hence, the appearance of the Golden ratio in art.
The Golden rectangle is also related to the Golden spiral, which is created by making adjacent squares of Fibonacci dimensions.
In 1509, Luca Pacioli wrote a book that refers to the number as the "Divine Proportion," which was illustrated by Leonardo da Vinci. Da Vinci later called this sectio aurea or the Golden section.
The Golden ratio was used to achieve balance and beauty in many Renaissance paintings and sculptures.
Da Vinci himself used the Golden ratio to define all of the proportions in his Last Supper, including the dimensions of the table and the proportions of the walls and backgrounds.
The Golden ratio also appears in da Vinci's Vitruvian Man and the Mona Lisa. Other artists who employed the Golden ratio include Michelangelo, Raphael, Rembrandt, Seurat, and Salvador Dali.
The term "phi" was coined by American mathematician Mark Barr in the 1900s. Phi has continued to appear in mathematics and physics, including the 1970s Penrose Tiles, which allowed surfaces to be tiled in five-fold symmetry.
In the 1980s, phi appeared in quasi crystals, a then-newly discovered form of matter.
Phi is more than an obscure term found in mathematics and physics. It appears around us in our daily lives, even in our aesthetic views.
Studies have shown that when test subjects view random faces, the ones they deem most attractive are those with solid parallels to the Golden ratio.
Faces judged as the most attractive show Golden ratio proportions between the width of the face and the width of the eyes, nose, and eyebrows.
The test subjects weren't mathematicians or physicists familiar with phi - they were just average people, and the Golden ratio elicited an instinctual reaction.
The Golden ratio also appears in all forms of nature and science. Some unexpected places include:
Flower petals: The number of petals on some flowers follows the Fibonacci sequence. It is believed that in the Darwinian processes, each petal is placed to allow for the best possible exposure to sunlight and other factors.
Seed heads: The seeds of a flower are often produced at the center and migrate outward to fill the space. For example, sunflowers follow this pattern.
Pinecones: The spiral pattern of the seed pods spiral upward in opposite directions. The number of steps the spirals take tend to match Fibonacci numbers.
Tree branches: The way tree branches form or split is an example of the Fibonacci sequence. Root systems and algae exhibit this formation pattern.
Shells: Many shells, including snail shells and nautilus shells, are perfect examples of the Golden spiral.
Spiral galaxies: The Milky Way has a number of spiral arms, each of which has a logarithmic spiral of roughly 12 degrees. The shape of the spiral is identical to the Golden spiral, and the Golden rectangle can be drawn over any spiral galaxy.
Hurricanes: Much like shells, hurricanes often display the Golden spiral.
Fingers: The length of our fingers, each section from the tip of the base to the wrist is larger than the preceding one by roughly the ratio of phi.
Animal bodies: The measurement of the human navel to the floor and the top of the head to the navel is the Golden ratio. But we are not the only examples of the Golden ratio in the animal kingdom; dolphins, starfish, sand dollars, sea urchins, ants and honeybees also exhibit the proportion.
DNA molecules: A DNA molecule measures 34 angstroms by 21 angstroms at each full cycle of the double helix spiral. In the Fibonacci series, 34 and 21 are successive numbers.
The Fibonacci Sequence
The Fibonacci sequence is possibly the most simple recurrence relation occurring in nature.
It is 0,1,1,2,3,5,8,13,21,34,55,89, 144… each number equals the sum of the two numbers before it, and the difference of the two numbers succeeding it. It is an infinite sequence which goes on forever as it develops.
The Golden Ratio/Divine Ratio or Golden Mean – The quotient of any Fibonacci number and it’s predecessor approaches Phi, represented as ϕ (1.618), the Golden ratio.
The Golden Ratio is best understood geometrically by the golden rectangle. A rectangle unevenly divided resulting into one square and one rectangle, the square’s sides would have the ratio of 1:1, and the new rectangle would be exactly proportionate to the original rectangle – 1:1.618.
This iteration can continue both ways, infinitely. If you plot a quarter circle inside each of the squares as they reiterate, the golden spiral is formed.
The golden spiral is possibly the most simple mathematic pattern that occurs in nature like shells of snails, sea shells, horns, flowers, plants. Numbers are only what we use to organize quantitative information. golden ratio spiral galaxies.
The Golden Ratio can be seen from a Chambered Nautilus to a Spiraling Galaxy The Golden Ratio can be applied to any number of geometric forms including circles, triangles, pyramids, prisms, and polygons.
The Golden Ratio can be seen from a Chambered Nautilus to a Spiraling Galaxy The Golden Ratio can be applied to any number of geometric forms including circles, triangles, pyramids, prisms, and polygons.
The golden ratio is formed by thirds within thirds, sixths, the connection between two and three, including every even and odd number itself.
The ratio itself represents the transcendence of numbers, understanding our world is not numbers, but what numbers represent.
Through the spiral, the ratio illustrates how the numbers, all quantities, are quality. Eventually, all quality can be represented through quantity.
Properties qualitative and quantitative are just labels of information, our gathered indisputable fact.
Sunflowers have a Golden Spiral seed arrangement. This provides a biological advantage because it maximizes the number of seeds that can be packed into a seed head. If you graph any number system, eventually patterns appear.
In mathematics, numbers and their patterns do not only continue infinitely linear, but in all directions.
"Breathtaking Proportions – The ‘Golden Ratio’ sits at the heart of every Aston Martin. Balanced from any angle, each exterior line of Rapide S works in concert and every proportion is precisely measured to create a lithe, pure form. Our engineering follows the same principle. A near perfect weight distribution ensures Rapide S is balanced in form and balanced in function.”
For example, considering infinite decimal expansion, even the shortest segments have an infinite amount of points.
Our universe and the numbers not only go on infinitely linear, but even it’s short segments have infinite points. (A beautiful short film on Fibonacci sequence in Nature - ‘Nature by Numbers’)
Nature by Numbers
The golden ratio is not the only mathematical pattern that reaches infinity, there are many other patterns as well that reach infinity. Knowing this, ask yourself, how could infinity occur twice?
If something were to happen infinitely, how could it happen twice? The answer is simple, infinity represents what is eternal, what is truly whole. For example, if infinity were to be used as a variable in mathematics like all other numbers, it would be denoted as 1∞, 2∞, 3∞, 4∞, etc.
The oneness of everything factual is what you know, what you perceive, what you are aware of, is all the universe looking at itself. This is the universe, even you are the universe, us and everything we know is all the same thing.
Since the numbers are everywhere, everything is a part of a pattern. Reflections of reflections, wheels within wheels. Life itself is a Fractal. (Another video on the Egyptian ‘Temple of Man’ is a symbolic representation of the Fibonacci series of balanced organic expansion and an expression of the underlying principles of life in the universe)
The Fibonacci Series - Egyptian Sacred Architecture
How To Defeat The Empire February 7 2023 | From: CaitlinJohnstone / Various
One of the biggest and most consistent challenges of my young career so far has been finding ways to talk about solutions to our predicament in a way that people will truly hear.
I talk about these solutions constantly, and some readers definitely get it, but others will see me going on and on about a grassroots revolution against the establishment narrative control machine and then say “Okay, but what do we do?” or “You talk about problems but never offer any solutions!”
Part of the difficulty is that I don’t talk much about the old attempts at solutions we’ve already tried that people have been conditioned to listen for.
I don’t endorse politicians, I don’t advocate starting a new political party, I don’t support violent revolution, I don’t say that capitalism contains the seeds of its own destruction and the proletariat will inevitably rise up against the bourgeoisie, and in general I don’t put much stock in the idea that our political systems are in and of themselves sufficient for addressing our biggest problems in any meaningful way.
What I do advocate, over and over and over again in as many different ways as I can come up with, is a decentralized guerrilla psywar against the institutions which enable the powerful to manipulate the way ordinary people think, act and vote.
“How To Win A Grassroots Media Rebellion“ - Caitlin Johnstone At Ron Paul Institute Conference
The mainstream media and its partners in government want to silence any non-regime voices. Australian renegade blogger joins the Ron Paul Institute's August 18th Washington conference to tell us how we can fight back!
As long as the plutocrat-controlled media are able to manufacture consent for the status quo upon which those plutocrats built their respective empires, there will never be the possibility of a successful revolution.
People will never rebel against a system while they’re being successfully propagandized not to. It will never, ever happen.
Most people who want drastic systematic changes to the way power operates in our society utterly fail to take this into account.
Most of them are aware to some extent that establishment propaganda is happening, but they fail to fully appreciate its effects, its power, and the fact that it’s continually getting more and more sophisticated.
They continue to talk about the need for a particular political movement, for this or that new government policy, or even for a full-fledged revolution, without ever turning and squarely focusing on the elephant in the room that none of these things will ever happen as long as most people are successfully propagandized into being uninterested in making them happen.
It’s like trying to light a fire without first finding a solution to the problem that you’re standing under pouring rain.
Certainly we can all agree that a fire is sorely needed because it’s cold and wet and miserable out here, but we’re never going to get one going while the kindling is getting soaked and we can’t even get a match lit.
The first order of business must necessarily be to find a way to protect our fire-starting area from the downpour of establishment propaganda.
A decentralized guerrilla psywar against the propaganda machine is the best solution to this problem.
By Psywar I mean a grassroots psychological war against the establishment propaganda machine with the goal of weakening public trust in pro-empire narratives.
People only believe sources of information that they trust, and propaganda cannot operate without belief. Right now trust in the mass media is at an all-time low while our ability to network and share information is at an all-time high.
Our psywar is fought with the goal of using our unprecedented ability to circulate information to continue to kill public trust in the mass media, not with lies and propaganda, but with truth.
If we can expose journalistic malpractice and the glaring plot holes in establishment narratives about things like war, Julian Assange, Russia etc, we will make the mass media look less trustworthy.
By Decentralized I mean we should each take responsibility for weakening public trust in the propaganda machine in our own way, rather than depending on centralized groups and organizations.
The more centralized an operation is, the easier it is for establishment manipulators to infiltrate and undermine it.
This doesn’t mean that organizing is bad, it just means a successful grassroots psywar won’t depend on it.
If we’re each watching for opportunities to weaken public trust in the official narrative makers on our own personal time and in our own unique way using videos, blogs, tweets, art, paper literature, conversations and demonstrations, we’ll be far more effective.
By Guerrilla I mean constantly attacking different fronts in different ways, never staying with the same line of attack for long enough to allow the propagandists to develop a counter-narrative.
If they build up particularly strong armor around one area, put it aside and expose their lies on an entirely different front. The propagandists are lying constantly, so there is never any shortage of soft targets.
The only consistency should be in attacking the propaganda machine as visibly as possible.
As far as how to go about that attack, my best answer is that I’m leading by example here. I’m only ever doing the thing that I advocate, so if you want to know what I think we should all do, just watch what I do.
I’m only ever using my own unique set of skills, knowledge and assets to attack the narrative control engine at whatever points I perceive to be the most vulnerable on a given day.
So do what I do, but keep in mind that each individual must sort out the particulars for themselves.
We’ve each got our own strengths and abilities that we bring to the psywar: some of us are funny, some are artistic, some are really good at putting together information and presenting it in a particular format, some are good at finding and boosting other people’s high-quality attacks.
Everyone brings something to the table. The important thing is to do whatever will draw the most public interest and attention to what you’re doing. Don’t shy away from speaking loud and shining bright.
It isn’t necessary to come up with your own complete 'How It Is' narrative of exactly what is happening in our world right now; with the current degree of disinformation and government opacity that’s too difficult to do with any degree of completion anyway.
All you need to do is wake people up in as many ways as possible to the fact that they’re being manipulated and deceived. Every newly opened pair of eyes makes a difference, and anything you can do to help facilitate that is energy well spent.
Without an effective propaganda machine, the empire cannot rule. Once we’ve crippled public trust in that machine, we’ll exist in a very different world already, and the next step will present itself from there.
Until then, the attack on establishment propaganda should be our foremost priority.
The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish.
How To Communicate In A Polarized World
February 6 2023 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various "The single biggest problem in communication is the illusion that it has taken place.” - George Bernard Shaw.
We’re living in a polarized world. Just look at the comment sections on social media platforms and you’ll understand exactly what I mean: Individuals holding opposing views are verbally fighting against one another to prove themselves right and others wrong.
Here are a few examples: capitalists vs socialists, theists vs atheists, climate alarmists vs climate deniers, fruitarians vs carnivores, pro-life vs pro-choice.
Their goal is to hurt, belittle and win over those belonging to the opposing group. But the result is always the same: nobody wins, and everyone loses.
People waste their time spilling hate over others, only to find themselves further enraged and misunderstood, which leads to more hate-spilling. Constantly adding fuel to fire, the heated debate never ends.
In this article, I’d like to shed some light on the core reasons behind the polarizing conversations that are all over the place, and offer some insights on how to effectively communicate without resorting to hate and the war mentality that so many of us are accustomed to.
The Trap of Being Right
Most fights in conversations start when we label ourselves as right and others as wrong. In other words, they start from judgment.
When we judge others, we can’t see them as they truly are. To be more precise, we see them as less than they are.
That’s because by judging them we dehumanize them, and so we lose or considerably reduce our empathy towards them. As a result, we find no problem attacking them. Yet in reality we only attack a projection of our own minds.
The need to prove others wrong usually comes from the egoistic desire to feel that we’re on the right side of things (and hence “better” than others). This desire arises from a deep-seated fear: that we might be on the wrong side of things (and hence “worse” than others). In other words, it arises from self-judgment.
To admit the possibility of being wrong would be an anathema to our insecure ego that feeds on the idea of being right: It would lead to tremendous emotional distress due to the psychological discord that would surface in our consciousness.
To avoid that, we use all sorts of defense mechanisms to cover up for our personal insecurities, such as trying to win over others in conversations. But this creates two serious problems.
Firstly, when our goal in conversations is to prove that we’re right, we exclude any possibility of learning, for learning requires the admittance that we don’t know everything.
It requites paying attention to new information - even that which is conflicting to our beliefs - and being available to change our minds when presented with it. It requires suspending the ego, and being open to the idea that others might have more knowledge or insight on a topic than us.
Secondly, we don’t really understand the person we’re conversing with. We’re so focused on winning that we don’t care to hear another’s perspective and put ourselves in their shoes.
Or perhaps we hear, but we don’t really listen. And if we listen, we only listen in order to find an opportunity to talk back. Therefore, we fail to truly communicate with them. Rather, we’re exchanging verbal punches with a ghost of our own creation that entirely misses the point of communication: To connect with others.
The Art of Listening
To effectively communicate, we need to learn to truly listen (and not just hear). But to listen, we need to be willing to understand those we’re conversing with. And to understand them, it is important that we let go of our judgmental attitude towards them, for judgementality blocks our empathy - that is, our capacity to “feel with” another.
When we listen, we can see where others are coming from. We can see that they have their reasons for believing and saying what they do. We can see that when they hold opinions that are arguably wrong, that doesn’t mean that they themselves are wrong.
And we can also see that, when they disagree with us, that doesn’t mean they’re our enemies - it just means that they have a different way of thinking than ours.
When we listen, we don’t want to harm anyone. We understand that those who verbally fight against us are suffering from their own psychological discord, and so we respond with compassion instead of fighting them back.
We provide them with loving space in order to nourish their deep need for self-acceptance, which sometimes is enough to change their attitude towards us.
But even if their attitude doesn’t change, and they continue their fight, we simply disengage, careful not to add fuel to the fire of hatred and rage.
To listen, we also need to let go of the idea that we’re always right. We need to understand that no one is perfect or knows everything.
Learning is an ongoing journey, and part of that journey are the people we interact with. Everyone we meet can teach us important lessons, if we stop and pay attention to them. Even those we disagree with know some things that we don’t.
Once we realize that, and are willing to expand our knowledge and understanding, we’ll stop getting defensive when conversing with others.
On the contrary, we’ll start listening closely to what they have to say, and be open to question our beliefs when provided with new information that doesn’t fit in with them.
As I mentioned earlier, communication has one purpose: To connect us with others. By exchanging our feelings, thoughts and perspective, communication allows us to know each other better; hence it brings us closer to each other. And when communication brings us further apart, that’s a clear sign it has failed to take place.
Once we see that the goal of communication is connection, we’ll no longer fight with others. Of course, that doesn’t mean that no disagreement or conflict will ever arise from our conversations.
To some extent both are inevitable, yet not necessarily bad. In fact, they can be very beneficial: Disagreements can help us to reconsider our way of thinking and enrich our knowledge, and conflicts can help our relationships become healthier and more resilient.
But that’s the case only if they’re dealt with the right way - that is, with compassion, a genuine desire for understanding and the intention to heal our inner psychological discord from which our outer conflicts sprout.
Communication can be a bridge between ourselves and others. But when used the wrong way, it can create thick walls between our hearts.
Every word we utter has the power to connect or separate us, to create the conditions for conflict or the conditions for peace, to nourish our psyche or deprive us of what we need the most: Intimacy, love, connection.
So let’s use our words wisely, and harness their power for the benefit of ourselves and those we converse with.
The 5G Electromagnetic “Mad Zone” Poised To Self-Destruct: The 5G “Dementors” Meet The 4G “Zombie Apocalypse”& 5G Wireless: A Ridiculous Front For Global Control February 5 2023 | From: GlobalResearch / NoMoreFakeNews / Various Incisive research and carefully documented analysis of the impacts of 5G Electromagnetic Radiation by Claire Edwards.
The entities rolling out 5G are tormenting humanity and sucking their humanity from them by taking their minds and their health, while on the other side, you have the zombie apocalypse of all the people with their 4G cell phones, blindly going about destroying the world.
The 4G zombie apocalypse lot have to wake up. "They" need to wake up now before it is too late and time is of the essence.
It is time we asked a crucial question. How did we come to be in this 5G mad zone, poised to self-destruct? How on earth did we get here?
It appears that every expansion of the use of electricity since the 19th century correlates with drastic rises in all the modern diseases of civilization, but this information has been kept from the public in order not to impede commercial profit, military expansion and universal convenience.
Since 100+ years of quantum physics has had little to no impact on the way we live our lives or how we perceive reality, we in the West still labour under the illusion that our bodies are made up of lumps of discrete matter that can be conveniently excised by a surgeon’s knife when they go wrong, this having been established in the 19th century by a grave-robbing spree to collect corpses for surgical experiments.
Since no one seems to have considered the possibility that a living body might differ significantly from a dead one, this crude experimentation formed the foundation for the system that we now call Western medicine.
In an inversion typical of our Western thinking, natural healing methods dating back thousands of years could then be termed not “traditional”, but “alternative” and “backward”.
Taking advantage of this – let us charitably call it an induced misconception – our militaries discovered that microwave weapons could be deployed silently and secretly to “defend us” from alleged enemies or perhaps for some more sinister purpose.
They gleefully amassed compendia of thousands of studies, many done in the Soviet bloc, in order to solidify their knowledge of the many and varied types of biological damage that these weapons could inflict on human beings at very little cost or inconvenience to those deploying them.
There was even a symposium organized by the World Health Organization in 1973 to discuss The Biologic Effects and Health Hazards of Microwave Radiation, but the participants must have subsequently decided not to share this information with the public in view of their intelligent propensity to suspect that one day microwave weapons might be turned on them.
The self-proclaimed international commission on non-ionizing radiation protection (icnirp), which is an NGO with no international or official status that appoints its own members with no oversight or transparency and protects no one from anything, while disclaiming all liability on its website for any of its pronouncements, sets non-legally enforceable and astronomically high exposure guidelines that are time-averaged over 6 minutes to avoid taking peak pulsations into account and thereby falsify exposure calculations.
These implausible guidelines are embraced enthusiastically by the WHO and the International Telecommunication Union, both UN bodies, and most of the world’s governments, with no basis in law.
4G uses 2.45 GHz, which has been shown in more than 100 studies to cause a wide variety of severe damage to the body and nature at levels below the so-called safety guidelines of icnirp.
This was not good because it could affect the sales of electrical products and impede the military developing ever more sophisticated weapons, so the corrupt WHO just called these people mad: on its website, it claimed that the EMR-related symptoms experienced by millions of people worldwide;
“May be due to pre-existing psychiatric conditions as well as stress reactions as a result of worrying about EMF health effects, rather than the EMF exposure itself”.
This was a good solution, for such people could not use machines to communicate to anyone else that they were experiencing health problems, and in fact even more conveniently, they became societal outcasts because many of them became homeless, living in cars in the woods where there was no EMR.
And you employ pliable scientists to “war-game” the science by producing studies that show inconclusive results.
As time went on, the military wanted industry to develop better weapons for them, but this was expensive, and frankly it was becoming quite difficult to convince the public that there were that many enemies that they needed to be protected from.
After the kleptocracy of neoliberal economics,during which everything that could be stolen was stolen, all that is left is to consume the consumer him - or herself.
Companies like Facebook are designed to do just that and Zuckerberg regards consumers as “dumb fucks” for giving away their information for free.
Why is it that in New Zealand telcos like 2degrees, Spark, and Vodafone can install mobile phone towers just meters from our homes and schools, and we have no legal recourse to object?
This is a question that was succinctly answered by Russel Norman back in 2010, and the reason will probably shock you! In this video we share the pertinent parts from Russel Norman's 2010 blog post which has since been removed (but archived link is below).
He discusses the conflicts of interest surrounding New Zealand's National Environmental Standards which enabled telcos to install cell sites without the need for community consultation, or council approval.
The same paper discussed the development of psychic disturbances under EMR exposure showing effects ranging from changes in mood to nonsensical ideas and aural and visual hallucinations, and disturbances in behaviour all the way to attempts at suicide.
While people’s minds are disturbed by their exposure to EMR, the mainstream media plies them with blanket coverage of Greta Thunberg fear-porning about an unsubstantiated 12 years until doomsday from non-existent anthropogenic climate change in order to persuade them that they need a totalitarian, world government that can guarantee their safety in uncertain times.
Populations have been discombobulated by 25 years of cell phone use, 12 of them under intense “smart” phone attack.
The deployment of 5G is presented by militaries, governments and commercial entities as a race in which the winner takes all. Why should such a dangerous and completely untested technology have to be rolled out so quickly?
Could it be that the Internet is empowering people who are increasingly impoverished to open their eyes about the kleptocrats who plunder the planet?
The limited frequencies available have to be shared among commercial and military entities.
Thus 25 years of diminishing mental capacity among populations due to irradiation facilitated by the lie of the thermal hypothesis, combined with the apparent urgency to protect ill-gotten gains and prevent populations awakening to the truth and flexing their muscles to redress the power balance have conspired to produce a mad free-for-all – a licence to irradiate without constraint from every corner of the planet and from above our heads.
Technicians have been given free rein to dream up ways of attacking populations: from under manhole covers; from cabinets on the street; from lamp posts that blast blue light with no more diffusers, as well as 5G EMR in laser-like beams; from adhesive strips of tiny but powerful antennas hidden under carpets; on the street; in trains; in planes; in cars; in buses; blasting through the walls of our homes; from our television sets; from fridges, hairdryers, milk cartons, babies’ diapers, baby monitors, “smart” phones, “smart” meters, and soon from the billions of devices that are planned to be connected to the Internet of Things.
This is not to mention the plethora of “wearables” and cell phone apps that purport to help you monitor your health status while seriously undermining it.
Any remnants of a sane, balanced, calm and quiet life will be wiped out by 5G, 4G, 3G, or any other G of wireless technology. We are complicit in our own destruction and, worse, in the wanton destruction of all life on this Earth.
Greed, fear, stupidity and hubris have brought us to this point, complemented by inanity, laziness, complacency and unconsciousness.
The 5G Dementors are closing In for the kill. The question is whether the people choosing to play out the 4G Zombie Apocalypse on their “smart” phones can tear themselves away long enough to care.
If they can, or if at least some of them can, they need to understand certain realities:
4.
The problem with cell phones and WiFi has nothing to do with power levels. Wireless technology cannot be made safe by reducing the power. There are effects at near-zero power, and for some effects, there is an inverse power relationship, i.e. the lower the power, the worse the harm.
7.
There is one solution only to the problems of WiFi, cell phones and 5G: STOP USING THEM. All the time you pretend to ask the telcos to stop building this infrastructure while you pay them to do so, you are sending the wrong message.
8. Wake up! Choose life! Choose love! Choose the Earth!
Smash your phone. Get a landline. Cable your computer - or you could keep your portable not-smart-at-all computer, just as long as it is never connected to WiFi and not killing life on this planet.
“It’s the next (fifth) generation of cellular technology which promises to greatly enhance the speed, coverage and responsiveness of wireless networks.
How fast are we talking about? Think 10 to 100 times speedier than your typical cellular connection, and even faster than anything you can get with a physical fiber-optic cable going into your house. (You’ll be able to download a season’s worth of ‘Stranger Things’ in seconds.)”
Lunatic 5G installation of small transmitters packed close together every few hundred feet:
“The next big thing in cellular technology, 5G, will bring lightning-fast wireless Internet - and thousands of antenna-topped poles to many neighborhoods where cell towers have long been banned.”
"Wireless companies are asking Congress and state lawmakers to make it easier to install the poles by preempting local zoning laws that often restrict them, particularly near homes.
The lobbying efforts have alarmed local officials across the country. They say they need to ensure that their communities do not end up with unsightly poles cluttering sidewalks, roadsides and the edges of front yards.”
“They also are hearing from residents worried about possible long-term health risks. Until now, much of the cell equipment that emits radio-frequency energy has been housed on large towers typically kept hundreds of feet from homes [also harmful to health].
The new ‘small cell’ technology uses far more antennas and transmitters that are smaller and lower-powered, but clustered closer together and lower to the ground.”
A few decades ago, a movement was started to create an interconnected power grid for the whole planet. We were told this would be the only way to avoid wasting huge amounts of electricity and, voila, bring all nations and all people into a modern 21st century.
But now, it’s a different story, a classic bait and switch. The bait was the promise of One Grid for all. The switch is what 5G will bring us:
100 billion or more NEW devices online, all connected to the Internet and the Cloud. What could be more wasteful? What could be more ridiculous? This is the opposite of sane energy use.
Who really cares whether his 5G-connected refrigerator keeps track of the food items inside it and orders new items when the supply dwindles?
Who has to have a 5G driverless car that takes him to work? Who must have a 5G stove that senses what is being cooked and sets the temperature for four minutes?
Who lives and who dies if a washing machine doesn’t measure how much soap is stored inside and doesn’t order new soap? Who is demanding a hundred devices in his home that spy on him and record his actions?
With 5G, the ultimate goal is: every device in every home that uses energy will be “its own computer,” and the planetary grid will connect ALL these devices to a monitoring and regulating Energy Authority.
As Patrick Wood details in his classic, Technocracy Rising, that worldwide Energy Authority was the dream of the men who launched the Technocracy movement, in America, in the 1930s.
They set out the key requirements - which weren’t technically possible then, but are quite doable now: continuous real-time measuring of both energy production and energy use from one end of the planet to the other…
So that both energy production and energy consumption could be controlled. “For the good of all,” of course.
5G is the technology for making this happen. The Globalists:
“We’re promising a stunning long-range future of ‘automatic homes’, where everything is done for you. But really, that’s the cover story.
Ultimately, we want to be able to measure every unit of energy used by every device in every home - and through AI, regulate how much energy we will let every individual consume, moment to moment.
We control energy. We are the energy masters. If you want to run and operate and dominate the world, you control its energy.”
Terms and projects like smart grid, smart meters, sustainability, Agenda 21, smart cities, climate change - all this is Technocratic planning and justification for Rule through Energy.
The beginning of an actual rational plan for energy would start this way: DUMP 5G.
Dump the whole plan of installing small transmitter-cells on buildings and homes and trees and lampposts and fences all over the planet. Forget it. Don’t bring 100 billion new devices online.
Aside from the extreme health dangers, it’s ridiculously expensive. It’s on the order of saying we need thousand-foot robots standing on sidewalks washing the windows of office buildings.
Globalist Infiltrator Spills Never Before Heard 5G Secret - You’ve Been Sold Death In a Pretty Package
If some movie star wants to install 30 generators on his property and have engineers build him an automatic home, where he can sit back, flip a switch, and have three androids carry him into his bathtub and wash him and dry him, fine.
But planning a smart city? Who voted for that? Who gave informed consent? Nobody.
A global Energy Authority, of course, is going to decide that a small African country needs to be given much more energy, while Germany or France or the US will have to sacrifice energy for the cause of social justice.
But this is yet another con, because you won’t see government cleaning up the contaminated water supplies of that small African country, or installing modern sanitation, or curtailing the forced movement of populations into poverty-stricken cities, or reclaiming vast farm land stolen by mega-corporations and giving that land back to local farmers.
The whole hidden purpose of an Energy Authority is control.
And because the Authority is Globalist and Technocratic, it aims to lower energy use in industrial nations and help wreck their economies, making it much easier to move in and take over those countries.
Who in his right mind would propose a wireless system that relies on many, many, many cells / transmitters placed closely to each other, all over the world?
This system would be far more vulnerable to physical disruption than the present 4G.
You can find many articles that claim the US military must have 5G for their most advanced planes - and for their developing AI-controlled weapons.
How does that work? Where will all the transmitter / cells be placed on the ground and in the air? Something is missing here.
Is there another version of 5G we’re not being told about? Is geoengineering of the atmosphere the means for tuning up space so 5G signals can be passed along without cells / transmitters?
Part of the US obsession to bring 5G online quickly stems from competition with China, which at the moment is in the lead on developing and exporting the technology. “If China has it, we have to have it sooner and better.”
This attitude sidesteps the issue of why we must have 5G in the first place.
And now there are reports that the US government is considering a plan to build the whole 5G network itself - rather than leaving the job to corporations.
Of course, a few favored companies (like Google) would be chosen by the government in a non-bid situation to provide VERY significant help.
If such a plan were to launch, we would have a very tight club at the top of the communications and energy pyramid. And that club would maximize 5G to expand already-saturated surveillance of populations.
Wouldn’t you - if you had nothing better to do than control the world?
The Great Awakening Has Begun February 4 2023 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various Mass Awakening is the Cabal’s greatest Fear. The awakening is erupting. Being awake comes with a price.
It may have been difficult and painful going through the stages of awakening, but convincing others by challenging circumstances and conditions to open the eyes and minds of others is even more difficult. It has become a struggle against time when awake and one sees all the injustices that could have easily been avoided.
It’s very sad to see unawakened people being tossed to and fro, without having a clue as to what is really going on. But even that is an “engineered” shake-up designed by the Deep State.
Nevertheless, that should help every one of us to come to our senses and surpass this false reality.
Millions are flocking to alternative news sources to try to make sense of what’s going on, stumbling across realities they never considered possible, or could have ever imagined before.
If the truth be known, the awake are responsible for sharing it ardently, but also for doing it with a passion. Not always pleasant, but a duty that must be done.
The hour is late and the timeframe we are living in is terrible, the necessity brings forth optimal awareness and swift action. There’s no alternative left.
The world is bankrupt financially, economically, and morally, but through manipulation and deceit, people are led to believe that all is well.
It’s absolutely absurd that all the bubble assets are at such astronomical highs, while wealth-preservation assets like gold and silver have been totally annihilated through manipulation.
The elite and the media continuously fool the people regarding the state of the world.
Anger, Hatred, Aggression and Fear Are the Food Source of the Archons
The tactics employed are comprised of manipulating economies, trade and the masses through fear: fear of war, fear of starvation, fear of economic collapse, imprisonment and death.
This state of mind has directed and shaped global events for centuries and has become the standard operating procedure.
This process of enslaving civilisations is contrary to the survival drive of humanity and suppresses the natural instinct of all humans to do good and be kind to each other.
Do not view all this madness from a foundation of fear; this will just make you angry and aggressive, which in turn will lead to violence and a perpetuation of this madness.
It is hard to remain calm when faced with the hard truth, but it’s what must be done, in order to safely get through this. Anger, hatred, aggression and fear are the sort of emotions that have led to this madness and it is the food source of the Archons.
Stop feeding them and help to change our world view completely. In this way, we will change everything for the better, by changing our way of thinking.
Bear in mind; the real purpose of government is, always and everywhere, to enable the few to exploit the many.
The credit money system is a clever way of doing so. The bureaucracy will continue to churn out laws, statutes, codes and regulations that reinforce its powers and value systems and those of the police state and its corporate allies, rendering the rest of us petty criminals.
The average citizen unknowingly commits three felonies a day, thanks to this overabundance of vague laws that render otherwise innocent activity illegal. As an example, small farmers who dare to make unpasteurised goat cheese and share it with members of their community will continue to have their farms raided.
The Mainstream Media, the Last Bastion of the “Deep State”
The Mainstream Media is the last bastion of the “Deep State” organised crime network that, over the years in the past, has infiltrated and hijacked most, if not all institutions.
But, their days are numbered and the ensuing collapse will most likely be violent and shocking to all those unaware of what is unfolding.
The principal source of the Deep State’s power is their control of the process of creating and distributing money, i.e. their ownership of almost all of the world’s central banks, and multinationals.
They have used this money-power to bribe, blackmail and assassinate people at top levels of power in order to enforce their control.
They also control the corporate media and have been using every propaganda tool at their disposal to rig society and markets where necessary.
Fortunately, trust in the mainstream media has fallen to an all-time low and continues to plummet.
Much of this has to do with an increasingly aware and disgruntled public: More and more people are able to discern a mainstream media totally lacking integrity, thanks to the rising popularity of the independent / alternative media, exposing the dishonesty.
People are increasingly seeing right through the various media sources with their dogmatic, unhealthy sceptics, shills, trolls, pseudo-debunkers, controlled opposition agents, biasing, filtering and in-your-face lies; intended to sell us the spin of disinformation to keep people ignorant, deceived and helplessly anaesthetised in the world’s matrix controlling system.
The Real Question is How Do We Become Conscious?
Our overwhelming, uncontrollable mass awakening is what the world’s ruling elite fear the most. Since we greatly outnumber them and their associates, they wouldn’t know how to deal with our vast numbers, even with their advanced technology.
As a result, the real question is how do we become conscious?
Other than the martial arts badass that he was, Bruce Lee was also a philosophy badass.
In my newest video I'm sharing some of Bruce Lee's most profound philosophical insights that can inspire you to live a more empowered life. It's 17 minutes long and took me weeks to create, so I hope you'll enjoy it.
Those unable to see that just about every matter under the sun is a deception, that their family and friends are affected in every way imaginable; those who don’t yet realise the extent to which the dark overlords have us tightly stitched up, are indeed about to experience the shock of a lifetime when this entire fraudulent system comes crashing down.
What they have clung to as a reality will soon sink into the abyss of Grand Deceptions.
Simply, become conscious by choosing it. By acting on those synchronicities better known as meaningful coincidences. By acting on that which calls, moves and inspires us.
Taking action through listening to our inner voice, coming from our inner being; paying attention to our gut feelings and basic instincts.
Choosing to become conscious means detaching one’s self from the mind control programming; escaping the effects of the physical, mental, emotional and spiritual prison matrix woven around us by the Globalist’s oppression.
Breaking free from the mind programming and the imposition of others, with multidimensional consciousness, escaping the dualistic confinements of matter, energy and space-time, anything is possible, and the Truth will be revealed.
Creating a driving desire to find out more about the truth regarding what is going on in our world. Seeing that the world is in a mess and we are all plodding along, business as usual, expecting someone else to sort it all out.
Most of us are too busy earning money and surviving, as surviving, by design, takes up all our time. Most people cannot seem to see beyond that and that is why we are in this mess in the first place.
We have all been manipulated and played. We have all been mesmerised, hypnotised and turned into consumer-driven slaves.
Making money for the large corporations and the 0.1% rich of the world is the name of the game, or so we have been programmed.
Each day they get richer and richer, finding new ways, like global warming and CO2 emission taxes, to force us to part with our hard-earned money; they are very clever at it.
They know how to manipulate the human mind, they know how to get us to spend our money and we don’t even realise it is happening.
Governments extract far too much money from us, and we use almost all of our time on Earth working for this money.
They leave every family with a small amount to spare, while the really wealthy manage to avoid paying their taxes through carefully engineered loopholes.
The real purpose of government is, always and everywhere, to enable the few to exploit the many. The money system is a clever way of doing so.
We All are Slaves to the System
The modern world of industry, commerce, and investment works on win-win software.
Only governments with their conflicts, wars, taxes, tariffs, ‘do-this laws’, and ‘don’t-do-that prohibitions’, continue to operate on pre-civilised programming. It is a relic, an institution with a ‘grab whatever we can grab’ mentality.
A trade war is just as phony as a war on drugs, a war on crime, or a war on terror.
None are worth fighting for. And none are winnable. It is meant to reward the elite at others’ expense. Nothing more, nothing less.
Think of it, we are all, quite simply, slaves to the system! The people at the bottom are paying for the people at the top to keep their lavish life styles. We pay our taxes and any money that is left over is coveted by major corporations.
We are bombarded with adverts continuously, telling us to buy more stuff we don’t need. We are encouraged to spend, spend and then spend some more. We replace everything, even when it doesn’t need replacing. We need to get out of this mentality.
We need to re-cycle, re-use and make do with what we have. We have all been brainwashed into this consumerism insanity. It’s all been smoke and mirrors, mind-games, played out on the world stage, aiming to keep us all in a state of awe and fear.
We All Want to be Free, Healthy, Educated, and Live in a Peaceful Society
Our subconscious minds have been conditioned to see only what differentiates us, rather the things that bind us. Believe it or not, we’re extremely similar in all aspects.
We may come from different backgrounds or different cultures, but we all have the same basic values in life. We all want to be free, healthy, educated, to live in a peaceful society and to have access to the basic necessities for survival.
That’s about it. Wherever we live in the world. Basically, all we really want is to be happy and healthy.
Instead, we have wars, hunger, insecurity, homelessness, and many around the world don’t have access to clean water and food. And it’s all by design because, people who are constantly “on the edge” don’t have time for self-education, introspection and eventually spiritual awakening.
We all are the victims of mass propaganda and brainwashing.
It has reached the point where families choose to believe the media and the governments of the world, rather than members of their own family and friends who have woken up to the truth and are attempting to warn them and awaken them.
The truth can be frightening and that is why people want to avoid it. They would rather stick their heads in the sand like an ostrich, believing that as long as they choose not to look at it, it will not exist.
Unfortunately for them, Truth has a way of existing, even in the face of ridicule and denial. It does not need the approval of a counterparty to become legitimate.
Truth simply Is. Once you know the truth, you can never go back, even if you want to. The truth cannot be unseen; once seen, the truth stays with you forever. In any event, be assured, the truth will come out in the end, as it always does.
The truth comes at a cost – it will end all the lies and the illusions that people previously based their entire lives on. And that is an on-going process. Many feel lost and afraid right now all across the spectrum of humanity.
This deliberate creation of chaos is designed to do just that. However, parallel and simultaneous to their psychotic designs, a massive arousal of the human spirit is occurring, spurred on by an arising of conscious awareness and a deep sense of growing personal realisation and empowerment.
Most may not recognise these rising, seemingly confusing energetic changes, as being the creative process at work, but it is, The Great Awakening. First, preceding this creativity is a destructive process, eliminating everything that is unreal and inhibitive of personal development and progress.
These two dynamics work alongside each other.
The "Elite" see us as their slaves, our sole purpose being to provide them with our energy money, so that they can follow their master plan, bringing about the New World Order.
We have procreated very well and are now, in their view, overrunning the planet, so they now want to cull a large number of us. Hence GMO’s, fluoride, chemtrails, vaccinations and the endless wars; all these things lower our immunity for whatever they have planned for us.
They want us to be in a state of eternal slumber, hypnotised and brainwashed by their omnipresent propaganda and most of us have unwittingly complied with their wishes.
But, we are more powerful than them and they know it, which is why they have been so patient. Humanity is waking up, slowly but surely.
One of the reasons humanity cannot grasp what is going on, is because these creatures are so evil, that it’s hard to believe just how vile they are. And people are actually right in their disbelief of these atrocities: human beings cannot be this cruel!
Humans are not at the pinnacle of this diabolical plan, it is a Reptilian agenda, and Reptilians cannot experience positive emotions. They are simply unable to care for others or to experience noble emotions, such as love or empathy.
They are driven by fear, hate, rivalry and competition. The truth is far stranger and more incredible than we can imagine, say whistle-blowers like Corey Goode.
Will our mass awakening to the deception produce a turnaround, into a world that makes a difference for everyone?
A world where there are no predators, no controlling hierarchy, no blood-sucking vampires, slave-drivers at the top, ruling the enslaved at the bottom. No more fighting for self-sufficiency, because we will achieve everything in the communities we live in.
The Three Trigger Terms Being Used To Stop Critical Thinking February 3 2023 | From: WakingTimes / Various
It’s a strange world of newspeak we live in. What was once a society devoted to logic and progress is now being herded in echo chambers of thought control and anti-critical thinking.
Without the ability to examine an issue impartially and completely there is little hope of maintaining liberty and freedom, as history repeatedly demonstrated.
Today, we find that thinking is a diminishing art, and in its place, sound bites and stop-thought terms are used to put the brakes on the mind. These terms are widely used as signals to prevent minds from looking too deeply at a topic or issue.
""Thinking critically means making reasoned judgments that are logical and well thought out. It is a way of thinking in which one doesn’t simply accept all arguments and conclusions to which one is exposed without questioning the arguments and conclusions.
It requires curiosity, skepticism and humility. People who use critical thinking are the ones who say things such as, “How do you know that?”
“Is this conclusion based on evidence or gut feelings?” and “Are there alternative possibilities when given new pieces of information?""
The three terms most widely used today to this avail are detailed below.
1. Conspiracy Theorist
This term is so overused that it really is devoid of any practical meaning.
If you were to examine it at face value, though, it describes a person who is looking to understand injustices in our world and is willing to look at uncomfortable facts in search of negative influence… of which there is plenty in our world today.
However, ‘conspiracy theorist’ has literally become a derogatory term that is attributed to anyone who refuses to accept mainstream narratives at face value.
It doesn’t matter that there is overwhelming evidence to indicate that mainstream media does not value objectivity or report on important issues thoroughly or truthfully.
Now we find this term applied as a prefix to well-known journalists and media personalities, almost as we use the term Doctor.
It’s an adjective that precedes them everywhere, so that before you even know what issue is being discussed, you know that the issue is coming from someone considered to be fringe and unacceptable.
2. Alt
We see the label ‘alt’ being applied more and more frequently as an adjective for sentiments that supposedly do not fit in with the accepted status quo. Ideas outside of the box.
Alt-Media. Alt-Right. Alt-Left. Alt-News. Alt-Health. And so on.
The signal here is that the mainstream is the safe space, and that any segment of ideas or thought given this prefix is outside of that mainstream, and therefore not something ordinary people would want to associate with.
It takes complex ideas and sensitive issues and benches them, so that when the hive mind stumbles upon something ‘alt’ they immediately react with fear, disdain and feigned outrage.
There is no ‘alt’ in our world. We are one, and any faction of ideas is really just a spinoff of the shared reality we all live in.
If segments of this shared space are off-limits and labeled as so, we all lose.
3. Hate Speech
This term is one of the all-time favorites of politicians and tyrants. After all, what could more dangerous than hate?
Newsflash: Hate speech is not the same thing as a hate crime.
Speech is just that, speech. It is literally vibrating air moving through space, and unless we’re talking about and LRAD crowd control cannon, sound really can’t cause people physical harm.
It is fascinating to watch how people use this term so freely as if speech itself can be criminal.
American [Western] society is founded on the idea of freedom of speech and self-expression, which at its core is the recognition that as human beings we do not and never will all see the world in the same way.
It is an acknowledgement of the fact that different people have different ideas about how the world is and should be. That these differences shouldn’t be used as a basis for discrimination.
The term hate speech is one of the most loaded and ambiguous terms in the political lexicon. Beware.
Final Thoughts
Next time you see or hear these terms being used, ask yourself what it is about the story that you’re not supposed to think too deeply about.
Allow both sides of the argument to share equal time in your mind, and honor the independent, sovereign being within yourself that deserves a chance to make up its own mind about how it wishes to view the world.
Satanists Are Gaslighting Us
February 2 2023 | From: HenryMakow / Various Have you ever asked yourself, "Am I crazy?" If you have, you're not crazy. You're most likely being gaslighted.
Gaslighting is a form of psychological abuse aimed at controlling a person by altering reality to the point where the person will doubt his own sanity.
A good example is pretending the common flu is a deadly pandemic in order to enslave humanity by destroying human rights and livelihoods.
The term "gaslighting" comes from a 1930s play called Gas Light. The main character in the play literally tries to drive his wife crazy by gradually dimming the gas-powered lights in their home.
When she notices the lights dimming, her husband not only denies that the lights are dimming, he convinces her that she is imagining it to the point where she questions her own sanity.
We are now living in a perpetual state of gaslighting. The "reality" that we are being sold by the media is at complete odds with what we are actually seeing with our own two eyes.
And when we question the false reality that we are being presented, or we claim that what we see is the actual reality, we are vilified as racist or bigoted or just plain crazy.
You're not racist. You're not crazy. You're being gaslighted.
New York State has twice as many deaths from COVID-19 as any other state, and New York has accounted for one-fifth of all Covid-19 deaths, but we are told that New York Governor Andrew Cuomo has handled the pandemic better than any other governor.
But if we support policies of Governors whose states had only a fraction of the infections and deaths as New York, we're called anti-science and want people to die. So, we ask ourselves, am I crazy? No, you're being gaslighted.
We see mobs of people looting stores, smashing windows, setting cars on fire, and burning down buildings, but we are told that these demonstrations are peaceful protests. And when we call this destruction of our cities what it obviously is - riots - we are called racists. So, we ask ourselves, am I crazy? No, you're being gaslighted.
We see that the major problem destroying many inner cities is crime - murder, gang violence, drug dealing, drive-by shootings, armed robbery - yet we are told that it is not crime, but the police, that is the problem.
We are told we must defund the police and remove law enforcement from crime-riddled cities to make them safer. But if we advocate for more policing in cities overrun by crime, we are accused of being white supremacists and racists.
So, we ask ourselves, am I crazy? No, you're being gaslighted.
The United States of America accepts more immigrants than any other country in the world. The vast majority of the immigrants are "people of color", and these immigrants are enjoying the freedom and economic opportunity not available to them in their country of origin, but we are told that the United States is the most racist and oppressive country on the planet, and if we disagree, we are called racist and xenophobic.
So, we ask ourselves, am I crazy? No, you're being gaslighted.
Capitalist countries are the most prosperous countries in the world. The standard of living is the highest in countries that practice capitalism.
We see more poor people move up the economic ladder to the middle and even the wealthy class through their effort and ability in capitalist countries than any other economic system in the world, but we are told capitalism is an oppressive system designed to keep people down.
So, we ask ourselves, am I crazy? No, you're being gaslighted.
Communist countries killed over 100 million people in the 20th century. Communist countries strip their citizens of basic human rights, dictate every aspect of their lives, treat their citizens as slaves, and drive their economies into the ground, but we are told that Communism is the fairest, most equitable, freest and most prosperous economic system in the world.
So, we ask ourselves, am I crazy? No, you're being gaslighted.
The most egregious example of gaslighting is the concept of "white fragility". You spend your life trying to be a good person, trying to treat people fairly and with respect.
You disavow racism and bigotry in all its forms. You judge people solely on the content of their character and not by the color of their skin. You don't discriminate based on race or ethnicity.
But you are told you are a racist, not because of something you did or said, but solely because of the color of your skin.
You know instinctively that charging someone with racism because of their skin color is itself racist.
You know that you are not racist, so you defend yourself and your character, but you are told that the very act of defending yourself is proof of your racism. So, we ask ourselves, am I crazy? No, you're being gaslighted.
Gaslighting has become one of the most pervasive and destructive tactics in American [Western] politics. It is the exact opposite of what our political system was meant to be.
It deals in lies and psychological coercion rather than truth and intellectual discourse. If you ever ask yourself if you're crazy, you are not.
Crazy people aren't sane enough to ask themselves if they're crazy.
So, trust yourself, believe what's in your heart. Trust your eyes over what you are told. Never listen to the people who tell you that you are crazy, because you are not. You're being gaslighted.
50 Years Of Near Death Experience Research Suggests That The “Soul” Is Real + 7,000 Souls Recall Their ‘Life’ Between Lives During Regression Hypnosis, The Similarities Are Astounding February 1 2023 | From: StillnessInTheStorm / Various
Nikola Tesla once said that, “The day science begins to study non-physical phenomena, it will make more progress in one decade than in all the previous centuries of its existence.”
Fast forward to today, and we now have hundreds of notable world-renowned scientists studying “non-material” science.
Science the birth of quantum mechanics, the mysteries of consciousness have been at the forefront of scientific study, and we now know today that consciousness plays a crucial part, in several different ways, when it comes to perceiving what we call our physical material world.
In Brief:
The Facts: 50 years of research conducted by scientists into Near Death Experiences is summarized below. The research shows that consciousness, or the soul, or something continues to have awareness after "death."
Reflect On: Evidence of sensitive and touchy topics in science have always been dismissed and ridiculed. Why, no matter how strong the evidence, are discoveries ridiculed or swept under the rug? Are our minds that closed?
Most of our founding fathers of science, especially physics, were all spiritual mystics.
Max Plack, a physicist who originated quantum theory, regarded consciousness as “fundamental,” and matter as “derivative from consciousness.” He said that “we cannot get behind consciousness. Everything that we talk about, everything that we regard as existing, postulates consciousness.”
Eugene Wigner, a physicist and mathematician told the world that “it was not possible to formulate the laws of quantum mechanics in a fully consistent way without reference to consciousness.”
With all of this being said, there is still a resistance to the new discoveries that non-material science is making, especially when it comes to topics on the umbrella of parapsychology, like telepathy, remote viewing (which was used by the US government for intelligence purposes for 25 years), for example, near death experiences (NDE’s) and much more.
“Despite the unrivalled empirical success of quantum theory, the very suggestion that it may be literally true as a description of nature is still greeted with cynicism, incomprehension and even anger.”
– (T. Folger, “Quantum Shmantum”; Discover 22:37-43, 2001)
This is, again, perhaps why so many scientists are coming together to create awareness about this and emphasize some very important points about non-material science.
Near Death Experiences (NDE’s) are one area of study under parapsychology and non-material science. What happens when we die? Does some aspect of us survive death? Some non-material aspect, like consciousness, for example? Does consciousness originate in the brain, or is it a receiver of it?
It’s been the topic of discussion in philosophy and theology for years, and in the 20th century it has become the subject of scientific research.
One of the people responsible for starting this initiative was Ian Stevenson, who, as the Chair of University of Virginia’s Department of Psychiatry, in 1967, created a research unit within the department to study if anything of the human personality survives after death.
His research investigated multiple hundreds of children who claimed to recall past lives and there are many examples.
These children are able to give remarkable details about their past lives, and in some cases include describing how they died, locating past family members of who they used to be that are still living, and more details that would otherwise be impossible to describe.
Here is a video of Dr. Bruce Greyson speaking at a conference that was held by the United Nations. He is considered to be one of the “fathers” of near death studies. He is Professor Emeritus of Psychiatry and Neuro-behavioral Science at UVA.
In the video he describes documented cases of individuals who were clinically dead (showing no brain activity), but observing everything that was happening to them on the medical table below at the same time.
He describes how there have been many instances of this – where individuals are able to describe things that should have been impossible to describe.
Another significant statement by Dr. Greyson posits that this type of study has been discouraged due to our tendency to view science as completely materialistic. Seeing is believing, so to speak, in the scientific community.
It’s unfortunate that just because we cannot explain something through materialistic means, it must be instantly discredited.
The simple fact that “consciousness” itself is a non-physical “thing” is troubling for some scientists to comprehend, and as a result of it being non material, they believe it cannot be studied by science.
To access some of the published research in this area, you can refer to this article. Below is a lecture that was filmed at the UVA by the medical department. It features Jim B. Tucker Bruce Greyson Edward F. Kelly J. Kim Penberthy, from the Division of Perceptual Studies.
Large studies have shown that a significant amount of people who have been clinically dead, experience some type of ‘awareness’ during that time. For example, one patient – a 57-year-old man at the time, despite being pronounced “dead” and completely unconscious, with no detectable biological activity going on, recalled watching the entire process of his resuscitation.
On a side note, Certified Master Hypnotherapist Michael Newton developed a technique to regress his clients back in time to recall memories from their past lives.
During this process he stumbled upon a discovery of enormous proportions. He was able to bring the souls back to the place where they go before their next life - a life between lives. Out of 7,000 regressions, a large majority had eerily similar recollections of a place that many of them called “home.”
A New Groundbreaking Documentary About Post-Materialist Science
It’s interesting because as far back as 1999, statistics professor Jessica Utts at UC Irvine, published a paper showing that parapsychological experiments have produced much stronger results than those showing a daily dose of aspirin helping to prevent heart attacks.
Utts also showed that these results are much stronger than the research behind various drugs like antiplatelets, for example.
“Expanding Reality is about the emerging postmaterialist paradigm and the next great scientific revolution. Why is it important? Because this paradigm has far-reaching implications.
For instance, it re-enchants the world and profoundly alters the vision we have of ourselves, giving us back our dignity and power as human beings.
The postmaterialist paradigm also fosters positive values such as compassion, respect, care, love, and peace, because it makes us realize that the boundaries between self and others are permeable.
In doing so, this paradigm promotes an awareness of the deep interconnection between ourselves and Nature at large.
In that sense, the model of reality associated with the postmaterialist paradigm may help humanity to create a sustainable civilization and to blossom.”
– Mario Beauregard, PhD, from the University of Arizona
These people have exhausted their own resources in order to make Expanding Reality for the world, show your support by purchasing the movie here. You won’t be disappointed.
The Takeaway
The takeaway here is to recognize the evidence existing suggesting the soul, or consciousness, or some type of awareness exists after death. Now, what consciousness encompasses, might be different from the soul, etc, but those are much deeper discussions to be had.
When will science recognize something that’s clearly observable given the witness testimony and similarity of the experiences, and that phenomena that can’t be explained can still be real?
The parameters of modern day science really prevents us from moving forward, which is why we are seeing such a large growth in non-material science, the next step after quantum physics.
7,000 Souls Recall Their ‘Life’ Between Lives During Regression Hypnosis, The Similarities Are Astounding
Certified Master Hypnotherapist Michael Newton developed a technique to regress his clients back in time to recall memories from their past lives.
During this process he stumbled upon a discovery of enormous proportions.
The ancient Greek philosopher Heraclitus said: "You cannot step into the same river twice."
What he meant is that nature, just like a river, is ever-changing. Hence, according to Heraclitus, to resist this change is
to resist the very essence of our existence.
Sadly, many of us expend much of our energy resisting change. We're so worried about what the future might bring that we're trying hard to control life.
In Brief:
The Facts: Over 7000 people/souls share their experience, through regression hypnosis, as to what happened after they died and before they reincarnated.
Reflect On: What are the implications of such research? If we reincarnate, how does that change your view of who you truly are? What is the purpose of life? How might this change how you approach this particular life?
As a result, we can't let go and enjoy the present moment. And, no matter how much we try to control life, eventually it always disappoints us by taking its own course.
I spent the last few days creating a new video where I discuss in more detail the pointlessness of resisting change and the
importance of embracing uncertainty in order to overcome anxiety and flow frictionlessly with the river of life.
The Secret to Overcoming Anxiety
He was able to bring the souls back to the place where they go before their next life - a life between lives. Out of 7,000 regressions, a large majority had eerily similar recollections of a place that many of them called “home.”
One of the most fascinating aspects of Newton’s work was that it didn’t matter who he was working with or what their previously held beliefs were in regards to the concept of “a soul” or reincarnation - in fact, many didn’t believe in these concepts at all.
After coming out of a session, many of these people were changed forever. They were able to recount some of their past lives and feel and clearly see the relationship those previous lives had to their current life.
In the world of hypnotherapy, past-life regression is almost common, but what’s unique about Newton’s work is his ability to get his subjects to recall memories from being in the womb, and then from before that point as well, to the place between each life.
This was a place where, often, all of the soul family was waiting and welcoming with open arms. Many of the subjects were often surprised to see who was there as some of these people had provided a challenging experience for them in their previous lives.
According to Newton, the hypnotic responses from his subjects in regards to the afterlife provided credible information because of the consistency in their reports.
Often the subjects would even use the same words and graphic depictions of where they were and what they were seeing. Newton had no reason to feel that anyone had a motive to fake their stories, and treated each case as if he was hearing the information for the first time.
In other words, he was not suggesting words or ideas to them, but rather giving them the freedom to express these lives on their own. The similarities between the subjects was quite astounding.
Some of these similarities included,
People’s memories of the initial activities of the soul just after final death on earth parallel the recollections of people returning from a near-death experience (NDE).
Souls are generally anxious to move away from the earth after death, and in many cases may stay a few days for their funeral.
Most souls initially pass through a tunnel towards the light of heaven.
The appearances of physical structures or other familiarities from Earth on the entry of the soul into heaven are intended to ease their transition.
Souls have the capability of projecting former life forms in communication with other souls.
Immediately after their death on earth, souls are met initially in heaven by their spirit guides or someone with whom they were close in their previous life. They meet others that were important to them previously.
Spirit guides continue their protective role in heaven.
Communication in heaven is done through telepathy.
A private form of consciousness between spirits exists through touch.
Ghosts are spirits who have chosen to remain within the earth plane, generally with a high degree of discontent. They can be dealt with by various means, such as exorcism, to get them to stop interfering with human beings.
Souls who were unable to turn aside a human impulse to harm others will go into seclusion upon entering the spirit world and remain for quite a while. The following reincarnation may be as a victim in a karmic cycle of justice.
An arriving soul can enter a place of healing as part of the restoration of the soul after a lifetime on earth.
A life review is conducted, first with spirit guides and later with a Council of Elders.
Souls travel to their initial destination in heaven through a large staging area.
Souls proceed to their cluster, consisting of small groups of soul energy that appear like a cluster of transparent bubbles or translucent bulbs. They contain entities who often shared past lives with the arriving spirit.
Group placement is determined by soul level.
Secondary groups have some contact with a primary group.
Opportunity for socialization and travel exist for souls living in their group.
Once a soul group is formed no new members are added.
Souls are grouped with others of similar characteristics.
At higher levels of soul evolution more independence takes place from group activities.
Spirit lights demonstrate color that correlates with a soul’s state of spiritual evolution.
The spirit world resembles one great schoolhouse with a multitude of classrooms under the direction of teacher-souls who monitor progress.
All souls have a personal guide who may be with them for thousands of years and many lives.
Junior guides are often assigned as well, later in the development of a soul.
Guides can appear as humans as well as spirits.
Most souls in the world today are in an early stage of development.
Spirits can experience two lives on earth at the same time.
A dormant part of our soul remains in heaven during incarnations.
Souls learn the techniques of the creation of physical items by thought, starting with simple assignments.
Souls incarnate on worlds other than the Earth.
The evolution of souls can continue way beyond the level where incarnation takes place.
Souls are reincarnating more frequently in recent centuries, and today would have roughly two lives during the past century.
Souls are not required to reincarnate but considerable pressure is brought to bear by spirit guides when the time is considered right.
Souls go to a place of life selection in order to examine alternative lives to lead.
There is a tendency for spirits to reincarnate in the same geographical area they were in during past lives.
The effort required to overcome a physical disability accelerates spiritual evolution.
Souls learn prior to a new incarnation to recognize future earthly signs from other souls they may encounter on earth with whom they have been close in the spirit world.
Souls leave heaven to enter the body of an infant through a tunnel.
The physical shock of birth is greater than that of death.
Souls can arrive in the infant’s body anytime before, during or slightly after the moment of birth.
Again, not only is this level of similarity and detail fascinating, but many of the thousands of people who were put under this hypnosis had no previous belief of reincarnation, the soul, or source consciousness. Their experiences here changed their minds.
In one instance a woman who had always faced challenges with her father in her current life saw that his soul had actually inhabited the body of the man who was the one who killed her in a past life.
She was able to see how the members of the soul family aren’t always who you might expect. Some people who have caused us the most grief may have been doing so for our soul’s best interest, in order to help us grow.
For some of us, this work may resonate on a deep level. I know for myself while watching a documentary on this subject called, Flipside: A Journey Into The Afterlife, and hearing the people recount their previous lives or the place that was often described as “home,” no part of me doubted anything they were saying for even a second. This information resonated to the very core of my being and just happens to go along quite nicely with my previously held beliefs in terms of reincarnation and the afterlife.
Of course, we can never know for sure, but the topic of past lives and life after death is truly fascinating and can be fun to explore.
I highly recommend the book on this subject, Journey Of Souls: Case Studies Of Life Between Lives by Michael Newton himself. It goes into much more depth and provides transcripts of actual sessions with the hypnotized subjects.
1899 Merck Manual Shows Natural And Food - Based Medicine Once Reigned Supreme + The Healing Web January 31 2023 | From: GreenMedInfo / TheGreatAwakeningReport / Various
At the turn of the 20th century, in NYC, for one dollar, you could have grabbed yourself what was at the time, the most comprehensive medical book ever published in a Western language - one that clearly acknowledges the many ways foods and plants heal serious disease.
The Merck Manual, also known as the The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, is the oldest continuously published English language medical textbook, and the best-selling medical textbook worldwide.
The first edition titled, “Merck’s 1899 Manual of the Materia Medica.” was produced by George Merck, founder of Merck & Co, in New York as a subsidiary of the family company established in Germany in 1668.
Today, Merck & Co. has grown into a multinational corporation with an annual revenue of $43 billion dollars, and hires tens of thousands of employees throughout the world. [Unfortunately, as has happened on many occasions - companies that were founded with good intentions have since been co-opted.]
The 1899 manual was laid out in the following three parts:
1.“All those Simple Medicinal Substances (that is, drugs and chemicals) which are in current and well-established use in the medical practice of this country”
2. “The principal means of treatment for each form of disease, as reported to be in good use with practitioners at the present time.”
3. “The modes of action of the various medicaments [as laid out in Part 1]."
The 1899 manual promised to provide the physicians of the time;
“... a complete Ready-Reference Book covering the entire eligible Materia Medica. A glance over it just before or just after seeing a patient will refresh his memory in a way that will facilitate his coming to a decision.”
Materia Medica is a Latin term for the extant body of collected knowledge about the therapeutic properties of any substance used for healing (i.e., medicines).
Perhaps what is the most striking thing about the first 1899 edition of the Merck Manual is that many of the remedies listed are entirely natural.
It would not be until 1906 that Congress, with the strong support of President Theodore Roosevelt, would pass the Pure Food and Drug Act, which would usher in the era of pharmaceutical medicine, largely consisting of patented, synthetically produced medications.
In 1899, the standard of care included toxic compounds like arsenic and mercury, as well as completely natural ones derived from common plants and foods, but few if any patented drugs.
The Pharmaceutical Industry Has Always Depended on Natural Medicine
While this may be counintertuivive about the origins of what has become, arguably, the world’s most powerful international pharmaceutical company, namely: natural medicine is still the basis for the vast majority of today's blockbuster pharmaceutical products.
In fact, 63% (537 of 847 small molecule-based pharmaceuticals) of all drugs introduced since 1981 were derived from natural products or had a natural product-inspired design.
And perhaps even more noteworthy, of the 155 anti-cancer drugs developed since the 1940's, only one would be considered de novo chemical (with absolutely no relationship to inspiration from a natural chemical compound!)
You can view a fully scanned and text searchable version of the 1899Merck Manual here.
The manual contains reference to hundreds of foods and commonly used natural products, such as arnica, papain, cod liver oil, valerian, camphor and myrrh. [For our readers who have the time and inclination, please list additional natural compounds from the manual in the comments section below this article].
Cannabis, for instance, is listed as a medicine 62 different times, including for the following conditions:
Cannabis Indica: as diuretic in hematuria.
Cannabis Indica: as diuretic in acute and chronic Bright's disease with hematuria.
Cannabis Indica: sometimes useful in chronic cases.
Cannabis Indica: Bladder, Paralysis of...iin retention from spinal disease.
Cannabis Indica: in very chronic cases of Chronic, Bronchitis
Cannabis Indica: Cholera Asiatica.
Cannabis Indica: Chorea: may do good; often increases the choreic movements.
Cannabis Indica: in retention from spinal disease.
Cannabis Indica: Bright’s Disease.
Cannabis Indica: Climacteric Disorders.
Cannabis Indica: Corns
Cannabis Indica: Coughs
Cannabis Indica: in nocturnal delirium occurring in softening of the brain.
Cannabis Indica: Delirium Tremens (associated with Alcoholism)
Consider that the list of remedies in the manual were often food-based.
For example, for Delirium Tremens related to alcoholism, the Merck Manual lists “Beef-tea,” as “most useful,” and “Food: nutritious; more to be depended on than anything else.”
Imagine if a doctor today recommended such “quackery” in todays’ pharmaceutically-dominated paradigm?
As we've discussed previously, even the term "snake oil" comes from the use of snake lipids by Chinese railroad workers as a linament to soothe aching muscles.
This is additionally confirmed through an amazing map of ‘herbal cures’ from 1932released by Slate, which included medicinal plants in common use among pharmacists and the public back then. The map itself states under the heading 'The Service of Pharmacy':
“It is important that the public does not lose sight of the fact that the professions of Pharmacy, Medicine, and Dentistry, each give an essential service, which must not be impaired or destroyed by commercial trends.
The public and the professions will suffer equally if these services are allowed to deteriorate. In pharmacy the public should understand something of the breadth of knowledge required of the pharmacist.
Few people realize the extent to which plants and minerals enter into the practice of pharmacy, and how vital they are to the maintenance of the public health.
It has been stated that upwards of 70 percent of all medicines employed are plant products.”
Flash forward 80 years and we have a medical system which relies almost entirely on patented chemicals and/or biologicals that are far removed from anything resembling the 'back yard farmacy' of yesteryear.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
This map should be shared far and wide and hopefully will shed light on the massive, emergent database of natural substances (there are about 1700 indexed on our website alone) that can be used to treat a staggeringly wide range of health conditions (over 3,000 indexed on our site alone).
Click on the image above to download a high-resolution PDF of the full document
The Great Awakening Report has partnered with Dylan Louis Monroe (@masterconspiracy), the mastermind behind the Deep State Mapping Project in releasing The Healing Web, a map exposing the truth about the health industry, the battles waged against our health, and holistic approaches to treat what ails you.
Please download a copy of The Healing Web to use as a reference and guide in your own personal journey to seek and maintain good health.
The Healing Web is a bi-hemisphered index of holistic and pharmacological remedies for most common illnesses and conditions. It’s a visual aid to illustrate the variety of alternative therapies available, and the central importance of diet in treating all diseases.
Western Medicine, though useful at times, is built on toxic treatments that fail to address the true causes of disease, and lure trusting patients into lifelong treatment plans.
The web includes the historical origins of both systems in the upper corners of the diagram.
An optimal approach to healthcare would utilize the best techniques of both systems. Let the Healing Web guide YOU to find lasting physical and spiritual healing.
DISCLAIMER: These statements are intended to inspire you to pursue your own independent research, and should not be used to diagnose, treat, cure, or prevent any disease. Consult your Higher Self for further guidance.
A majority of the 1st World is presently witnessing a catastrophic state of institutional failure in their primary state-sponsored Medical industries.
Hospitals are being built at breakneck speeds to combat a global health crisis, but in reality, it’s not actually a crisis at all but in fact a masterfully orchestrated plan carried out by a sick Cabal of elite profiteers.
Previously known as “Robber Barons”, their wealth goes all !he way back to Pharaoh.
Over centuries, they’ve studied psychology, black magic and alchemy, and used their advanced occult knowledge against the common man.
In a way the Healing Web is comparing the worst of Big Pharma to the best of Holistic medicine.
That may seem biased at first, but as you come to understand the full history, and that Medicine is partially being employed as a tool for mass extermination, Holistic philosophy is clearly the better choice of first resort.
Diet modification alone could prevent or reverse a majority of diseases, but our institutions have misled us on some of the most fundamental aspects of health & nutrition.
Other foods have been transformed into poison by adding preservatives, and sugar [or toxic chemical sugar replacements.]
Many personal physicians may mean well, but the core of the Medical industry is frightfully corrupt. The interaction between Government, Big Pharma, Big Agra, and Big Food constitutes a perpetual genocide we’ve come to accept as the norm.
Thankfully, we still have a choice. Every condition would benefit from a multifaceted approach to treatment such as a combination of detox, diet, exercise, immune support through supplementation, and energetic and spiritual healing.
A holistic approach can even include a pharmacological treatment, with ancillary natural remedies to minimize side effects.
What is the optimal diet for human health and longevity? Many are struggling to find an answer to this question.
The debate has been polluted with much propaganda and misinformation from every side. Clearly the standard Western diet that most people grew up with was the wrong answer.
Excess sugar and fried food have fueled one of the greatest unacknowledged epidemics man has ever known. Many are switching to a Vegan diet in retaliation to the obvious horrors of factory farming, but is Veganism really the best answer?
The progression of altruistic dieting from Vegan to Fruitarian, to Liquitarian, to Breatharian ends in severe malnutrition unless one miraculously develops supernatural Buddhist abilities.
This is not a rational long term diet plan for ordinary people. Food anchors our souls to the 3D world. To achieve 5D consciousness through starvation is a form of self destruction, and defeats the purpose of this incarnation.
Many who tried Veganism and experienced negative consequences have now gone back to a Carnivorous diet, and recognize that the mainstream push for Veganism may be part of the New World Order’s depopulation agenda.
We have been indoctrinated with a conception of beauty that idealizes anorexia and the malnourishment of women. Are we being soyed down, and fed frankenfood to make us docile and more easy to manage, as part of the same strategy that gave us water fluoridation and atmospheric aerosol injections?
We are living through a war against our personal health being led by the establishment. To survive, we must go back to what we know is real, natural, and tested by time; organic food, sustainable farming, and raw nutrition.
We’ve developed a culinary culture that involves overcooking everything, destroying beneficial enzymes, bacterial cultures, and proteins. This causes poor digestion and malabsorption of nutrients, which can have a negative domino effect leading to greater systemic illnesses.
It’s time lo unlearn everything we’ve been taught by the agencies we thought we could trust. Diet aside, the healing technologies being withheld from the public could extend life close to immortality.
The prospect of eternal life may sound alluring, but it raises logistical capacity concerns.
Does humanity have the maturity yet to adhere to a more ethical population regulation strategy that doesn’t rely on mass deception, or are we as a species nothing more than a swarm of locust, pillaging one continent to the next, consuming planet after planet, leaving barren radioactive ruins in our path? Would we be considered a plague by the rest of the galaxy?
Natural law dictates “kill or be killed”, but how does civilization fit into the equation?
All energy and life force is recycled from something that came before it. We are all one, and simultaneously individual refractions of Source.
The universe embodies the Eastern wisdom of Yin and Yang, not the new age mantra “Love and Light”.
Our mission, beyond survival, is to learn how to coexist in harmony with each other and all other sentient life in the universe, to create, and make progress without it devolving into endless consumption, our current societal model.
World Extreme Weather: Is It Man Or Something Else? January 30 2023 | From: GlobalResearch / Various
Our planet seems to be in a growing crisis in terms of agriculture and crop production related to unusual weather shifts.
Many reports in recent months use the term “extreme weather” to describe record heat across Europe this [Northern Hemisphere] summer, record flooding in US Midwest farm states, or record drought across India and major parts of Africa and China.
Parts of the USA Midwest are undergoing the worst growing conditions since at least the 1980s. In the UK the weather has been ruinous to the grain harvest there.
The crucial question to ask is whether we can assume, as many do, that this is all part of man-made global warming, today renamed climate change, or whether it can be caused by something quite different:
The periodic cycles of solar activity that in the past months have entered what astro-scientists call a “solar minimum.”
If it is due to the latter, we are spending huge sums on addressing a wrong problem, in fact trillions of dollars.
Until this July large parts of India were suffering record drought. Chennai reservoirs were down to 0.2% of capacity over the past two years as a severe heat wave saw 99% less water than a year ago.
Acute water shortages have forced thousands to flee their villages.
Though in early August above-average monsoon seasonal rains relieved the situation in some parts, so far the rainfall is far from adequate to restore empty reservoirs across India.
In China severe drought has left about 800,000 hectares of crops affected in northern China’s Hebei Province with rainfall some 55% below normal.
That comes as a devastation of China’s pig population from the deadly African Swine Fever spreads and crops across the country are being destroyed by a plague of Army Fallworm infestation that is resistant to most weed-killers.
At the same time record rains have devastated agriculture in key growing regions. In the UK excessive rainfall in August has brought the wheat harvest to a halt according to the National Farmers’ Union.
Across the major US Midwest record snowfall in winter, coupled with record rains this spring, have severely delayed plantings for corn and soybeans.
The twelve months through July have been the wettest on record in the Midwest grain belt resulting in millions of acres going unplanted.
In Africa, Zambia is experiencing the worst drought since 1981, and severe drought in other African countries is reported.
Solar Minimum…
The events have been dramatized by various advocacy groups and political parties as proof that man-made global warming - emissions of CO2 from industry, coal plants, cars and the like - are the cause.
We are being inundated with proposals for new taxes in the hundreds of billions of dollars in especially the European Union, taxes that we are told are needed to solve this problem. What if we are focused on the wrong cause-effect relation?
Recent research suggests that we have been too limited in our science and are ignoring what is likely orders of magnitude a greater influence in world weather and its shifts than any manmade emissions.
What is relevant to this discussion is the fact that no linear climate model used by the UN IPCC or any of the hundreds of climate think tanks around the world are able to model what is by far the greatest single factor affecting our weather, the “moody” sun.
What astrophysicists have documented is that our sun - by far the greatest factor for whether we experience heat or cold spells, El Nino Pacific events, or severe volcanic or earthquake activity as in the past months - that the sun undergoes a complex cyclical series of intense activity followed by declining activity, activity commonly known as sunspots or solar eruptions, huge electro-magnetic events.
Typically the sun eruptions come in roughly 11 year cycles of peaks and lows. These cycles overlay longer cycles and relate to the highly complex motion of our solar system in the universe.
Currently since 2018 we are experiencing a period of significant decline in solar activity, a solar minimum. The last such was during 2008-2009.
There is convincing evidence that this minimum will be what is called a Grand Solar Minimum, far more than any in the recent decades. What are observable effects of such cyclical solar minimum periods?
Cosmic Rays and Clouds
According to astrophysicists, when the sun’s magnetic field weakens, the outward pressure of the solar wind decreases.
This allows more cosmic rays to penetrate our planet’s atmosphere. In turn the cosmic rays hitting Earth’s atmosphere create aerosols which, in turn, seed clouds. According to Dr Roy Spencer;
“Clouds are the Earth’s sunshade, and if cloud cover changes for any reason, you have global warming, or global cooling.”
Hurricane Dorian Microwave Beam Proof
This shows proof of a microwave beam, weakening and steering Hurricane Dorian, before it hit the North Carolina coast.
The beam comes from an SBX type megawatt microwave transmitter at a Marine Air Base.
The US navy is not going to be happy about this video. This microwave technology is killing the oceans, by punching hundreds of holes in the ozone layer, every week.
These microwave beams are weapons, killing Mother Nature, herself. We humans, who have awareness of these doomsday technologies, must speak out, and shut them down. Simply disclosing these devices MAY be enough to curtail their use. So please add your voice to help stop the deliberate killing of OUR planet!
The US Government’s National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) says;
“All weather on Earth, from the surface of the planet out into space, begins with the Sun.
Space weather and terrestrial weather (the weather we feel at the surface) are influenced by the small changes the Sun undergoes during its solar cycle.
The most important impact the Sun has on Earth is from the brightness or irradiance of the Sun itself.”
What are the effects of a weaker solar activity, a more dormant cycle as we now experience of less solar energy or irradiance reaching Earth?
In addition to increased cloud coverage globally, the vital jet streams weaken and volcanic activity increases, along with earth quakes, combined with erratic unpredictable weather.
The Earth’s magnetosphere, which normally locks the Jet Stream in place, weakens, and that in turn causes the stable Jet Stream to shift South as it did in January 2019 in North America causing the record cold and snows across the USA Midwest.
In some regions there will be significantly more drought while in others significant flooding with major effect on world food production possible.
The weaker solar activity, known as Solar Minimum, also correlates with a global cooling trend. This has been documented going back centuries and longer.
The current solar cycle, called by NASA the Number 24 Cycle, peaked in early 2014 before starting its measurable decline in annual sunspot activity. The minimum is predicted to take place in 2020. It could last for years. Some predict a new “mini Ice Age.”
The subject is complex and vastly under-researched as we focus instead almost exclusively on man-made changes or possible changes to our weather with simplistic computer models.
If the coming winter in the Northern Hemisphere is anything like the past one, it should prompt us to take this solar component of our climate seriously.
By refusing to promote vigorous new research, we run a real risk in coming years of being unprepared for dramatic harvest failures globally at a time when most OECD governments have decided to eliminate emergency public grain reserves, and our food supply is organized on a “just-in-time” system.
Science is not about “consensus,” but rather about discovering truth, however controversial.
The White Tangata Whenua + Maori Legend: Blonde Mummies Of The South Pacific January 29 2023 | From: YourNZ / AtlanteanGardens / Various
Recently the Northern Advocate published some revised history claiming that white people from Europe settled Aotearoa before Maori came here.
Northern Advocate (NZ Herald): Pre-Maori faces created from skulls, says Northland historian:
“A Northland historian has released what he says are forensic reconstructions of pre-Maori Northlanders that support his theory that Chinese and European seafarers came to New Zealand centuries before Polynesians.
Kaipara based historian Noel Hilliam says a forensic expert from Edinburgh University has reconstructed features using skulls retrieved from heaps of ancient human bones that were once piled in caves at several sites around the Kaipara.
The faces depict a blond woman with Celtic characteristics common in Wales and a man of Mediterranean appearance.
Kaipara skeletons were found with strands of red hair and a London pathologist who examined them in 1997 did not consider them Polynesian.
In a message to Mr Hilliam, the Edinburgh pathologist said his examination of skulls and skeletal remains from four sites showed they were from two races.
“People known in your country as Turehu originated from Wales over 3000 years ago and those known as Waitaha originated from the Mediterranean,” the pathologist said.
“The two skulls you randomly uplifted from one site – the female, which I named Henrietta, is Turehu of 23 years of age and 1.3m tall going on the average height of skeletons I examined. She originates from Wales.
“The Waitaha male is 34 years old 1.65m tall, average among the skeletal remains examined, and originates from the Mediterranean.”
The historian has not disclosed the names of the pathologist and forensic expert because he expected controversy over their findings.”
The Mystery of the Kamanawa Wall
A pyramid in New Zealand? or just a pile of very even blocks of stone. If it is a man made structure, we know it is at least 1800 years old. In 186 AD the Taupo eruption covered a vast area in volcanic ash and pumice, including this mound of stone.
These sorts of claims are not new. From Dargaville and Districts News (Stuff) in 2012: `Greeks got here first’
“New Zealand history is going to be turned on its head when the book To the Ends of the Earth is launched next month, co-author Noel Hilliam says.
The controversial book, written by researcher Maxwell C Hill with additional information from Dargaville shipwreck explorer Noel Hilliam, Gary Cook and John Aldworth, looks at what they say is evidence that Greeks, Spanish and Egyptians travelled to New Zealand before Maori.
The 378-page book explores a variety of evidence from ancient maps to ancient rock formations, giant human skeletons, cave drawings, oral history and a multitude of other physical evidence.
“Our contention is that ancient Greek navigators were the first to sail down under, landing in New Zealand before the Christian era began, to become the first inhabitants of the islands,” Mr Hilliam says.”
Now Hilliam claims it was the Welsh who got here first.
“Noel Hilliam told the Northern Advocate he had found skulls that pre-date Māori.
However Mr Hilliam’s research, which has no academic basis, has been widely criticised.
“The statement that the young adult woman is from Wales is ludicrous. There is no way to find that information out from the skull size and shape, nor is it possible to tell that a person has blue eyes and blonde hair from skeletal features,” University of Otago bio-archaeologist Dr Siân Halcrow told Vice.
Worse, his actions have been condemned as racist and illegal.
“It is the violation of a sacred site. Them raiding urupā and acquiring ancestral heads – they haven’t said where from – makes me really concerned,” Auckland University senior lecturer Dr Ngarino Gabriel Ellis told Vice.
“Taking from urupā, just like from anyone’s [grave], is a violation of our funeral practices. These are our ancestors. They were not intended to be removed and distributed.
“It’s also illegal to go and tamper with anyone’s grave – so why aren’t there criminal charges being pressed?”
Mr Hilliam has refused to name the ‘experts’ he talked to, and told Vice that while he knew he was breaking the law, he did it because the law was unjust.
The Northern Advocate has since removed the article.”
I couldn’t find the article yesterday but it is back on the Herald’s beta site.
“Over the past 30 years a growing a minority of New Zealanders has decided that the first inhabitants of their country had white rather than brown skin. They believe that one or more European peoples emigrated to these islands thousands of years ago, and established a populous and technologically sophisticated civilisation here.
This pigmentopia was invaded and conquered by the ancestors of Māori. The warlike Polynesians slew the white men they found, took the women as wives, and appropriated the indigenes’ greenstone carvings.
Mike Barrington’s article may have talked nonsense about New Zealand history, but it did provide a reasonably accurate narrative of the careers of the country’s pseudo-historians.
Hilliam has made other remarkable claims over the years. In 1982 he said he had found the remains of an old Spanish ship on a beach near Dargaville, but the wreck vanished before he could show it to anybody.
In 2008 he told Radio New Zealand that he had found a Nazi submarine off the Northland coast. The submarine had supposedly left Germany in the last days of the Third Reich, loaded with gold. Hilliam never made good on his promise to reveal the location of the submarine wreck.
The notion of a white tangata whenua promised to relieve Pakeha of their status as latecomers to New Zealand, and to counter Māori talk of historical injustice. But the theory had, and still has, a problem: a complete lack of evidence.
In recent years a series of scholars have run DNA tests on Māori, in an effort to trace their ancestry. These tests confirm that Māori are a Polynesian people, and that Polynesians have their origins in coastal Asia thousands of years ago. There is no genetic evidence for ancient contact between Polynesians and Europeans.
The believers in an ancient white civilisation are undeterred by the lack of evidence for their claims. They insist that a conspiracy of Māori leaders, politically correct academics, cowardly Pākehā politicians and sinister international organisations is working to conceal and destroy the physical legacy of New Zealand’s first inhabitants.
They claim that the stone city in Waipoua forest has been closed to visitors by Department of Conservation staff and local Māori. Elsewhere teams of explosives experts are blowing up the stone houses of the first New Zealanders and sealing burial caves.
Ancient European bones and artefacts are being quietly removed from museums, and roads are being built through the sites of Celtic observatories.”
I guess the Herald will remove the article from their beta site as well.
Maori oral traditions state that, upon arrival in New Zealand, Maori found that there was a large, well-established population already living in the country. The inhabitants were described as having skin complexion that was white to light-ruddy, with eye colors from blue to green to darker tints.
Their hair color ranged from white and golden, with red being predominant in the general population.
The Maori term Pakeha, later used to describe white colonial Europeans, was derived from the ancient name Pakepakeha used to describe the former white population.
Pocket groups of these first inhabitants survived into the 20th century and are well-remembered by old-timers as the red headed, freckle-faced Maoris or Waka blondes.
Scholars probing definitions and development of the Maori term "Pakeha" (Maori name for white people) state the following:
The derivation seems to be from ‘Pakepakeha’ mythical people who are mischievous beings, with fair skin and hair who lived deep in the forest, coming out at night.
Who Inhabited New Zealand Before the Polynesian / Melanesian Maori?
This is one of eleven mummified heads repatriated to New Zealand in 1998 of our earliest known inhabitants, who were referred to by the Maori as 'Kiri-Puwhero" (light-complexioned skin) with hair that was "Uru-Keru" (reddish, golden tinged).
These pre-colonial, mummified Europoid heads should be subjected to DNA analysis.
The ‘Pakepakeha’ are also linked to ‘Patupaiarehe’ by their fair skin and hair. The ‘Patupaiarehe’ had fair skin and beautiful voices, and gave people the secret of fishing with nets.
These creatures’ possess canoes made of reeds, which can change magically into sailing vessels. The ‘Patupaiarehe’ can also be linked to Nahe’s version of Pakeha as an abbreviation of ‘Paakehakeha’, gods of the ocean who had the forms of fish and man (Biggs, 1988).
A New Zealand stamp portrays the pre-Maori Patu-paiarehe people, now relegated to the realm of myth and legend
The coffins seen above were photographed in 1919 high up a cliff-face at a very remote part of New Zealand. Each coffin was hewn-out by stone tools from a single log, like a dugout canoe.
These skeletons display recognisable European physiology. They were already very old when found in isolated country, far from the consecrated ground of a churchyard.
The deceased people were, undoubtedly, the white Ngati Hotu, known in local Maori and European folklore to have hidden from the cannibals for centuries in this inhospitable region.
After the coming of the Polynesian-Melanesian cannibals to New Zealand, the earlier people were hunted to extinction as a food source.
Many of the Patu-paiarehe or Turehu women were forcibly absorbed into the Maori tribes as slaves. Fugitives or survivors amongst the earlier people moved to the very rugged and remote interior of the country and lived in the deep forests or dark caves, many succumbing to lung ailments from hiding out by day and foraging by night.
Ancient Bloodlines and Lost Civilizations
Maori oral traditions state that, upon arrival in New Zealand, they found that there was a large, well-established population already living in the country.
Robert Sepehr is an author, producer and anthropologist specializing in linguistics, archeology, and paleobiology (archeogenetics).
GMOs Are Killing Us: Facts You Probably Don’t Know
January 28 2023 | From: NaturalNews / Various
You’ve probably heard that GMOs are bad, and that’s absolutely accurate – but it’s also an oversimplification.
It’s not like high fructose corn syrup, a toxic ingredient that you can easily avoid by not purchasing foods that are made with it.
The problem is far more complex and insidious, and it’s killing people and animals every day.
When we talk about GMOs, we are referring to genetically modified organisms.
This can be a plant, a microorganism or even an animal – it’s anything with DNA that has been modified via genetic engineering or transgenic technology to create something new that does not occur in nature.
You’re very likely to encounter GMOs in corn and soy in the U.S., and even if you don’t eat those foods in their plain form, their byproducts can be found in nearly every processed food out there.
These plants are created to tolerate being sprayed directly with herbicides and resist certain insects. This means that farmers can – and do – spray them liberally with these dangerous chemicals.
In fact, that’s part of the deal. Many people aren’t aware of the fact that farmers who use GMO seeds form a legal contract with Monsanto to use only their toxic Roundup herbicide.
They’re forced to buy new seeds from Monsanto every year – something that has bankrupted many farmers and led to a slew of suicides in India – and buy deadly Roundup.
This brings us to the next disturbing fact about GMOs that tends to fly under the radar: Roundup isn’t just bad because it contains glyphosate; it contains other ingredients that make it even more toxic.
Glyphosate on its own is unquestionably dangerous, but a proprietary ingredient found in Roundup, polyethoxylated tallow amine, makes it even deadlier.
This is a surfactant that enhances glyphosate’s activity, but it also has the effect of enabling glyphosate to penetrate human skin and be stored inside bone marrow, which is where lymphoma can originate.
Last year, Monsanto was ordered to pay a school groundskeeper with terminal cancer $289 million after Roundup was identified as playing a role in the illness; they face hundreds of similar cancer-related lawsuits.
One study found that these “inert” ingredients in Roundup can be incredibly toxic to humans at concentrations that are even 100,000 times more diluted than the products sold on store shelves.
For its part, Monsanto refuses to disclose the specific composition of Roundup on copyright grounds.
GMOs Don’t Live Up to the Hype
You might think that these downsides are a trade-off for the benefits gained by using GMOs, but the truth is that there isn’t any scientific evidence that the GMOs used today provide better yields, greater nutrition, or improved drought tolerance.
In fact, some studies have found that herbicide use has gone up while crop yields have gone down.
Another big unknown is the long-term safety of GMOs. Many people believe that anything sold to the public must be deemed safe prior to going on the market, but that hasn’t been the case with GMOs.
There has been no long-term epidemiological study to date exploring the long-term effects of GMOs on human health, with the biotech companies themselves behind most of the research that claims GMOs are safe.
The FDA doesn’t test genetically engineered foods for safety, saying that is up to the manufacturer. The food isn’t required to undergo independent pre-market safety tests, and they rely instead on voluntary “consultations” in which biotech firms submit their own studies.
Not surprisingly, studies have shown that industry-funded studies are a lot more likely than independent ones to reach findings that are favorable to the industry. How are they allowed to get away with this?
GMOs are killing us, filling our food supply with unnatural sustenance and prompting toxic glyphosate to be sprayed on our food and make its way into our soil, air and water while the FDA looks the other way.
Glyphosate Worse Than We Could Imagine: “It’s Everywhere” & Monsanto / Bayer Keeps Riding A Path Of Corruption January 27 2023 | From: GlobalResearch / NoMoreFakeNews / Various
Glyphosate residues have been found in tap water, orange juice, children’s urine, breast milk, chips, snacks, beer, wine, cereals, eggs, oatmeal, wheat products, and most conventional foods tested. It’s everywhere, in brief.
As new studies continue to point to a direct link between the widely-used glyphosate herbicide and various forms of cancer, the agribusiness lobby fights ferociously to ignore or discredit evidence of human and other damage.
Related:Roundups other problem: Glyphosate is sourced from controversial mines A second US court jury case just ruled that Monsanto, now a part of the German Bayer AG, must pay $ 81 million in damages to plaintiff Edwin Hardeman who contracted non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma cancer.
The ruling and a line-up of another 11,000 pending cases in US courts going after the effects of glyphosate, have hit Bayer AG hard with the company announcing several thousand layoffs as its stock price plunges.
In a trial in San Francisco the jury was unanimous in their verdict that Monsanto Roundup weed-killer, based on glyphosate, had been responsible for Hardeman’s cancer. His attorneys stated;
“It is clear from Monsanto’s actions that it does not care whether Roundup causes cancer, focusing instead on manipulating public opinion and undermining anyone who raises genuine and legitimate concerns about Roundup.”
It is the second defeat for the lawyers of Monsanto after another jury ruled in 2018 that Glyphosate-based Roundup was responsible for the cancer illness of a California school grounds-keeper who contracted the same form of cancer after daily spraying school grounds with Roundup over years, unprotected.
A new independent study shows that those with highest exposure to glyphosate have a 41% increased risk of developing non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL) cancer.
A meta-analysis of six studies containing nearly 65,000 participants looked at links between glyphosate-based herbicides and immune-suppression, endocrine disruption and genetic alterations.
The authors found “the same key finding: exposure to GBHs (glyphosate-based herbicides) are associated with an increased risk of NHL (Non-Hodgkin’s Lymphoma).”
Further, they stated that glyphosate “alters the gut microbiome,” and that that could “impact the immune system, promote chronic inflammation, and contribute to the susceptibility of invading pathogens.”
Glyphosate also ”may act as an endocrine disrupting chemical because it has been found recently to alter sex hormone production” in both male and female rats.
In a long-term animal study by French scientists under Gilles Eric Seralini, Michael Antoniou and associates, it was demonstrated that even ultra-low levels of glyphosate herbicides cause non-alcoholic liver disease.
The levels the rats were exposed to, per kg of body weight, were far lower than what is allowed in our food supply. According to the Mayo Clinic, today, after four decades or more pervasive use of glyphosate pesticides, 100 million, or 1 out of 3 Americans now have liver disease. These diagnoses are in some as young as 8 years old.
But glyphosate is not only having alarming effects on human health. Soil scientists are beginning to realize the residues of glyphosate application are also having a possibly dramatic effect on soil health and nutrition, effects that can take years to restore.
While most attention is understandably drawn to the human effects of exposure to glyphosate, the most widely used agriculture chemical in the world today, independent scientists are beginning to look at another alarming effect of the agrochemical - its effect on essential soil nutrients.
In a study of the health of soils in the EU, the online journal Politico.eu found that the effects of spraying of glyphosate on the major crops in European agriculture is having disastrous consequences on soil health in addition to killing weeds.
Scientists at Austria’s University of Natural Resources and Life Sciences in Vienna showed that casting activity of earthworms had nearly disappeared from the surface of farmland within three weeks of glyphosate application.
Casting is the process of the worm pushing fertile soils to the surface as they burrow, essential for healthy soil and plant nutrition.
A study at Holland’s Wageningen University of topsoil samples from more than 300 soil sites across the EU found that 83% of the soils contained 1 or more pesticide residues. Not surprisingly,
“Glyphosate and its metabolite AMPA, DDTs (DDT and its metabolites) and broad-spectrum fungicides… were the compounds most frequently found in soil samples and at the highest concentrations.”
The use of various pesticides, above all glyphosate-based ones like Roundup, has exploded over the past four decades across the EU much as across the USA. The agribusiness industry claims that this has been the key to the dramatic rise in farm crop productivity.
However if we look more closely at the data, while average yields of major grains such as rice, wheat and maize have more than doubled since 1960, the use of pesticides like glyphosate-based ones has risen by 15-20-fold. Oddly enough, while the EU requires monitoring of many things, monitoring of pesticide residues in soil is not required at the EU level.
Until recently the effects of heavy use of pesticides such as Roundup have been ignored in scientific research.
Evidence of soil experts is beginning to reveal clear links between use of pesticides such as glyphosate and dramatic drops in soil fertility and the collapse of microbe systems essential to healthy soil. Worms are one of the most essential.
It’s well-established that earthworms play a vital role in healthy soil nutrients. Soils lacking such are soils that deprive us of the essentials we need for healthy diets, a pandemic problem of soil depletion emerging globally over the past four decades, notably the same time frame that use of pesticides has exploded worldwide.
Earthworms are beneficial as they enhance soil nutrient cycling and enhance other beneficial soil micro-organisms, and the concentration of large quantities of nutrients easily assimilable by plants.
The EU puts no limits on how much glyphosate can be put on crops even though it is established that glyphosate can kill specific fungi and bacteria that plants need to suck up nutrients in addition to its effects on earthworms. That is a major blind spot.
Where Now?
What is becoming clearer is the colossal and obviously deliberate official blind eye given to potential dangers of glyphosate-based pesticides by regulatory bodies not only in the EU and the USA, but also in China, which today produces more glyphosate than even Monsanto.
Since the Monsanto Roundup patent expired, Chinese companies, including Syngenta, Zhejiang Xinan Chemical Industrial Group Company, SinoHarvest, and Anhui Huaxing Chemical Industry Company, have emerged as the world’s major producers of the chemical as well as largest consumers, a not good omen for the future of the legendary Chinese cuisine.
Glyphosate is the base chemical component for some 750 different brands of pesticides worldwide, in addition to Monsanto-Bayer’s Roundup.
Glyphosate residues have been found in tap water, orange juice, children’s urine, breast milk, chips, snacks, beer, wine, cereals, eggs, oatmeal, wheat products, and most conventional foods tested. It’s everywhere, in brief.
Despite the overwhelming evidence, however, EU Commission bureaucrats and the USA EPA continue to ignore prudence in not banning the toxic chemical pending thorough independent investigation over longer time.
If I were cynical, I would almost think this continued official support for glyphosate-based herbicides is about more than mere bureaucratic stupidity or ignorance, even more than simply corruption, though that for sure plays a role.
The nutritional quality of our food chain is being systematically destroyed and it is about more than corporate agribusiness profit.
Monsanto / Bayer Keeps Riding A Path Of Corruption
Here’s a ripe fantasy for you. Imagine this - You’re the head of a multi-billion-dollar global corporation.
You know your most famous, best-selling product is toxic and can cause cancer. It’s an herbicide used around the world - not only in public locations, but even by people spraying their own lawns.
Your company has recently lost law suits, with gigantic payout penalties, because you covered up what you knew: the herbicide is carcinogenic.
A fearless reporter has written articles, and now a book, exposing your company. What to do about her?
Among other actions, talk to Google. Maybe they can help. They’re like you. They’re experts in cover-ups.
Wait. This isn’t a fantasy. It’s real. A real newspaper, The Guardian, has the details. Here are quotes from their new blistering investigation:
“Monsanto operated a ‘fusion center’ to monitor and discredit journalists and activists, and targeted a reporter who wrote a critical book on the company, documents reveal.”
“The records reviewed by the Guardian show Monsanto adopted a multi-pronged strategy to target Carey Gillam (twitter), a Reuters journalist who investigated the company’s weedkiller and its links to cancer.
Monsanto, now owned by the German pharmaceutical corporation Bayer, also monitored a not-for-profit food research organization through its ‘intelligence fusion center’, a term that the FBI and other law enforcement agencies use for operations focused on surveillance and terrorism.”
“Monsanto paid Google to promote search results for ‘Monsanto Glyphosate Carey Gillam’ that criticized her work.”
“The internal [company] communications add fuel to the ongoing claims in court that Monsanto has ‘bullied’ critics and scientists and worked to conceal the dangers of glyphosate, the world’s most widely used herbicide [Roundup].
In the last year, two US juries have ruled that Monsanto was liable for plaintiffs’ non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL), a blood cancer, and ordered the corporation to pay significant sums to cancer patients…”
“’I’ve always known that Monsanto didn’t like my work … and worked to pressure editors and silence me,’ Gillam…said in an interview. ‘But I never imagined a multi-billion dollar company would actually spend so much time and energy and personnel on me. It’s astonishing.’”
“Monsanto had a ‘Carey Gillam Book’ spreadsheet, with more than 20 actions dedicated to opposing her book before its publication, including working to ‘Engage Pro-Science Third Parties’ in criticisms, and partnering with ‘SEO experts’ (search engine optimization), to spread its attacks.
The company’s marketing strategy involved labeling Gillam and other critics as ‘anti-glyphosate activists and pro-organic capitalist organizations’.”
“Gillam, who worked at the international news agency Reuters for 17 years, told the Guardian that a flurry of negative reviews appeared on Amazon just after the official publication of Whitewash [her book about Monsanto], many seeming to repeat nearly identical talking points.”
“’This is my first book. It’s just been released. It’s got glowing reviews from professional book reviewers,’ she said. But on Amazon, ‘They were saying horrible things about me … It was very upsetting but I knew it was fake and it was engineered by the industry. But I don’t know that other people knew that’.”
We’re talking about reality-construction here. Or should I say, reconstruction. Companies that can manipulate the ranking of search results online, and customer reviews, and professional reviews, and science, paint over the truth with lies, and the public believes what it is permitted to see.
That’s a pretty good description of tons of what is called Fake News.
“Well, we don’t like what this reporter is doing because it exposes us as naked and culpable and criminal, so let’s hide and defame the reporter’s work.
Let’s move a cloud over it. In time, the reporter’s work will fade out, and we’ll still be here. We’ll keep pounding out the notion that we’re doing good, we’re devoted to public service, we’re providing a marvelous product, we’re cutting-edge researchers, and so on.
Our product causes cancer? That’s ridiculous. We would never sell such a product. We’re fine people…”
The one big thing this company has going for it? A major segment of the public doesn’t want to believe something so visible and huge (the company) is committing evil acts left and right, out in the open.
A company isn’t like a deranged individual with a gun who walks into a store and shoots people. No. A company is an organized and competent and polite entity that BELONGS.
It’s part and parcel of the COMMUNITY. The idea that the company could be guilty of destroying and maiming life on a continuing basis…that would be tantamount to saying it is an organized-crime operation - which is absurd.
Yes. It’s absurd. Until it’s shown to be true.
And then, on top of it all, suppose the government, which has the resources and the laws and the agencies to bring this company to justice doesn’t lift a finger, but in fact supports the company with its own official brand of fake news?
Why, that’s a…a conspiracy. Yes. The dreaded word.
Another absurdity. Until it’s shown to be true by the simple act of opening one’s eyes and looking.
Shall we take this a step further? Why not? In for a penny, in for a pound. We’re entering a new phase in the battle to expose high-level, society-wide, institutional crimes.
They will be accused of fomenting violence. In order to “protect the community” (where have we heard that before?), there must be a limiter and a monitor on information.
The public must be guarded against false news. Righteous censorship must prevail. For the greater good, the 1st Amendment must undergo a reformation.
To understand this, think “money laundering.” Criminal organizations, like drug cartels, have so much cash on hand they have to find ways to hide it. So they funnel it into friendly banks and legitimate businesses and shell corporations.
Likewise, with the advent and expansion of the Web, there is so much information exposing high-level crimes, it must be hidden - but certainly not by its authors.
Agencies of government and secret corporate units and social media giants must conceal this information by obscuring it and defaming it and dead-ending it and blacking it out and blaming it for inspiring heinous crimes.
That’s the laundering operation, and it extends to every true conspiracy.
A final note for now - here’s a wrinkle on the laundering campaign. In the defunct subject called Logic, it’s called the Straw Man fallacy.
You build up a patently ridiculous icon to represent a wide field of information, you knock down that icon, and then you claim it invalidates the whole field.
For example, some pathetic paid agent publishes a piece claiming JFK never died in 1963, he’s living under the name, Jack Kenn, in Brooklyn, on Oswald Street.
A paid blogger jumps on this “conspiracy theory,” and in the process declares that all conspiracy theorists are lunatics. The one becomes the many.
It’s a version of “we’re all normal people living normal lives and here are disruptors who want to take us off course into a storm and make us believe that official truth is different from actual truth.”
I have news. Millions and millions and millions of people are way past that moronic construction, and they aren’t turning back.
The Secret And Hidden Agenda Of Language: Why Many Words Are Magic Spells January 26 2023 | From: Omnithought / Various
According to research at Cambrigde Uinervtisy, it deosn’t mttaer in waht oredr the ltteers in a wrod are, the olny iprmoetnt tihng is taht the frist and lsat ltteer be at the rghit pclae.
The rset can be a toatl mses and you can sitll raed it wouthit a porbelm. Tihs is bcuseae the huamn mnid deos not raed ervey lteter by istlef, but the wrod as a wlohe.
Spelling: We Spell Words to Pronounce a [Prison] Sentence or Term
The first thing you learn when you go to school is how to spell. Words are spelled to create a sentence of terms. Think of a jail sentence or a prison term.
The Wyrd sisters in Greek mythology were Fates or witches who controlled the fates of man. In our language we use curse words and cursive writing. We cuss and dis-cuss. Words have meaning and (are) mean things especially cross words.
They can be used to make a point. We use a “con” verse to converse in order to keep us off course in our dis-course as a phrase frays. We use catch words. A story is a spiel or a spell. It is all part of the gospel of the Godspell or God’s spell.
Books contain chapters. What is a chapter? A chapter is a secret society or religious order, like the Knights Templar.
A chapter contains many pages. What is a page? A page is an understudy and in service to the queen and king, as in pages and squires, a knight who is well versed in magic and is more or less a soldier or trained assassin.
To page someone is to summons them. Pages summon demons to enslave or imprison our souls. After all, a page does contain many sentences. A jail sentence is served in a prison ward.
And indeed a sentence is created by words that are spelled out by using letters. A letter is someone who allows something to happen or someone who does something for some one else, like a bloodletter.
Languid Language
We languish in our languid language. Languid means “weak and lacking spirit or void of animation, lifeless” and languish which means “to lose strength or animation; be or become dull, feeble or spiritless; lackadaisical, listless”.
How are we imprisoned by our language? Think about a book. The word book as a verb means to arrest or detain - “book ’em, Danno”.
In fact, the Latin word for book is “liber”, which is where we get our word “library” and also the word “liberty”. You can book a reservation which means you’re paying for the ownership of something in advance. You can book or place a bet on a game or race with your bookie.
Yes, there is a bet being placed on a race - and it is the human race and the game is the game of life. It is the main bet or the alpha bet. In a group of monkeys, the alpha monkey is the primary monkey or the one in control.
There’s a song called Spirits in the Material World from an album named Ghost in the Machine. The lyrics proclaim:
“Our so-called leaders speak. With words they try to jail ya. They subjugate the meek. Where do the answers lie when we live from day to day? We are spirits in a material world.”
The song was performed by a group appropriately named, The Police. The song - and an entire album by Sting, the lead singer, entitled The Soul Cages - refers to how we are spirits imprisoned in an earthly body.
Aoccdrnig to rscheearch at Cmabrigde Uinervtisy, it deosn’t mttaer in waht oredr the ltteers in a wrod are, the olny iprmoetnt tihng is taht the frist and lsat ltteer be at the rghit pclae. The rset can be a toatl mses and you can sitll raed it wouthit a porbelm. Tihs is bcuseae the huamn mnid deos not raed ervey lteter by istlef, but the wrod as a wlohe.
Words Mean Things
Most words have multiple meanings and synonyms not to mention many anagrams which the subconscious mind can recognize. Factor in its homophones such as “there”, “they’re”, and “their” and it can get quite confusing to keep track.
What effect does that have when words with almost opposite meanings are homophones.
Think about “know” and “no”. Knowledge is considered a very positive word yet it is linked phonetically with the most negative word in our language. So when you say “I know this to be true” are you partiallly negating its reality?
Consider the above statement in which the letters of the words have been rearranged, yet you still should be able to read it without problem.
This means your subconscious mind should also relate multiple meanings to words have many anagrams. So it shouldn’t be any problem to associate God as good, the devil as evil. Now consider the following word relationships: live, evil; god, dog; love, evol.
Pronouncing the words has a pronounced effect. The science of cymatics shows how all spoken sounds take on a vibratory geometry or shape like how you can blow smoke rings by forming your mouth into the shape of the ‘O’. The tibetan monks show how sound can be used to form geometric patterns in a plate of sand particles. So the spoken word can indeed create reality.
Also consider the mind’s ability to combine words and sounds. When someone sneezes you feel customarily obligated to say “Bless you”. But if you sound out the syllables does your subconscious mind also make the connection to the phrase “Be less, you”.
So the very act of blessing someone can also be subconsciously telling them to be less. This is spell casting.
How are we being programmed through our language to go to the sun or hell? Hello?!!!! Helios was the Greek name for the sun. The sun in English as well as other languages such as Latin, is called Sol. We are all said to be souls or to have a soul (Sol). We have a solar plexus and our feet have soles.
Hu was one of the twelve gods in the Egyptian stellar cult which could explain why we are human. Colors and hues originate from the light of the sun. Politicians encourage soldiers or soldiers to go to war for God and country. Of course, when they die they will go to another dimension (die men sun).
Have you ever wondered why we use the word hello to greet each other? After all, the word can be reduced to hell, the fiery place of eternal punishment and the suffix -o which means “associated with”.
In Greek mythology, Helios, which means “sun”, was the God of the Sun. Is it just a coincidence that you have a soul and that our sun is called Sol?
If so, why do we call those who die in battle soldiers or sol diers? Is that why we say “good morning” when the sun rises - because it is good to see the sun because it gives us life, but we are mourning those who sacrificed their souls to make it possible. Why do we call our male offspring sons? You are called a person. Is it because you pertain to the sun?
Words are defined in a dictionary - dick-shun-nary. Two of the three syllables are negative sounds and theother is a derogative slang term. Synonyms and antonyms are listed in a thesaurus.
‘The’, from the greek ‘theos’, is the root of the-ology, the study of ‘god’ and ‘saurus’ means ‘lizard’. A thesaurus literally means ‘lizard god’. How many names for government entities start with a negative prefix. The word nation is nay-shun. The UN, Un-ited nations, NATO, NASI party, NASA, Norad, Unesco, NASCAR, NATAS, and I’m sure you can come up with others.
How to Ruin a Language with Rune Magic
Do some of the letters or building blocks of our language contain within them a blueprint for the control and possession of our spirits? English has Germanic origins and it is likely that the english letters have their roots in the Germanic runes which were used for magic and casting spells.
From Wikipedia on rune magic: “In 1990, Stephan Grundy, a.k.a. Kveldulf Gundarsson, described runic magic as the active principle as opposed to passive interpretations based on runic divination.
He held that runic magic is more active than the allegedly shamanic practice of seid practiced by the Seiðkona. Runic magic, he states, uses the runes to affect the world outside based on the archetypes they represent.
Most of Gundarsson’s runic magic entails being in possession of a physical entity that is engraved with any or all of the individual runes or “staves”, so as to practically work with their energies.
The individual runes are reddened with either blood, dyes, or paints. The act of possessing the stave in its final form serves the purpose of affecting the world of form with “the rune might” of that particular stave. After use, the staves are discarded or destroyed.
Gundarsson holds that each rune has a certain sound to it, to be chanted or sung; the sound has in common the phonetic value by which it is represented. This act of singing or chanting is supposed to have more or less the same effect of using the staves in their physical form.
Many of the letters of the English alphabet come directly from the Germanic Runes which were used for magic and spell casting and for causing ‘ruin’. Look at how many English letters you can identify from the Elder Futhark rune set.
The word “grammar” comes from grammars which were old Latin books on syntax and diction. The ancient magic books of Europe which contained instructions to summon demons were known as the Grimoires, French word for “grammar”.
A “grimoire” or spellbook is a derivative of the french word “grammaire”. The pronunciation and sound of words affects the matter around us. The science of cymatics is the study of sound vibration on matter and it has been demonstrated with sand on plates that vibration caan cause geometric patterns.
The ancient Goetia spellbooks were used for conjuring up demons and each demon had its own sigil and name.
“IT” & The Creature from the Subconscious “ID”
Stephen King captured the hearts of America with the release of his blockbuster smash hit book, “It”. The video features the menacing face of a clown while the book reveals the clown’s head as a skull with stars in the eye sockets.
“Your every fear – all in the deadly enemy. It can be anything, a fanged monster that won’t stay on the movie screen, something ominous lurking in the basement or around the next corner. No matter what your biggest fear is, no one knows IT better than Stephen King…
The force takes the shape of a clown, but it isn’t clowning around. Instead, it terrorizes youngsters with their innermost fears, bringing them to untimely doom – until a group of wily neighborhood kids fight back. Thirty years later it resurfaces: meaner, angrier. And the friends who vividly remember the terrors of their youth reunite to make a desperate final stand against it.”
In an interview, King admits he was possessed during the writing of the book.
Let “It”Be & Make “It”So
Sigmund Freud, the father of psychology, invented a model of the psyche which contained three parts to the self: the ego (conscious mind), the superego (superconscious mind) and what he termed the “id” or the subconscious mind. This was the realm of our fears: scary monsters and demons.
This id was considered a sort of third person subsistent to the conscious and superconscious mind. Of course, we use the word “it” as a sort of third “person” as well in our use of speech. And, of course, subconsciously we have been programmed to accept the abbreviated “ID” as our identity.
We unknowingly give power to this creature and help create “it” every day with our thought and speech. We watch the horor movie “It” by Stephen King and associate all our deep dark subconscious fears with “IT”.
Likewise with the word “thing” (‘everything’. ‘anything’, and ‘nothing’ or no thing) and the use of ambiguous words such as ‘they’ (THEY live), ‘them’ (“If you can’t beat ’em join them”).
We chant the chorus to the song Let It Be over and over again. And it’s no coincidence that IT is the acronym that has been curently assigned to the Information Technology field, or computers, for IT very well may be an artificial intelligence or computer.
We really need to learn to speak with a more conscious language in mind, ever aware of how we think our thoughts in our minds and how we word our sentences!
“S”- Lang
Consider the English letter ‘S‘. First of all, it looks like a snake or serpent - one that has risen up and is ready to strike or if viewed from overhead it looks like one that is perhaps crawling along. In two-dimensional space, it looks like a sideways wave and in 3-D space it looks like a spiral, both paths that energy follows.
The letter ‘s’ is used in English to denote “possession”, which is Satan’s specialty, by placing it at the end of a word with an apostrophe. Plurality or the concept of multiplication or creation, is achieved by appending an ‘s’ or ‘es’ to a word.
These two facts, coupled with the sheer number of words in our language means the ‘S’ sound is one of the most, if not single most, frequently uttered sounds in our speech.
Although the vowels are used frequently, they have more than one sound associated with them, a long and short sound.
There are probably more esses used in our speech than any other sound. Virtually every sentence we speak contains one or more of these hissing sounds. It would not be accurate to say we sound like hissing snakes when we speak, but our incessant hissing probably reminds us of it at some level subconsciously.
Not only does the letter ‘S’ physically represent the snake or serpent, phonetically it even sounds like a snake!! It sounds exactly like the hissing sound a snake makes – sssssssss – when it “shakes” its tail. The word hiss even ends in a double-s.
And, of course, the words snake and serpent are both s-words as well as Satan, who the Bible says took the form of a snake. He was said to have told mankind a secret - that man would not die if he ate of the fruit.
Of course, when you want to tell someone a secret you say, “pssssssst, come here…” or if you want to keep a secret you say “Shhhhhhhhhhhhh!!“. The dollar sign, $, is the standard symbol for English currency.
Money is said to be the root of all evil. Not only does the ‘S’ look like a snake (Satan), and sound like a snake, which is known for shedding its skin, but nearly all words that begin with the letter ‘s’ have a negative connotation associated with them. That is why they can be considered s-words, or swords, because they can kill and injure like a sword.
These s-words are a seal or stamp associated with Satan, Satan’s Slang or s-lang. The word lang is defined in the dictionary as an abbreviation for the word “language”.
Satan, the snake or serpent also known as Set, slithers about striving to snatch, steal, or strip us of our souls or spirits and is obsessed with possessing or seizing them.
He, or she, is subtle, sly, sneaky, slick, slippery, scaly, secretive, scary, spins, spirals or screws into your soul and possesses you and seizes your spirit.
Speech is his peach and when we speak, Satan is at his peak as far as deception is concerned. The words “possesses”, “obsesses”, “seizes” contain a multiple s-sound and are words pertaining to control.
The word ess, which is defined as the pronunciation for the letter ‘s’, becomes the word esse when a silent ‘e’ is added. The word esse means “to be” which is where we get the word essence and the word essay which is sort of a written speech and comes from the Old French esai which means “to put to a test” which is what Satan did to Jesus in the wilder-ness.
The suffix “-ness” also means a state of being, like loneliness or business. It’s interesting that the Loch Ness in Scotland is said to contain a serpent creature named “Nessie” which nests there.
Yes, Satan certainly is a “Busy Ness” when it comes to the business world and show business. And he specializes in monkey business. One should keep this in mind before wishing for good-ness.
Shit! I, mean, Sheesh! It is not easy to think of positive s-words and double “ss” words are even worse. The swastika resembles two esses and the word ‘swastika’ has two of them in number.
The Nazis had the “SS” and the ‘ss’ logo which looked like lightening bolts.
The far reaching extent in which the spell our language has cast on us can be seen in the every day usage of cliche. Our languages are saturated with what we like to call killer words and phrases because that’s what they do. Englishmen use the word bloody all the time… bloody well right, they do!!! Some women are considered drop deadgorgeous… and when they are dressed to kill, they are to die for. She was a dead ringer for Marilyn Monroe.
If looks could kill they would because she will take your breath away.
Wouldn’t you just kill for a date with her? Sometimes she really gets under my skin and burns me up, but if anyone tries to hurt her, they would have to go“over my dead body because I will punch their lights out if they get near her. I’m serious as a heart attack. I’m dead serious.
She can be as mean as a snake at times, but she really knew how to kill ‘em with kindness. I was dead set for her. I could have just died right there. I mean, I felt like I had just died and gone to heaven.
Eat your heart out. She was a live wire, but at least I would go out in a blaze of glory.
I don’t want to beat a dead horse, but she really took me for a ride. Of course, I wore my heart on my sleeve the whole time, but I was scared to death I might lose her because you really have to keep your eyes peeled to find a good one. Not to be a killjoy, but I’m dead to the world around most women, dead as a doorknob.
Ok, that was overkill and painful to read, but it did make a point. Think about the terms we use when we wish good luck to others. “Break a leg, kid” or “Knock ‘em dead!” Or if someone borrows something from us we say, “Go ahead, knock yourself out.” Even time is not immune to our sadistic ways…”time to kill”, “just killing time”.
Why do Christians conclude their prayers by invoking the name of an Egyptian deity, Amen, who had the body of a man and a ram’s head when Satan is depicted as a horned god having a goat’s head?
Why does the American dollar bill (known as a buck) have an Egyptian pyramid on its reverse side accompanied by the Latin phrase “Anuuit Coeptis Novus Ordo Seclorum” which can be translated “Announcing the Birth of a New World Order”?
Why does the American military wear a chevron as an insignia patch when the word derives from the French word chevre, which means “goat”, and On, the Egyptian City of the Sun?
If the word God traces back to the Indo-European root “ghut-” or the German “gott”, why does the changing of the vowel from a short sound to a long sound render the word “goat”?
Why does Christmas, the birthday of the Son of God, coincide with the birthday of the Sun of God at the winter solstice, the three days when the sun is at its lowest point on the Southern Cross, appears to stand still for three days, and then rises or is born again?
Is this why Easter is celebrated during the Spring Equinox when the East Star, the Sun, has risen? Why is Santa an anagram for Satan? What exactly does Old Nick really mean? And what is a jingle bell?
Why do we have company and product names like Chevron, Capri Sun, Shiner Bock, Star Bucks, and Sears and Roebuck? What is a Sun Kist or a Star Kist? Why are sports contests called ball games and why do we idolize rock stars such as Kid Rock?
The genre of Horror films possesses other “creature features” with “It” in the title. There was “It Lives!”, “It Lives Again”, “It Came From the Sea”, “It Came From Outer Space”, and “It’s Alive!” which is the expression Doctor Frankenstein made famous when he brought his monster to life.
From the time we were young, we have been told over and over again that IT is a scary creature that this association has become deeply embedded within the recesses of our mind.
On the Adamms Family, Cousin Itt was a monster. Itt communicated via a high speed gibberish that only members of the Addams family seemed to understand.
Cousin Itt’s voice was provided by sound-effects engineer Tony Magro, who created Itt’s garbled responses by mouthing gibberish into a tape recorder, with a “ppffft and a thhhhhttt” added for good measure, and then accelerating the tape’s recording speed.
The eyes have it. What do the eyes have? What or who is it? The eyes are the windows to the soul. In Saturday Night Live, Dana Carvey played the Church Lady who asked, “Could IT be… Satan?”
That IT refers to Satan can seen in the phrase “when It rains, It pours.” Satan, the goat God, is also known as Pan, the Piper. The word gote, a variant spelling of goat, means a channel or pipe for water and comes from the Old English word geotan which means “to pour”! So when It reigns, It pours.
When children play hide and seek, someone always has to be “it”. All the other children run and hide from whoever’s “it”. “It” then goes roaming around trying to find and capture whoever’s not “it”. When someone is found they are tagged as the new “it” - “Tag, you’re it!!”
The Beatles’ Paul McCartney said the idea for the song “Let it Be” came to him in a dream. He chants the line over and over and we all sing along almost willing it into existence.
Every time the song is played on the radio, thousands and thousands are sending forth thought and sound vibrations into the air. We use the word “it” in our language over and over all the time. Could it be possible to manifest a creature from the id, or from the subconscious? Think of these songs: Bread’s “Make it with you”,
The Scorpions “Make it Real”:
“…Make it real, not fantasy
Did you ever have a secret yearning?
Don’t you know it could come true?
Now’s the time to set wheels turning
To open up your life for you
As you know there’s always good and evil
Make your choice, Don’t be blind
Open up your mind and don’t be trivial
There’s a whole new world to find
Make it real, not fantasy…”
The Michael Jackson song “Who is it?”
“…(Who is it?)
It is a friend of mine
(Who is it?)
Is it my brother?
(Who is it?)
Somebody hurt my soul
(Who is it?)
I can’t take this stuff no more…”
In this song, Michael explains who IT is:
“Can you feel it in the air
Ghosts be hiding everywhere
I’m gonna be
Exactly what you wanna see
It’s you who’s haunting me
You’re warning me
To be the stranger
In your life
Am I amusing you
Or just confusing you?
Am I the beast
You visualized?
And if you wanna to see
Eccentricities
I’ll be grotesque
Before your eyes
Let them all materialize
Is that scary for you, baby
Am I scary for you, oh
Is it scary for you, baby
Is it scary for you?”
How about songs like Mariah Carey’s Make It Happen or Bread’s Make It with You? Star Trek’s Captain Picard says “Make it so.”
People do things “just for the hell of it”. Believe it. Keep it real. To hell with it!!! Keep it up. Let it ride. Pass it on. Get with it.
Are you with it? Go for it. Hop to it. Bring it on. Get it together. Play it again, Sam. There’s something to it. Check it out. Figure it out. I love it!! When someone dies, “I guess that was it”. Live it up. Let it go. Do you get it? i get it! How’s it going? It’s going good! How’s it hanging? Don’t let it end. Who can it be now? It’s a wonderful life (the ‘i deal’ life). Let’s make it last. You’ve got it made. Give it a try. Grin and bear it. It just so happens. Leave it alone. Give it a rest. How sweet it is. It’s what you make it. I can see it in your eyes. Get it together. What is it? Get over it. The devil made me do it. Whatever it takes. Now you see it, now you don’t. Cut it out. Whoomp, there it is.
I’m not going to stand for it. Take it away boys. It looks so real. Say it ain’t so. Give it up. It could happen to you. It can’t be true (it always lies). I can feel it in my bones. It’s a mystery. Give it everything you’ve got.
It’s all in your head. I can’t get it out of my head. It’s in the way that you use it. Get it, got it? Good. Could it be? Don’t even try it. Sit on it.
The Energizer bunny took the world by storm in one of the best advertising campaigns in history.
The slogan which was for batteries that create energy was “It keeps going and going…” and became a household phrase for many years. Alka Seltzer encourages us to “Try it, you’ll like it!” Compaq asks the question, “Has it changed your life yet?” And American Express admonishes us to “Don’t Leave Home without It.”
The company Sobe had this ad on their web site encouraging us to “get it up” and to “keep it up”.
The Lexicon of Love
we all “fall” inlove sometimes
blinded by love
from make up to break up
love is the drug
i got a crush on you
i just died in your arms tonight
crazy for you
dying to be with you
hurts so bad
i gave her my heart
smitten
swoon
addicted to love
take my breath away
i’m lost without your love
breaking up is hard to do
you put a spell on me, under her spell, spellbound
love hurts, love bites, love stinks, lovestruck baby
lovefool
lovegame
love is a battlefield
drunk in love
stole/captured my heart/soul
dazed and confused
cupid shoots an arrow through the heart
poison arrow
why do fools fall in love
how can you men a “broken heart”
heartbreak hotel
heartbreaker
unbreak my heart
heart skips a beat
heart attack
killer looks
over the moon
all’s fair in love and war
50% marriages end in divorce
Everything We Eat & Drink Is Completely Controlled By These Ten Companies + Secret Ingredients January 25 2023 | From: CollectiveEvolution / SecretIngredients / Various
Scour the aisles of the grocery store, and you may be astonished to find just how many types of Pringles there are out there.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Oxfam International created the infographic that exposes an inconceivable reality: Just 10 main corporations manufacture the majority of what we purchase at the market.
“What we did is we took certain issues … [and] we saw the kind of impacts they had on the ground,”Chris Jochnick of Oxfam told NPR.
“We released reports about those issues and those impacts and how they’re tied to the 10 largest food and beverage companies.
And then we pushed the companies to begin to address them.”.
You may not normally associate makers of soda with makers of granola bars, but seeing these unlikely ties that form the “Big 10” of the food and beverage industry controlling what we put in our carts proves just how easy it is to be duped by the American [Western] food system.
For instance, PepsiCo produces Quaker granola bars, while Nestlé makes frozen California Pizza Kitchen pies.
Pineapple Fanta doesn’t come from a tropical island at all, but is canned at the Coca-Cola factory, just like Barq’s root beer.
“These corporations are so powerful that their policies can have a major impact on the diets and working conditions of people worldwide, as well as on the environment,” noted Alexander E.M. Hess in USA Today.
The fact that you can count on just two hands who controls our groceries is a bizarre thought, but a much-needed realization.
They include: PepsiCo, General Mills, Kellogg’s, Associated British Foods, Mondēlez (formerly Kraft Foods), Mars, Danone, Unilever, Coca-Cola, and Nestle.
Even more disturbing is the fact that it’s not just the junk food that’s involved.
These giant corporations make it extremely difficult for startups and small businesses to compete at all.
Furthermore, while OxFam America only examined the top-earning companies for its campaign, natural brands have been a part of big buyouts, too.
So while you may opt for brands you consider to be better choices, liked Naked Juice and Garden of Eatin’ all-natural chips, many of our favourite alternatives still cost more but are now owned by the very companies we’re trying to avoid, like Coca-Cola and General Mills.
Also disturbing is the environmental impact these companies are having on the health of our planet.
As Business Insiderreported, “the Big 10 emitted 263.7 million tons of greenhouse gas emissions in 2013 and if the companies were a nation, it would be the 25th most polluting country in the world.”
To take action, you can help by steering clear of the Big 10 altogether.
That means being aware of everything they manufacture, and ensuring you don’t buy any of those products.
Choose to shop at your local farmers’ markets, and continue to do your research when it comes to the small-scale brands you love, because you never know when they may get bought out, too.
While the debate rages on about GMOs and pesticides, this powerful film by Amy Hart and Jeffrey Smith, shares remarkable stories of people who regain their health after discovering the secret ingredients in their food and making a bold commitment to avoid them.
The secret ingredients in our food may be a lead driver of our obesity, infertility, cancer, digestive problems, autism, brain fog, skin conditions, gluten sensitivity, allergies, fatigue, anxiety, and many other conditions.
Meet more than a dozen people whose turned around serious health conditions after adopting a diet that avoids genetically modified organisms (GMOs) and food sprayed with toxic herbicides like Roundup. Learn from leading physicians who say that these are not coincidences.
They see illness and recovery like this every day in their practice. And listen to the scientists who explain why.
At the heart of the story is Kathleen DiChiara and her family of five who were collectively struggling with 21 chronic diseases
They were like many other families – despite living a healthy lifestyle and making a point to exercise and ‘eat right’ – they were constantly struggling with one condition after another.
When Kathleen was faced with a severe health crisis, she became determined to figure out what was causing these conditions.
Everything changed when she identified the secret ingredients that were keeping them a perpetual state of illness – and eliminated them from their kitchen.
The results were dramatic. Kathleen’s experience is not uncommon.
The film shares many other powerful stories of people who regained their health after changing to an all organic diet, free of GMOs, Roundup and other toxic pesticides.
Skin and digestive conditions disappear; cancer patients now have a clean bill of health; autistic children are now thriving; infertile couples now have healthy babies.
These experiences are backed up by physicians, scientists and experts who explain the science, and the political history, of GMOs and Roundup.
#TheStorm - How To Prepare For A Global Corruption Purge? January 24 2023 | From: MartinGeddes / Various In the last few weeks my thoughts have drifted towards the events of this season that are going to shake our world.
We have seen all the pieces being put in place for a mass justice event in the USA - the like of which has never been encountered before.
Here in the late 2010s, it is arguable that we are seeing the decline and end of Globalism, together with many supporting institutions and doctrines.
Whilst the counter-trend is labelled Nationalism by the media, it is better seen as anti-authoritarianism. The demand is for power be held closer to the people, rather than by an unaccountable political establishment.
Anti-globalism is the narrative that joins together otherwise seemingly disparate events - mass protests in Hong Kong, Brexit in the UK, a "cold" civil war in France, a new government in Brazil, and the Trump administration in the USA.
Working people are tired of extreme wealth disparities, declining standards of living, and mass migration causing cultural upheaval.
Most of all, ordinary people demand and end to their exploitation through endemic corruption. Specifically, a two-tier justice system has evolved where a privileged class can easily evade consequences for their thieving behaviour.
This powerful stateless mafia - which controls many important political, financial, media and industrial institutions - now faces removal and justice.
Now that the Mueller investigation has collapsed into nothing of consequence.
There are at least six major scandals about to break in Washington DC:
1. Pedogate - Epstein Island and the blackmail operations associated with it (NXIVM, SNCTM); UK royal family's involvement plus MI6; Israel and Mossad's dirty role; Hollywood's elite (notably at Disney) are up to their necks in this filth.
2. Spygate - Obama personally authorising illegal FISA spying on the Trump administration, before and after the election. Draws FVYE spy network nations into the scandal, especially Britain.
3. Russiagate failed coup attempt - Brennen, Clapper, Comey, Ohr, etc. - are all going to hang for treason. Italy has already cleaned house on this one, having been implicated in the set-up.
4. Election fraud in 2016 and 2018 by Democratic party (and for many years before). May trigger the unseating of many in the House and special elections.
5. Clinton Foundation - sale of state secrets to China; Haiti human trafficking (cf Epstein).
6. Uranium One - illegal sale of US nuclear material to Russia (which draws Mueller into his own scandal…).
Corruption is a widespread phenomenon. Anti-corruption initiatives have a long history. Multinational business has been a thing for centuries.
That there might be a coordinated multi-country corruption purge should not be a matter of great controversy.
It is the confluence of so many simultaneous major scandals that is what gives #TheStorm its moniker and "black swan" outlier status. It will sweep away some compromised institutions, and put many previously untouchable people in jail.
This is a paradigm change in government and business, restoring trust and honour that have been missing for decades.
The End of the American 'Deep State'
Whether it has been the East India Company, the Venetians, or the Spanish in South America, international trade has always allied to intelligence gathering - and trodden a fine line between legitimate commerce and organised crime (e.g. the opium wars, theft of gold).
To understand #TheStorm we need to recognise that the problem of a two-tier justice system itself comes from transnational crime cartels.
Corruption has its own business model, strategies, and organisational design patterns. "Institutionalised crime" syndicates are often of a military-like nature, with power coming from spying, clandestine operations, subversion, esoteric science, and deception.
That power is tied to specific families and secret societies, many being in Europe and Asia. From its founding, the United States has been fighting against fifth columnists, who were often working on behalf of European banking, aristocratic, and religious powers.
They have used their military intelligence networks to infiltrate American institutions and install their own people - who often become celebrated as quintessentially "American" in the process!
Three notable and well-documented events from the 1940s-1970s paint the contextual picture:
Operation Paperclip imported thousands of key members of the German Nazi regime into important scientific, academic and military posts after WW2.
Operation Northwoods showed the (corrupted) US Government was willing to use "false flag" attacks by its military against its own people for its geopolitical ends.
This funded the activities of allied crooked banks, media companies, and military-industrial corporations. Collectively these "Deep State" actors over time compromised the US judicial, legal, and political systems - and subverted the Constitution.
Trump's de Facto Military Government
Once civilian institutions are too compromised, the only remaining way of peacefully reversing these changes is via the military.
Trump is far more than a figurehead, but to focus on him alone is to miss the big picture. He is the most visible part of a multi-decade Patriot plan to retake the country from the bankster criminals, and give it back to its people.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like
Putin?
It would be wise to take Trump and his generals very literally when they state their intentions, as their lives are on the line.
You can see Trump's closeness to the military with:
His inauguration - where he unusually and symbolically had soldiers appear behind him.
Choices of personnel, being surrounded by generals, especially from the Marines.
The famous "calm before the storm" remark, as he is often pictured with his senior military team on social occasions.
Focus on celebrating the military and its independence from foreign control for the 4th July celebrations this year.
His links to Admiral Rogers and General Flynn who know where the bodies are buried and have been involved in the resulting intrigue.
A deeply embedded crime network has had effective control over the US DoJ, FBI, and CIA - as illustrated by the Clintons' magical escapes from justice.
The legal and justice systems are being cleaned up, and the "pioneer public" primed for stunning revelations that will shake the foundations of society.
#TheStorm is About to Make Landfall
Sessions, Durham, Huber, Horowitz, Rosenstein, Barr - there are objective reasons to believe that large DoJ legal teams have been quietly working for a considerable period under these leaders.
Their task is to indict those responsible for the scandals listed earlier. The job of some of these teams is complete, according to the DoJ website.
There has already been a record-breaking surge of indictments, arrests and convictions for human trafficking.
There has also been extensive building work done at Guantanamo Bay, and a new senior judge has been appointed for military tribunals there.
There is an enabling executive order on courts martial, and federal capital punishment has been reinstated. The President has made many proclamations on the treasonous nature of the offences, and that they must never recur.
What is going to happen in late 2019 and into early 2020 is that multiple connected scandals are all going to break in fast succession. They will involve crimes against humanity, and horrors we had hoped had ended with the Nazis, Chairman Mao, or Pol Pot.
A recurring theme from insider leaks is that the trials are going to be televised as a kind of "Nuremberg 2.0".
Trump is not a politician. #TheStorm is not politics. This is about fixing the framework in which politics happens. #TheStorm is a restoration of the American Republic under control of its citizens, and the Constitutional rule of law.
The conspiracies against the people are very real, and their prosecution is now inevitable.
These events are going to be a shock to most of the public, who have been lulled into complacency by a media conspiracy of silence.
They will be scared and confused, since they will not know whom to trust, how bad the situation has been, or whether it is sufficiently contained.
Now is the time that forward-looking leaders can begin to prepare, so you can honestly state that this is on your radar, and you are taking proactive steps to manage the situation.
There is ample evidence of this being a very real and serious situation, and to ignore it is irresponsible.
We can be reasonably certain that the following will experience major impacts from #TheStorm:
Political foundations that are used to launder bribes and payoffs (e.g. under the cover of "book deals").
Charities that are nothing of the kind, being covers for illegal activities.
NGOs that have a covert purpose (e.g. Red Cross involvement in organ harvesting plus human trafficking).
Multi-national corporations who are using slave labour, or have operations in certain politically risky countries (e.g. Apple being forced to repatriate manufacturing from China).
Financial industry players, with many banks having large fraud liabilities. It is no secret that some like Bank of America, Citibank, HSBC, Wells Fargo, and Deutsche Bank face trouble, having over-indulged in nefarious business practises.
Media industry, which faces a cataclysmic loss of trust by the public as its past misdeeds and methods get exposed to the light.
Telecoms and IT, which is the foundation for a great deal of espionage. Amazon is tainted by its CIA associations; Google faces a total brand meltdown.
Energy, as a great deal of corruption is tied to oil and gas extraction and commodity trading, as well as the push for renewables driven by illegitimate concerns.
#TheStorm will reveal three scams that are each trillions of dollars in scope that will further damage the reputation of the media, academia, government, and religious bodies:
War-for-profit (drawing in banks, arms industry, and public and private intelligence agencies)
This is a "trust apocalypse": those who you were taught were most worthy of trust will repeatedly be proven to have betrayed it. Conversely, you will discover who the truly trustworthy are, as the lies and scams are exposed.
Confronting something of this magnitude in our own lifetimes can seem rather daunting. The MBA strategy books focus mainly on the positive creation of value in the legitimate economy.
Where we touch on fraud and crime it comes clearly boundaried in topics like "revenue assurance" and "business continuity planning".
The collapse of a longstanding massive network of organised crime that intersects with every sector isn't something we have a precedent for. There isn't a chapter for this kind of scenario in the textbooks.
We just know that the November 2020 election cycle is a forcing function: the "swamp" needs to be exposed before then - so that the public is clamouring for total drainage.
To deal with this situation, here are some initial suggestions as to how you can take action now:
Get your own personal affairs in order as a hygiene factor. You can't be sorting out other people's problems if your own are a distraction. Clear the decks of anything optional or troublesome.
Set your moral compass now. Those who thrive post-Storm will have different values to those who prospered before it. Be very clear with yourself what you and your organisation truly stand for, and what isn't changing and is non-negotiable.
Expand your information sources. The mass media has become compromised by decades of infiltration and corruption. They are complicit in serious crime, if only via a conspiracy of silence, and cannot tell you the whole story. You need to look to alternative sources of journalism and analysis for an accurate picture.
Build your human network. Consider creating a temporary and informal organisation to track and make sense of these changes. Use a "who knows, who cares, who can" model to draw in those sufficiently informed, motivated and resourced to act voluntarily and on their own initiative. Manage your exposure. Start to manage your risk of exposure to Deep State aligned companies and sectors. Think about the most important business contracts you have and whether they are robust enough for this kind of outlier business event. Begin to plan contingencies for disruptions on both your supply and demand sides.
Map the possible opportunities. This is going to be a one-off opportunity to acquire talent from tainted institutions, buy up businesses at distressed prices, and occupy vacated market roles whose previous holders have been razed by #TheStorm. Making good enough moves quickly is likely to beat waiting for perfect certainty. Start making your shopping list.
The Global Accounts: The Truth, The Thieves, The Liars And The Con Artists January 23 2023 | From: NeilKeenan/GroupK
I am sitting here thinking of how close we are to finally getting to what we could call the “End Game”, but then I keep saying to myself that the Cabal hasn’t quit anything yet, but they are near ready to be destroyed.
I see such groups as the Committee of 300 breaking bread with other kindred spirits in order to strengthen their positions in their quest for controlling the Global Accounts.
You can clearly see this with their plans to rob South Korea of their Assets / bunkers giving nothing in return.
I also see many other insidious groups coming out of their clandestine closets and making false claims for the Accounts – of which most of them had never heard of before myself and Group K came along and exposed the crooks lurking behind their false fronts of notoriety.
I’ve heard and seen the sanctimonious push for said Accounts by public individuals or organizations that never made one damned effort to protect the Accounts from the Western thievery that has occurred over the past ten years that I have been involved in this colossal effort.
And finally, to top it all off – you know it became really silly when David Wilcock recently made the preposterous claim and says the Dragon Family (probably White or Red or Purple) is working with him and planning on making a movie.
Hahahhahah! I love a good laugh, given that I was in Singapore with the Family when David’s release took place.
They not only laughed about doing a movie but wondered “who is David Wilcock?”
The Family have never heard of him.
And does anyone really believe that this ancient family who operates in privacy above all would ever “go Hollywood”?!
In the past I would let this fly, but I believe I did my good share when I provided David with nearly all of the material for ‘Financial Tyranny‘ (with Keith Scott providing some details as well).
Remember this book was about my original lawsuit and nothing more. No more freebies, David! Not only this, but I was never credited for the wealth of information that I contributed towards ‘Financial Tyranny‘, just the mention of my name here and there.
Returning to the more immediate and indeed urgent “real” matters at hand; it has become clear that a growing number of conniving parties are overwhelmingly interested in only ONE Account… The Global Accounts.
As the Amanah I will never give credence nor any of my time to all the innumerable, nefarious thieves of years past, present and future… no matter how many times they deceptively change their names or alliances.
Hear me now loud and clear! You are all wasting your time!
Soon I will be allocating funds for Humanitarian Projects beginning in Indonesia and then worldwide – to only those who are proven to be legitimate and honorable.
To the entire Cabal: You are out of the game!
After many years of stealing, devastating murder and mayhem across this planet, at last, you have struck out.
We The People are finally becoming the winners on this earth, and we are stepping up to help one another build a better future for our children and grandchildren!
Guess what? You are not going to be involved.
So take a seat, a back seat at that, and watch how these Accounts are really supposed to work. It is near time, folks, and soon we will be screaming, “The time has come today”!
Back door confusion, including your horrific Red Flags, have gone on for the past year in Indonesia.
Even after making false claims to nearly all of the Global Accounts in Asia, many of your crooked (“wolves in sheep’s clothing”) global organizations – all along were waiting for the right opportunity to sneak into Indonesia during the night and steal everything in their bunkers.
I want to especially call out the UBS’s cunning plans, as I am the last person they wanted to see stand in their path with official documents that tell the truth about financing in Asia with UBS; and how they stole not only personal and / or corporate Assets, but Global Assets as well – which they continue to do to this very day.
I am now going to expose a document that shows how UBS has stolen Assets to finance Malaysia, circumventing the actual owner of the Assets not for one year, but for many (to the very day this man passed on).
And now they brazenly want to steal the Gold from the real Dragon Family’s (Gold) Account.
After preventing theft from their Accounts for many years, I will be damned if I will allow UBS to steal anything that belongs to the Family now.
I submit to you a picture of the UBS team involved in such thefts here:
And the alleged leader of this group as well: Once again the infamous Mr. Loh (on Right):
Note that the only banking person I will allow to converse with the UBS is Chris Brosnahan.
UBS, you know who he is and where the truth will be fully exposed to end your blatant thievery.
In the near future, I plan on litigating and exposing what exactly it is they’ve done and who they really are behind their facade of banking respectability!
Simultaneously, I also plan on taking them out of the race…
Otherwise, let’s go to court, boys and girls, and have a real good time!
I love it when you squirm in your seats in your three piece suits, as I sit relaxed with my Tommy Bahama shorts and shirts on as though I just arrived from the beach.
It really is a pisser, isn’t it?
At the moment, I foresee a quick skirmish between myself and the above groups. Consequently, I plan on litigating and making them become crazy by shining the light of truth on exactly what it is and who they are!
I also plan on taking them out of the race. This is almost done, and the battle will be short, seeing that what I hold is exactly what they fear the most.
I cannot wait to expose it to the planet leaving said jackasses with nothing but their hands in their empty pockets.
Here is the UBS offering of gold that is not theirs:
Now, remember these are Indonesian / Golden Dragon Family assets held by the UBS.
Forthrightly, it is about the West and its man-made technology that created many “timely” volcanic eruptions, deadly earthquakes and tsunamis here in Indonesia.
There was no seismic activity whatsoever prior to these tragedies.
“Remember that John Kerry threatened Indonesian President Jokowi that the West would sink this island if they did not relinquish the Gold they held.
Neil reminds us of the threat made by John Kerry when he visited Indonesia; that he wanted the gold – and when he was told that he could not have any gold – he remarked about the weather and earthquake technologies that the West (the Zionist Nazi faction of the Cabal) have access to.
Kerry indirectly threatened to ‘sink’ Indonesia (and any other country that attempts to stand in their way)and this threat is on the record… just so you know. One further note; Indonesia has already felt the wrath of the HAARP machines, as have Turkey and a number of South American nations.
Shortly thereafter the Japanese militarized their Army for the first time since WWII in their quest to invade Indonesia, to take the Gold that did not belong to them.
It is interesting to note that this was at a time and there was no seismic activity detected whatsoever.
It’s time to bundle up one and all to fight the Khazarian Gangsters right under our own roofs.
WE, that is WE THE PEOPLE are doing this right now all over this beautiful World of OURS.
Let us create our own teams of action and lend support to those leaders that support us and are accountable to you and me.
I am sure the sneaky Lizards will find a way to slither their way out, but the “Calvary Call” is on its way..
So stay alert. Help wherever you may and be prepared for a better World.
Neil Keenan and Group K
UPDATE: Message From a Dutch-Indonesian Insider:
“My heritage is that of an old Dutch family that has lived for generations in Indonesia and, as many of my higher-up Indonesian political and financial friends, we closely follow Neil Keenan’s activities and we most certainly do appreciate beyond words, what this one man has done to protect our country.
He has exerted to much to save the sovereignty and wealth of our nation. He has done so selflessly and at his own expense. We truly respect him as our Amanah.
Those of us at the top echelons of our society are amazed and grateful for how Neil relays pertinent and timely information about the plans and actions of the Globalist Cabal in their attempts to steal our assets and ruin our country, because of not only greed, but indeed other far more insidious intentions.
We deeply appreciate his protection and defense of our heritage and the wealth of Indonesia; the Dutch and the nations of Asia that have entrusted their wealth for safekeeping here. We know that we are under attack and that Neil has intervened on our behalf.
On nearly a dozen occasions no other one person nor collective has stepped in front of these evil entities to slam the door in front of them. We thank you Mr. Keenan. We also know that the war against the cabal remains ongoing and that we must maintain diligence. It goes without saying that there will be more attacks, however Mr. Keenan makes “gado-gado” (fight-fight) and “mixes the game up”.
And this brings me to mt key point: I know you are out there and you know who you are. And I know you are reading this:
Our Dutch and Indonesian patriots need to step up and protect our Amanah and visit justice upon the Nelu’s and Younus’s (etcetera); all of those who who became treasonous traitors to not only our country but the world at large.
It is time that all of us with the wherewithal to do so, must undertake further investigation to expose any and all that try to pull strings to steal our power and wealth.
Mr. Keenan will help to make our country a truly great nation and we need to match his efforts in any practicable manner. I have been informed that Neil has been in country for almost six weeks in working to complete his duties as Amanah duties.
There are remnants with intentions of blocking and delaying. For our part, we will do as much as we possibly can to assist.
This is the opportunity of a lifetime to win against the (now increasingly referred to) global adversary. So what are we, those of us with still some tools at our hands waiting for?
The balance of power has tipped and the time is upon us for those with means to seize the opportunity and come forward in this final push.
Awareness of this pivotal point in history is fundamental. May many become brave when the fiend [is being leveraged to] flee.”
– Dutch Indonesian Insider
The Power Of Individual Awareness And Faith January 22 2023 | From: EarthStarFreedom / Various In these times of great deceit, where there is much turmoil in the world, I like to reflect on the big picture and look at where the world is going, and how it is being directed.
There is a clear cut strategy to lump people into large opposing groups, this is called “collectivism”...
If you happen to fall outside of these “pigeon holes”, then you can be labelled as racist, homophobic, conspiracy theorist, right wing, left wing, fascist, capitalist, communist or whatever suits at the time to create more division.
Oneness and Unity Begins With the Individual
The antidote to collectivism is for the individual to regain their freedom of rights and understanding of ‘where they stand’.
Empowering the individual is not creating more division or ego, like we have been taught and led to believe! Oneness and unity, always begins with an individual that is conscious and one with themselves.
An awakened human who knows the truth of who they are, and where they stand, will automatically enroll and affect others into the same unified understanding.
Empowered individuals will always understand critical, logical thinking and they also understand emotional receptivity and heart based feelings.
An empowered human being is connected to spirit above and the Earth below. It is said in Buddhist teachings, that one truly awakened human being does more for the planet that anything else, just look at the impact that Buddha had on the planet!
The teachings live on today after 2500 years, and although they may not be exactly what Buddha taught in its purity, many Buddhists, or people who learn his teachings, get many positive understandings and can therefore evolve and grow.
Even in other traditional Christian teachings, although I don’t often agree with religion in its controlling dogmatism, it assists many people to grow spiritually and as a human being, because it’s what they need at the time.
“It is said in Buddhist teachings, that one truly awakened human being does more for the planet that anything else, just look at the impact that Buddha had on the planet!"
The inner strength and balance of an individual, leads to strong values in families, which leads to strong diverse communities, which in turn leads to strong unified nations and world.
The virtue signalling which we see a lot of today, does not lead to virtuous living, no matter how many times it is repeated. When politicians wax lyrical about wonderful values like kindness, peace, love and other such things, they cannot be grounded as integral until people know and live the truth.
“The inner strength and balance of an individual, leads to strong values in families, which leads to strong diverse communities, which in turn leads to strong unified nations and world."
Values such as these are like dust in the wind, until there is an underlying foundation in which to balance and integrate the values, and this means having lots of experiences, understanding the law of polarity and knowing truth. The truth is within and outside of us.
There is the truth of who we are, the truth of how we live, and the truth that is happening in the world.
And yes the outer truths are subjective, meaning they are somewhat personal to each person at their level of understanding, however when people learn more about themselves and the objective truths, which are natural principles and laws, then the subjective truths of what’s going on in the world become more aligned in context.
To give an example, in politics we have labels for left wing and right wing affiliation.
The left wing camp will say that we must look after the poor, the environment and pay attention to the social need of the community, however the only way that is going to happen properly is by considering the ‘right wing’ needs of production, taking responsibility for ones self and taking actions that create abundance to pay for the genuine welfare required.
This is a macro example of the importance of balancing the polarities of life. This comes about through consciously aware individuals, who understand their objective nature, and hopefully some are in positions of power and leadership authority!
Objective Truth is Our Foundation
What I find is the best way to understand objective truth is to see it as a foundation for life, just as our Earth is an objective foundation ‘home’ for us to live on.
Natural principles and universal laws are solid, unchanging immutable truths, which makes them objective and these translate into quality moral and common laws to base a balanced society. “Do no harm” or, “do not cheat, lie, steal or kill” is surely a commonsense moral law, which can easily be a simple basis for our legal system, of common law.
Natural laws can create a legal system that is in harmony with all human beings, as we are all unified by nature and creative forces.
I think it is important to mention at this point, a key value or tenet to learn and know is FAITH. This is unifying and integrally valuable, to assist us in growing as a spirit or soul, having a human experience.
Faith is what religion or spiritual teachings are really supposed to teach. Faith is being able to feel safe and secure, when we don’t have all the “evidence” of where we are heading.
“Faith is being able to feel safe and secure, when we don’t have all the “evidence” of where we are heading."
Faith in it’s most powerful, creates the evidence and drive we need to keep going when everything looks dark and unknown. We would not advance as a being, or as humanity if we had to “know” everything before we did anything.
We harness faith, so that we CAN know, and so that we grow inwardly as a soul and outwardly as a human being. The inward - outward bio feedback mechanism is very important to assist us to do what we know is right.
We must especially encourage children to develop faith, by teaching them to follow their heart.
Children will do this naturally, however we as adults often want to shut them down, because we have forgotten how to follow our heart and do what we love, and to have faith in a higher power.
The ultimate faith is this type of faith, via the heart, via love, which in turn connects us to a higher power greater than our physical/mental self.
“We must especially encourage children to develop faith, by teaching them to follow their heart."
Faith coupled with truth, is a powerful combination which can literally create miracles and move mountains if we knew we could.
Same with this current world situation, we must harness faith, know truth and then kindness and peace will be understood in proper context and as a way to live a healthy balanced life.
Freedom is the goal for many who understand & know themselves.
This is only possible by living with natural truths and faith, grounded in our individuality, as central tenets on which to base a life of freedom in our community (come-unity, co-immunity) and world at large.
The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists January 21 2023 | From: / PhiBetaIota / Zerohedge / NoMoreFakeNews / Various
Variations on the quote below have been misattributed as a response to a toast, by John Swinton, as "the former Chief of Staff at the New York Times", before the New York Press Club in 1953.
However, research reveals that Swinton (1829-1901), after moving to New York, wrote an occasional article for the New York Times and was hired on a regular basis in 1860 as head of the editorial staff.
Related: Former Google Engineer: Google Will Try to Prevent Trump from Being Re-elected
Afterward holding this position throughout the Civil War, he left the paper in 1870 and became active in the labor struggles of the day. He later served eight years in the same position on the New York Sun and later published a weekly labor sheet, John Swinton's Paper.
The remarks were apparently made by Swinton, then the preeminent New York journalist, probably one night in 1880. Swinton was the guest of honour at a banquet given him by the leaders of his craft.
Someone who knew neither the press nor Swinton offered a toast to the independent press. Swinton outraged his colleagues by replying:
There is no such thing, at this date of the world's history, in America [Read: The West] , as an independent press. You know it and I know it.
There is not one of you who dares to write your honest opinions, and if you did, you know beforehand that it would never appear in print. I am paid weekly for keeping my honest opinion out of the paper I am connected with.
Others of you are paid similar salaries for similar things, and any of you who would be so foolish as to write honest opinions would be out on the streets looking for another job.
If I allowed my honest opinions to appear in one issue of my paper, before twenty-four hours my occupation would be gone.
The business of the journalists is to destroy the truth, to lie outright, to pervert, to vilify, to fawn at the feet of mammon, and to sell his country and his race for his daily bread. You know it and I know it, and what folly is this toasting an independent press?
We are the tools and vassals of rich men behind the scenes. We are the jumping jacks, they pull the strings and we dance. Our talents, our possibilities and our lives are all the property of other men. We are intellectual prostitutes.
(Source: Labor's Untold Story, by Richard O. Boyer and Herbert M. Morais, published by United Electrical, Radio & Machine Workers of America, NY, 1955/1979.)
Despite the misattribution, the quote raises the issue of whether there is not continuing truth in Swinton's remarks, and whether some candid journalist might not be able to fairly say similar things today.
Anyone who has associated closely with journalists can hardly avoid finding a ring of truth in such words, and the best evidence lies in the actual product of journalists and how well, or how poorly, it both agrees with and covers what actually happens, especially involving such things as corruption and abuse of power.
Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations
In the new age of censorship, bias, manipulation, and propaganda, Americans [The West] have somewhat started to fall for it all a little less.
Now, average Americans [Read: Westerners] think of the media as more destructive than banks and corporations – and that trend isn’t likely to reverse anytime soon, as the government continues to use the media to push their agenda.
The media is focusing on making two sides hate each other instead of reporting on the facts, and the majority of the public is unaware and doesn’t care that their minds are being manipulated by their own emotional responses."
- SHTFPlan
This should not come as a surprise to anybody. A recent survey has revealed that most Americans believe that the news media, more than any other institution, have a negative impact on their country.
The findings are hardly surprising, according to media analyst Lionel. Considering most the “news” is full of propaganda and mind manipulation tactics, it is refreshing to see Americans balk at the media.
Conducted by the Pew Research Center, the poll found that 64 percent of Americans believe that the media has a damaging effect on the United States – making them more loathed than other often-demonized institutions such as banks (39 percent) and large corporations (53 percent), according to a report about the poll done by RT.
"The media are not here to provide information... so that you can make intelligent decisions. No, that’s not what the media are. The media are corporate tools,” Lionel said.
And it isn’t just the media taking a beating, but all of the establishment including corporations and government. It seems like Americans, whether they want to admit it or not, are finally realizing they don’t want to be controlled and enslaved.
It’s a good sign that humanity is awakening to what those in power are doing to the rest of us.
The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists
In the wake of the recent mass shootings; and after the FBI concluded that conspiracy theories could fuel terror attacks; and after the major media and politicians hoisted the notion that free speech should be further eroded, in order to protect the citizenry; the obvious choice for persons who want to avoid blame for violence is: REMAIN NORMAL.
Eyes straight ahead. Don’t think. Obey official orders. Maintain a pleasant outward appearance. Don’t question authority. If you accidentally encounter information that points to crimes committed by those in power, don’t bother trying to figure out where on the political spectrum they reside. Instead, move along, forget what you experienced, keep your mouth shut. Play dumb. Better yet, become dumb.
Here’s an instructive and astonishing example, if you consider the implications.
Fake evidence used in the Oklahoma Bombing. How official “science” was deployed to advance a political agenda.
On April 19, 1995, one-third of the Murrah Federal Building in Oklahoma City blew up, killing 169 people and wounding 680 others.
Three men were arrested and convicted: Tim McVeigh, Terry Nichols, and Michael Fortier. McVeigh was put to death on June 11, 2001, Nichols is currently serving multiple life sentences without the possibility of parole, and Fortier was sentenced to 12 years (he served that term and was released).
The official narrative of the bombing stated: A Ryder truck parked at the curb outside the Murrah Building contained barrels of ammonium nitrate plus fuel oil (ANFO bombs), and their coordinated explosion occurred shortly after 9AM on the morning of April 19th.
In addition to the deaths and the woundings, the explosion impacted 324 buildings and 86 cars in the area.
(In My 1995, book, “The Oklahoma City Bombing, the Suppressed Truth,” I laid to rest the claim that ANFO bombs could have caused that much damage; and more importantly, I showed that an explosion coming out of a Ryder truck at the curb could not have caused the particular profile of damage sustained by the Murrah Building.)
The vaunted FBI lab decided that, indeed, all the damage and death HAD been caused by ANFO bombs in the Ryder truck.
But two years after the bombing, on March 22, 1997, we had this from CNN: “The Justice Department inspector general’s office has determined that the FBI crime laboratory working on the Oklahoma City bombing case made ‘scientifically unsound’ conclusions that were ‘biased in favor of the prosecution,’ The Los Angeles Times reported Saturday.”
“…[FBI] supervisors approved lab reports that they ‘cannot support’ and…FBI lab officials may have erred about the size of the blast, the amount of explosives involved and the type of explosives used in the bombing[!].”
“…harshest criticism was of David Williams, a supervisory agent in the [FBI] explosives unit, the paper [LA Times] said. Those flaws reportedly include the basis of his determination that the main charge of the explosion was ammonium nitrate. The inspector general called such a determination ‘inappropriate,’ the Times said.”
“…FBI officials found a receipt for ammonium nitrate at defendant [Terry] Nichols’ home and, because of that discovery, Williams slanted his conclusion to match the evidence.”
And with those revelations, the case, the investigation, the court trials, and press probes should have taken a whole new direction. But they didn’t.
The fake science was allowed to stand.
Therefore, other paths of investigation were abandoned. If bombs did, in fact, explode in the Ryder truck, but didn’t cause the major damage, then those bombs were a cover for other explosions of separate origin - for example, charges wired inside the columns of the Murrah Building, triggered at the exact moment the Ryder Truck explosion occurred.
Now we would be talking about a very sophisticated operation, far beyond the technical skills of McVeigh, Nichols, and Fortier.
Who knows where an honest in-depth investigation would have led? The whole idea of anti-government militia terrorism in the OKC attack - symbolized by McVeigh - was used by President Bill Clinton to bring the frightened public “back to the federal government” as their ultimate protector and savior.
Instead, the public might have been treated to a true story about a false flag operation, in which case President Clinton’s massaged message would never have been delivered.
But the fake crooked science pushed by the FBI lab was permitted to stand - despite exposure as fraud.
If the federal government can egregiously lie about an event as huge as the Oklahoma Bombing, using fake science as a cover - what wouldn’t they lie about?
That’s a question which answers itself.
IN THIS CASE, THE FBI, CNN, THE LA TIMES, AND OTHER MAINSTRAM MEDIA OUTLETS WERE ALL GUILTY OF PUSHING “A CONSPIRACY THEORY,” BECAUSE, AS ANY FOOL CAN SEE, FOLLOWING UP ON THE FBI LAB’S CROOKED LIES AND TWISTED EVIDENCE WOULD HAVE LED TO A NEW THEORY AND A NEW INVESTIGATION OF THE CASE, IN WHICH THE BOMBER AND HIS TWO ACCOMPLICES WOULD MOST LIKELY HAVE BEEN OVERTHROWN AS A COMPLETE EXPLANATION.
Therefore, the free speech of these conspiracy theorists - CNN, the LA Times, and the FBI lab - should be limited, if not completely shut down.
After all, these conspiracists certainly provoked severe demoralization/cynicism about the honesty of government in the minds of many, many persons - and a few of those persons would have been motivated to pick up a gun and do harm to others.
You can’t have it both ways. You can’t say conspiracies are only sold by people outside the mainstream AND no matter what the mainstream publishes it never implies a conspiracy.
And this is where the protests against free speech crash on the rocks. This is where the stew of accusations and pretenses of knowledge about how opinion and information cause violence crash on the rocks.
This is where people who can think begin to see how agents and players try to divide and conquer society.
And this is where a 230-year-old weapon still stands to block assaults on free speech: the 1st Amendment.
The Twitter Files & Loss Of Faith In Societal Institutions: A Necessary Chaos January 20 2022 | From: CounterspinMedia / ThePulse / Various
With the release of the Twitter Files recently, it’s now official that the US Government colluded with major social media to manipulate public perception.
We now know that the US Government, through the FBI, was able to request Twitter to take down posts they didn’t like. This is not only a violation of the American First Amendment, but contravenes the very spirit of free speech laws.
That the governments of the world collaborate with the mainstream media is not a new idea. Operation Mockingbird demonstrated almost 50 years ago that the US Government planted intelligence officers in mainstream media entities, for the specific purpose of pushing pro-Establishment propaganda.
The Twitter Files are just another example of this long-established pattern.
Domestic propaganda was openly used by George W Bush to manipulate public perception in favour of his administration’s policies. Doing so was illegal, but that didn’t concern Bush any more than the legality of invading Iraq did. Then the open use of domestic propaganda was given a massive boost when Barack Obama made it legal.
Ten years ago, in the middle of the Obama reign, the alternative media dominated what were then the alternative media platforms. The mainstream media was still clinging to print, television and radio. But the mainstream media came to realise that the internet was the future. They began to take social media seriously.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
However, an obstacle remained. People preferred alternative media. They enjoyed the more casual interactions with smaller media entities. This led to high levels of trust, something the mainstream media no longer enjoyed since acting as cheerleaders for the Iraq War.
It meant that all the intelligence operatives embedded in mainstream media could no longer control the narrative.
The solution? Ban the alternative media!
Once the Establishment realised that the horse of narrative control had bolted, they retreated to their fallback position of banning all alternative narratives.
Mass censorship was the strategy used by authoritarians in the past, whether Nazi or Communist, so it’s no surprise that neoliberal authoritarians would do the same.
The image above shows what happened to the Google traffic of VJM Publishing on the 5th December 2020, after the Establishment decided they’d had enough of us.
Our organic traffic was restricted from 200 or so hits per day to less than 50. It was as if someone reached into the Google algorithm and pressed a button that said, “Throttle traffic to VJM Publishing!”
Given this attitude, it’s not surprising that Western governments are doing everything they can to destroy those who will not submit.
The Twitter Files are proof that little has changed since Operation Mockingbird in the 1970s. Western governments still use embedded intelligence agents to control the narrative, only they now do this with social media as well as legacy media.
Indeed, little has changed since 1928, when Edward Bernays wrote that:
"The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society.
Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country.”
That invisible government, now global, still intends to manipulate the opinions of the masses.
So now that the opinion-forming mechanisms have transitioned from radio, television and newspaper to social media and search engines, the invisible government has taken over the Internet.
The ongoing Twitter Files saga is utterly undeniable proof that all of the major social media portals are heavily infiltrated by Establishment operatives. It turns out that, as Joy Pullmann put it:
"Twitter, Facebook, Google, et al., are part of government propaganda operations.”
Whereas the US Government used to plant intelligence officers in CNN, MSNBC, the New York Times and the Washington Post, they now plant them in Twitter, FaceBook, Google and Reddit.
Predictably, the Establishment will scream about how all this is conspiracy theory, and how none of the mainstream social media platforms or search engines have intelligence officers on their staff, and how, even if they did, they’re not censoring anything.
But people who have followed the history of governmental interference in mainstream media will understand that the Twitter Files haven’t shown proof of anything unexpected.
What the Twitter Files have shown proof of is government officials working to destroy free speech rights, which in Western countries are protected under human rights legislation. This is therefore proof of a human rights abuse – but don’t hold your breath waiting for prosecution.
Thanks to widespread censorship pushed by Western governments, it’s now impossible to trust the narrative coming from mainstream Internet sources any more than the narrative coming from legacy media.
Smart people will follow alternative media outlets, such as CounterSpin Media and VJM Publishing, to get facts and evidence instead of a globalist, corporatist, Establishment agenda.
Loss Of Faith In Societal Institutions: A Necessary Chaos
I've been reading The Atlantic for about a year now. I do so to expose myself to great writers who have totally different ideas and perspectives than me.
I find this helps me have a handle on what others in my community and world are thinking, and how I might be able to communicate my ideas in a way that may get them to at least think - even if they don't agree with me in the end.
Our world is in a chaotic moment of sorts. In some way, all of us believe that things are 'falling apart.' As I read The Atlantic, I have to say that I can't help but feel these people are so stuck in ideological thinking that it's painful.
Weekly, I read the sentence "a threat to our democracy" many times over, as if most Western countries aren't oligarchy's. "What world do they see?" I ask myself. "What facts do they operate from, and what facts do they avoid?"
I'm not going to suggest I'm bias free, but I feel The Atlantic is a prime example of people who have a naive level of faith in our institutions and are ignoring every bit of evidence that exposes the level of corruption within them.
Where We Are Now
We are arriving at a moment where the majority of people recognize something is wrong in our society and are starting to put some pieces together as to what it involves. I call this Breaking The Illusion.
The reality of what has come out around COVID, government irresponsibility, and cover-ups over the last few years has been immense. Many knew of this before, but millions more saw this during COVID.
For starters, when you combine what the Twitter Files have revealed thus far and what has been gleaned through investigation over the course of COVID you get:
Government corruption, censorship, authoritarian mindsets, political corruption, propaganda involving Big Tech, and a collusion between government, Big Pharma and Big Tech to raise profits at the expense of people - these are all just a sliver of what is going on in apparent 'democratic countries.'
To be fair, millions were aware of these facts prior to COVID, but what happened during COVID brought in a huge portion of well credentialed and intelligent people into the mix. This not only boosted the numbers of people willing to talk about reality, but it improved the quality of conversation.
As people wake up to these facts they lose faith and trust in our institutions.
Billions of people witnessed the chaotic COVID moment largely manufactured by governments. These actions have sown a level of distrust so deep that latest Gallup polls indicate people's trust in media, both television and newspapers, in the United States is at an all-time low.
To be clear, the loss of trust in mainstream media equates to a loss of trust in government because legacy media has just parroted what government has said without questioning or holding it to account.
And since many in the general public knew government was wrong, the lack of trust in mainstream media = lack of trust in government.
If you are seeing that graph correctly you are seeing that we are experiencing the lowest point in media trust that has ever existed on Gallup's record.
Around the world I imagine this trend would be somewhat similar. People are losing trust media, health organizations, and government at such a rate that one of the key goals of the 2021 World Economic Forum meeting in Davos was rebuilding public trust in institutions. It's no secret it's gone.
Oddly though, mainstream media, fact checkers, and politicians want people to believe this lack of trust is solely a result of fake news and misinformation online. To them, it's the people who spread conspiracy theories that are somehow changing people's minds about government using misinformation.
The fact there are mounds of evidence proving government corruption, amongst other issues mentioned above, doesn't seem to matter to these people.
Sure, maybe fake news is in a small way responsible for a loss of trust in institutions, but the facts do very much support the idea that governments are not looking out for people's best interests, and people are tired of being lied to.
In this instance, governments, media and fact checkers are failing to take any responsibility for the role they play in the reality that people don't trust them - a typical habit in our current collective consciousness which states that we as people don't like taking responsibility for what we cause nor like to admit when we are wrong.
This is only furthering the loss of trust.
To be clear, I think we are seeing a loss of faith or trust in institutions everywhere, including in academia and science.
Universities are clearly forgoing their core mission to educate and allow different opinions and ideas to be discussed and explored. Instead, they are bowing to the woke mob, putting their profits first, engaging in censorship, and taking part in the dumbing down of society.
Further, the recent move by the College of Psychologists of Ontario to suggest Jordan Peterson needs to be taken through re-education training for making a few ‘unacceptable’ Tweets doesn’t bring more faith to institutions, it further erodes it in an eerie 1984-esque way.
Given the multiple ways in which our societal institutions are being exposed as outdated, authoritarian, and destructive, I have been wondering where this will ultimately lead.
On one hand, I can sense the value of a loss of faith in our institutions. A strong enough look at how our societies are set up reveals they are in deep, deep need of a change. If a better world is what we want we have to face facts: our current systems are horrendous for creating this world.
The more trust we lose in our institutions, the more opportunity we have to see the reality of them and ultimately create something new.
On the other hand, as we lose faith in our institutions we end up on this awkward uncomfortable space of "where are we headed? What can we believe? To what degree should we continue to play within our existing systems?"
I put together a multiple part essay on these questions as I believe they are some of the most important of our time. But simply, I believe this uncomfortable space between worlds is a necessary evolutionary pressure and needs to be faced with presence and courage.
If this is indeed the necessary chaos needed for us to evolve our society, what are we being asked to change? Faith in the 'old world' is being lost. It is being revealed as a rigged game.
The mindsets that are willing to rig the game are the same mindsets that created our current societal design. Are we at an opportune moment to learn from our current experiment and sow the seeds for a new one?
If I can have readers walk away with one thing from this piece it might be to consider: Instead of seeing the loss of faith in our institutions and the chaos it brings as purely a scary thing, think of what opportunities we have.
Embrace this moment of change and evolution, even with its frustrations.
Ask yourself BIG questions. Momentum is building towards the opening of deeper conversations around re-questioning our worldviews, what 'solutions' may birth from that, and how we could create a more thriving world.
All of this is occurring because people are now seeing more clearly the true nature of the world we live in at the moment.
Hanne Herland Explains How Universities Became Globalist New Left Propaganda Tools And Enemies Of Free Speech January 19 2023 | From: TheHerlandReport / Various
Universities as Globalist New Left propaganda tools: Universities have become globalist propaganda tools, sadly.
This is where they young are brainwashed and has become the main halls of biased, politically correct propaganda. This is where students learn not to think freely. Or rather, freedom is defined as the right to concur with the New Left’s view on current affairs.
Debates are no longer free and open; rather, the university campus is an arena of a strict authoritarian push against free speech and the respect for diverse opinions.
It is a worldwide tendency for neo-Marxist socialists to team up with the 1 % richest capitalists in the world.
Thinkers like Herbert Marcuse, the father of the student revolution in the 1960’s, speaks openly in A critique of pure tolerance about the need to oppress the views of the majority population in order to succeed in revolutionizing the culture.
Marcuse’s illiberal words reveal the authoritarian New Left pursuit, stating that repressing the worldview of the majority is necessary in order to achieve the desired goal: To change the value system and revolutionize the West according to the neo-Marxist ideology.
Based on the professor’s ideological lens, he teaches classes and effectively colors the mind of the young. And it is no news that research often relies on purely subjective assumptions.
Historian and philosopher of science Thomas S. Kuhn garnered attention in the 1960s when he showed how subjective much of the research at universities really is, how easy it is to create propaganda.
The dominant worldview strongly influences the opinions of professors and students alike.
The individual scientist is often much more influenced by the ideologies of his time and subjected to a peer pressure to reach the conclusions he knows will be applauded. He tends to end up interpreting his subject matter in line with the trends.
In “The Structure of Scientific Revolutions,” Kuhn explains that in science, the dominant understanding of reality builds on a series of assumptions.
It becomes the intellectual’s role to produce evidence that supports the dominant academic consensus, which Kuhn calls the dominant paradigm.
A paradigm, the theoretical framework of a scientific school – the popular way to view the world – may work wonderfully and enable scientists to provide a basis for the scientist to map the pieces of his findings into a system of understanding.
Yet, if paradigms are inadequate, they end up making wrong assumptions, and its conclusions, in turn, fail. They come to the wrong conclusions.
Universities as Globalist New Left propaganda tools: Kuhn points out that the role of the oppositional intellectual is to challenge the ruling paradigm and break the logjam of politically correct assumptions.
If no one dares break out of the deadlock, and nobody poses critical questions in order to examine the current hypothesis’, the quality of intellectual thinking is steadily reduced.
The end result is a totalitarian system in which the professor’s job is no longer to examine the evidence, but to present arguments that support the ideas of the current elites.
Indeed, others before Kuhn had studied the problem of twisting history in order to make it better fit the ruling paradigms.
In the 1600s, Francis Bacon complained in “Novum Organum” of the medieval scientist, that he did not sufficiently incorporate a sufficient range of experience in framing his decisions.
The scientist first determined the question and then sought for the answers he wished for, Bacon said, those answers that fit his assumptions, to begin with. He stated that a scientist’s method too often ended up bending the evidence to suit his own ideology or preference.
It is, for instance, a historical fact that the Early Middle Ages was a time when monasteries were the leading intellectual learning sites, educating the elite and providing for the poor and needy. Yet, modern-day professors have often referred to this age as “The Dark Ages.”
It is true that the term also refers to the period after the fall of the Roman Empire onward, yet many regularly use the term when referring to the Early Middle Ages, negatively focusing on the religious worldview at the time.
On the other hand, the 1600s is described as the “Age of Enlightenment,” implying that as scientists were questioning God, increasingly critical of traditional religion, looking for other explanations of nature, that would somehow make them more “enlightened” than the previous generations.
There seems to be an underlying need, a hidden agenda, to insinuate that an age of strong religious beliefs automatically was “a dark phase” in European history.
Yet, it was the early Christian medieval thinkers who first enhanced rationality on a large scale, placing the ability to reason on the same level as faith, stating that both of these qualities lead to knowledge.
The scholastics during the Middle Ages studied nature and the cosmos in order to understand God better, and strongly emphasized the need for rationality. They laid the foundation for the later study of modern science and order in nature.
Professors and intellectuals who should defend fearless speech instead become puppets of an academic elite, rather than being critical voices, posing questions to those in power.
If critical voices are silenced and open discussions cease, scientific research itself glides into an apathetic self-confirming state.
This becomes, as Harvard professor Harvey Mansfield puts it, a subtle form of tyranny, a soft despotism.
Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted & Psychotechnology: How Artificial Intelligence Is Designed To Change Humanity January 18 2023 | From: WakeUpWorld / GlobalResearch / Various
Total Individual Control Technology is a type of EM (Electromagnetic) and V2K (Voice to Skull) mind-control technology that is being experimented with and deployed by the military industrial complex against segments of the American population.
Total Individual Control Technology is the ultimate weapon of control, since it can targets your individual DNA. Those attacked by this electronic stalking are known as TIs (Targeted Individuals).
Recently another brave whistleblower has stepped forward to expose it. Bryan Kofron (who formerly used the alias of Justin Carter) is a security industry specialist who used to work for a private security company SIS (Security Industry Specialists) in Seattle, Washington.
He quit in disgust after realizing that his former firm, and others just like it, were actively using so-called “total individual control technology” to target people, then ultimately control and destroy their lives.
Since he quit, he has himself become a victim of the technology via gangstalking.
What is Total Individual Control Technology Capable Of?
According to Kofron, this technology is so advanced that it can be used to read your mind, program your mind with thoughts (that you would believe are your own) and induce emotional states in you (including pain, hate and fear).
It can be used to tap into your optical nerve and auditory systems to see and hear what you are seeing and hearing.
It can target particular people by engaging in individual-specific attacks (based on the target’s DNA resonance). Finally, it is being used in vast social engineering programs as a way to experiment upon poor, homeless and weak people who have little or no chance of fighting back.
In interviews or presentations such as this and this, Kofron explains that this technology is being used by psychopaths who have little scruples about the harm they are causing.
They are targeting specific groups of people: those who are cognitively inclined, highly intelligent, knowledgeable about advanced technology or interested in ‘alternative’ research (i.e. conspiracy research.)
In general, they are either targeting empowered individuals with free minds (to stop dissidents and revolutionaries) or those too poor and weak to fight back.
According to Kofron, here are some of the things Total Individual Control Technology is able to do:
“This technology manipulates the electrical signals in the brain, thus controlling thoughts and feelings and emotions and sensations throughout the body. It works by rewiring the brain by creating new neural pathways and destroying existing neural pathways, thus this literally changes the way a person thinks and thus behaves.”
“This technology can also be used to control the muscle movement of the target. It can take over one’s hands or feet while driving and make you press on the accelerator or press on the brake or turn. This can be used to cause accidents it can also be used to prevent accidents from happening.”
“This technology can also tap into the optical nerve of the target, and the auditory system of the target, so that those monitoring the target can see what the target is seeing and hear what target is hearing.
This information is then downloaded and stored on a computer, in a highly secure classified site on servers that are guarded by some of the tightest security in the world.
This results in the individual’s entire day, everything they see, everything they hear, everything they experiment, everything they experience, and everything they feel being recorded till the end of time.”
“This technology can also be used to manipulate the emotions of the target. It can induce fear, love, hate.”
“This technology can be used to beam images and even motion pictures into one’s brain. Images and motion pictures that are so realistic that you think you are actually watching a movie or seeing something in reality. It’s like a virtual reality 3D rendering that takes place within the target’s mind.
The images and motion pictures manifest themselves in such a way that the target if they are not aware that this technology is being used on them will believe that they are natural thoughts and natural images.”
“This technology can also be used to induce and control dreams. It can be used to control dream cycles and sleep patterns. To cause one to sleep very deeply or to cause one to not sleep at all. REM cycles, alpha beta and delta brainwaves can be induced immediately by this technology.
And this technology can also be used to mimic spiritual experiences. Joy, love, peace that passes understanding can all be induced artificially by this technology to make the target believe that they are having a genuine spiritual experience when they’re not.”
“This technology can also be used to sexually manipulate the target. Make them feel sexual arousal or turn off their sexuality altogether, it can stimulate them and it can shut them down at a moments notice. It can also be used to manipulate the hormones of the target, thus lowering and raising estrogen and testosterone levels in women and men respectively.”
“This technology can also be used to read the thoughts of the target in real time … they can read your thoughts verbatim as they occur within your own mind.”
“Anywhere from small groups of people 10-20 to 100, to medium size groups of people several thousand to tens of thousands.
This is done by creating a field effect, where an entire field of electromagnetic energy is created in a geographical location and any human being within that geographical location within that electromagnetic field affecting that geographical location will be effected by the technology.
This can be used to induce a general mood in a population or a crowd of people. It can be used to make them passive, it can be used to make them agitated. And this can be used to cause or stop, induce riots. Stop crime, start crime. Stop thoughts, start thoughts. Massive mind control on a citywide level.”
Total Individual Control Technology Attacks Specific Individuals Based on DNA Resonance
As I have discussed in previous articles on mind control - such as “They” Can’t Read Your Thoughts … Right? - the state of current mind control technology is beyond most’s people comprehension and idea of what is possible.
Yet, we have had enough out-of-the-closet whistleblowers and leaked or declassified documents to give us a clear idea of the scary extent to which we can be psychically attacked.
Whistleblowers such as Dr. Robert Duncan have lectured at length about the capabilities of V2K technology, which is defined as an EM frequency technology that utilizes RF (Radio Frequency) signals to induce sound within the cranial cavity of the target. V2K literally pipes thoughts directly into people’s heads without them knowing it.
Kofron bases his information on his own experience as an insider in this field, and also as recent victim of V2K himself. He was attacked once he went public. He claims he has been assaulted with a beta version which is especially nasty, piping thoughts into his head such as:
“Everyone’s against you.”
“Please be quiet or we’re going to kill you.”
“Don’t work again or we’re going to kill you.”
“You’re the lab rat now motherfucker.”
Kofron claims the Total Individual Control Technology attacks are attempting to turn him against his former work colleagues, friends and family.
However, since he was trained in this area, he knows that the voices are technological and can defend himself against the manipulations once he hears and identifies them.
Kofron echoes exactly what Duncan has warned about: individual-specific attacks. Duncan states that every person has a “unique resonance signature”, and in almost exactly the same words, Kofron states that:
“… the DNA of the individual is used to determine the resonant frequency of the DNA itself, the resonant frequency is then used to fine tune the technology … to tune it perfectly to the resonant frequency of the targeted individual’s DNA.”
This leads into another aspect of the NWO agenda: the drive to create a worldwide DNA database. When seen in the light of Total Individual Control Technology, the acquisition of an entire population’s DNA takes on a very sinister meaning.
It is no coincidence that Amazon and Google (who are ultimately controlled by the same force, as David Icke suggests) are racing each other, along with Microsoft, IBM and other companies, to assemble a DNA database as quickly as they can.
Those in power who gain access a completed worldwide DNA database and total individual control technology would have a horrifying weapon at their disposal to target literally anyone they wanted.
Kofron exposes how prospective employees are tricked out of their DNA. They apply for a job at SIS, get told they have to do a drug test, and when the urine sample is sent to a lab, part is siphoned off as DNA to go into Amazon’s burgeoning DNA database.
Americans, in the millions, are having their DNA stolen from them, without their knowledge or consent, so they become unwitting targets of this insidious program!
Social Engineering with Total Individual Control Technology
Kofron talks at length about how this technology is fully operational and is already being tested upon those in society who are struggling (such as those who are homeless, poor and who don’t have much family or many friends) since they make the easiest targets.
On his website GangstalkerWar, he exposed the details of ongoing operations within Seattle (where he used to work for SIS).
This social engineering is being done by the Federal Government, the Military Intelligence agencies, private security firms (more on this below), some of the largest US corporations (after all, we live in a corporatocracy), local and state police, and social programs within inner-city America.
In one such operation, the perpetrators would target certain geographical blocks of the city, and, for instance, cause everyone in that area to be in a bad mood. In another operation, SIS (employed by Amazon whose headquarters are in Seattle) would test upon Amazon employees.
In another operation, SIS would experiment upon its own low level employees.
In another operation, homeless people were brought in from all over the nation to special buildings that were then targeted. This is true gangstalking - the ganging up by sociopaths and psychopaths upon the innocent to electronically harass and stalk them.
The Rising Danger of the Private Security Firm Industry in America
Kofron warns about an alarming trend in American society: the rise of private security companies who mostly employ ex-military and ex-intelligence agents. As I covered in this 2-part series, the US Military Intelligence Complex is completely and utterly out of control.
It runs the government and pulls the strings attached to all the puppet politicians, who don’t have the necessary “clearance” to access the truly top secret information. These security firms, like the MIC itself, appear to operate above and outside the law.
The culture inside of these companies is toxic. People rising up the ranks are conditioned to use this technology against innocent victims, and are told they will be rewarded with everything (money, power, women, sex, connection, access, status, belonging to the power club) if they go along with the program and become perpetrators.
If they have a strong conscience and refuse, they will be sacked, shunned, cut off, threatened and even made into TIs themselves.
Another aspect of Total Individual Control Technology which the perpetrators use to shield themselves is the cruel use of false psychiatric diagnoses.
Here’s how it works: they manipulate TI victims to see a psychiatrist, and then they bribe the psychiatrist to deliver a fake diagnosis that the victim is mentally unstable, deranged, delusional, crazy, incompetent, paranoid, schizophrenic, suffering from Multiple Personality Disorder – or they invent some similar legal-medical-psychobabble diagnosis.
This has the unfortunate effect of stripping away the victim’s natural or human rights, which leaves him or her with no recourse to fight back against his attackers, since his claims and testimonies will be dismissed as the ravings of a madman.
This is a similar tactic to what is used with other victims of mind control. In my interview with Max Spiers, he touched on the use of the Big Pharma “false memory” foundation, which includes bogus therapists and psychiatrists who convince mind control victims that they’re having false memories (when they are actually recalling how they were tortured and programmed).
The Infrastructure Underlying Total Individual Control Technology
The infrastructure that is enabling the total individual control technology is composed mostly of antennae, radar and cell phone towers. Often, the antennae are camouflaged (hidden behind walls).
Some or most of the radar used is from military bases.
Kofron was not able to explain much of how the technology actually works, although an electrical engineer who called in on one of the radio interviews suggested that the perpetrators are setting up a standing wave of DNA, then doing slight variations in the phasing using pulse code modulation.
Final Thoughts: Total Individual Control Technology Perpetrated by the Cult of Power
In concluding, it’s important to realize how such cruel surveillance is being perpetuated.
As Kofron explains, it’s all about creating an “in” club of perpetrators who get rewarded with money, sex, power and the intrinsic human need for belonging, get told they are on the “right” side and the TIs are on the “wrong” side – and get threatened that if they speak up or quit, they may end up on that wrong side. It’s the cult of power.
Hopefully this testimony can serve as a wake up call for those on the fence who can’t quite bring themselves to believe or act. In many ways, time is running out and the net is being drawn tighter and tighter.
The more technology advances, the more weapons the cult of power will have to enslave those who stand for truth and freedom. At a certain point, there will literally be nowhere to run or hide. The only option is to face it now before it’s too late.
Psychotechnology: How Artificial Intelligence Is Designed To Change Humanity
Psychotechnologyis a word coined by William Ammerman, although the word may also have been coined by others and share multiple meanings. Ammerman defines the word as “technology that influences people psychologically by deploying artificial intelligence through digital media.”
This neologism is a portmanteau, being made up (obviously) of psycho from psychological, plus technology.
The concept behind the word psychotechnology is an extremely important (and dangerous) one: the idea that as technology becomes more advanced, more personable and more human-like, it will start persuading us more and more.
Psychotechnology and Voice AI
There are many dangers of AI or Artificial Intelligence. As I pointed out in my previous article Voice AI: Dawn of the Reduction of Human Thinking, the emergence of voice AI may herald a new era of intellectual passivity and laziness.
People may start to depend so heavily on their voice AI oracle that they no longer bother to fact check, research the veracity if its answers or seek alternative viewpoints.
This, in turn, will place a colossal limit on human perception, which will essentially be constrained by whatever limits and algorithms Big Tech constructs – working closely, of course, as it always has, with the MIC (Military Intelligence Complex) and other elements of the NWO (New World Order).
The Danger of AI: Humans Extending Empathy to Machines
I regard psychotechnology as a key danger of AI. It represents a particularly insidious threat, since it ostensibly appears benign and helpful. Here is the point: as we talk to our smart devices and smart machines, we become more empathetically connected to them.
Digital assistants like Apple’s Siri, Amazon’s Alexa, the Google Assistant and Microsoft’s Cortana use voice user interface (VUI) technology. There is something about the act of giving and receiving speech to an object that moves into a different ontological category.
The makers of AI know this; indeed, Big Tech founders and executives have openly boasted about hacking human psychology and exploiting vulnerabilities in the human psyche (here is former Facebook executive Sean Parker, one example of many).
As we engage more and more with our smart devices, we start to project our feelings onto them (despite the fact they are inanimate objects).
We start to take hear their voice as the voice of some animate, autonomous being. We start to become persuaded by them.
AI Machines are Designed to Operate Upon you Psychologically
Psychotechnology is psychological technology. It is technology that operates upon us psychologically. We need to stop and reflect for a moment. We are having conversations with AI machines intentionally designed to learn how to persuade us with personalized information.
These AI machines know how to trigger us emotionally, because they have been programmed that way. Ammerman explains that this is due to a convergence of 4 factors:
1. Personalization of information/ads
2.
Increased science of persuasion
3.
Machine learning
4.
Natural language processing
We are at the point in our evolution where the science of persuasion has become quite advanced, as Ammerman explains:
“A social media “like” triggers a small release of dopamine which produces pleasure in our brains and keeps us addicted to our social media feeds.
Video game developers use similar triggers to reward us and keep us addicted to our games. Researchers including Clifford Nass and BJ Fogg have transformed the study of persuasion into a science while simultaneously demonstrating that humans can develop an empathetic relationship with their computers.
They have also demonstrated that the more humanlike computers seem, the more empathy humans display toward them. As computers gain more humanlike qualities, such as speech, they become more persuasive.”
Then, when you combine this with machine learning, you have a recipe for the dangerous potential of AI machines to transform from servant to master:
“Algorithms no longer simply predict. They prescribe and improve. Advances in artificial intelligence, including supervised learning, unsupervised learning, and reinforcement learning, ensure that marketers and advertisers are constantly improving the tactics they are using to deliver persuasive and personalized messaging.
Quite literally, computers are learning to persuade us using personalized information.”
Siri and Alexa, I Love You
Ammerman tells the story of how he interacted with a little boy (4 years old) who was commanding the Amazon Echo device to do certain things, e.g. play Star Wars music. Then, at a certain point, he declared to Alexa, “I love you!”
His mother overheard this; Ammerman noticed a look of pain and/or jealousy on her face. Sadly, this story is not uncommon. There are numerous reports of people falling in love with their machines. Mechanophilia (being sexually turned on by machines) is a diagnosable psychological disorder.
Have you heard about dating simulations where the aim of the video game is to fall in love with a computer character and live happily ever after?
None of this is really surprising when you consider that it’s the NWO agenda. We are being conditioned to do so. We are being encouraged to anthropomorphize our machines and relate to them as living beings when they are actually just inanimate objects.
Why? The agenda behind it is transhumanism, the merging of man and machine. We are being trained to treat AI as animate, then to befriend it, then to worship it, so that finally we can be convinced to merge with it – and lose our humanity in the process.
Final Thoughts: We Must Be Aware of the Impacts of Psychotechnology
This is one area where being aware is the main part of the solution. If we want to retain our autonomy (and mental sanity), we must resist the urge to anthropomorphize our smart devices and computers. They are machines, not matter how ‘clever’ they become.
There is no substitute for human relationships, human interaction and human intimacy. Stop referring to machines as ‘he’ or ‘she’ when they can never be more than inanimate objects that have been programmed to do something.
Stop using them as a substitute for thinking, entertainment and – most importantly – for deeper fulfillment. We ignore the impacts of psychotechnology only at our own peril.
WaterGate Was PedoGate; 70% Of Top US Officials Compromised January 17 2023 | From: Geopolitics / Various The June 1972 break-in of the Democratic National Committee headquarters led to the resignation of US President Nixon in 1974, after his supposed role in the conspiracy to cover up.
"The Watergate break-in was strictly based on one thing – the pedophile records that were being kept at the Democratic National Headquarters."
- Det. James Rothstein, NYPD, Retired
In October 2016, I presented at a Trauma and Dissociation conference in Seattle, USA. Following my talk, one attendee approached me in the hotel lobby where my fellow presenters sat at their merchandise stalls.
“All this!” she shouted while sweeping her arm across the sideshow alley of over-priced books, stickers and fridge magnets, “All this – is shit! You have the real stuff! Where’s your book?!” Tears welled in her eyes. “Write a book! Please write a book!”
Yes, I have the real stuff. I’m not some arrogant academic pretending to understand what it’s like to be a victim of the most heinous crimes.
I lived it. I spent my developmental years trapped in a mind control labyrinth.
I then spent my adult years navigating a way out. I eventually achieved what few victims have, true integration. I may therefore declare with authority what does and does not work.
I prefer the term ‘victim’ to ‘survivor’ because the latter implies my ordeal is over. My ordeal will likely never end. As Dr Reina Michaelson warned, “Fiona, I think this is a life sentence.”
I serve a life sentence for crimes committed against me, with the full knowledge and blessing of the Australian government.
I am constantly harassed by police, paid agitators, pedophile payroll academics and journalists, DID sleeper cells, perpetrator relatives, fake victims, fake advocates, professional social media trolls, and retired intelligence community thugs hired to do the dirty work of the VIP pedophiles who dare not overtly attack me since that would attract media attention to their role in the international child trafficking operation.
Recovery from extreme abuse begins with realising the true nature and extent of international child trafficking. In 2015, a certain journalist wrote favourable articles about me concerning my Sydney press conference.
I subsequently phoned and asked him to investigate and publish my full story. If only one mainstream journalist published my testimony against Antony Kidman, I reasoned, it would blow the international child trafficking network wide open.
During this call, he relayed a conversation he once had with “a couple of spooks” who told him that all senior politicians are pedophiles because that is how they are controlled. He asked me if that was my story.
“That’s exactly right. That’s consistent with my experience,” I tried to contain my excitement. “The mainstream media has long documented the CIA’s involvement in drugs and weapons trafficking, right?”
He agreed, noting there had just been another story about that in the mainstream press.
"Well then, is it so hard to imagine they are also involved in trafficking children – which is far more lucrative than guns and drugs? ASIO and the CIA work together to traffic children between Australia and America. They’re the ones who trafficked me.”
The journalist promised to consider my request, bearing in mind he had a young family and publishing my story would surely place them at risk.
But he never got back to me. A short time later, he suddenly developed a rare and aggressive form of cancer. I called him, expressed my condolences, and we chatted for a bit.
At the end of the conversation, I mentioned I was considering writing a book. I asked him to clarify and elaborate on what he told me of his encounter with the “spooks”.
“I never said that,” he bluntly asserted.
I sighed in resignation… It was over. There went my last chance at breaking into the mainstream media. There went years of building rapport and credibility with mainstream journalists.
Years of investigating other abuse cases and passing my findings on to television and newspapers.
Years of driving journalists around the district to meet the victims themselves. Years of results in other cases. The Gold Coast Hogtie Doctor story went international, with Neville Davis being permanently banned from practising medicine in Australia (although, that doesn’t stop him setting up shop in Thailand).
Gary Willis’ 20-year child abuse spree ended with a permanent ban on his teaching for the NSW education department (although, that didn’t stop him from working for Education Queensland, at Tallebudgera Primary School).
And NSW police were forced to do a mop up investigation of Daruk Boys Home after sensational headlines about a victim having his penis cut off went global (although, they left out the bit where Daruk boys were trafficked to VIP pedophiles at Kings Cross child brothels).
I had come so close. My 2015 press conference was statistically the most popular story on the Sydney Morning Herald website that day, even though their computer technicians refused to list it as the most viewed article.
The USA National Inquirer intended to run a front-page story about Antony Kidman being a pedophile, until they received a vicious letter from Nicole’s lawyers.
A journalist and her photographer husband flew up from Sydney to interview me for a major Australian magazine – until Nicole, who had lucrative contracts with Sydney’s media outlets, took a “Scientology approach to managing” me.
Finally, a UK journalist travelled around the country interviewing me and two other victims of Antony Kidman for the Daily Mail Online, until one of the victims (whose parents were Antony Kidman’s personal friends), was threatened and subsequently withdrew last minute.
Despite everything the pedophile network threw at me, my story still got out there, such that if you Google Antony Kidman’s name, the words ‘child abuse’ soon follow.
Once Nicole Kidman’s PR team shut down my mainstream media exposure, by drawing on Kidman’s lucrative contracts with every Australian media outlet, I turned to the internet. Armed with a simple meme app and a talent for lyric writing, I launched my own social media campaign.
I spent years in front of the computer, communicating with hundreds of victims and supporters, many fake, many genuine. I hit the conspiracy theory jackpot when David Icke featured an enormous photograph of me and my story on his Australian speaking tour.
My tactics worked. Online articles about Nicole Kidman, where the pubic was free to leave negative comments, were followed by streams of intelligent attacks on her orchestrated stardom.
I realised my impact when Kidman’s PR team paid a newspaper and a morning television show to feature an article tellingly titled, ‘Shame on you, Australia. Stop hating on Nicole Kidman.’
People don’t hate Nicole as an individual. They hate what the Harvey Weinstein scandal later highlighted: that Hollywood rewards something other than an ability to sing, dance or act. Hollywood rewards loyalty to their pedophile system.
But no amount of alternative media success can match a complete break into mainstream. So, I admitted defeat. I stopped posting and even checking my sites.
Days before the 2016 US Presidential Election, I received a barrage of texts from old friends asking if I was okay. People started inquiring about our family’s welfare. I had no idea what was happening.
Then I checked my blog site. A spike of 100,000 views in one day stemmed from an article that activist group Anonymous published about my being trafficked to American VIPs.
They used my story to undermine Hillary Clinton’s candidacy and expose her involvement in a child sex trafficking ring. The Clinton Foundation was a front for the trafficking of children including Haiti earthquake victims.
Bill and Hillary’s trafficking network implicated her campaign chairman John Podesta. Podesta and his brother Tony were staying in a villa owned by UK politician Sir Clement Freud, near British child Madeleine McCann when she disappeared in Portugal.
Clement was Sigmund Freud’s grandson who was outed in mainstream British media as a pedophile. John and Tony Podesta perfectly matched the identikit images Scotland Yard released of Madeleine’s abductors.
Pedogate, as the scandal became known, surfaced when Wikileaks released emails from John Podesta’s account in October 2016.
The emails notably outed Hillary Clinton as a self-confessed “Molech” worshipper, and captured politicians ordering children for pedophile parties using fast-food code words.
The White House, for instance, made a massive ‘fast food’ order, contravening policy dictating all food be prepared onsite using raw ingredients to counter the security risk posed by externally prepared foods.
The trafficked kids were held in transit cellars within local Washington DC businesses, including a restaurant where a drag entertainer was caught on tape boasting about raping and killing kids.
Clean FBI and NYPD officers made multiple attempts to charge Clinton and other VIP members of the trafficking ring, but their efforts were typically thwarted by those above them in the chain of command.
Mainstream media giants launched a cover-up campaign against the leaked Podesta emails. The likes of CNN (founded by one of my pedophile rapists, Ted Turner) successfully drew the public’s attention from what was contained in the emails, to who might have leaked them and spread ‘fake news’.
Clinton herself never addressed or denied the emails contents. The emails were in fact leaked by US intelligence community staff who opposed organised pedophilia.
Mainstream journalists who reported the truth of the matter were promptly fired. Dozens of Clinton staff and associates met untimely deaths, in quick succession.
So Pedogate was discredited as ‘fake news,’ despite NBC’s June 11, 2013 televised report regarding Hillary Clinton using her position as U.S. Secretary of State to cease an investigation into child sex trafficking within the State Department.
Pedogate reached the public via social media. YouTube featured interviews with credible witnesses who testified to the existence of an international child sex trafficking operation involving US politicians and the CIA.
That was when I noticed retired NYPD Detective James Rothstein. The Pedogate ring, he explained, was the same network he investigated for 35 years.
Rothstein observed, the perpetrators were doing everything in their power to shut the Pedogate story down. He predicted the perpetrators would successfully bury it, like every other time their network was almost exposed.
Rothstein explained that the NYPD was no ordinary state police force, but a leading investigative agency with national and international offices.
Back in 1966, Rothstein became the first police detective assigned to investigate the prostitution industry. He soon discovered the underground sexual blackmail operation that compromised politicians with child prostitutes.
‘Human Compromise’ is the term he uses for this honey-trap process. Rothstein and his colleagues found that up to 70 percent of top US government leaders had been compromised. The CIA conducted the human compromise operation, while the FBI’s task was to cover it up.
James Rothstein was alerted to an identical VIP pedophile ring operating in the UK, when British Intelligence consulted him regarding the Profumo Affair. MI6 agents visited Rothstein in New York to extract what he knew about British politicians and other VIPs having sex with child prostitutes.
This was part of their effort to cover up the true pedophile nature of the Profumo scandal.
Rothstein found the international pedophile rings are connected, and that their members meet at various world locations where each destination catered for a different type of degenerate sexual proclivity, including satanic themed abuse.
Rothstein and his colleagues encountered fierce resistance to the investigation and prosecution of members of the child trafficking operation.
His investigative journalist contacts at the New York Times and Washington Post could not get stories about the VIP pedophile ring printed. All police, FBI, customs and IRS officers who pursued the VIP pedophile network above street level had their careers subsequently destroyed.
Rothstein’s attempts to arrest key perpetrators were continually thwarted.
The choice example is when he served the head of the CIA’s human compromise operation, Tippy Richardson.
According to pedophile turned police informant Ben Rose, in November 1971, Tippy Richardson, businessman Leonard Stewart (from OPEC, Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries) and a surgeon named Dr Chesky, raped and murdered three boys aged 14 to 15 years in Rose’s apartment on East 64th Street in New York City.
The New York State Select Committee on Crime subsequently served subpoenas on both Tippy Richardson and Leonard Stewart. When served, Richardson said that because he worked for the CIA, the subpoena would be withdrawn under the National Security Act by the time Rothstein and his colleague returned to their offices. It was.
In 1972, Rothstein arrested one of the five Watergate burglars, CIA operative Frank Sturgis. During a subsequent two-hour interrogation, he discovered the truth about Watergate.
The burglars sought something they nicknamed “The Book” which listed the Democrat and Republican politicians who accessed child prostitutes, their sexual proclivities, the amounts they paid to rape kids, and such.
The official Watergate explanation is that the Republicans broke into Democratic National Committee Headquarters to obtain information about their election strategies.
People who lived through Watergate typically comment with a frown, “that never made sense.”
Rothstein’s experiences make better sense of why Nixon conspired to quash the Watergate investigation, why he suggested the investigation posed a threat to national security, why his personal secretary destroyed Oval Office tape recordings after they were subpoenaed, and why his own Vice President issued a pardon which protected him from prosecution for any crimes he had “committed or may have committed or taken part in” as president.
If Nixon’s crimes included pedophilia, that would make perfect sense.
I am confident President Richard Nixon and his good buddy ‘the Reverend’ Billy Graham were named in the Watergate pedophile records, because I was sex trafficked to both men as a young child.
When I spoke with James Rothstein, he said he had not heard that Nixon was a pedophile, but that he certainly knew from multiple victims Reverend Billy Graham was a rampant pedophile.
Rothstein also told me that during his investigations he became aware of an identical child sex trafficking ring in Australia involving Prime Ministers’ Although he never directly investigated it himself, he said Peter Osborne who worked in Australian intelligence knew the details.
He also confirmed that Australian politicians and other VIPs attended international child brothels.
Another voice to surface in the wake of the Pedogate scandal was Dutch banker Ronald Bernard.
Bernard shed further light on the people and system behind the international child trafficking network during a series of interviews with an Irma Schiffers.
Bernard said he worked in international finance and high-end money laundering for 12 years. There he discovered that political power does not reside with publicly elected representatives, but with the world’s 8,000 to 8,500 wealthiest individuals who exercise power behind the scenes and who routinely manipulate the media.
These people, he explained, sit at the top of a power structure that resembles a pyramid. Directly beneath them sits the Bank for International Settlements (BIS).
Below the BIS sit the IMF (International Monetary Fund) and the World Bank.
Below them sit the Central Banks, which are illegally created private banks which oversee the commercial banking system of their respective countries. Below these sit the multinational companies. Finally, below these sit the countries’ governments.
Bernard said the wealthiest 8,000 to 8,500 people created the BIS in 1930. Since the world’s richest individuals are too young to have helped establish the BIS 88 years ago, he must be referring to banking dynasties like the Rothschilds.
In a Chapter titled, ‘Banking and the World’s Biggest Business,’ the book Dope, Inc.: Britain’s Opium War Against the U.S. (Kalimtgis, Goldman & Stienberg, 1978) lists the Rothschilds as one of the nine family dynasties responsible for the modern drug industry which, they assert, “is run as a single integrated world operation, from the opium poppy to the nickel bag of heroin sold on an inner-city corner.”
The current global drug trade was established by the British Crown during the Opium Wars, when P&O steam lines were founded to transport the drugs, the HSBC bank was established to launder the proceeds, and the ‘court Jews’ (Rothschilds) were employed to financially manage the operation. Apparently, little has changed, and the same operation has simply been expanded.
Illegal Immigrant Bought Baby for $80 in Guatemala to Get Priority Release in US
There must have been some truth to the content of Dope Inc. because its revelations resulted in the HSBC bank losing its license to operate in the USA.
The book also inspired law enforcement officials to swap their assumption that drug trafficking consisted of pockets of independent criminal activity, for the fact it is a global network coordinated by the CIA, with proceeds laundered through banks and funneled into the CIA’s covert, terrorist operations.
This is the very system Ronald Bernard described. He said his own laundering operation dealt with governments, multinationals, terrorist organisations, and secret services.
Secret service agencies, he specified, do not serve and protect a people or country as the public expect. Instead, they are all criminal organizations that trade in drugs, weapons, and children.
According to Bernard, the wealthy elites controlled their employees by compromising and blackmailing them – just like James Rothstein said.
"The best way to understand the child trafficking industry is to trace the history of the drug trafficking industry.
As you read Dope Inc., cross out each occurrence of the word ‘drugs’ and replace it with the word ‘kids’ – this will give you a picture of the child trafficking network that victimised me.
Like the drug trade, the child sex trafficking industry is run by the very same people as a single integrated world operation."
At the top of this sit the wealthy elite who maintain control by ensuring only blackmailed, compromised politicians, military brass, and government officials occupy leadership.
The secret services, including ASIO, the CIA and British Intelligence, coordinate the child trafficking and human compromise operation, receive the victims procured via the little men, train these into suitable assets, and transport the victims nationally and internationally to service VIP pedophiles.
Australia is in the process of two federal investigations, the Royal Commission into Institutional Responses to Child Abuse, and the Royal Commission into Misconduct in the Banking, Superannuation and Financial Services Industry.
Only one of these investigations has shed any light on the global child trafficking network I personally reported to the Child Abuse Royal Commission.
On 5 April 2018, the newly appointed head of AUSTRC (Australian Transaction Reports and Analysis Centre) told the ABC news:
"I thought coming from the Australian Criminal Intelligence Commission that I had a pretty good handle on serious and organised crime side. I didn’t appreciate the depth and breadth of involvement with private entities and banks.
I didn’t appreciate how many industries it does actually touch.
There’s a misperception that money laundering is a victimless white-collar crime that’s probably just looking at tax avoidance – and it’s not.
It’s criminal entities using financial institutions here and nationally to move criminal funds around our country and our financial system overseas and it has a massive impact on everyday life; whether that’s child exploitation, serious and organised crime, drug importation – it all involves money laundering."
Australia’s Commonwealth Bank was subsequently fined 700 million dollars for near 54,000 breaches of anti-money laundering and anti-terrorism financing laws, including the laundering of proceeds from child sex trafficking, and the channeling of funds into overseas terrorist organisations.
So, my very own bank, which wooed my kiddie custom with a green tin money box painted to resemble a building, simultaneously facilitated my child abuse.
In short, the late US President Richard Nixon was probably looking for evidence of malfeasance by the high ranking Democratic Party leadership, and as a retaliation, was made the ultimate fall guy in order to save the organization from falling.
His fall from grace was a compromise between a JFK-like assassination and an early retirement.
Meanwhile, the conviction of the Vatican Treasurer Cardinal Pell, an Australian pedophile touted to be the handler of the incumbent White Pope Bergoglio, and the mass resignations of the bankers in 2012, which culminated in the unprecedented resignation of Pope Benedict in 2013, are proof enough that the Oligarchy Criminal Cabal has been experiencing a massive crackdown in its globalized Satanic operations.
This means that the takedown of Jeffrey Epstein could be the watershed event for more takedowns in the near future if the current US government is working in earnest for the benefit of We, the People.
All we need to do now is to stay with the present course, inform as much people as we can, that all is not lost about our humanity afterall. Reject negativity in all forms of discourse, that’s part of their favorite staple to smear the messenger rather than the message.
The Rothschild’s Global Crime Syndicate And How It Works January 16 2023 | From: TheMilleniumReport / Various
Rothschild’s Crime Construct Part One.
Debt is their control Mechanism. Their power goes far beyond the Banking Empire. War is their most profitable business. Countries and individuals turned into corporations. The world is ruled from three independent sovereign states. Debt must first be created before being able to create debt money. The Rothschilds have infiltrated royalty and aristocracy through breeding.
The Rothschilds are the owners of the entire financial system
. The Rothschilds descend from Mayer Amschel Bauer who changed his name to Rothschild, derived from the Red Shields – Rotes Schild – of his house in Frankfurt/am M – Germany.
He established his international banking business by deploying his five sons, who set up shop in London, Paris, Frankfurt, Vienna, and Naples. The family was deceitfully elevated to the status of nobility in the Holy Roman Empire and the United Kingdom.
Behind the scenes, the Rothschild dynasty is unquestionably the most powerful bloodline on Earth and their estimated wealth exceeds $500 trillion. They own the entire financial system.
This mind-blowing scope of control functions as follows; The Rothschilds sit at the top of their pyramid-structured organisation, literally running the entire financial world with about eight thousand selected members.
Although it is difficult to fully investigate and verify, Rothschild may share his ultimate power with the House of Saud and the Soros family, and on lower levels with some other banking families, as will be explained later.
The Rothschilds have set up the world’s financial institutions making sure they literally receive 90% of the generated interest paid by the populace at large.
These criminals are Luciferians while on the surface, for easier public consumption, they have dubbed their religion Zionism. In truth, they worship Lucifer, which includes satanic ritual abuse, including paedophilia and the sacrifice of children.
The Rothschilds are headquartered in the Babylon-BIS-Tower in Basel
On the second echelon of the power structure, sits Rothschild’s fully owned BIS – Bank of International Settlement established in 1931 in the Netherlands.
Headquartered in Basel -Switzerland, and is recognised by all counties as being the top bank of all financial institutions in the world. Every Central Bank is a member of the BIS-bank. They have a civil organisation agreement for total immunity, and enjoy immunity from all worldly laws and rules, so no one can attack them.
Basel, where the Babylon style BIS-Tower is located was the location where the Nazis, during WW2 met to trade the stolen Jewish gold. The BIS issues instructions to all other financial institutions across the entire globe.
On the third echelon, directly below the BIS are the Rothschild-owned IMF – International Monetary Fund – and World Bank. The IRS and similar tax-collecting agencies in other countries, are structured as a foreign, private corporation of the IMF and forms the private “army” of the Federal Reserve – Fed – and all other Central Banks.
The main objective is to make sure the people pay their taxes and always remain useful slaves. Their sole devotion is to enslave entire countries and their populaces through their criminal debt money system.
Debt is Their Control Mechanism
By bailing-out countries after having intentionally manipulated them into debt and subsequently pretending to help them by calculating their maximum levels of debt, they make sure the debt can never be repaid, to keep them slavery bound.
This strengthens their hold/control on these countries as they pay them back through slave labour, while they additionally plunder all of their resources.
They blackmail the heads of these nations through various operations such as child sex trafficking, organ harvesting, and paedophilia, making sure all countries are fully integrated as hopeless slaves to their financial system, from which no escape is possible.
There are two Megabanks that offer loans to all countries around the planet, the World Bank and the IMF. The first one is jointly owned by the world’s top banking families, with the Rothschilds at the very top, being the main shareholder, while the second one is privately owned by the Rothschilds alone.
These two Megabanks offer loans to “developing countries” and use their almost impossible-to-pay-back interests to get their hands on the real wealth, namely land, mineral resources and precious metals.
The fourth echelon explained below, are almost all the central banks in the world that are similarly owned by the Rothschild family. To name but a few, these are the central Bank of England in the City of London, the Vatican Bank in Rome, and the Federal reserve in Washington DC, and the European Central Bank – the ECB in Frankfurt am/M.
While the central bank in London manipulates the gold price every day. The City of London, the Vatican in Rome and Washington DC are recognised as free states, to assure their immunity from literally everyone.
Consequently, all employees, of the established banking institutions are immune to prosecution and oversight.
Their Power Goes far Beyond the Banking Empire
The fifth echelon holds the regular banks and the stock markets, these form the executive branch of the debt system with their interest rate manipulation.
The true power of the Rothschilds goes far beyond the Banking Empire, they have also been behind all wars since Napoleon’s Waterloo war.
That’s when Nathan Rothschild, during the Battle of Waterloo in 1815, manipulated the stock market to purchase and pay for England. He discovered also how profitable it is to finance both sides of a war they’ve been doing that ever since.
Nathan found himself with an increase in wealth of 6,500 times more than what he had previously owned after his engineered stock market crash of 1815. In essence, he robbed Britain blind, and he became, for all accounts and purposes, the owner of most of England.
From that point forward his family, with more wealth than they could have ever dreamed of, became an influential player in governments, and they steered policy decisions going forward, by bribing and paying politicians from that time onward.
It also bears noting that this scheme by Rothschild was historically important for another reason: It showed how ‘fabricating‘ a disaster could lead to massive financial gains.
And that also is the reason why the world still finds itself in the intertwined in endless wars, because it is very, very profitable to the Rothschilds and their parasite bankster bloodlines. And for as long as their debt money is used, the world will never know peace.
The Rothschilds and their banking cartel have funded both sides of virtually every war since that date in 1815 – wars initiated by their paid agents in government in cahoots with the military and intelligence agencies, have all been manipulated into existence.
This has cost the lives of at least hundreds of millions – 75 million in WW 1 and 2 alone, allowing the cabal to control governments and people through debt payments of the loans provided.
When the wars eventually devastate countries, the cabal banking cartel lends more money to rebuild them – the interest payment for these extended loans, ensures they will remain slaves to the cabal.
As the cabal also owns the defence companies, they also sell all weaponry, accumulating huge profits, requiring yet more loans to governments. If the Deep State didn’t want wars, there would be none.
Countries and Individuals Have Been Turned Into Corporations
Beyond these atrocities, it may be shocking for many to find out that each country and each individual has been turned into a corporation that is ruled from abroad.
The construction is too complicated to be explained in a few words, but important to note is that the exploitation rights of these deceitfully created corporations are controlled by the British Crown and the Vatican within this organisation.
On a more practical note: All US Presidents, except for Donald Trump were cabal-appointed CEOs and their business is to make money for the British Crown and the Vatican, who take their share of the profits every year.
The World is Ruled from Three Independent Sovereign States
The British Crown covertly rules the world from the 677-acre – 2,7KM2, independent sovereign state, known as The City of London. This other Crown is comprised of a committee of 12 banks, headed by the Bank of England, controlled by the Rothschilds.
In 1815 after he had bought and paid for England, Nathan Mayer Rothschild made the following statement:
“I care not what puppet is placed upon the throne of England to rule the Empire on which the sun never sets. The man who controls Britain’s money supply controls the British Empire, and I control the British money supply.”
The House of Rothschild is really at the top of the pyramid of power. They are behind the push to force onto the people of the world, a New World Order, hereby actively pushing towards complete and utter domination of the entire world.
They are behind the European Union, the Euro and the ECB. They also are behind the idea of a North American Union and the ‘Amero’ currency to become the new currency for the whole of the American continent.
They control all of the world’s secret services, including CIA, MI-5, MI-6 and Mossad, while their private army is NATO and their private government is the UN.
Debt Must First Be Created Before Being Able to Create Debt Money
All the money in the world is based on debt; first debt must be created in order to make debt money.
This is actually a contradiction in terminus, as money is paid to settle debt, which makes real money the opposite of debt. In truth, debt cannot be used as money, except in the world controlled by the Rothschilds.
Please read this paragraph again, until you really understand how we the people are being deceived and robbed of our hard-earned money, money that is created from our valuable energy, that streams into their pockets, because the Rothschilds have equated our energy money to their worthless debt money!
Go to the bank, sign a loan contract, digitally debt is created on your side, out of nowhere. This is how they create all the money in the world that is always based on debt, and so the economy runs on debt.
The charged interest rates for the loan, say 5%, is however not created from your debt/contract, that has to come from another loan contract for which similarly no interest money has been created.
This, in essence, amounts to stealing from Peter to pay Paul. This purposely creates a shortage in the debt money supply.
The interest income goes from the people at the bottom of the pyramid straight to the top of the pyramid; the Rothschilds with their selected wealthy few.
These interest payments thieve from other contracts which ensures the continuation into eternity of financial shortages. To fix this, they keep piling on debt contracts on top of yet more debt contracts to cover the debt on debt on debt holes they themselves have created.
Worldwide this sucks the real value out of people’s money and resources. This is what causes the global national debt to continue to grow.
Meanwhile, the interest rate income is adding capital to the highest top of the pyramid. In addition to the interest rate scam, inflation results, which is yet another theft from us the people.
And the money keeps moving straight up continuously; again, to the very top of money-scam pyramid. As a matter of fact, the interest rate charges cause most of our financial troubles.
The 6th echelon in the pyramid-hierarchy is formed by the multinational corporations. These corporations are responsible to maintain assets and/or operations.
But actually, in many cases they exploit resources and employees. The Rothschilds own, directly or indirectly, almost all of these multinational corporations, such as Coca Cola, Monsanto, Shell, Nestlé, DuPont, P&G, Unilever, Philips, etc.
The 7th echelon in the pyramid structure is formed by the Governments. Governments play along by paying the usage taxes, 13% of the tax money brought in, goes directly back to the privately-owned banking system. Which is corruption at it’s finest.
Finally, on the 8th echelon, at the bottom of the pyramid, are we the people, constantly feeding the Rothschild – elites at the top. We are considered to be bottom-feeders; or useless eaters and we do our part by paying 90% of the interest rate charged that is subsequently divided over the top 10% or the highest top of the pyramid.
That’s how the Rothschilds have built their wealth in excess of 500 trillion dollars, resulting from the web they have woven around us.
Their plan is to completely take over the planet and in that respect, the Rothschilds have been incredibly successful, by hiding their manipulations behind their puppet-cronies.
They control humans like puppets on strings and so they have become the wealthy rulers and dark lords of planet Earth.
The Rothschilds Infiltrated Royalty and Aristocracy Through Breeding
Sumerian – Babylonian – Khazarian bloodlines, like that of the Rothschilds, have used official marriages and concubines to infiltrate royal and aristocratic families.
DNA science has torn back the curtains of time and revealed the Serpent in these people. The ones today called “Jews,” are the very disciples of the evil entity who the Bible describes as, “that old serpent, the devil.”
From the early centuries of the first millennia, the Khazars of Eastern Europe were known as the diabolical “Serpent People,” and now, the nation of Israel has admitted that its people are indeed, the Khazars.
Many politicians, Satanists and others throughout the system are mind-controlled to ensure complete control of events. From the outside – the side the public sees – they are quite normal, but when switched, they are very different people.
The originator of this mind-control process is the Nazi ‘Angel of Death,’ Josef Mengele, who was helped to escape to the United States by the Archon bloodline networks that control American Intelligence and the Roman Church.
They wanted the ‘camp doctor’ at Auschwitz, to continue his sickening genetic and mind-control research that he had conducted on Jewish children in the concentration camps.
National Borders don’t matter to the Archon Crime Cabal – they are one ‘global family’.
Rothschild, one of the main agents of the Khazarian – Archon bloodline, discovered the basic principle of power, influence, and control over people as applied to economics.
That currency or deposit loan accounts had the required façade of power that could be used to induce people into surrendering their real wealth in exchange for a promise of greater wealth – as opposed to real compensation.
People would put up real collateral in exchange for a loan of promissory notes. – On the principle:
“When you assume the appearance of power, people soon give it to you.”
Money – whether it’s a tangible piece of paper or a number on a screen – is intrinsically worthless, yet it fuels the modern world.
The ultimate control of money rests with the private cartel of central bankers, the Federal Reserve System, ECB, BoJ, BoE, etc.
Because of this, it is detrimental for citizens and it is extremely important to understand how this shadowy – private – organization works and how it’s ultimate goal is to forever enslave us in a descending pit of debt that we will never be able to crawl out of.
In order to better understand the importance of GOLD, its history, its significance to the crime cabal, its workings, and the massive fraud foisted upon us, it is important to understand Gold’s dominant role.
Phillip Eugene de Rothschild, one of the millions of unofficial offspring of the family had a detailed correspondence with David Icke in which he explains the hierarchy of the Crime Cabal:
At the forefront are the royal families of Europe… Prince Philip… is the leading biological descendent of the ‘Reptilians’ as David Icke calls them.
Immediately below him are the males of my family line (Rothschilds) like court of ministers in charge of logistics and operations. The current monarchs of The Netherlands, Spain, Denmark, and some other old Austrian nobility (Habsburgs) are next in line of this occult power conspiracy.
How many more children and human beings need to suffer before humanity grows up and faces the reality and sheer evil of the force that controls them and their reality?
The British royal family, like all the royal bloodlines of Europe, are instituted on Satanism, paedophilia, and the manipulation of occult knowledge for deeply malevolent practices, that ends in league with the ‘dark suits’ expressions of the bloodlines in politics, banking, corporations and the media.
They are all part of or involved in this gigantic web of paedophilia, Satanism, drug-running, and murder. The sick and depraved world of the Archon bloodlines, commonly referred to as Elites.
The Vatican, CIA, and this Criminal Construct has not only taken control of our monetary system since its inception, but they believe they have been granted their power via Satanic worship and rites, during which they rape, torture and murder children, hence the term “Money Magic”, the creation of money out of thin air.
According to their belief system, they are granted the power to create the fraudulent money by their evil masters in exchange for them enslaving humanity and helping to create hell on earth.
An increasing number of people are waking up to the fact that 99% of the Earth’s population is controlled by an elite 1% – but did you know that one family, the Rothschilds, rules everything, even the 1% top elites?
There is more to follow: Please share this information with everyone you know. If sufficient more people are awake, we’ll win this battle, our children and grandchildren will be grateful for your help.
Israeli minister called accusation of “anti-Semitism” a “trick” to silence criticism of Israel
During the interview, she was asked:
Question: Often when there is dissent expressed in the United States against policies of the Israeli government, people here are called anti-Semitic. What is your response to that as an Israeli Jew?
Shulamit Aloni replied:
“Well, it’s a trick, we always use it. When from Europe somebody is criticizing Israel, then we bring up the Holocaust. When in this country people are criticizing Israel, then they are anti-Semitic.
And the organization is strong, and has a lot of money, and the ties between Israel and the American Jewish establishment are very strong and they are strong in this country, as you know.
And they have power, which is okay. They are talented people and they have power and money, and the media and other things, and their attitude is “Israel, my country right or wrong,” identification.
And they are not ready to hear criticism.
And it’s very easy to blame people who criticize certain acts of the Israeli government as anti-Semitic, and to bring up the Holocaust, and the suffering of the Jewish people, and that is to justify everything we do to the Palestinians.”
In New Zealand as with other Western countries “the trick” is used to silence criticism of Israel.
People such as newspaper editors, journalists and members of parliament are intensely pressured whenever they speak out against Israel’s brutal military occupation and apartheid policies towards Palestinians.
In New Zealand the pressure comes from groups like the Jewish Council, the Israel Institute, the Israel Parliamentary Friendship Group and the Israeli embassy.
Pressure from “the trick” helps silence criticism and good people end up making excuses for Israel’s murderous policies by blaming the Palestinian victims.
It’s an appalling inversion of truth and justice that leaves the public confused and gives the green light for Israel to continue its ruthless attacks on Palestinians who resist the occupation and fight for self-determination.
Yes, there is genuine anti-Semitism in New Zealand and around the world and all of us must stand side by side with the Jewish community to fight it whenever it rears its ugly head.
However, using one monstrous evil – the Nazi genocide of European Jews in the 1930s and 1940s – to look the other way or back off criticism of another evil is cowardly and inexcusable.
Fear is a natural survival instinct and arguably more motivating than logic and reason. It can also be used to great effect to shift the mindset of communities and nations.
While such manipulation is, of course, not uncommon, what is surprising is how blind societies are to recognising when fear is being used as a tool for political persuasion.
We recently saw this in the Government’s response to the Covid-19 pandemic when the Prime Minister used alarmist computer modelling to justify her “Captain’s Call” to lock the country down.
Claiming “tens of thousands of New Zealanders” could die, the PM rejected Ministry of Health advice to stay at Level 2 for 30 days, and imposed what we now know to be the most stringent policy response in the world.
Instead of relying on cost benefit analyses and regulatory impact statements from trusted government agencies to inform her decisions, the PM chose inaccurate computer models that grossly exaggerated the number of deaths.
It has now been revealed that the modelling she relied on did not take into account the contact testing and tracing that was central to the health response being implemented by Dr Ashley Bloomfield, the Director General of Health.
The explosion of predicted deaths that resulted, was then used by the PM to scare the country into accepting her hard-line lockdown.
This is not the first time the Prime Minister has used scaremongering to force her policy agenda onto the country. Her whole response to climate change has been based on fear.
Climate change is, of course, a natural process influenced by a wide range of factors including the sun, clouds, and ocean currents.
Throughout history, the Earth’s climate has been far hotter than it is today and far colder. Sea levels have been far higher and far lower. Carbon dioxide – the trace gas used by plants to make food – has existed at far higher atmospheric concentrations and far lower.
But the United Nations’ climate models that are being used to redefine economic policy around the world, only focus on the minuscule proportion of carbon emissions produced by humans.
In doing so, they disregard not only the 97 percent of carbon dioxide from natural sources, but also the overwhelming influence that other crucial factors such as the sun have on the climate.
These alarmist models, which blame climate change on humans, are being used by politicians – including our Prime Minister – to implement the UN’s socialist agenda: state control of all economic activity through the regulation of carbon emissions.
Fortunately, most scams motivated by scaremongering are eventually exposed – often by the very people who pioneered the movements before they were captured by political extremists.
This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator Michael Shellenberger is a leading American climate activist, who, having promoted global warming propaganda for almost three decades, has decided to stop the lies:
“On behalf of environmentalists everywhere, I would like to formally apologize for the climate scare we created over the last 30 years. Climate change is happening. It’s just not the end of the world. It’s not even our most serious environmental problem.
Here are some facts few people know: Humans are not causing a ‘sixth mass extinction’; Climate change is not making natural disasters worse; Netherlands became rich not poor while adapting to life below sea level; Habitat loss and the direct killing of wild animals are bigger threats to species than climate change; Wood fuel is far worse for people and wildlife than fossil fuels…
I know that the above facts will sound like ‘climate denialism’ to many people. But that just shows the power of climate alarmism.”
Michael Shellenberger explains how difficult it has been to speak out against the climate scare:
“I was embarrassed. After all, I am as guilty of alarmism as any other environmentalist. For years, I referred to climate change as an ‘existential’ threat to human civilization, and called it a ‘crisis’.
But mostly I was scared. I remained quiet about the climate disinformation campaign because I was afraid of losing friends and funding. The few times I summoned the courage to defend climate science from those who misrepresent it I suffered harsh consequences. And so I mostly stood by and did next to nothing as my fellow environmentalists terrified the public…
But then, last year, things spiralled out of control. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez said ‘The world is going to end in twelve years if we don’t address climate change.’ Britain’s most high-profile environmental group claimed ‘Climate Change Kills Children.
As a result, half of the people surveyed around the world last year said they thought climate change would make humanity extinct.
And in January, one out of five British children told pollsters they were having nightmares about climate change. Whether or not you have children you must see how wrong this is.
I admit I may be sensitive because I have a teenage daughter. After we talked about the science she was reassured. But her friends are deeply misinformed and thus, understandably, frightened. I thus decided I had to speak out.”
While Michael Shellenberger deserves credit for speaking out and exposing the misrepresentation, those activists who lie who should be held to account – particularly by the media.
It is therefore regrettable that so many in the media have decided their interests are better served by aligning with the popularists, rather than adhering to the bedrock values of their profession.
Prime amongst New Zealand’s serial alarmists is the Green Party’s Climate Change Minister James Shaw.
Not only does he knowingly describe carbon dioxide, the cornerstone of life on earth, as a “pollutant”, but he also continues to claim that as a result of climate change, adverse weather events are getting worse, which is another alarmist fabrication that is simply untrue.
But as the late Stephen Schneider, a Stanford University Professor who had been a lead author for the UN’s Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change explained, for advocates of climate alarmism the truth is not a priority:
“…we need to get some broad based support, to capture the public’s imagination. That entails getting loads of media coverage. So we have to offer up scary scenarios, make simplified, dramatic statements, and make little mention of any doubts we might have. Each of us has to decide what the right balance is between being effective and being honest.”
Fearmongering, of course, has been an effective tool to manipulate the public throughout history.
The myth that population growth will deplete food and resources, and ultimately destroy the planet, can be traced back to the writing of the Reverend Thomas Malthus in 1798.
These idea gained unprecedented traction following the 1968 release of The Population Bomb by Paul Ehrlich, an entomologist at Stanford University. The book incited such fear of overpopulation that it triggered waves of repression around the world.
The facts, however, tell a different story. Population growth has been slowing for more than three decades. Forty years ago, while the average woman had between five and six children to ensure the survival of the next generation, she now has between two and three.
Women are having fewer children because better healthcare means that most babies now live to grow up. As a result, half of the world is already below the long-term replacement level.
Concerns over ‘peak oil’ have also been in and out of vogue over recent decades. Driven by the theory that the world would run out of oil, the reality is that rather than resource depletion, scarcity has been the result of geopolitical disruption.
The Club of Rome, an Italian-based think tank established in 1965, investigated resource scarcity in their highly influential book The Limits to Growth. Using computer modelling, they forecast apocalyptic economic and environmental disaster.
Ironically, it has now become clear that, contrary to what they were predicting, the best way to improve humanity and the environment is through more growth, not less.
As countries improve their living standards, so too they improve social, economic and environmental wellbeing. It is the resourcefulness of free markets to innovate and maximise the efficient use of resources that results in a progressive improvement in living standards.
What is also bizarre is that while in the 1970s climate computer models predicted that the burning of fossil fuels would trigger another ice age, nowadays they are claiming the exact opposite – that the burning of fossil fuels will cause the planet to dangerously overheat.
This contradiction has not stopped our politicians – with fossil fuels identified as the villain, their policy response of an increasing carbon levy, has effectively imposed socialist state control over all economic activity.
When the Prime Minister and Climate Change Minister introduced their Zero Carbon Act last year, they boasted about imposing the harshest restrictions on carbon emissions of any country in the world.
Then last month, they amended the Emissions Trading Scheme to cap carbon emissions, causing the price of carbon to jump from around $25 a tonne to $33.
At $25, New Zealanders were paying an ETS levy of around 4c for every litre of petrol they bought. At $33, the levy is now around 7 cents a litre, and at $35, it will be around 9c a litre. Such price hikes will flow right through the economy, increasing the cost of living.
The Climate Change Minister expects carbon prices will go much higher.
Meanwhile the carbon price rise has had a major impact on vegetable affordability, especially tomatoes.
With hothouses no longer economical in some areas, local growers are being forced to close. As a result, New Zealanders will see an increase in produce imported from countries with no carbon costs.
With the 2015 Paris Agreement on Climate Change specifying that measures introduced to enable countries to meet their carbon targets must not reduce food production, Minister Shaw is clearly breaking the rules.
Governments can only get away with imposing socialist control under the guise of climate change because of their scaremongering.
By endlessly claiming that burning fossil fuels is causing dangerous global warming, they promote renewable energy as the only sustainable alternative.
In a controversial new film, Planet of the Humans, which climate activists have tried to ban, filmmaker Michael Moore provides a devastating indictment of the renewable energy scam, explaining it is not clean, green, nor sustainable, but is more destructive than the energy sources it seeks to replace.
The film shows how wind, solar and biofuel projects destroy wildlife habitats, rare and endangered species, and millions of acres of forests, deserts and grasslands.
It exposes bogus claims about the benefits of renewable energy and explains that electricity for a small city of 50,000 households requires 15 square miles of solar panels, along with wind turbines, and a huge array of batteries – or a coal or gas power plant – for nights and cloudy days.
Paul Driessen, a senior policy analyst for the Committee For A Constructive Tomorrow, reviewed the film and describes the turbines:
“Each one is comprised of nearly 5,000,000 pounds of concrete, steel, aluminum, copper, plastic, cobalt, rare earths, fiberglass and other materials.
Every step in the mining, processing, manufacturing, transportation, installation, maintenance and (20 years later) removal process requires fossil fuels. It bears repeating: wind and sun are renewable and sustainable; harnessing them for energy to benefit mankind absolutely is not.”
While some of the film’s conclusions are questionable, Michael Moore raises concerns about the merits of alternative energy that alarmists have conveniently ignored:
“We’re basically being fed a lie.” Maybe we’d be “better off just burning fossil fuels in the first place,” than doing all of this.
Although dissenting voices are not yet dominating the debate about climate alarmism, there is enough concern for political leaders to stop the headlong rush into policy extremism and exercise some common sense judgement.
With New Zealand already struggling to recover from the harsh lockdown, the last thing this country needs is climate policy based on scaremongering to undermine our fragile economic recovery.
Why Do We Condemn Others For Being ‘Less Awake’ Or ‘Less Conscious?’ January 13 2023 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various
It’s humbling to remember that you once did not know the things you know today.
Yet sometimes many of us judge and condemn others who do not yet know what we currently know. Why?
The Facts: So much of the time, many in the 'truth seeking' community will judge and condemn others who are not 'as awake.' This keeps us plugged into egoic consciousness and creating a world driven by polarity.
Reflect On: Right and wrong aside, as these are just subjective polarities, how does it feel to judge others? Does it connect you to them? Does it allow you to see and feel that they are inherently one with you? Do you feel free when driven by judgement?
I feel like I’ve written this statement in so many of the recent articles I’ve written:
“We’re in a time where so much truth about how our world really functions behind the scenes is coming to the surface.”
When people learn about this stuff, they feel they are ‘in the know” and one thing I’ve noticed since I started Collective Evolution 11 years ago, is that many in the community of ‘seeking truth’ seem to become judgemental of those who aren’t seeking the same thing or who don’t agree.
It’s common to get caught up in the feeling or judgement that we might be better than others because we might be a little more aware or evolved in certain ways.
“I can’t believe that person still does that or thinks that way, man, they are so dense or 3D.” someone might say while snickering and hating on people.
“Look at these stupid sheep who know nothing about what’s going on in the world! Go back to your 9-5 job and just shut up!” says someone who judges the way someone sees the current world.
The truth is, YES, some of us do evolve in our awareness a little quicker, and we may see things a little differently.
YES, some of us do start to figure out what’s going on in the world a little faster than others. But does that make you better?
Does that make you step into a state of judgement? How does it feel to view people as ‘sheep’? Do you notice you feel good? Loving? Free? Connected to others? Do you feel you could look at others in the eye and see the inherent loving connection that exists between you and them?
Or is it clouded by the identification with ego because truthfully, in these moments, you are still asleep?
All the journey of having some of us awaken a little quicker provides is brother and sister souls with the opportunity to learn from one another about what’s going on so we can all evolve and change this world together in the end.
So again we reflect, did you once not know something that now you judge someone for? Have people done this to you? How do these things feel?
Does it help us to beat people up emotionally when they don’t have the same understandings as us? Do people not seem crazy and angry when they get mad at others who don’t understand truths? Is this going to help them awaken? Or shy away from this information?
I want to be clear, there is no right or wrong here. One isn’t ‘the nice thing to do’ and the other ‘the mean thing to do.’ I’m not telling you what to do. I suggesting you search within yourself and find the answer.
I’m bringing forth the idea of questioning how each of these experiences feel and then seeing which one you truly align with more.
The choice is ours as to how we act, but when the world doesn’t change and people wonder what’s going on, I often point to the fact that many people are waiting angrily and judgementally for the world to change, yet they are only adding to the problem by holding onto those emotions and staying plugged into a story of separation.
Isn’t it possible that given your polarity towards people, you are creating the need for them to reflect the opposite polarity back to you until you can activate your awareness enough to see the neutrality in things?
To see that yes, things are happening in the world, but by coloring them with your emotion and creating divides by judging others you are doing precisely what the deep state does in creating divide – it is all the same level of consciousness.
Awareness of self, the true self, beyond the ego, is the key to awakening to and creating a new reality. Yes, learning about the various forms of ‘corruption’ or societal manipulation, that is obviously happening, is helpful in opening the door for many to start to question their reality.
And it also gives us a reason, when we are less aware, to begin exploring the desire for change, but are we truly awake and free if we are still tied down and plugged into the polarity of the world we are working to change?
Can our reality really change if we are just operating from the same mindset and egoic state of being but with slightly different beliefs? If it can change, is it true and deep change? Would we truly be free? Can we access our highest potential when in anger and judgement?
See how it feels, explore these questions within yourself.
Going Deeper
I’ve created many materials over the past few years including a conscious breathing course and a personal transformation course designed to simply slow life down and get more in tune with yourself.
Neither of these courses are huge commitments and are approachable, ‘level 1’ like, approaches to seeing a different side of yourself – your true self. Utilize these tools if it resonates with you. Both are available in our inner circle called CETV.
Inside our inner circle, you will have access to powerful information, guided programs, and a community all geared towards being informed about what’s happening in our world, and how you can truly engage in a guided journey of personal transformation so that you can be a change-maker our world truly needs at this time.
You’ll be inspired by how many likeminded people inside are ready to share in this journey.
Narrative Is Crumbling January 12 2023 | From: CaitlinJohnstone / Various
It’s difficult to understand what’s going on in the world.
It’s difficult to understand what’s going on in the world because powerful people actively manipulate public understanding of what’s going on in the world.
Powerful people actively manipulate public understanding of what’s going on in the world because if the public understood what’s going on in the world, they would rise up and use their strength of numbers to overthrow the powerful.
The public would rise up and use their strength of numbers to overthrow the powerful if they understood what’s going on in their world because then they would understand that the powerful have been exploiting, oppressing, robbing, cheating and deceiving them while destroying the ecosystem, stockpiling weapons of armageddon and waging endless wars, for no other reason than so that they can maintain and expand their power.
The public do not rise up and use their strength of numbers to overthrow the powerful because they have been successfully manipulated into not wanting to.
Narrative is crumbling.
The public have been successfully manipulated into not wanting to rise up and use their strength of numbers to overthrow the powerful due to the way the powerful have been able to shore up mainstream narrative control in the form of purchasing mass media outlets, funding think tanks, buying politicians, implementing government opacity, pushing internet censorship, and other forms of perception management.
The powerful use their control over mainstream narratives to ensure that enough members of the public believe they live in a free democracy where things aren’t perfect but it’s the best you could ask for, instead of in a corporatist oligarchy wherein the powerful exploit, oppress, rob, cheat and deceive them while destroying the ecosystem, stockpiling weapons of armageddon and waging endless wars.
As long as the powerful are able to exert control over mainstream narratives, there will never be enough members of the public willing to use their strength of numbers to shake off the powerful and create a healthy society.
The powerful will remain capable of exerting control over mainstream narratives for as long as the public maintains its current unhealthy relationship with mental narrative.
Narrative is crumbling.
A collective shift into a healthy relationship with mental narrative would mean thought becomes the useful tool we evolved it to be rather than this noisy, compulsive head-chatter which dominates our lives where we are driven by fear and attachment to imbue an endless string of mental stories with the power of belief.
If we had a healthy relationship with mental narrative we would naturally view stories about what’s going on in the world far more objectively, because rather than glomming onto them out of fear and attachment we would have psychological space enough to look at them and critically examine whether or not they are useful tools for us to use in the present moment.
Noam Chomsky - The 5 Filters of the Mass Media Machine
According to American linguist and political activist, Noam Chomsky, media operate through 5 filters: ownership, advertising, the media elite, flak and the common enemy.
If humanity collectively made such a transition on a mass scale - a transition which sages across the millennia assure us humans are fully capable of - then humanity would become impossible to propagandize effectively.
If humanity becomes impossible to propagandize effectively, the lies will be impossible to conceal via mainstream narrative control, and humanity using the strength of its numbers to create a healthy society will become an inevitability.
And the funny thing is, in a weird way from way out of left field that nobody could possibly have anticipated, humanity’s current relationship with mental narrative appears to be drawing to a close.
The narratives are breaking down.
People’s old ways of understanding what’s going on in the world just aren’t holding together anymore.
Trust in the mass media is at an all-time low, and it’s only getting lower.
People are more aware than ever that anything they see can be propaganda or disinformation.
Deepfake technology will soon be so advanced and so accessible that nobody will even trust video anymore.
The entire media class will now [attempt to] spend years leading the public on a wild goose chase for Russian collusion and then act like it’s no big deal when the whole thing turned out to be completely baseless.
There’s a virus causing a massive disturbance in the entirety of human civilization with two wildly different narratives about it running simultaneously, and both sides are 100 percent convinced that all the facts have fully vindicated their position.
There are protests where people are becoming more and more aware that they are being fed empty narratives of approval and understanding while their core demands are going completely unaddressed.
New cold war escalations between the US-centralized empire and the unabsorbed governments of China and Russia are going to cause the media airwaves around the planet to become saturated in ever-intensifying propaganda narratives which favor one side or the other and have no interest in honestly telling people the truth about what’s going on.
It’s all accelerating toward a white noise saturation point.
How long do you think we can go on like this?
How far do you think humanity’s relationship with narrative can be stretched before it snaps completely and forces a completely new way of being?
How long before it becomes more and more common for people to begin looking to themselves as individuals to determine which narratives are useful to them instead of looking to establishment narrative managers like they used to?
How long before people find themselves more and more often asking the question “Is this true?”
How long before people find themselves more and more often asking the question “What is truth?”
How long before people find themselves more and more often asking the question “What else have I been deceived about?”
How long before people find themselves more and more often asking the question “How else have I been deceiving myself?”
The current strain that is being placed on our collective relationship with narrative is completely unsustainable.
This would be a bad thing if we’d had a healthy relationship with mental narrative, but we don’t; we have a profoundly unhealthy relationship with mental narrative which has left us susceptible to terrible abuses on a mass scale.
We are now, as a species, collectively squeezing ourselves out of our old unhealthy relationship with narrative.
Narrative is crumbling.
It’s all crumbling to the ground. This cannot be a bad thing.
The Surveillance State: How To Disappear & It’s Why Big Tech Is Watching You: How You Spend Your Money Reveals Parts Of Your Personality, And Vice Versa January 11 2023 | From: 21stCenturyWire / NaturalNews / Various
With each passing day, supposedly ‘free and democratic’ western governments are working overtime to emulate the type of surveillance states we see in countries like China and North Korea.
The goal is 24/7 digital tracking of every citizen, and this authoritarian agenda is being accelerated during the current manufactured COVID-19 ‘crisis.’ Besides going off-grid to a remote rural area, is it still possible to opt-out?
To answer this question, you will first need to audit which lines of tracking are currently in use.
Is it possible for a person to successfully evade this rapidly emerging Orwellian grid of surveillance and social control?
Even when wearing a mask in public, the State and its corporate enablers still have multiple lines of tracking honed on members of the public.
To create effective privacy shields, it is first necessary to deconstruct your current web of digital networks. In addition, there are also a number a new tools at your disposal.
“If extricating yourself from the electrical grid is, to some degree, a test of moxie and patience, extracting yourself from the web of urban surveillance technology strains the limits of both.
If you live in a dense urban environment, you are being watched, in all kinds of ways. A graphic released by the Future of Privacy Forum highlights just how many sensors, CCTCV cameras, RFID readers, and other nodes of observation might be eying you as you maneuver around a city’s blocks.
As cities race to fit themselves with smart technologies, it’s nearly impossible to know precisely how much data they’re accumulating, how it’s being stored, or what they’ll do with it."
“By and large, right now, it’s the Wild West, and the sheriff is also the bad guy, or could be,” says Albert Gidari, the director of privacy at Stanford Law School’s Center for Internet and Society.
The various nodes where sensors and other tech could detect your movements through the city - Click on the image to view a larger version in a new window
Smart technologies can ease traffic, carve out safer pedestrian passages, and analyze environmental factors such as water quality and air pollution.
But, as my colleague Linda Poon points out, their adoption is also stirring up a legal maelstrom.
Surveillance fears have been aroused in Oakland, California, Seattle, and Chicago, and the applications of laws protecting citizen privacy are murky. For instance: data that’s stored on a server indefinitely could potentially infringe on the “right to be forgotten” that’s protected in some European countries.
What would it look like to leapfrog that murkiness by opting out entirely? Can a contemporary urbanite successfully skirt surveillance? I asked Gidari and Lee Tien, a senior staff attorney at the Electronic Frontier Foundation, to teach me how to disappear.
During the course of our conversations, Tien and Gidari each remind me, again and again, that this was a fool’s errand: You can’t truly hide from urban surveillance.
In an email before our phone call, Tien points out that we’re not even aware of all the traces of ourselves that are out in the world. He likens our data trail - from parking meters, streetlight cameras, automatic license plate readers, and more - to a kind of binary DNA that we’re constantly sloughing. Trying to scrub these streams of data would be impossible.
Moreover, as the tools of surveillance have become more sophisticated, detecting them has become a harder task. “There was a time when you could spot cameras,” Tien says.
Maybe a bodega would hang up a metal sign warning passersby that they were being recorded by a clunky, conspicuous device. “But now, they’re smaller, recessed, and don’t look like what you expect them to look like.”
Other cameras are in the sky. As Buzzfeed has reported, some federal surveillance technologies are mounted in sound - dampened planes and helicopters that cruise over cities, using augmented reality to overlay a grid that identifies targets at a granular level.
“There are sensors everywhere,” Gidari says. “The public has no ability to even see where they are.”
The surest way to dodge surveillance is to not encounter it in the first place - but that’s not a simple ask. While various groups have tried to plot out routes that allow pedestrians to literally sidestep nodes of surveillance, they haven’t been especially successful.
The most effective solutions are also the least practical ones. To defeat facial recognition software, “you would have to wear a mask or disguises,” Tien says. “That doesn’t really scale up for people.”
Those techniques are hardly subtle, though - in trying to trick the technology, you would stick out to the naked eye. And as biometrics continue to advance, cameras will likely be less dupable, too.
There are also legal hiccups to consider: Drivers who don’t want city officials to know where they parked or when, Gidari says, would have to outwit license plate recognition tools by obscuring their license plate, such as with the noPhoto camera jammer, a new $399 device that fires a flash at red light cameras in an attempt to scramble a readable image.
Obscuring license plates is already illegal in many cities and states, and others are chewing on new procedures.
LED glasses might not trick biometric cameras - but they will definitely attract the attention of folks on the street (Image Source: National institute of Informatics)
In their book Obfuscation: A User’s Guide for Privacy and Protest, Finn Brunton and Helen Nissenbaum, both professors at New York University, champion a strategy of “throwing some sand in the gears, kicking up dust and making some noise,” essentially relying on the melee of data jamming to “hide in a cloud of signals.”
A number of apps, websites, and browser extensions attempt to aid users in this type of misdirection - say, for instance, by running in the background of your regular web activities, trying to cover your digital tracks by throwing surveillance off your scent.
For example: A site called Internet Noise searches for randomized phrases and opens five fresh tabs every ten seconds. (I left it running as I wrote this, and now my browser history includes pictures of badgers, an online mattress store, an NPR article about the Supreme Court, and a research paper about gene mutation in hamsters.)
As a cloaking technique, it’s not a perfect veil, writes Emily Dreyfess in Wired: “It’s actually too random. It doesn’t linger on sites very long, nor does it revisit them. In other words, it doesn’t really look human, and smart-enough tracking algorithms likely know that.”
The site is more of a protest over Congress rolling back a not-yet-implemented FCC regulation that would have stymied ISPs from selling users’ browsing history.
Still, Tien advocates a certain degree of self-protection. He views these measures as a kind of digital hygiene - the “equivalent of washing your hands when you go to the bathroom,” or getting a flu shot.
But he stresses that they’re only a partial prophylactic: “Nothing that will make you immune from the problem.”
Other techniques include employing Tor - a network that tries to anonymize the source and destination of your web searches by routing traffic along a convoluted path - and Signal, which offers encrypted messaging and phone calls.
The Electronic Frontier Foundation’s Surveillance Self-Defense toolkit also suggests particular tools and behaviors for specific scenarios.
People participating in protests, the guide suggests, might consider stripping meta-data from photos, to make it harder to match them with identities and locations.
But this isn’t a perfect solution, either, Tien says, because you can only control what you post. “If I take a picture and scrub the metadata, that’s one thing,”
On a daily basis, Tien tells me, “I don’t think you or I can exercise much meaningful self-help against the kind of tracking we’ll be seeing in real-world physical space.”
That’s fodder for a point he makes about a fundamental asymmetry in the information that’s available to the bodies that install the cameras and those who are surveilled by them.
There are relatively few laws relating to the expectation of privacy in a public space. The officials and organizations that install sensors, cameras, and ever-more-sensitive devices, he says, “have much more money than you do, much more technology than you do, and they don’t have to tell you what they’re doing.”
Ultimately, Tien and Gidari both take a long view, arguing that the most payoff will come from pushing for more transparency about just what this technology is up to.
Part and parcel of that, Tien says, is resisting the idea that data is inherently neutral. The whole messy, jumbled mass of it contains information that could have tangible consequences on people’s lives.
Tien says citizens need to remind their elected officials what’s at stake with data - and in the process, maybe “dampen their enthusiasm” for the collection of it.
There, he says, some advocates of immigrant rights are realizing that data collected via municipal surveillance “might not be such a good thing when we’re interested in protecting immigrants and the federal government is interested in deporting them.”
The practical strategies for opting out - of becoming invisible to some of these modes of surveillance - are imperfect, to say the least. [ Comment: Move out of a city if you are living in one. It's a start. ]
That’s not to say that data collection is inherently nefarious, Gidari says - as he wrote in a blog post for the CIS, “no one wants to live in a ‘dumb’ city.”
But he says that opting out shouldn’t need to be the default:
“I don’t think you should have been opted in in the first place.”
It’s Why Big Tech Is Watching You: How You Spend Your Money Reveals Parts Of Your Personality, And Vice Versa
Studies show that the way people spend their money can reveal some aspects of their personality, and it’s only a matter of time before corporations and governments take advantage of this fact to further their own agendas.
Researchers fromUniversity College London and Columbia University analyzed the spending of more than 2,000 UK consumers who had agreed to share their financial data for the analysis.
They looked at more than 2 million spending records, analyzing the purchases people made at supermarkets and places like Amazon. Their spending was broken down into categories such as cafés, furniture stores, online retailers, insurance policies and supermarkets.
The participants also completed personality tests that assessed them on the big five personality traits of neuroticism, agreeableness, conscientiousness, extroversion and openness to experience.
The researchers then applied a machine learning technique to explore how people’s spending habits aligned with those traits. Their findings were published in the journal Psychological Science.
The scientists discovered that not every trait had a direct correlation with spending, but some narrower traits such as self-control and materialism had strong matches.
For example, people who are more open to experience had a tendency to spend more money on flights. Consumers who are considered more agreeable tended to donate more money to charity, while more materialistic consumers spent less on donations and more on luxuries like jewelry.
Those who are extroverted made more drinking and dining purchases, and conscientious consumers put more money into savings.
In recent years, a number of brave individuals have alerted us to the fact that we're all being monitored and manipulated by big data gatherers such as Google and Facebook, and shed light on the depth and breadth of this ongoing surveillance. Among them is social psychologist and Harvard professor Shoshana Zuboff.
People who were categorized as being neurotic, which means they had greater anxiety and worries, generally had lower mortgage payments.
That could be because such personalities tend to have greater concerns about overextending themselves financially. Meanwhile, those who had greater self-control spent less money in bank fees.
The authors of the study said that their predictions were consistent across age ranges and salary brackets. There was only one exception:
People who lived in poor areas were more difficult to predict.
That may be because when money is tight, people have fewer choices when it comes to spending it in ways that may express their personality.
How Can this Information be Used Against Us?
The authors of the paper noted that there are serious ethical concerns related to their research. Companies could analyze people’s spending patterns to help them identify more vulnerable consumers.
For example, financial services firms could target people who are lacking in self-control with messages about products that could turn out to be harmful.
The authors wrote: “There is an urgent need for policymakers to ensure that individuals (and societies) are protected against potential abuse of such technologies.”
Indeed, as more and more people spend the bulk of their money electronically using payment cards, people’s spending patterns can be studied at unprecedented levels.
This could allow those with access to people’s spending habits to determine their personality and use it in destructive ways.
This goes far beyond the grocery store checking how often you buy certain foods to target you with the right discounts and get you in their door; it’s Big Tech knowing if you’re introverted, agreeable or neurotic and possibly sharing that information with governments, who can then target you in all sorts of ways that are scary to imagine – and there’s no way to opt out of it.
The Study Of Fundamental Consciousness Entering The Mainstream January 10 2022 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various
The world-renowned neuroscientist Christof Koch, spent nearly two decades working alongside the co-discoverer of the DNA molecule, Francis Crick.
Their mission was to find the neurobiological basis of consciousness.
They discovered many insights into cognition and the functioning of perception, yet the central enigma, the nature of consciousness itself, remained mysteriously elusive.
In 2009, Koch shocked the scientific community by publishing his conviction that consciousness probably isn’t just in brains, but is a fundamental feature of reality.
In Brief:
The Facts: Consciousness is appearing to be a fundamental property, just like liquids, solids and gas, consciousness and its connection to the physical material world is now gaining big time credibility.
Reflect On: How much do we have yet to discover? Are we ready to abandon what we thought we knew in light of new discoveries and evidence?
This is a view known to philosophers as ‘panpsychism.’ The theory Koch is now dedicating his research to is called ‘Integrated Information Theory’ or ‘IIT.’ It is the brainchild of neuroscientist Giulio Tononi of the University of Wisconsin-Madison.
In explaining his theory, Tononi asks us to consider a simple light sensitive photo diode like those found in a digital camera. A simple diode might respond to just two states: light or dark.
We could present our diode with any number of images, yet regardless of the picture, the diode conforms to one of only two possible states. Is it light, or is it dark?
Now consider yourself looking at the same picture, lets say, of the Eiffel Tower on a beautiful spring day in Paris. For us, looking at this image results in a reduction from a near infinity of possible states.
Not an image of the Andromeda galaxy, not a childhood picture of your mother, not cells dividing in a Petri dish and so on. Because of the vast number of images we are capable of recognizing, each one is highly informative.
For Tononi, the vast amount of information capable of being integrated in the brain means that we have a comparatively huge capacity for consciousness.
Tononi’s theory, that consciousness is born out of networks with high integrated information, has novel ways of being tested in the laboratory.
In studies with sleeping participants, Tononi and his colleagues used transcranial magnetic stimulation to send a ripple of activity through the cortex of sleeping participants.
The researchers found that when dreaming, this ripple reverberated through the cortex longer than when participants were in stages of dreamless sleep.
This demonstrated that during dreaming, when the brain is conscious, the cortex has a higher degree of integration.
In another experiment, the researchers built tiny robots known as ‘animats’ that were placed into mazes. The animats used simple integrated networks capable of evolving over sequential generations.
To their surprise, the greater the degree of integration that the animats evolved, the quicker they were able to escape the mazes.
For Tononi this finding suggested that consciousness may play a more central role in evolution than had previously been thought.
The mathematical value of integrated information in a network is known as phi. But Tononi’s theory, now the topic of serious mainstream discussion, has an extraordinary implication.
Phi didn’t just occur in brains, - it is a property of any network with a total informational content greater than its individual parts. Every living cell, every electronic circuit, even a proton consisting of just three elementary particles have a value of phi greater than zero.
According to Integrated Information Theory, all of these things possess something, albeit but a glimmer of ‘what it is like’ to be them.
Tononi states:
“Consciousness is a fundamental property, like mass or charge. Wherever there is an entity with multiple states, there is some consciousness. You need a special structure to get a lot of it but consciousness is everywhere, it is a fundamental property.”
Integrated information theory is in its infancy and there are still many questions it must face. Did the information of brains operate at the level of the neuron, or the protein, or something deeper still?
The electromagnetic field of the brain, as observed by psi researcher Dean Radin, is always re-establishing its quantum connection to the entire universe. Could a much richer informational interaction exist than has yet been imagined?
Physicists such as John Wheeler have laid the groundwork for a radical new understanding of reality, in which matter, the laws and constants of nature, and indeed the entire universe is best described, not in terms of physical objects, but through the play and display of a fundamental dynamic information.
Quantum mechanics suggests that at the deepest level of nature, the entire physical universe is interconnected. Might the total information of the universe be integrated in some deep sense? Is it in a mysterious way conscious of itself?
As spiritual traditions throughout the ages have long asserted, instead of isolated and separate experiencing beings, we may experience on behalf of the greater evolving system in which we find ourselves.
In Koch’s highly anticipated 2012 book, ‘Consciousness – Confessions of a Romantic Reductionist’, he states:
“I do believe that the laws of physics overwhelmingly favored the emergence of consciousness. The universe is a work in progress. Such a belief evokes jeremiads from many biologists and philosophers but the evidence from cosmology, biology and history is compelling.”
Regardless of the validity of Tononi’s theory, today increasing numbers of scientists and academics are convinced that the existence of consciousness simply cannot be sensibly denied.
The study of fundamental consciousness is now entering the mainstream. This movement consists of thinkers in and outside of the mind sciences.
Yet despite their different academic backgrounds, they are united by two common convictions: that consciousness is an intrinsic rather than incidental emergence in the universe, and that any complete account of reality must include an explanation of it.
Orwell’s 1984 No Longer Reads Like Fiction - It’s The Reality Of Our Times
& The Propaganda Ministry Known As “The Free Press” January 9 2023 | From: RT / PaulCraigRoberts / Various
70 years ago, the British writer George Orwell captured the essence of technology in its ability to shape our destinies in his seminal work, 1984. The tragedy of our times is that we have failed to heed his warning.
No matter how many times I read 1984, the feeling of total helplessness and despair that weaves itself throughout Orwell’s masterpiece never fails to take me by surprise.
Although usually referred to as a ‘dystopian futuristic novel’, it is actually a horror story on a scale far greater than anything that has emerged from the minds of prolific writers like Stephen King or Dean Koontz.
The reason is simple. The nightmare world that the protagonist Winston Smith inhabits, a place called Oceania, is all too easily imaginable. Man, as opposed to some imaginary clown or demon, is the evil monster.
In the very first pages of the book, Orwell demonstrates an uncanny ability to foresee future trends in technology.
Describing the protagonist Winston Smith’s frugal London flat, he mentions an instrument called a ‘telescreen’, which sounds strikingly similar to the handheld ‘smartphone’ that is enthusiastically used by billions of people around the world today.
Orwell describes the ubiquitous device as an “oblong metal plaque like a dulled mirror” affixed to the wall that “could be dimmed, but there was no way of shutting it off completely.”
Sound familiar? It is through this gadget that the rulers of Oceania are able to monitor the actions of its citizens every minute of every day.
At the same time, the denizens of 1984 were never allowed to forget they were living in a totalitarian surveillance state, under the control of the much-feared Thought Police.
Massive posters with the slogan ‘Big Brother is Watching You’ were as prevalent as our modern-day advertising billboards.
Today, however, such polite warnings about surveillance would seem redundant, as reports of unauthorized spying still gets the occasional lazy nod in the media now and then.
In fact, just in time for 1984’s anniversary, it has been reported that the National Security Agency (NSA) has once again been illicitly collecting records on telephone calls and text messages placed by US citizens.
This latest invasion of privacy has been casually dismissed as an “error” after an unnamed telecommunications firm handed over call records the NSA allegedly “hadn’t requested” and “weren’t approved” by the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court.
In 2013, former CIA employee Edward Snowden blew the whistle on the NSA’s intrusive surveillance operations, yet somehow the government agency is able to continue – with the help of the corporate sector – vacuuming up the private information of regular citizens.
Another method of control alluded to in 1984 fell under a system of speech known as ‘Newspeak’, which attempted to reduce the language to ‘doublethink’, with the ulterior motive of controlling ideas and thoughts.
For example, the term ‘joycamp’, a truncated term every bit as euphemistic as the ‘PATRIOT Act’, was used to describe a forced labor camp, whereas a ‘doubleplusgood duckspeaker’ was used to praise an orator who ‘quacked’ correctly with regards to the political situation.
Another Newspeak term, known as ‘facecrime’, provides yet another striking parallel to our modern situation.
The Candace Owens Show: Nigel Farage
Brexit Party leader Nigel Farage and Candace Owens discuss why Brexit and the election of Donald Trump was a revolt against the global political establishment.
They also examine the importance of the nation state, capitalism and the 2016 U.S. election. Don’t miss this special episode filmed in our London studio!
Defined as “to wear an improper expression on your face (to look incredulous when a victory was announced, for example) was itself a punishable offense.”
It would be difficult for the modern reader to hear the term ‘facecrime’ and not connect it with ‘Facebook’, the social media platform that regularly censors content creators for expressing thoughts it finds ‘hateful’ or inappropriate.
What social media users need is an Orwellian lesson in ‘crimestop’, which Orwell defined as “the faculty of stopping short, as though by instinct, at the threshold of any dangerous thought.”
Those so-called unacceptable ‘dangerous thoughts’ were determined not by the will of the people, of course, but by their rulers.
And yes, it gets worse. Just this week, Mark Zuckerberg’s ‘private company’ agreed to give French authorities the “identification data” of Facebook users suspected of spreading ‘hate speech’ on the platform, in what would be an unprecedented move on the part of Silicon Valley.
‘Hate speech’ is precisely one of those delightfully vague, subjective terms with no real meaning that one would expect to find in the Newspeak style guide.
Short of threatening the life of a person or persons, individuals should be free to criticize others without fear of reprisal, least of all from the state, which should be in the business of protecting free speech at all cost.
Another modern phenomenon that would be right at home in Orwell’s Oceania is the obsession with political correctness, which is defined as “the avoidance of forms of expression or action that are perceived to exclude, marginalize, or insult groups of people who are socially disadvantaged or discriminated against.”
But since so many people today identify with some marginalized group, this has made the intelligent discussion of controversial ideas – not least of all on US college campuses, of all places – exceedingly difficult, if not downright dangerous.
Orwell must be looking down on all of this madness with much surprise, since he provided the world with the best possible warning to prevent it.
For anyone who entertains expectations for a happy ending in 1984, be prepared for serious disappointment (spoiler alert, for the few who have somehow not read this book).
Although Winston Smith manages to finally experience love, the brief romance – like a delicate flower that was able to take root amid a field of asphalt – is crushed by the authorities with shocking brutality.
Not satisfied with merely destroying the relationship, however, Smith is forced to betray his ‘Julia’ after undergoing the worst imaginable torture at the ‘Ministry of Love’.
The book ends with the words, “He had won the victory over himself. He loved Big Brother.”
Will we too declare, like Winston Smith, our love for ‘Big Brother’ above all else, or will we emerge victorious against the forces of a technological tyranny that appears to be just over the horizon? Or is Orwell’s 1984 just really good fiction and not the instruction manual for tyrants many have come to fear it is?
An awful lot is riding on our answers to those questions, and time is running out.
As I have reported on many occasions, the presstitutes constitute not a free press but a Ministry of Propaganda for the government and ruling oligarchic interests.
Ben Norton explains that the New York Times gets permission from Washington before it prints a story:
The New York Times has publicly acknowledged that it sends some of its stories to the US government for approval from “national security officials” before publication.
He explains that CIA control and manipulation of the media has a long tradition, a tradition exposed by journalists who know:
“Legendary journalist Carl Bernstein, a former Washington Post reporter who helped uncover the Watergate scandal, published a major cover story for Rolling Stone in 1977 titled “The CIA and the Media: How America’s Most Powerful News Media Worked Hand in Glove with the Central Intelligence Agency and Why the Church Committee Covered It Up.”
Bernstein obtained CIA documents that revealed that more than 400 American journalists in the previous 25 years had “secretly carried out assignments for the Central Intelligence Agency.”
Bernstein wrote:
“Some of these journalists’ relationships with the Agency were tacit; some were explicit. There was cooperation, accommodation and overlap. Journalists provided a full range of clandestine services - from simple intelligence gathering to serving as go‑betweens with spies in Communist countries.
Reporters shared their notebooks with the CIA. Editors shared their staffs. Some of the journalists were Pulitzer Prize winners, distinguished reporters who considered themselves ambassadors without‑portfolio for their country.
Most were less exalted: foreign correspondents who found that their association with the Agency helped their work; stringers and freelancers who were as interested in the derring‑do of the spy business as in filing articles; and, the smallest category, full‑time CIA employees masquerading as journalists abroad.
In many instances, CIA documents show, journalists were engaged to perform tasks for the CIA with the consent of the managements of America’s leading news organizations.”
Virtually all major US media outlets cooperated with the CIA, Bernstein revealed, including ABC, NBC, the AP, UPI, Reuters, Newsweek, Hearst newspapers, the Miami Herald, the Saturday Evening Post, and the New York Herald‑Tribune.
However, he added, “By far the most valuable of these associations, according to CIA officials, have been with the New York Times, CBS and Time Inc.”
These layers of state manipulation, censorship, and even direct crafting of the news media show that, as much as they claim to be independent, The New York Times and other outlets effectively serve as de facto spokespeople for the government - or at least for the US national security state."
Udo Ulfkotte, an editor of the German newspaper, Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung, Explained in his book, Gekaufte Journalisten (Bought Journalism), that no significant journalist in Europe is free of CIA influence.
The English language edition, Journalists For Hire: How The CIA Buys The News, has been suppressed. A few copies managed to escape destruction.
Two are currently available on Amazon, one for $910.99 and one for $1,994.99.
As I have often reported, in the “Western democracies” truth is suppressed and controlled explanations are put in its place.
Western peoples are largely unaware of the agendas of the national security state and ruling elites. People in all walks of life serve these agendas without knowing it.
Those who try to inform them are usually dismissed as “conspiracy theorists.” Obviously, there can be no democracy when the electorate is kept in the dark.
Why Don’t People Revolt? [Historical But Relevant] January 8 2023 | From: Geopolitics / Related
Our views about the world are moulded by those who cast and press the dies together.
There are no independent ideas unless the slave mind completely severs itself from the chains which keep pulling those synapses apart.
Poem by Agnes Török on the news of a new Conservative budget. Based on experiences of living in Britain under austerity as a young, queer, unemployed, female immigrant student – and not taking it any more. More info on: www.agnestorok.org
“What has to be explained is not the fact that the man who is hungry steals or the man who is exploited strikes, but why the majority of those who are hungry don’t steal and why the majority of those who are exploited don’t strike.”
- Wilhelm Reich “The Mass Psychology of Fascism”
Presuming that people are exploited and that it is in their interests to strike back, and we think they are and it is, what can we say about this?
Further reading: Marx and Engels “The German Ideology” / Steven Lukes “Power” / “In Defence of False Consciousness”
How Swedes and Norwegians Broke the Power of the ‘1 Percent’
While many of us work to create a better world, it’s worthwhile to consider other countries where masses of people succeeded in nonviolently bringing about a high degree of democracy and economic justice.
Sweden and Norway, for example, both experienced a major power shift in the 1930s after prolonged nonviolent struggle. They “fired” the top 1 percent of people who set the direction for society and created the basis for something different.
Both countries had a history of horrendous poverty. When the 1 percent was in charge, hundreds of thousands of people emigrated to avoid starvation.
Under the leadership of the working class, however, both countries built robust and successful economies that nearly eliminated poverty, expanded free university education, abolished slums, provided excellent health care available to all as a matter of right and created a system of full employment.
Unlike the Norwegians, the Swedes didn’t find oil, but that didn’t stop them from building what the latest CIA World Factbook calls “an enviable standard of living.”
Neither country is a utopia, as readers of the crime novels by Stieg Larsson, Henning Mankell and Jo Nesbø will know. Critical left-wing authors such as these try to push Sweden and Norway to continue on the path toward more fully just societies.
However, as an American activist who first encountered Norway as a student in 1959 and learned some of its language and culture, the achievements I found amazed me. I remember, for example, bicycling for hours through a small industrial city, looking in vain for substandard housing.
Sometimes resisting the evidence of my eyes, I made up stories that “accounted for” the differences I saw: “small country,” “homogeneous,” “a value consensus.” I finally gave up imposing my frameworks on these countries and learned the real reason: their own histories.
Then I began to learn that the Swedes and Norwegians paid a price for their standards of living through nonviolent struggle. There was a time when Scandinavian workers didn’t expect that the electoral arena could deliver the change they believed in.
They realized that, with the 1 percent in charge, electoral “democracy” was stacked against them, so nonviolent direct action was needed to exert the power for change.
In both countries, the troops were called out to defend the 1 percent; people died. Award-winning Swedish filmmaker Bo Widerberg told the Swedish story vividly in Ådalen 31, which depicts the strikers killed in 1931 and the sparking of a nationwide general strike. (You can read more about this case in an entry by Max Rennebohm in the Global Nonviolent Action Database.)
The Norwegians had a harder time organizing a cohesive people’s movement because Norway’s small population - about three million - was spread out over a territory the size of Britain. People were divided by mountains and fjords, and they spoke regional dialects in isolated valleys.
In the nineteenth century, Norway was ruled by Denmark and then by Sweden; in the context of Europe Norwegians were the “country rubes,” of little consequence. Not until 1905 did Norway finally become independent.
When workers formed unions in the early 1900s, they generally turned to Marxism, organizing for revolution as well as immediate gains. They were overjoyed by the overthrow of the czar in Russia, and the Norwegian Labor Party joined the Communist International organized by Lenin.
Labor didn’t stay long, however. One way in which most Norwegians parted ways with Leninist strategy was on the role of violence:
Norwegians wanted to win their revolution through collective nonviolent struggle, along with establishing co-ops and using the electoral arena.
In the 1920s strikes increased in intensity. The town of Hammerfest formed a commune in 1921, led by workers councils; the army intervened to crush it. The workers’ response verged toward a national general strike. The employers, backed by the state, beat back that strike, but workers erupted again in the ironworkers’ strike of 1923 - 24.
The Norwegian 1 percent decided not to rely simply on the army; in 1926 they formed a social movement called the Patriotic League, recruiting mainly from the middle class. By the 1930s, the League included as many as 100,000 people for armed protection of strike breakers - this in a country of only 3 million!
The Labor Party, in the meantime, opened its membership to anyone, whether or not in a unionized workplace. Middle-class Marxists and some reformers joined the party. Many rural farm workers joined the Labor Party, as well as some small landholders.
Labor leadership understood that in a protracted struggle, constant outreach and organizing was needed to a nonviolent campaign. In the midst of the growing polarization, Norway’s workers launched another wave of strikes and boycotts in 1928.
The Depression hit bottom in 1931. More people were jobless there than in any other Nordic country. Unlike in the U.S., the Norwegian union movement kept the people thrown out of work as members, even though they couldn’t pay dues.
This decision paid off in mass mobilizations. When the employers’ federation locked employees out of the factories to try to force a reduction of wages, the workers fought back with massive demonstrations.
Many people then found that their mortgages were in jeopardy. (Sound familiar?) The Depression continued, and farmers were unable to keep up payment on their debts. As turbulence hit the rural sector, crowds gathered nonviolently to prevent the eviction of families from their farms.
The Agrarian Party, which included larger farmers and had previously been allied with the Conservative Party, began to distance itself from the 1 percent; some could see that the ability of the few to rule the many was in doubt.
By 1935, Norway was on the brink. The Conservative-led government was losing legitimacy daily; the 1 percent became increasingly desperate as militancy grew among workers and farmers. A complete overthrow might be just a couple years away, radical workers thought.
However, the misery of the poor became more urgent daily, and the Labor Party felt increasing pressure from its members to alleviate their suffering, which it could do only if it took charge of the government in a compromise agreement with the other side.
This it did. In a compromise that allowed owners to retain the right to own and manage their firms, Labor in 1935 took the reins of government in coalition with the Agrarian Party. They expanded the economy and started public works projects to head toward a policy of full employment that became the keystone of Norwegian economic policy.
Labor’s success and the continued militancy of workers enabled steady inroads against the privileges of the 1 percent, to the point that majority ownership of all large firms was taken by the public interest. (There is an entry on this case as well at the Global Nonviolent Action Database.)
The 1 percent thereby lost its historic power to dominate the economy and society. Not until three decades later could the Conservatives return to a governing coalition, having by then accepted the new rules of the game, including a high degree of public ownership of the means of production, extremely progressive taxation, strong business regulation for the public good and the virtual abolition of poverty.
When Conservatives eventually tried a fling with neoliberal policies, the economy generated a bubble and headed for disaster. (Sound familiar?)
Labor stepped in, seized the three largest banks, fired the top management, left the stockholders without a dime and refused to bail out any of the smaller banks. The well-purged Norwegian financial sector was not one of those countries that lurched into crisis in 2008; carefully regulated and much of it publicly owned, the sector was solid.
Although Norwegians may not tell you about this the first time you meet them, the fact remains that their society’s high level of freedom and broadly-shared prosperity began when workers and farmers, along with middle-class allies, waged a nonviolent struggle that empowered the people to govern for the common good.
No End To Coverups January 7 2023 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various Craig Roberts (yes, there are two of us) is a former US Marine and a 27-year veteran of the Tulsa, Oklahoma, police force. He is a capable and committed person.
Since 1989 he has written 13 books. His latest, just published, Medusa File II, consists essentially of his voluminous files of the investigation of the bombing of the Alfred P. Murrah Federal Building in Oklahoma City on April 19th, 1995, known as “the Oklahoma City Bombing.”
The FBI, appreciative of Roberts’ capabilities, requested his service in the investigation. As officially part of the investigation, he took the investigation seriously. The investigation proceeded rapidly, developing many leads.
Numerous witnesses saw Timothy McVeigh with many dark complexioned men prior to and just after the bombing. Leads were also developed to militias in Elohim City, to the German, Strassmeir, and others.
Before any of these leads could be developed, the investigation was taken over by President Bill Clinton’s Attorney General, Janet Reno.
Once Washington took over, the investigation stopped. In its place was Washington’s theory that it was Tim McVeigh’s lonely protest.
The volumnious evidence of McVeigh’s accomplices or controllers, as might have been the case, was in the way of the official story that imposed itself on the investigation. Many people resisted the coverup that descended on the case, including local journalists who eventually lost their jobs or moved on.
Roberts stuck it out to the end. So did black Oklahoma City Police sgt. Terrance Yeakey. For resisting the official story Yeakey paid with his life. Roberts provides the reasons he believes Yeakey had definitive evidence that the official story was a coverup. The OCPD was called off once the official story was in place, but Yeakey wouldn’t quit and became a problem.
The official OCPD report says it was suicide, but Roberts recognizes homicide when he sees it. There was no autopsy and the police refused to release the police report to Yeakey’s family. Being black, they had little recourse.
Remaining skeptics were dismissed as “conspiracy theorists,” and that was the end of the case.
One of the striking details that Roberts provides is that in the immediate aftermath of the bombing with rescue workers removing dead and wounded from the rubble, numerous federal agents appeared, ordered the rescue workers out of the building on the grounds that there were still unexploded bombs in the building.
Then with the trapped still under the rubble, all rescue efforts halted until the federal agents had removed file cabinets from the building.
Roberts speculates that the cabinets contained the files of the Mena drug running operation that many believe involved Arkansas governor Bill Clinton, and that President Clinton and Janet Reno didn’t want these files to see the light of day.
For an official explanation of the case that relies solely on McVeigh’s “truck bomb,” the federal agents’ statement that unexploded bombs remained in the building is a conundrum.
If there were unexploded bombs remaining in the building, how could it be that McVeigh was the lone wolf perpetrator?
It reminded me of General Benton Partin, a US Air Force explosive expert, who produced a detailed report proving that the Murrah building blew up from the inside out, not from the outside in. Of course, by the time Gen. Partin got his study completed, the fix was in, and there was to be no challenge to, or reconsidering of, the official cover story.
Roberts doesn’t know who did the bombing or why. All he knows is that leads were not followed and the case was solved by Washington and not by an investigation.
Just like the assassination of JFK.
Just like the assassination of RFK.
Just like the assassination of Martin Luther King.
Just like 9/11.
Just like Saddam Hussein’s “weapons of mass destruction.”
5G Technology Is The "Stupidest Idea In The History Of The World" Says Washington State Science Professor & Lloyds Of London And Other Insurers Refuse To Cover Health Claims Caused By 5G Wireless Technologies January 6 2023 | From: CollectiveEvolution / SOTT / Various We are in the midst of a 5G wireless technology rollout, and politicians have yet to address safety concerns. [Historical But Relevant]
I recently used Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau as an example, but it’s happening worldwide.
It’s one of many examples that illustrates how large corporations completely control politics.
I also wrote about Robert F. Kennedy explaining how this came to be, and how they’ve been able to completely compromise government, big media, and our federal regulatory agencies that are supposed to be protecting and informing us.
The Facts: Martin L. Pall, PhD and Professor Emeritus of Biochemistry and Basic Medical Sciences at Washington State University outlines in a new report the many health risks associated with 5G technology and wireless radiation in general.
Reflect On: 5G is gaining attention, and it might make us a little fearful of the effects, but we must observe this fear and bring things back to awareness of the issue so we can make better choices, but not be fearful. Check out our CE Protocol for this.
In the video, he uses Big Pharma as an example, as they provide the most money to congress; even more so than big oil and gas. In that article I also outline multiple examples of fraud so readers can get a clearer picture of what’s going on and see some actual evidence of it.
It’s clear that we are not being protected, and politicians are simply abiding to the the will of their masters, the big corporations, who in turn act as slaves to their ‘financial overlords,’ the big banks.
We continue to see products and services being approved and implemented without ever going through any safety testing.
This is a big problem, and one of the main reasons why we could be seeing a drastic rise in multiple diseases and ailments, especially when it comes to neuropsychiatric disorders.
Is there really any concern for the well being of humanity within these institutions?
If not, why do we continue to support them? Is it because we’re under the illusion that there is actual concern? And why do we continue to take power away from ourselves by electing corrupt politicians?
Anyway, in this article, I’d like to draw your attention to Dr. Martin L. Pall, PhD and Professor Emeritus of Biochemistry and Basic Medical Sciences at Washington State University.
“Putting in tens of millions of 5G antennae without a single biological test of safety has got to be about the stupidest idea anyone has had in the history of the world.”
That report goes through a lot of science, which only adds to all of the science that’s already available regarding the harmful effects of 5G technology.
If you’re looking for more information,I often point people toward the Environmental Health Trust because it’s a great resource that gives you access to more science.
This is not new information.
For years, numerous studies have been published proving the health concerns regarding 5G technology and hundreds of scientists have petitioned the United Nations about them.
Media Release: Ontario Doctors Warn of Rising Health Care Costs after 5G Roll Out
These initiatives started as a result of the work done by Dr. Marin Blank from Columbia University’s Department of Physiology and Cellular Biophysics.
According to him, with regards to wireless radiation in general:
“We have created something that is harming us, and it is getting out of control. Before Edison’s light bulb there was very little electromagnetic radiation in our environment.
The levels today are very many times higher than natural background levels, and are growing rapidly because of all the new devices that emit this radiation. Putting it bluntly they are damaging the living cells in our bodies and killing many of us prematurely.”
Again, it’s unbelievable that these technologies are being rolled out without any safety testing done. How is this even allowed to happen?
The thing is, if there was safety testing done, there would likely be no changes made anyway, and these corporations would be allowed to rollout and utilize these technologies.
Seeing how this article is about the work of Dr. Pall, below is a lecture that goes into detail about his research and why we should be concerned with 5G technology.
It’s alarming that some people have been made to believe that this is “pseudoscience.” Not only is this surprising, but it’s also very concerning.
During the “Health in Buildings Roundtable” sponsored by the NIH and co-organized by the US CDC and several other organizations, Dr. Martin Pall from Washington State University (WSU) concluded that the “5G rollout is absolutely insane.”
In this short presentation, Dr. Pall confirmed that the current 2G/3G/4G radiation the population is exposed to has been scientifically linked to: lowered fertility, insomnia, fatigue, depression, anxiety, major changes in brain structure in animals, cellular DNA damage, oxidative stress, hormonal disruption, cancer, and much more.
Dr. Pall briefly explained the mechanisms of how the electro-smog emitted by our cell phones, wifi routers, cell phone antennas, and other wireless technologies affect human cells.
What You Can Do: We Don’t Have To Be Afraid
We’ve written about this topic in depth, and below are some recent articles we’ve published that go into more detail if you’re looking for more information.
On a side note, a lot of this information can spark a fearful reaction, and that’s normal.
It could elicit the same fearful reaction you may have to other humanitarian issues including the massive amounts of pesticides being sprayed in our environment and on our food, the rising deforestation rates, and several other aspects of the human experience that need to be changed.
As important as it is to not react with fear and panic, it’s even more important not to completely ignore these things and think everything will magically be okay.
Earth has become engulfed with this mess as a result of our ignorance, as a result of us ignoring important scientific findings such as these.
If we continue along this path, disease rates will continue to rise. Awareness is key, and simply being informed about this issue is a huge step in the right direction.
So, what can you do? You could purchase some EMF protective clothing and bedding, or you could even paint your home with EMF protective paint. You can unplug your computer when not in use, turn off your cell phone, and unplug all your electronic devices before you go to sleep.
You could have a wired internet connection, which is actually much faster than any wireless connection. You can live a healthy lifestyle, and you can use mind-body healing techniques to help you.
I write a lot about parapsychology, and it’s quite clear that our minds can have a significant impact on our biology.
I know it sounds a little ‘new agey,’ but the truth is, if you don’t believe you are being harmed, odds are that the impact on your biology will be significantly different than someone who is fearful and stressed out about health concerns. Consciousness is huge, and it is one of the biggest factors in regards to preventative measures.
You can learn more about this balance through our CE Protocol.
Lloyds Of London And Other Insurers Refuse To Cover Health Claims Caused By 5G Wireless Technologies
Lloyds of London, one of the world's premier insurance groups, is refusing to insure health claims made against 5G wireless ("wi-fi") technologies.
How curious that Lloyds of London has excluded from their policies any negative health effects caused by wi-fi technologies. Now, WHY would Lloyds leave all that money on the table if these technologies are so safe? And, why are other insurance companies following Lloyds' lead?
If you think that following-the-money provides insights, you'll probably conclude that something VERY BIG is embedded in this decision.
Here's some background (including links):
The FCC and other government regulatory bodies, in collusion with the big telecomm industries, are ferociously pushing smart meters, 5G and the Internet of Things.
This roll-out is not only happening in the US, but all over the world. The giant telecomms gush enthusiastically about how EVERYTHING will be connected
OMG! We're gonna have Incredibly high-speed connectivity so your little girls and teens can, at supersonic speed, upload pix of their latest nail-polish jobs or cute puppy videos to FaceBook, Pinterest, etc., etc., for their friends to gasp and giggle.... - and, of course, click "like" and forward these to their friends... again, all at warp speed.
It's pretty clear that this whole "play" by the giant telecomms is seen by them as a financial windfall - for them. And, via their lobby groups, it's seen as a windfall for all the politicians who support this agenda.
Politicians will be rewarded in the usual manner - pricey junkets to exotic places, elegant dinners, campaign contributions and, of course, cushy "golden parachute" jobs for those wi-fi supportive ex-politicians within the telecomm industries, or within their lobby groups. In short, crony business as usual.
But wait. There's a tiny but growing wrinkle in this rosy scenario of sugar plums dancing in the heads of these telecomm leaders.
Specifically, Lloyds of London, one of the world's premier insurance groups, is refusing to insure health claims made against wireless technologies. And, other insurance companies are following Lloyd's lead in this.
If you follow the money, this is HUGE. After all, if these wi-fi techno-toys are so safe, why is Lloyds leaving all this additional money on the table?
Well, Lloyd's November 2010 Risk Assessment Team's Report gives us a solid clue: The report compares these wireless technologies with asbestos, in that the early research on asbestos was "inconclusive" and only later did it become obvious to anyone paying attention that asbestos causes cancer.
Keep in mind that Lloyd's Risk Assessment study of wi-fi was published over 8 years ago.
Even back then, however, their Risk Assessment Team was smart enough to realize that new evidence just might emerge showing that the various wi-fi frequencies do cause illness. The result? Lloyds opted to exclude coverage for wi-fi related illnesses.
And then, PG&E followed close on, slipping in its own legal clauses (just as it was rolling out smart meters) that claim no liability for wi-fi related health damage.
The schools who opt to put in wi-fi are responsible, according to PG&E, and any other organizations that opt to have PG&E put wi-fi in their buildings are the responsible parties
Today, MANY more recent peer-reviewed scientific studies show a range of serious damage caused by these wi-fi frequencies. 5G brings a quantum leap in damage - to DNA, to cell mitochondria, and much more.
Fortunately the global public is waking up.
Conversations are in the air about a global class-action lawsuit vs. the SPECIFIC INDIVIDUALS WORLDWIDE who are recklessly ignoring the Precautionary Principle in their promotion of advanced wi-fi technologies.
In part - goes the growing conversation - the lawsuit will be based on the Nuremburg Principle of "informed consent."
After all, what's going on is a tiny handful of people are pushing a huge experiment on what will be billions of people, all without have gotten their informed consent ... and without insurance for those who are electromagnetically sensitive - a growing group to watch.
These unfortunate individuals are our "canaries" in the coal mine.
Pay close attention. This whole issue is about to become a whole lot more interesting.
After years of listening to cellular phone companies assure us that WiFi and cell phone transmission is safe, why did Lloyds of London, a company who will take risks when other insurers won't exclude EMF injuries?
Are they expecting an avalanche of health claims related to EMF?
What Does Lloyd's of London Know That We Don't Know?
We think Lloyd's underwriters must be reading the research findings from major publications like the BioInitiative Report.
Included in this report are summaries of research publications between 1990 -2014 on the biological effects of radio frequency and cell phone radiation.
The research news is chilling. Prolonged exposure to EMF causes cellular malfunction, the formation of free radicals which then leads to a multitude of health issues.
There are many physicians who now believe EMF effects underlie ALL medical issues.
This report was created by 29 authors from around the world, including 10 with medical degrees, 21 PhDs and 3 masters degrees.
No longer can public officials pretend EMF is harmless. The cat is out of the bag!
Schools May Foot the Bill With WiFi Injuries
Lloyds is dumping the blame back on schools. In their insurance waiver, they state clearly that it is schools responsibility to inform parents and teachers if WiFi is being installed in their schools.
Parents for Safe Schools and other groups want to know why schools are not acknowledging the proven health effects of EMF?
By allowing WiFi to be installed in the schools, they are acting as if WiFi is a safe technology. For many individuals, animals and plant life, serious health consequences occur with daily exposure to EMF.
Lloyd's Won't Discuss Their New EMF Exclusion Clause
My interpretation of this revealing statement is that CFC Underwriting, and perhaps all of "the market" has realized that the time has come to hedge against a future surge in "illnesses caused by continuous long-term non-ionising radiation exposure i.e. through mobile phone usage."
Why else would they refuse coverage "across the market as standard."?
“Unfortunately, Lloyd's doesn't have a spokesperson who can talk about this so we're going to have to decline."
Now I'm used to rejection as a reporter, but I couldn't quite believe this and told her so in my reply, mentioning that their refusal to talk about the policy change would possibly "draw attention away from more important aspects of the story."
This is a huge problem that will not be solved by buying magical pendants. Everyone now understands tobacco and asbestos risks.
This is worse. This is also impacting on animals including livestock and on plants including food.
The Transhumanist Agenda And The [Attempted] Future Of Humanity January 5 2023 | From: NaturalBlaze / Various The Transhumanist agenda is more than just Artificial Intelligence (AI), or robots taking over jobs, or transgender restrooms at public facilities to accommodate an ever growing push for uniformity among the masses.
Transhumanism is Posthumanism. It is humanism with the optimism taken out, a movement that advocates for the transformation and the “advancement of humanity through technology” that runs the gamut from nanotechnology to AI.
Transhumanism began taking shape in the 1930s under Social Engineers like Edward Bernays whose book Propaganda revealed the method of mind control for anyone curious enough to pay attention:
“The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society.
Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country. … We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of.
This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society.…
In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons… who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses.
It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind."
- Edward L. Bernays, Master Propagandist
These messages and themes are blatant for anyone to see, if the eyes are open.
They represent a form of consent, which individuals must give for the agenda to be carried out.
Social engineers have informed us through fiction, non-fiction, film, media, the educational system, politics, religion, sports, Hollywood celebrities, and rigged elections throughout the centuries. And each time we have consented.
Aldous Huxley’s novel Brave New World informed us of a world of bio and social engineering in black and white. He described a future that had already begun to take shape under his pen.
To grasp the Huxleyesque nature of current culture we only need to look at one of his personal quotes:
“There will be, in the next generation or so, a pharmacological method of making people love their servitude, and producing dictatorship without tears, so to speak, producing a kind of painless concentration camp for entire societies, so that people will in fact have their liberties taken away from them, but will rather enjoy it, because they will be distracted from any desire to rebel by propaganda or brainwashing, or brainwashing enhanced by pharmacological methods. And this seems to be the final revolution."
Transhumanism is mind control to shift perception to a hybrid society. As perception shifts, the individual is homogenized into an amorphous “public persona.”
The term “Public Health” is, itself a public relations term, created in 1913 when the Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research (RIMR) to convince individuals to give up their power to an outside, unseen authority.
“Public Health” dilutes the power of individuals. An individual is real. A ‘public’ is a concept. Therefore, Public Opinion, Public Safety, Public Body, and Public Perception are myths used to justify a transfer of power to a higher authority.
There is no power in the group. As each human is born an individual, there is only individual perception, individual opinion, individual bodies, and individual safety.
Once you are convinced to do things for the good of the “public,” such as implanting tracking chips to keep your job, or merging yourself to a machine to enhance your memory, or taking nano-chipped pharmaceutical drugs to ensure compliance, or agreeing to public checkpoints, you lose individual identity.
You are part of the blob. And how do you measure the success of “the public?”
Has the nation become stronger as a result of handing over individual power to an outside authority?
“We now live in a nation where doctors destroy health, lawyers destroy justice, universities destroy knowledge, governments destroy freedom, the press destroys information, religion destroys morals, and our banks destroy the economy."
- Chris Hedges
Inversion Reality
Transhumanism is Inversion Reality to create order out of chaos, where up is down, black is white, sickness is health, male is female, abnormal is normal, and uniformity is unity.
It is a reality of a perfect “controllable race.” The Transhumanist movement is not new or out-of-the-box.
It has been playing out before our eyes under the deception of politics and Hollywood make-up and glamour for more than a century.
Transgendered actors are now coming out to be recognized as separate from male or female; non-gendered.
Like Caitlyn Jenner, anyone has a right to reshape themselves and choose a different identify. However, what happens when true identity is concealed and used for deception?
How many Hollywood actors, mainstream news anchors, super models, politicians, are disguised behind wigs, false eyelashes, or beards to create the Great Deception?
What deeper meaning rests behind celebrity worship, the golden idols actors give themselves, or the pentagrams they bow down to on the Hollywood Walk of Fame?
Have people been measuring themselves against a standard of beauty and worth based in illusion? Do New Age teachings go back to the Freemasons? Back to Babylon and the Gnostic teachings?
With more questions than answers, is it time to look behind the curtain of the Media Industrial Complex?
The Transhumanist-Posthuman agenda is not about the equality of the sexes since the sexes are meant to merge into an androgynous blob.
Under the Trans Agenda, an era of social and ecologic inequities are the new standard where nature is unnecessary and human relationships are replaced by sexbots that cook, clean, converse (or not), and provide for physical needs.
What if the deeper agenda is to weaken the male energy as “protector and defender,” subvert the female essence, and neutralize the divine through technologies such as CRISPR?
CRISPR genetically modifies DNA to redesign gender at the level of the human embryo to create an androgyne that cannot reproduce.
The Transhumanist agenda offers a radical upgrade of humanity to something smarter, bigger, better. It suggests we are entering a virtual reality without a discussion of morals or spiritual matters, where we can transcend our biological limitations with implants and injections.
Is this the wet dream of a robot or the musings of a madman? Do we extend life, prevent death, or bring the dead back to life even if life is no longer worth living?
As TV and films try to convince us that vampires are sexy, do we leave the light behind because the darkness brings a different type of eternity? Do we accept that the Transgender agenda has infiltrated the classroom to indoctrinate children from Kindergarten?
Human 2.0 Is Almost Here: The Transhumanism Agenda Just Went Mainstream
In agreeing to the Trans Agenda, we need to know the consequences of our actions instead of rushing headlong over a cliff. What are the risks?
Were the risks knowable when corporations introduced new technology that promised to feed the world with genetically-modified foods or connect the world through electro-magnetic frequencies?
Now that GMO foods are not enough to feed the world, the message has shifted to taking a shot in the arm to feed the world: “For every flu shot given at our Pharmacy or The Little Clinic, we’ll donate a meal to Feeding America.”
Are the negative health effects of these previous untested technologies the real reason humanity needs to preserve itself in new ways?
Are GMO foods and vaccines just part of the agenda to bioengineer humans to prevent procreation? Will babies be made-to-order to maintain order?
The Transhumanist Agenda will declare that humanity will go extinct or permanently destroy itself unless transhumanistic technologies are realized. Are we repeating an extinction that happened once before in Atlantis?
Yet, they will never suggest that there is meaning to living an imperfect life or dying a natural death because nature and God are no longer part of the equation.
Never Rush to Decision
“While you’ll feel compelled to charge forward it’s often a gentle step back that will reveal to you where you and what you truly seek."
But are the risks of Transhumanism clear? Does the original personality remain the same? Does the soul remain intact?
Can a posthuman being with increased life expectancy, intelligence, health, memory cease to exist on a higher level? Are we sacrificing divinity to worship androgyny?
Is policy guidance written by a hidden government enough to forge ahead to a Brave New World? What happens to peace, love, caring, and cooperation?
Those who “believe” in the Trans religion have a right, as long as it does not infringe upon another’s Rights. And those who choose not to?
Their Rights must be preserved too. Informed-consent means no deception from the inside-out.
Former High Ranking CIA Agent Gives A Break Down On What The US Deep State And Shadow Government Is Comprised Of January 4 2023 | From: SOTT / Various A CIA whistleblower, Kevin Shipp, has emerged from the wolves den to expose the deep state and the shadow government which he calls two entirely separate entities.
"The shadow government controls the deep state and manipulates our elected government behind the scenes," Shipp warned in a recent talk at a Geoengineeringwatch.org conference.
Shipp had a series of slides explaining how the deep state and shadow government functions as well as the horrific crimes they are committing against U.S. citizens.
Some of the revelations the former CIA anti-terrorism counter intelligence officer revealed included that "Google Earth was set up through the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency and InQtel."
Indeed he is correct, the CIA and NGA owned the company Google acquired, Keyhole Inc., paying an undisclosed sum for the company to turn its tech into what we now know as Google Earth.
Another curious investor in Keyhole Inc. was none other than the venture capital firm In-Q-Tel run by the CIA according to a press release at the time.
Shipp also disclosed that the agency known as the Joint Special Ops Command (JSOC) is the "president's secret army" which he can use for secret assassinations, overturning governments and things the American people don't know about.
FBI warrantless searches violate the Fourth Amendment with national security letters, which Shipp noted enables them to walk into your employer's office and demand all your financial records and if he or she says anything about them being there they can put your supervisor in jail or drop a case against themselves using the "State's Secret Privilege law."
"The top of the shadow government is the National Security Agency and the Central Intelligence Agency," Shipp said.
Shipp expressed that the CIA was created through the Council on Foreign relations with no congressional approval, and historically the CFR is also tied into the mainstream media (MSM.)
He elaborated that the CIA was the "central node" of the shadow government and controlled all of the other 16 intelligence agencies despite the existence of the DNI.
The agency also controls defense and intelligence contractors, can manipulate the president and political decisions, has the power to start wars, torture, initiate coups, and commit false flag attacks he said.
As Shipp stated, the CIA was created through executive order by then President Harry Truman by the signing of the National Security Act of 1947.
According to Shipp, the deep state is comprised of the military industrial complex, intelligence contractors, defense contractors, MIC lobbyist, Wall St (offshore accounts), Federal Reserve, IMF/World Bank, Treasury, Foreign lobbyists, and Central Banks.
In the shocking, explosive presentation, Shipp went on to express that there are "over 10,000 secret sites in the U.S." that formed after 9/11. There are "1,291 secret government agencies, 1,931 large private corporations and over 4,800,000 Americans that he knows of who have a secrecy clearance, and 854,000 who have Top Secret clearance, explaining they signed their lives away bound by an agreement.
He also detailed how Congress is owned by the Military Industrial Complex through the Congressional Armed Services Committee (48 senior members of Congress) giving those members money in return for a vote on the spending bill for the military and intelligence budget.
He even touched on what he called the "secret intelligence industrial complex," which he called the center of the shadow government including the CIA, NSA, NRO, and NGA.
Shipp further stated that around the "secret intelligence industrial complex" you have the big five conglomerate of intelligence contractors - Leidos Holdings, CSRA, CACI, SAIC, and Booz Allen Hamilton.
He noted that the work they do is "top secret and unreported."
The whistleblower remarked that these intelligence contractors are accountable to no one including Congress, echoing the words of Senator Daniel Inouye when he himself blew the whistle on the shadow government during the Iran-Contra hearings in 1987.
At the time Inouye expressed that the "shadow government had its own funding mechanism, shadowy Navy, and Air Force freedom to pursue its own goals free from all checks and balances and free from the law itself."
Shipp further added that the shadow government and elected government were in the midst of a visible cold war.
So who is Shipp and is he credible as a whistleblower, does he have credentials for the CIA? Aim.orgwrote:
"Shipp held several high-level positions in the CIA. He was assigned as a protective agent for the Director of Central Intelligence, a counterintelligence investigator, a Counter Terrorism Center officer, a team leader protecting sensitive CIA assets from assassination, a manager of high-risk protective operations, a lead instructor for members of allied governments, an internal staff security investigator, and a polygraph examiner.
He was tasked with protecting the CIA from foreign agent penetration and the chief of training for the CIA federal police force. Mr. Shipp functioned as program manager for the Department of State, Diplomatic Security, and Anti Terrorism Assistance global police training program.
Shipp noted he was working with former NSA whistleblower William Binney but didn't state what the two were working on together. Shipp is highly credible and may just be the highest level whistleblower.
This leak is huge. He has been previously mentioned in the New York Times for blowing the whistle on the mistreatment of him and his family when they were put in a mold-contaminated home.
He is also mentioned in a WikiLeaks cable during the GiFiles that I was able to dig up. Is this the beginning of whistleblowers coming forward to end the shadow government and deep state? You can watch Shipp's full explosive presentation below.
2022 Review: When “Conspiracy Theories” Turned Into Obvious Realities January 3 2023 | From: VigilantCitizen / Various
As I look back at the year 2022 and the bizarre events that marked it, an expression immediately comes to mind: “Revelation of the Method”.
Originating from ancient Rosicrucian texts, this obscure concept refers to the process of exposing the masses to dark realities (often in a veiled and underhanded manner) to elicit implied acceptance.
Once these formally hidden truths are revealed to the public and met with general apathy, indifference, or incredulity, they become normalized and embedded in society’s collective unconscious. Some occultists compare this process to the alchemical “Great Work” where the world is “transmuted” according to the will of the occult elite.
"The alchemical principle of the Revelation of the Method has as its chief component, a clown-like, grinning mockery of the victim(s) as a show of power and macabre arrogance.
When this is performed in a veiled manner accompanied by certain occult signs and symbolical words and elicits no meaningful response of opposition or resistance from the target(s), it is one of the most efficacious techniques of psychological warfare and mind-rape."
- Michael Hoffman II, Secret Societies and Psychological Warfare
Since the advent of mass media, the Revelation of the Method has become increasingly apparent. While, in the past, the elite operated in complete secrecy, it now seeks to operate in plain sight.
"In the beginning and middle stages of this operation, the “hoodwink” was a key to the accomplishment of objectives. Generally speaking, deception is far less necessary today.
Quite the contrary, the cryptocracy has actually been determined to reveal many of its greatest secrets to us “profane ones” for some time now.
– Ibid.
Several events of 2022 fit perfectly the concept of Revelation of the Method. “Conspiracy theories” are turning into obvious truths right before our eyes.
Dark secrets are being revealed yet most of the world still does not grasp what they mean. And that’s exactly what “they” want.
The Vigilant Citizen is about exposing what is truly happening. That way, instead of passively accepting their madness due to ignorance, we can actively reject it due to knowledge.
Here’s a look at some revealing events of 2022 and what they meant in the grand scheme of things.
On March 25th, the world was shocked by the unexpected death of Taylor Hawkins, the drummer of the Foo Fighters. While the circumstances surrounding his death were strange, the timing of this event was simply perplexing.
Exactly one month prior to Hawkins’ death, the Foo Fighters released a horror-comedy movie called Studio 666. The subject of the movie: Members of the Foo Fighters get killed as blood sacrifices to a Satanic music industry.
In the movie, Dave Grohl is possessed by a demon and sacrifices (with gruesome killings) every member of the band, including Taylor Hawkins
This entire movie was highly symbolic, especially considering what would happen exactly one month after its release. Was this movie a horrific coincidence? Or were they revealing their method?
Drinking Blood
Megan Fox casually says that she drinks blood in rituals
For years, I’ve been writing about the occult elite’s obsession with cannibalism and drinking blood. In occult circles, it is believed that extracting and consuming blood in specific circumstances can have powerful rejuvenating effects – and the potency is multiplied when the “donor” is young. There’s nothing new about those practices as they’ve existed for centuries (see my article on Elizabeth Bathory).
Despite these facts, mass media has been ridiculing this “conspiracy theory”. Then, Megan Fox straight up said that she drinks blood in rituals. During her interview with Glamour Unfiltered, she said:
"But yes, we do consume each other’s blood on occasion for ritual purposes only. It is used for a reason and it is controlled where it’s like, let’s shed a few drops of blood and each drink it.”
Combine Megan Fox’s highly publicized obsession with blood with the countless recent movies revolving around cannibalism, and you get a clear case of Revelation of the Method.
Anne Heche
Anne Heche flails around as she’s forcibly jammed into an ambulance. She’ll be declared dead shortly after
Every time I think about the footage of Anne Heche attempting to break away from a stretcher that’s carried by a couple of firemen, I get deeply disturbed. And so many questions come to mind. Why did they cover her (as if she was already dead) while she was on the stretcher? Why wasn’t she properly secured on the stretcher? More importantly, why was she trying to get away?
As usual, mass media was quick to conclude that Heche’s erratic behavior was due to drugs and/or alcohol, despite the fact that witnesses stated the contrary. A few months after my article where I explained that Heche was clearly running from something (and not just high out of her mind) the truth finally came out.
A few months after the crash, the coroner concluded that Heche wasn’t under the influence of drugs or alcohol
So, if Heche was sober during that day, what actually happened? Why did she act this way? It appears that we’ve all witnessed the sacrifice of another celebrity.
In September, Indiana University unveiled a statue honoring Alfred Kinsey.
In my article about Alfred Kinsey, I explained how his “research” was funded by the Rockefeller Foundation and serves as a basis for sexual education in America to this day.
With that being said, here’s a table from his book Sexual Behavior of the Human Male.
Table 34. One of the most horrific tables in scientific history
Table 34 documents the “sexual responses” of children from infants through teens as recorded by their adult male abusers. These pedophiles conducted sexual experiments on hundreds of children by bringing them to what the experimenters called “orgasm” (screaming, weeping, fighting the sexual “partner”) and timing these responses with a stopwatch.
In short, Table 34 records nothing less than the systematic abuse of over 300 children aged between 5 months to 14 years old. The data it contains is simply horrifying. How can an 11-month-old baby have 14 orgasms in 38 minutes unless it was the result of outright torture?
With all of that being said, the University of Indiana nevertheless unveiled a statue celebrating Alfred Kinsey. Why? Because the occult elite are pedophiles and they want their sick culture to be celebrated.
In October, Doja Cat celebrated her birthday with an all-out parade of industry slaves. Clearly influenced by the movie Eyes Wide Shut (which is based on the occult elite’s sex magick rituals), the party was about industry slaves imitating their handlers, the same way toddlers imitate their parents.
More importantly, it was another case of Revelation of the Method.
For years, I’ve been writing about celebrities having to sacrifice a loved one to attain a higher level in the industry. I’ve also written about handlers controlling celebrities in extreme ways. While these claims were regarded as crazy “conspiracy theories” by many, Kanye West just said it in unequivocal terms:
"My mama was sacrificed.”
He also mentioned the father of Michael Jordan, the son of Bill Cosby, and the son of Dr. Dre – all dead in mysterious circumstances. According to him, these sacrifices are carried out to “control and traumatize”.
A week prior, Kanye exposed his “personal trainer” Harley Pasternak as an all-out MK handler. He even posted a threatening text message he received from Pasternak.
Pasternak threatened to drug and institutionalize Kanye for misbehaving
I’ve been writing about the elite celebrating their pedophilia for years and mainstream media tried hard to suppress this obvious fact. Indeed, my article about Pizzagate was attacked by publications such as The New York Times, even calling The Vigilant Citizen “fake news”.
This year, Balenciaga released an ad campaign that was so vile that everyone had to shut up and face the truth. Even The New York Times.
In a series of upsetting photographs, the geniuses at Balenciaga had children holding plush animals wearing BDSM gear, along with other highly symbolic objects around them (i.e. dog leashes). To make things worse, other pictures actually contained a court ruling regarding child pornography.
Yes, there was a backlash. That’s because there’s a growing number of vigilant citizens out there who forced mainstream media to address this issue. We must keep going.
The Revolutionary Act
Despite the fact that several “conspiracy theories” discussed on this site were essentially confirmed in 2022, The Vigilant Citizen was banned from Google search results and was completely demonetized.
The reports I got from Google were infuriating. For instance, one article was demonetized due to “unreliable and harmful claims”. The reason: I wrote that … men cannot be women.
The absurdity of the situation truly messed with my mind as I realized that the quote “In a time of universal deceit, telling the truth becomes a revolutionary act” is truer than ever.
As Google attempted to suffocate this site by banning it from its advertising monopoly, I had to find a way to secure the survival of the site. Deleting “problematic” content and self-censoring myself to please Google was, of course, out of the question. So, after some soul-searching, I came up with a possible solution that would allow the site to survive without any censorship: Reader subscriptions.
So, in June, I removed every single ad from this site and solely relied on reader subscriptions. There was some risk involved as an insufficient number of subscribers would result in the site going down. However, it was a do-or-die situation: Either this site remained an independent source of uncensored truth, or it just stops existing.
Fortunately, YOU came through. Vigilant Citizens across the world subscribed to the site, allowing the site to survive without a single ad on its pages. I can finally write “unreliable and harmful claims” such as “men cannot be women” without being threatened with financial ruin on a daily basis.
So I’d like to take this occasion to thank, from the bottom of my heart, every single VC subscriber for supporting this site and allowing it to survive.
The best way for me to thank you is by working even harder on new articles and delivering the hard-hitting content you’re looking for. And, with your support, that’s exactly what I’ll be doing in 2023.
Not only will I keep publishing articles on a wide range of topics, but I’ll also launch a new project that has been requested for years: VC Videos. This new project is coming soon, it will be high quality and it will be unique. And it’s being made possible due to your incredible support this year.
In conclusion, this year confirmed lots of things that were discussed on this site since 2008. And I have a feeling that we’ll see more of this in 2023.
I will do my best to decipher everything 2023 throws at us and I will keep providing the vital information needed to navigate these strange times.
In fact, it is more likely that sea levels will decline, not rise, explained Dr. Nils-Axel Mörner, the retired head of the paleogeophysics and geodynamics at Stockholm University.
A new solar-driven cooling period is not far off, he said. But when Mörner tried to warn the UN IPCC that it was publishing false information that would inevitably be discredited, they simply ignored him.
And so, dismayed, he resigned in disgust and decided to blow the whistle.
Asked if coastal cities such as Miami would be flooding due to sea-level rise caused by alleged man-made global warming, Mörner was unequivocal:
“Absolutely not.” “There is no rapid sea-level rise going on today, and there will not be,” he said, citing observable data.
“On the contrary, if anything happens, the sea will go down a little.”
The widely respected scientist, who has been tracking sea levels in various parts of the globe for some 50 years, blasted those who use incorrect “correction factors” in their data to make it appear that seas are rising worldwide.
Indeed, even speaking of something called “global sea level” is highly misleading, the expert explained.
“It is different in different parts of the world,” Mörner said, noting that sea levels can rise in one part of the world and decline in another depending on a variety of factors.
For instance, the interview took place right next to an 18th-century Baltic sea-level marker in Saltsjöbaden near Stockholm that showed the Baltic sea level at the time it was made.
Because the ground is rising, the marking is now higher up from sea level than it was when it was made.
Mörner has personally been measuring and tracking sea levels in equatorial regions of the world - Bangladesh, the Maldives, Southern India, New Caledonia, Fiji, and beyond.
Mörner's conclusion is that solar activity and its effects on the globe have been the “dominant factor” in what happens to both the climate and the seas.
Meanwhile, the UN claims the current changes in climate and sea level are attributable to human emissions of carbon dioxide (CO2).
Man’s emissions of this essential gas, required by plants and exhaled by people, makes up a fraction of one percent of all so-called greenhouse gases present naturally in the atmosphere.
“Absolutely not,”Mörner said about the CO2 argument, noting there was“something basically sick” in the blame-CO2 hypothesis. “CO2, if it has any effect, it is minute - it does not matter. What has a big effect is the sun.”
Obviously, while he was serving on the UN IPCC, Mörner tried to warn his colleagues on the UN body that the politically backed hypothesis about CO2 driving temperature changes, and the subsequent claims regarding dangerous sea-level rise, were totally incorrect.
“They just ignored what I was saying,”he recounted.
“If they were clever - if they had facts on their hands - they could show that, 'no, you're wrong.' But that is not the case. They just will not discuss it. I will try to discuss it.
I will show with their own data that they are wrong. Because in science, we discuss. We don't forbid or neglect.”
“Why does anybody say something when it is not correct?” he asked.
“They say it because they have applied excellent lobbyists. They are working with lobbyists in their hand; 'say this, do that.' We don't do that.”
In the field of physics, Mörner estimated that 80 to 90 percent of physicists know the hypothesis is wrong. And among geologists and astronomers, he said probably 80 percent know it is wrong.
“They claim that there are 97 percent who are for it,”Mörner said.
“I claim that it is 97 percent of scientific facts against them.”
Quoting Galileo, the 80-year-old Swedish scientist also slammed the shady tactics used by climate alarmists and the lobbyists they work with to suppress the real facts and demonize those who contradict their alarmist narrative.
“If you write an excellent paper in a peer-reviewed journal, but they don't like it, they write to the journal and tell them they cannot write things like that, it's against the general consensus,” said Mörner, who has published hundreds of peer-reviewed papers on a wide range of scientific subjects.
“They even put those journals on a black list. This is a shady thing going on. We don't work like that in real science.”
Instead of science, Mörner suspects that the behind-the-scenes promoters of the man-made warming hypothesis have dark, ulterior motives.
“I think the ultimate thing is that they want a government for the whole globe, and that is a weird idea,” Mörner said, criticizing the Rockefeller dynasty and global efforts to keep developing countries from developing under the guise of saving the climate.
“This is the hope of controlling everything. It is autocracy. It is really bad. Nobody should rule like that. But everybody has had these strange dreams - small countries of being larger, and empires wanting to be super-empires, and then they collapse. We have a whole history full of that. This globalism is a dangerous thing.”
By putting so much emphasis on climate alarmism and the alleged dangers of CO2, meanwhile, Mörner said the UN has diverted resources and attention away from “all the real problems” of the world that really do exist.
“This is a terrible thing, this is the terrible thing,” he said. It is especially sad because “the world is full of real problems” such as hunger, starvation, killings, natural disasters, diseases, and so much more, he said.
Yet because of the incessant focus on demonizing CO2 and trying to control “climate,” those very real problems get ignored.
He urged the Trump administration to “forget about” the whole UN climate agenda:
“Because that is nonsense, and you have very carefully and cleverly understood that.”
However, he also urged Trump to be empathetic and willing to discuss the climate issue.
“It is very simple for us to discuss it, because we really have the facts, they have their models,” Mörner said.
“And facts are better than models.”
Dr. William Happer, a world-renown physicist from Princeton University who has advised President Trump on climate issues, also denounced warming alarmism and the demonization of CO2.
In an interview with The New American at a climate-skeptic summit put together by Freedom Force International, Professor Happer said there was nothing to worry about from alleged man-made global warming or human emissions of the gas of life.
“CO2 will be good for the Earth,” Happer said, adding that CO2 levels were unusually and extremely low by historical standards.
“More would be a very good thing.”
Mörner, meanwhile, cautioned promoters of the man-made warming hypothesis that they were going to ultimately be exposed, with catastrophic consequences for the scientific community.
“This is so unscientific,” he said, condemning climatologists for ignoring facts that contradict their climate models.
“And that is a terrible thing, this unscientific part of it. Because one day, it will all be revealed as nonsense. And then we lose our trustworthiness.”
The data will not change, he said. And it is clear. If nothing else, when the next cooling phase begins -
“Everything points to that we are going into a new so-called grand solar minimum and that is in the middle of this century, maybe even as early as 2030”
- then everybody will realize how wrong the warmists have been.
That is when the “rats will leave the sinking ship,” he said.
But Mörner still expressed sympathy with those who have been duped into believing they are saving the planet by fighting CO2.
“Of course, everybody wants to believe in something,” he said.
“All those people who don't know what they are talking about, but they believe that they are saving the world. We don't save the world, the world will keep on going.”
It is even worse than that, though.
“This is the most dangerous and frightening part of it: How such a lobbyist group has been able to fool the whole world,” he concluded, comparing it to how National Socialists in Germany and communists in both Russia and China were able to deceive the populations and seize power.
Blasting the “autocratic process,” he said these organized and deceitful forces were “so dangerous.”
“What do they know? They are very nice, all of them, but they should be out playing, not talking at the United Nations,” he said, criticizing as “a little evil” that children would be used as propaganda props.
“That is an insult to science.”
Despite the warnings of Mörner and numerous other highly respected scientists around the world, including others who have served on the UN IPCC, the UN IPCC and the broader UN continue to sound the alarm over allegedly looming temperature increases and sea-level rises that will flood coastal cities around the world.
They typically refuse to debate, too. The New American reached out to the IPCC for comment repeatedly during the recent UN COP24 “climate” summit in Katowice, Poland.
However, the organization did not respond to e-mails, phone calls, or visits to the IPCC booth at the climate summit seeking comment.
Studies Show What Happens To The Human Body When We Walk Barefoot On Earth January 1 2023 | From: EducateInspireChange / Various
Walking barefoot, also known as grounding or earthing, involves placing your feet directly on the ground without shoes or socks as a barrier.
Earthing was a common practice in the past, but today people would stare at somebody walking barefoot in public. However, many studies published over the years have proved that the practice has enormous health benefits.
The Earth contains negative charge, and when somebody earths, it supply the person with antioxidants, as well as free-radical destroying electrons. This means putting your feet on the ground enables you to absorb large amounts of negative electrons through the soles of your feet which, in turn, can help to maintain your body at the same negatively charged electrical potential as the Earth.
Dr. James Oschman, a PhD in biology from the University of Pittsburgh and an expert in the field of energy medicine, notes:
A study titled “Earthing: Health Implications of Reconnecting the Human Body to the Earth’s Surface Electrons” postulates that earthing could represent a potential treatment or solution to a variety of chronic degenerative diseases.
It could also serve as a natural and “profoundly effective environmental strategy” against chronic stress, ANS dysfunction, inflammation, pain, poor sleep, disturbed HRV, hyper-coagulable blood, and many common health disorders, including cardiovascular disease.
Another study, conducted by the Department of Neurosurgery from the Military Clinical Hospital in Powstancow Warszawy, found that blood urea concentrations are lower in subjects who are earthed during physical exercise, and that earthing during exercise resulted in improved exercise recovery.
“This simple process of grounding is one of the most potent antioxidants we know of. Grounding has been shown to relieve pain, reduce inflammation, improve sleep, enhance well being, and much, much more. Unfortunately, many living in developed countries are rarely grounded anymore.”
The Broken Presidential Destiny Of JFK, Jr. December 31 2022 | From: UNZ / Various
Israel's "Kennedy Curse"? On July 16, 1999, John Fitzgerald Kennedy Junior was flying his private Piper Saratoga II, with his wife Carolyn Bessette and his sister-in-law Lauren Bessette.
He was to drop Lauren off at Martha’s Vineyard, then fly on with Carolyn to Hyannis Port for the wedding of his cousin, Rory Kennedy, the following day. At 9:39, as he was approaching Martha’s Vineyard airport, John radioed the control tower for landing instructions, giving no sign of difficulty. At 9:41 p.m., witnesses heard and saw an explosion in the sky, at the precise moment when John’s plane suddenly plummeted into the ocean at the radar-recorded speed of 4,700 feet per minute.
The next day, pieces of luggage from the plane were found floating nearly two miles away from the point of last radar contact.
The search and recovery operations were conducted by the Air Force and the Navy under national security conditions, with news reporting controlled from the Pentagon.
The National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) concluded its investigation eleven months later, and announced as “probable cause” of the plane crash “the pilot’s failure to maintain control of the airplane”, with “haze and the dark night” being possible factors.
The corporate media amplified the implication that John was an inexperienced and reckless pilot who ignored the dangerous weather conditions and who is to blame for his own death and the death of his wife and sister-in-law.
But many facts and testimonies inconsistent with that story have been concealed, while some convenient ones seem to have been fabricated. Independent investigators have found enough omissions and contradictions in the official and mainstream narrative to ask the questions:
Was he killed by the same cabal that had killed his father 36 years earlier, and for the same motive as his uncle Bobby 5 years later: his plans to conquer the White House and bring his father’s murderers to justice? (On JFK’s and RFK’s assassinations, read my article “Did Israel kill the Kennedys?” on unz.com).
I will examine the evidence of foul play and cover-up in JFK Jr.’s death in the second part of this two-part article. In this first part, let’s see if we can establish the following two things:
1. At age 39, John had made up his mind to launch his political career by seeking an electoral mandate in New York State, and he was about to announce it publicly.
He had also expressed to his friends his ambition to ultimately reach for the presidency. Given his personality and his popularity, he had high chances to make it in less than 20 years. He might realistically have become U.S. president in 2008 or 2016.
2. Brought up in the worship of his father, John had taken a keen interest in “conspiracy theories” about his death at least since his late teens. His knowledge deepened in his thirties, made him aware of State and media cover-ups in other affairs, and motivated him to publish, eight months before his death, a cover article by Oliver Stone, director of the groundbreaking film JFK, titled “Our Counterfeit History”.
If those two things can be proven - and they will - they must be connected. John’s quest for the truth about President Kennedy’s assassination cannot be separated from his political ambition to reclaim the White House, anymore than it could be in the case of his uncle Bobby, who, as David Talbot has shown (Brothers: The Hidden History of the Kennedy Years, Simon & Schuster, 2007), was planning to reopen the investigation on the Dallas coup as he was campaigning for the presidency in 1968.
These are two sides of the same destiny. The heir and the avenger are one and the same person. Therefore, the deep power network that had decided to eliminate Bobby on the threshold of the White House had every reason to make the same decision about John Junior.
True, John Junior was probably not yet ready for the presidency - although some, like Pierre Salinger, believed he would have run for president in 2000. But on the other hand, for many reasons, he was a more natural candidate than RFK, with more potential.
If he had to be stopped, didn’t it make sense to stop him before he made his political ambitions public? July 1999 was the right time; after that, the motive would be harder to conceal.
Even for media-brainwashed Americans, a second heir to JFK killed on the road to the White House would be hard to swallow.
Not to mention the fact that to let JFK Jr. live longer would be taking the risk of having a JFK III coming into this world: more trouble in perspective. Indeed, Carolyn may have been pregnant when she died with her husband.
Part I: The Heir and Would-be Avenger
JFK Jr. and the Camelot legacy
John Junior was literally born with the Kennedy presidency, precisely 17 days after his dad won the election. From the minute he came into this world, he had been in the national spotlight.
As Americans watched him grow up in the White House, they developed a strong affection for him, which did not displease his father.
While Jackie was trying to keep the photographers away from her children, “JFK had another view,” recalls Pierre Salinger, President Kennedy’s Press Secretary.
Whenever Jackie was away, “he was in touch with me and told me that now it was time for the media to get some wonderful pictures of John Jr. and Caroline in his office in the White House. I arranged for Jacques Lowe, who had been hired as the photographer of the Kennedys, to do those photos.”
Little “John John” turned three the day of his father’s funeral, and he broke the world’s heart when he solemnly saluted his father’s coffin. That iconic image encapsulated a nation’s grief, and impressed on millions of Americans the dream of seeing him reclaim the Oval Office one day.
For in the American collective psyche, the Kennedys represented royalty, and JFK Jr. was the legitimate heir to the throne. He was, wrote the New York Daily News the day after his death, the “charismatic crown prince of America’s royal family.” “He was the closest thing we had to a crown prince,” says Chris Cuomo in I am JFK Jr.
Little “John John” saluting his father’s coffin, on his third birthday
The Kennedys didn’t attain that royal status by just buying media coverage. It was conquered by the patriarch Joe Kennedy, whose philosophy Laurence Leamer has well captured in his great book Sons of Camelot: The Fate of an American Dynasty (2005). Joe Kennedy, he writes
“Believed that in each generation a few powerful men were the rightful leaders of their generation. He thought that he and his sons were part of this natural aristocracy. …
Joseph P. Kennedy created one great thing in his life, and that was his family. With acumen as great as his wealth, and limitless purpose, he built a family of sons who sought to reach the peak of American political life.
… Joe knew that he had achieved so much in America because of the liberty and opportunities. He believed that sons of privilege and wealth had an obligation to serve their country and to return something of the bounty that they had inherited.
Joe taught that blood ruled and that they must trust each other and venture out into a dangerous world full of betrayals and uncertainty, always returning to the sanctuary of family.
His sons took on part of Joe’s psychological makeup, the sense of lives without boundaries and ambitions without restrictions.”
After their father’s death, their uncle Bobby played the role of surrogate father for John Jr. and his sister Caroline.
When Bobby was assassinated in his turn in June 1968, Jackie said: “If they are killing Kennedys, my kids are the number one targets. I want to get out of this country.”
She married shipping magnate Aristotle Onassis, whose assets included a seventy-five-member, machine-gun-equipped security force.
Jackie wanted her son to grow up knowing who his father was. As early as 1967, writes biographer Christopher Andersen in The Good Son,
“Jackie made sure that John was constantly exposed to the people who knew John [President Kennedy] best - from longtime pals like Red Fay, Chuck Spalding, Oleg Cassini, Bill Walton, and his ubiquitous sidekick Dave Powers to such New Frontier stalwarts as Pierre Salinger, Theodore Sorensen, and Arthur Schlesinger Jr.
These were the folks ‘who knew Jack well and the things Jack liked to do.’ As long as they were around, she reasoned, ‘each day John will be getting to know his father.’”
And so, although John could hardly have kept real personal memories of his father, he was constantly, so to speak, steeped in the memory of him: “Whenever another child was visiting,” writes Andersen, “he would inevitably ask, ‘Would you like to hear my father?’
"Then he turned to a small stack of records and selected one to play.”
In 1972, Jackie asked Pierre Salinger to join her and her children for a month: “I want you to spend an hour or an hour and a half a day with John Jr. and Caroline and explain everything about what their father did.” And so Salinger did.
John’s craving for information about his father was never quenched. His friend and French biographer Olivier Royant reports that, when running his magazine George, John hired Jacques Lowe, JFK’s official photographer, and kept questioning him about his father for hours.
John John awaiting his father’s return to the White House
Even John’s irresistible yearning for flying, despite his mother’s plea not to do so, can possibly be traced back to his childhood, “when he and his mother watched as Daddy’s helicopter took off from the South Lawn in 1962,” or watched him reappear from the sky.
When Nanny Shaw announced to little John in the morning of November 23, 1963, “John, your father has gone to heaven to take care of Patrick [JFK and Jackie’s third child, who did not survive his first month],” John asked, “Did Daddy take his big plane with him?”
“Yes,” she answered. “I wonder,” John said, “when he’s coming back.”
Significantly, John gave his first private plane the registration number N529JK, a reference to his father’s May 29 birthday.
Did John intend to follow his father’s footsteps in politics? John Quinn, a pioneer researcher on his mysterious death, writes:
"Committed to the legacy of his compelling father, there was never any question about where John F. Kennedy Jr. was heading.
Is there any doubt about the fact that it was only a matter of time before he claimed his father’s legacy?
Anybody who claims that we will never really know, does not know anything about John F. Kennedy Jr.”
We don’t know at what stage in his life John fully endorsed that responsibility. But the thought had certainly been in his mind for many years already when he introduced his uncle Teddy at the 1988 Democratic convention. Like millions of Americans, Salinger was “very excited about that speech”:
“I took John Jr. to meet alone with me for several hours. I was telling him that this speech showed strongly that he should start thinking about going into politics.
He said he was interested, but he was still too young. He told me that he had an idea that he should go into politics in the next century.”
Jackie, the guiding spirit in John’s life, definitely saw her son as Camelot’s standard-bearer. In her last letter to him before dying to lymphoma in 1994, she wrote: “You, especially, have a place in history.”
According to presidential historian Doug Wead, interviewed in the film I am JFK Jr., Jackie “knew in her heart that, some day, the stars are gonna line up, and he’s gonna be president.”
“My mom sort of pressured me to get into politics,” John told Lloyd Howard in 1997. “She expected me to follow in my father’s footsteps, and of course I will. But I don’t think the time is right just yet.”
In 1995, John launched his political magazine George. Under the appearance of superficiality, it engaged in controversial issues of deep politics that reflected John’s interests.
After all, his father had also pursued a career in journalism before entering politics. George was also a means for John to interact with political actors and thinkers.
John didn’t avoid letting people know his interest for his father’s legacy. The September 1996 cover of George features Drew Barrymore grimed as Marilyn Monroe with the caption: “Happy Birthday, Mister President,” an obvious - and, to some, indecent - reference to Marilyn’ serenade in front of JFK at the Madison Square Garden in 1962.
In October 1997, for the 35th anniversary of the Cuban Missile Crisis, John travelled to Cuba to meet Fidel Castro (the interview he had wished didn’t materialize, but Castro invited him for dinner and for a swim in the Bay of Pigs, and rumor has that Castro gave him his view on his father’s death).
John’s interest for the presidency also transpired heavily in George, particularly in the recurrent section “If I were president,” in which various personalities were asked for suggestions. For the October 1998 issue, for example, Tony Brown, author of Empower the People: A 7-Step Plan to Overthrow the Conspiracy That Is Stealing Your Money and Freedom, declared that, if he were president, he would repeal the Federal Reserve Act of 1913.
In 1999, at age 39, John was trying to sell his magazine. He had new plans. According to Gary Ginsberg, a close collaborator who was with John the night before he died, “That last night he was very focused on two things: finding a buyer for George and his political future.” Christopher Andersen writes in his biography The Good Son:
“There seemed little doubt in the minds of those who knew him that John was on the brink of a bright political future.
‘He was probably a more natural politician than any of the other Kennedys,’ David Halberstam said, ‘and that includes his father. John had all the makings of a political superstar - once he decided that’s what he wanted.’”
In July 1999, his decision was made. His closest friends have testified that he was preparing to enter an election contest. Pierre Salinger, who knew him well, declared on French radio Europe 1, on July 19, 1999:
“I felt that in the coming year John Junior would also become a politician. It’s my point of view. And with other people, we thought he was going to be a Democratic candidate for the next presidential election.”
John Junior and Pierre Salinger in 1997
More plausibly, John Jr. would have started by seeking a political office in New York State, where he had lived since 1963. He loved New York, and New York loved him. A 1997 private poll ranked JFK Jr. as New York’s “most popular Democrat,” giving him 65 percent approval rating among fellow Democrats.
John had several options. One he excluded was mayor of New York City. His assistant at George, RoseMarie Terenzio, recounts that when New York Senator Al D’Amato suggested he should run for mayor, John laughed it off. When Terenzio asked him afterward if he would ever consider it,
“He said ‘Well, Rosie, how many mayors do you know that became President?’ I was so shocked I didn’t say anything. Then he smirked as if to say ‘That’s not the road you go down - we’ll see what happens.’”
Terenzio also made the following comment to the news website TheWrap:
“I think he would’ve run for president. I thought he would’ve run in 2008. I had dinner with a friend from George last night who thought for some reason he would’ve waited for 2016. He would be 56.”
Donald Trump and John Kennedy Jr. in 1999: Were they up to something?
According to Gary Ginsberg, JFK Jr.’s close collaborator at George,
“He had been thinking about running for the N.Y. Senate seat - he even had meetings about it that spring - but by July had concluded he would focus his attention on running for governor of N.Y. in 2003.
By temperament and interest, John, I think, realized he was far more suited to being a governor than a legislator.
He knew from running George that he could be an inspiring, strong chief executive of a state, setting the tone for government and successfully running a complex operation.
That idea became very appealing to him at some point that summer. Had the stars aligned over the next couple of years, I’m pretty convinced that’s what he would have pursued.”
Others around John believed he was about to enter the race for the Senate seat that Daniel Moynihan, a former assistant to President Kennedy, was going leave vacant in 2000.
This is the seat that Bobby Kennedy had occupied from 1964 to 1968. On July 19, 1999, New York Daily News reporter Joel Siegel interviewed two unnamed friends of JFK Jr., who said “they believed he would have run for office some day. Earlier this year, in one of the best-kept secrets in state politics, Kennedy considered seeking the seat of retiring Sen. Daniel Moynihan (D-N.Y.) in 2000, friends confirmed yesterday.”
Democratic Chairman John Marino, also quoted in Siegel’s article, did not believe he would have run for the Senate seat, but had little doubt that, if he did, “It would have been ‘Goodbye, anyone else. This is a guy who everybody recognized who would have had any nomination for the asking.’”
Christopher Andersen supports the view that, after consulting with Democratic leaders, John had made up his mind for the Senate. It clashed with Hillary Clinton’s plan.
The Clintons, who were to leave the White House in January 2001, were about to purchase a home in Chappaqua, N.Y., and Hillary was gearing up to run for the Senate as a stepping-stone to the presidency.
“In the end, John was still convinced his best shot was at running for Moynihan’s Senate seat. Hillary Clinton had hesitated to enter the race largely because she feared John, who was being touted behind the scenes as her principal rival for the nomination, would be a formidable foe.
John was both heir to the Kennedy magic and People’s ‘Sexiest Man Alive,’ as well as the consummate New Yorker, a resident of the city since the age of three.
Although New York had no residency requirements, Hillary, who had never spent more than a few days at a time in New York, would almost certainly be branded a carpetbagger. …
As late as the summer of 1999, Hillary actively worried about JFK Jr. and sought assurances from state party officials that he would not be a last-minute entry into the race.
… In early July, Hillary finally made her move and formally announced her candidacy.
But she was still concerned about the possibility that John might decide to toss his hat into the ring. As it turned out, she was right. John was now more confident than ever that he could easily beat her at the polls.
He believed Hillary was vulnerable not only because of the Monica Lewinsky affair, her husband’s subsequent impeachment, and a slew of brewing scandals in the Clinton White House, but mainly because she simply had no connection to the state he loved.
As Hillary had feared, young Kennedy planned on making much of Hillary’s carpetbagger status. ‘Wait until she gets here,’ John told his friend Billy Noonan.
‘She’s gonna get her head handed to her.’
He was going to fill Noonan in on the details of his upcoming campaign for the U.S. Senate - how and when he intended to make the announcement, what advice he was getting from Uncle Teddy, the endorsements and backing he was already lining up - when they all got together on Nantucket to celebrate Noonan’s fifth wedding anniversary on July 16.
Then they’d be off to attend his cousin Rory’s wedding in Hyannis Port. If, of course, all went according to plan.”
Christopher Andersen’s interview on Eyewitness News
Andersen relies on the testimony of John’s longtime friend Billy Noonan, who authored in 2006 Forever Young: My Friendship with John F. Kennedy, Jr. (Viking Press).
Here is what Noonan writes precisely, referring to the last phone conversation he had with John, whom he was supposed to meet on July 16:
“He had been making vague references on the phone about shutting things down, and starting things up.
During the week before our anniversary dinner, he told me that he had something pressing to talk about, but with curious ears in the office, John was cautious.
‘We’ll talk about it this weekend.’ … I asked him now what was up with that [1997] poll, to rib him about how the press was pushing for Hillary Clinton to replace Moynihan.
‘Wait until she gets here,’ John said. ‘She’s gonna get her head handed to her.’ He was in.”
This is the only mention by Noonan of John’s intention to run for the Senate. On one hand, it is not much. On the other, it should be taken very seriously, coming from one of John’s most intimate friends.
Given the importance of the issue, there can be no doubt that Noonan weighed every word he wrote.
One gets the impression that he wanted to say what he knew for the record, yet felt restrained from saying it too clearly, even when hinting at John’s awareness that his telephone conversations were tapped the day before he died.
In his 2009 article, Wayne Madsen quotes an unnamed “close friend of the late John F. Kennedy, Jr.” (who may be Billy Noonan), who said JFK Jr. “was about ready to announce his run for the U.S. Senate from New York. Kennedy was acutely aware of his vulnerability and hired on a personal security team just prior to his announcing for the Senate.”
Noonan and Andersen are not the only ones to think that John was upsetting Hillary’s plans. Andrew Collins writes:
“Approaching the end of two terms in the White House, the Clintons began preparing for their political future. They focused their attention on developing Hillary as a politician (even though she had no actual experience), and selling influence while they had it - buy now, pay later - payable to what would become ‘The Clinton Foundation’.
Hillary refused to return to Arkansas, and suggested the purchase of a home in New York which would allow her to run for the Senate in the upcoming election.
There was just one obstacle…. JFK Jr. had entered the political scene. New York was electric with word of JFK Jr. reclaiming his father’s legacy!
A piece of Camelot was still alive in America, and donors began to line up. She knew she could never defeat the son of JFK in New England.”
After reviewing all those testimonies, I feel that no certainty can be reached about John’s immediate plan, other that he was at the dawn of a bright political future and that he had several options in New York State.
If we believe Noonan - and why shouldn’t we - then Laurence Leamer, author of Sons of Camelot: The Fate of an American Dynasty (HarperCollins, 2011) is right when writing that “John watched with growing dismay as Hillary subtly insinuated herself into what he considered his state.”
April 1999: “Why Hillary won’t be senator”
It is easy to guess that, in return, Hillary saw John as a serious rival, on the state level in the short term, and on the national level in the long term. She stood no chance if John ever stepped across her way, and that was sure to happen sooner or later.
It is true, as some authors object, that John never frontally attacked the Clintons in his magazine George, perhaps out of Democratic loyalty.
But one of the very last issues of George that he oversaw himself (April 1999) was hostile to Hillary’s bid on the Senate seat, posting on the front-page: “Why Hillary won’t be senator.”
November 1999: “Hillary Comes Clean”
In April 1996, the cover had: “Why Women Will Dump Hillary.” But with John out of the way, Hillary did win the seat and, disturbingly, the November 1999 issue of George contained an exclusive interview of her, together with - in tragic irony - an article on “How Bobby Kennedy Seduced New York.”
JFK Jr. As a Conspiracy Theorist
Let’s move on to the next question: how dedicated was John to getting to the bottom of his father’s assassination?
According to testimonies from his friends, John Junior was haunted by the death of his father and quite knowledgeable about independant investigations contradicting the Warren Report. In 1999, he was not a newcomer to JFK conspiracy theories; his quest for truth had started as early as the late 1970s.
His old high school girlfriend Meg Azzoni, in her self-published book, 11 Letters and a Poem: John F. Kennedy, Jr., and Meg Azzoni (2007), writes that as a teenager, JFK, Jr. was questioning the official version of his father’s death: “His heartfelt quest was to expose and bring to trial who killed his father, and covered it up.”
Don Jeffries, author of Hidden History, claimed that “another friend of JFK, Jr.’s adult inner circle, who very adamantly requested to remain anonymous, verified that he was indeed quite knowledgeable about the assassination and often spoke of it in private.”
JFK Jr., said Jeffries in a radio interview, was on “a Shakespearian quest,” “to avenge his father’s death,” like young Hamlet.
October 1998 “Conspiracy Issue” with an article by Oliver Stone
John is the only Kennedy to have shown a serious determination to pursue this truth, besides his uncle Bobby. And he took the risk of making his interest public in October 1998, when he released a special “Conspiracy Issue” of George magazine , which included an article by Oliver Stone titled “Our Counterfeit History,” introduced on the cover as “Paranoid and Proud of It!”
In an article published in 2009, journalist Wayne Madsen claimed that, two weeks after John’s death, “I was scheduled to meet with Kennedy at his magazine’s offices in Washington, DC to discuss hiring on as one of a few investigative journalists Kennedy wanted to dig deep into a number of cases, but most importantly that of his father’s assassination.” (There is no confirmation of Madsen’s claim.)
As many truth seekers who had started with the Kennedy assassination, John had developed an awareness that other events of great historical consequence were the subject of State-orchestrated lies and cover-ups, with corporate media complicity.
And so the JFK assassination was not the only “conspiracy issue” explored by George. It is worth taking a look at two others, for they may inform us on the direction John Jr. was taking in his quest for truth.
In December 1996, George delved into the theory claiming that TWA Flight 800, which had exploded on July 17, 1996, soon after leaving JFK International, had been downed by a missile, rather than as the result of an short-circuit near the central fuel tank, as the National Transportation Safety Board concluded.
Although I have not been able to read the George article on TWA 800 (I will appreciate a comment from anyone who has), I assume it supported Pierre Salinger, who had been the most prominent journalist arguing that TWA 800 was shot down by a missile fired from a US Navy ship.
Salinger was severely attacked by his peers, and his notoriety suffered permanent damage. But in May 27, 1999, he reaffirmed his belief and asked to be vindicated in a Georgetowner column, based on new research confirming his views.
In this piece, Salinger mentions that “retired Navy commander William Donaldson has also come out with a new view: TWA 800 was shot down by a missile - fired not from a Navy ship but a terrorist group.”
That could explain the presence of a mysterious ship caught on radar while speeding away near where the plane exploded.
“‘Radar data collected during the last minute of the T.W.A. flight revealed the two closest objects to the plane, both between three and four miles away, as a Navy P-3 airplane and what the exhibit called simply a ‘30-knot target.’
Radar data for the next 20 minutes showed the mystery boat heading on a beeline out to sea, on a south-southwest course, even as other boats rushed to the crash to try to help out.
It was nearly 9 o’clock at night, not the usual time for an excursion. … [FBI officer] Lewis Schiliro acknowledged the presence of the mystery boat, which he said was at least 25 to 30 feet long and reached speeds of 35 knots, close to 40 miles per hour.
‘Despite extensive efforts, the F.B.I. has been unable to identify this vessel,’ he said. / The response is somewhat alarming given the F.B.I.’s assurances that it had turned over every stone.”
Alarming, but understandable if the mystery boat was in fact Israeli. Israel’s LAP (LohammaPsichologit, the Mossad’s department of psychological warfare) had been busy blaming Iran from the day of the crash, and “thousands of media stories perpetuated the fiction,” recounts Gordon Thomas in Gideon’s Spies: The Secret History of the Mossad (2009), with the London Times claiming that land-air Stinger missile systems had been smuggled across the Canadian border into the United States by Islamic terrorists.
A year later, the FBI’s chief investigator, James K. Kallstrom, would tell his colleagues: “If there was a way to nail those bastards in Tel Aviv for time wasting, I sure would like to see it happen. We had to check every item they slipped into the media.”
Some researchers into JFK Jr.’s plane crash have suggested a connection to the TWA 800 crash, which happened three years earlier almost to the day, and in the same vicinity. Jackie Jura, author of Orwell Today website, wrote:
“I remember when TWA 800 exploded and Salinger was going to give a press conference in Paris to expose the truth. But then he cancelled it.
The rumour on the net at the time was that the powers-that-be told him that if he gave the press conference they’d kill John-John, and so he backed down.”
Back down he did, but in May 27, 1999, he reiterated his claim, and John Jr. would die 50 days later. I don’t subscribe to that theory, but it is worth mentioning.
“TWA Conspiracy Theories” (December 1996)
In March 1997, three months after the issue featuring the “TWA Conspiracy Theories” cover article, George magazine published a 13-page article by the mother of Yigal Amir, the man convicted of assassinating Israeli Prime Minister Yitzhak Rabin. Rabin had offended the Israeli far-right by wanting to trade land for peace.
Amir’s mother revealed that her son had operated under the tutelage and training of a Shin Bet agent, Avishai Raviv, working for forces seeking to halt the peace process.
“Who was behind the killing of Yitzhak Rabin?” (March 1997)
Canadian-Israeli journalist Barry Chamish, who investigated the Rabin assassination in his book Who Murdered Yitzhak Rabin? (1988), agrees.
He also believes that JFK Jr. was determined to “get the full story on the Rabin assassination,” and finds support in several news release following JFK Jr.’s death:
“Catherine Crier of Fox TV’s The Crier Report, announcing that JFK Jr. was about to meet high ranking Mossad officers.
Then the German newspaper, Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung, reported that Kennedy had met with the deputy chief of the Mossad, Amiram Levine, to get the full story on the Rabin assassination two days before his plane went down.
Then Maariv ran an interview with JFK’s chauffeur, who happens to be Israeli. Then people started noting that Ehud Barak was in Washington at the time of Kennedy’s finale in life.”
Barak’s visit to the U.S. around July 16, 1999 - with a battalion of Intelligence and security agents - is a fact, but I have not been able to verify Chamish’ sources in the Crier Report, the Frankfurter Allgemeine or the Maariv. Chamish concluded:
“Yes, I’m sure he [John] was murdered. And yes, the Israeli political establishment had a motive for involvement.
The latest Kennedy to die violently was the only American editor to expose (in the March 1997 issue of his magazine George) the conspiracy behind Rabin’s assassination.
And he had every intention of continuing his exposes until he got to the bottom of the matter. We don’t know what drove him to stand alone in seeking the truth, but it may have had much to do with the information contained within Final Judgment.”
There is no confirmation that John Junior read Michael Piper’s book Final Judgment blaming Israel for the Kennedy assassination, and released in 1993. But it is in the realm of possibility, given his personal quest for the truth on his father’s death, and his consideration for the theory that Rabin was assassinated by the Israeli Deep State, rather than by a lone nut.
So, was JFK Jr. himself assassinated?
Here is man whose road to the presidency seemed traced. No other man of his age had better chances to reach the White House one day. And no other man in the world had more reasons to want the 1963 Kennedy assassination reinvestigated.
He was already trying to educate the public through his magazine, at the risk of exposing his own beliefs, something no other Kennedy had ever done (even RFK had kept his doubt on the Warren report private, and his plan to reopen the case secret).
And this man, his best friend Noonan believes, was just about to announce his candidacy for a New York Senate seat, which everyone would have understood as the first step toward the White House.
Pierre Salinger and others even believe he would have run for president in 2000.
What are the odds that he would die at this precise moment by accident?
How lucky for his enemies to be spared the trouble of eliminating him, as they had his uncle in 1968! If that was an accident, then that alone deserves to be called a “Kennedy curse,” doesn’t it! If it was an accident, then the Devil caused it. Or was it Yahweh?
As I have argued in “Did Israel kill the Kennedys?”, John’s uncle Bobby had been assassinated because he was, in his own eyes and in the eyes of most Americans - and therefore also in the eyes of his brother’s killers -, the continuation of his brother, his heir and avenger.
Even before David Talbot, Laurence Leamer has shown how close Jack and Bobby had been. He writes in Sons of Camelot:
“Bobby had been the president’s alter ego and protector. He could finish his brother’s sentences and complete a task that Jack signaled with no more than a nod or a gesture.
He had loved his brother so intensely and served him so well that within the administration it was hard to tell where one man ended and the other began.”
A bond of blood and spirit of a comparable nature existed between John F. Kennedy and the son that bore his name.
Although John Junior could not speak with his father, nor even remember speaking with him, his love and loyalty to his father, nurtured by his mother, was the driving force in his life.
From the point of view of JFK’s murderers, JFK Jr. was JFK redivivus, and RFK redivivus at the same time. All three were like one man who had to be killed three times.
Part II: Evidence of Assassination and Cover-Up
Was JFK Jr. assassinated? As we are going to see, the evidence may not be absolutely compelling, but what can be proven beyond a reasonable doubt is that federal authorities and corporate media engaged in a massive cover-up of any facts that contradicted the theory of the accident due to the pilot’s error.
And that is enough, I think, to decide between accident and assassination. The transgenerational cabal who had the motive, means and opportunity to murder JFK and RFK (and the power to get away with it) had the same motive, means and opportunity to murder JFK Jr. (and the power to get away with it).
We know for sure that, in 1968, RFK had both the ambition to win the White House and the determination to reopen the investigation on the death of his brother (read my article “Did Israel Kill the Kennedys?”). I have now shown that the same can be ascertained about JFK Jr. in 1999. Obviously, that made him a target, the next Kennedy on the list.
The 9:39 Call and the Explosion
According to Wayne Madsen, “JFK Jr.’s Plane Crash Was Originally Treated As Murder Investigation” (the title of his 2009 article):
“The FBI had discovered that there was ‘suspicious boating activity’ in an area of Martha’s Vineyard where Kennedy’s plane was descending to 2000 feet for its final approach to the airport.
The ‘suspicious’ boaters claimed to be fishing for striped bass. … after the plane’s wreckage was discovered, investigators found, according to Kennedy’s friend, that every light bulb, including that in the emergency flashlight, had been blown out on the plane and every circuit board, including those in the engine sensors and other electronic equipment, had been literally ‘melted.’
FBI agents on the scene preliminarily concluded that a ‘massive electromagnetic event’ caused Kennedy’s plane to crash. … Before the FBI could begin examining the ocean floor for any ‘special equipment’ that may have been thrown overboard from the fishing boat, their ‘murder’ investigation was abruptly called off by FBI headquarters in Washington.”
Unfortunately, I have found no source supporting Madsen’s claim about an aborted FBI investigation (that’s always the problem with Madsen). But the fact that no news of a criminal investigation ever reached the public is in itself very puzzling, given the history of Kennedy assassinations and the natural assumption that JFK Jr. could be a target.
That JFK Jr. had powerful enemies was well-known to the whole world, and the lack of a criminal investigation may be taken as confirmation of their power.
Independent investigators have gathered a fair amount of evidence that JFK Jr.’s death was a criminal act.
I will summarize what I hold to be the most solid evidence, based on my reading of all the relevant articles I could find on the Net (including those by early researchers such as John Quinn), and of the following two books: first, chapter 7 of Donald Jeffries’s book Hidden History: An Expose of Modern Crimes, Conspiracies, and Cover-Ups in American Politics (Skyhorse publishing, 2016), which I recommend (you may also want to listen to Jeffries’s one-hour interview); second, John Koerner, Exploding the Truth: The JFK Jr., Assassination (Chronos Books, 2018), which adds little.
In addition, John Hankey’s video “Dark Legacy II: the Assassination of JFK Jr” is very useful. However, I advise to skip Koerner’s Part I, meant to exonerate the Clintons and blame the Bushs; for the same reason, I recommend to start Hankey’s video at 15 minutes.
The basic fact that seems firmly established by radar data is that JFK Jr.’s plane suddenly nose-dived into the Ocean at 9:41. That cannot be explained simply by an engine failure, as the Boston Globe correctly asserted:
“Even if the engine died, a federal aviation source said, it is unlikely that the plane would reach such a high rate of descent, because the plane is designed to glide without power at a much slower rate for several miles.
And if Kennedy had run out of fuel, it is likely he would have made a distress call.”
The most likely explanation, apart from suicide, is that the plane suffered a structural damage, possibly by explosive, making it impossible to maintain in the air; blowing off a part of a wing or the tail would have been enough, and would have required only a very small device fixed to the plane.
The next element to consider is that, from the early hours of July 17, it was reported that JFK Jr. had made a call to Martha’s Vineyard airport at 9:39 pm, asking for landing instructions in a perfectly calm tone, less than two minutes before his plane suddenly dropped and disappeared from radar. That information was broadcast on Boston WCVB-TV and was relayed by ABC News. A United Press International article dated July 17 said:
“At 9:39 p.m. Friday, Kennedy radioed the airport and said he was 13 miles from the airport and 10 miles from the coast, according to WCVB-TV news in Boston.
He reportedly said he was making his final approach. … In his final approach message, WCVB-TV said Kennedy told controllers at the airport that he planned to drop off his wife’s sister and then take off again between 11 p.m. and 11:30 p.m. for Hyannis Airport.”
WCVB-TV repeated that information continuously during their first two days of reporting on the story. They broadcast, at 12:35 p.m. on July 17, a phone interview by anchor Susan Wornick of U.S. Coast Guard Petty Officer Todd Burgun, who confirmed the information. Here is a transcript of the footage, which Hankey has included in his valuable film (19:40):
Wornick: “We have been told by the Coast Guard that in fact there is now evidence of a last communication last night with JFK Jr.’s plane as he was making an approach to Martha’s Vineyard airport.
Petty officer Todd Burgun joins us from the Coast Guard Base in Boston. He is a Petty officer, and a public information officer. Thank you for being with us, sir. What can you tell us about this last communication with JFK Jr.’s plane?”
Burgun: “All I really know at this time is that it was at 9:39 p.m. and it was with the FAA. And he was on his final approach to Martha’s Vineyard.”
Wornick: “So at 9:39, to the best of your information, JFK Jr. made a contact with the airport, with the flight controllers that he was on his final descent.”
Burgun: “That is correct.”
That is all that remained of WCVB-TV’s report on the subject, when researchers later obtained archive copies; “hours of time on the tape archive of WCVB’s July 17 broadcast, during which information on Kennedy’s radio contact was continually reported, have been intentionally cut,” complained John Quinn.
According to Jeffries, the original interview of Burgun was much longer:
"On the uncut tape, Burgun went on to delineate all the points from the UPI’s article: Kennedy was calm, on approach to the airport, had provided his position and trajectory, and had even made a comment about dropping Lauren Bessette off at the airport. Some five hours of coverage was edited out.”
This crucial information was reported by news services on Saturday July 17 and early Sunday, July 18. By Monday morning, the FAA claimed that there was never a communication from Kennedy to the tower.
Todd Burgun became utterly unreachable. According to the Boston Globe, Martin Wyatt, a controller at the Martha’s Vineyard Airport tower the night of Kennedy’s flight “declined comment on whether he had radio contact with Kennedy’s plane.”
Simultaneously, on July 18, FAA and NTSB officials produced some “newly found” radar “evidence” which supposedly showed Kennedy’s flight exhibiting signs of difficulties and irregularities long before 9:39; obviously, Kennedy’s perfectly normal call at 9:39 did not fit with that new version of events.
Of course, it is not inconceivable that the crucial piece of information of JFK Jr.’s 9:39 radio call was mistaken, false, or fake.
Yet it seems highly implausible that the Coast Guard would charge their spokesman Todd Burgun - whose identity is not in question - to release it to the public without double-checking it.
The fact that the news was originally broadcast by a Boston TV station is perhaps significant, as is the fact that, among major newspapers, the Boston Globe was the most critical of the official story (I’ll mention other cases along the way).
Since Boston is the Kennedys’ historical stronghold, we can conjecture that an information war of some sort was going on between Boston and Washington, Boston trying to resist the disinformation assault from federal agencies.
The only available photo believed to be of the wreckage of JFK Jr.’s plane
The second element to consider is the testimony of Victor Pribanic, a trial lawyer from White Oak, Pennsylvania, who was fishing for striped bass off Squibnocket Point that night.
He gave an interview to The Martha’s Vineyard Times, cited in the New York Daily News, July 21, 1999: “I heard an explosion over my right shoulder. It sounded like an explosion. There was no shock wave, but it was a large bang.”
He also said, according to the Daily News,“that just before hearing the noise, he noticed a small aircraft flying low over the water toward the island.” Pribanic repeated his story to filmmaker Anthony Hilder of the Free World Alliance: “I heard a loud impact like a bomb.”
The next day, when Pribanic heard the news of the Kennedy crash, he gave his information to Hank Myer of the West Tilsbury Police Department.
Myer accompanied Pribanic to the site where he’d heard the explosion, which would turn out exactly where the plane went missing. Police, he was told, forwarded his information to the investigators.
Pribanic was apparently not the only witness of the explosion. The July 17 UPI article mentions:
"A reporter for the Vineyard Gazette newspaper told WCVB-TV in Boston that he was out walking Friday night about the time of the crash and saw ‘big white flash in the sky’ off Philbin Beach.”
When John DiNardo contacted the Vineyard Gazette in an attempt to talk with this reporter, a few days later, he was told that the “whole thing” was a mix-up due to some fireworks having been set off at “Falmouth”, and, when he insisted, he was told that the reporter was no longer employed by the paper.
Like the 9:39 radio call, the ear- and eye-witnesses disappeared from news reports from July 18 on. The National Transportation Safety Board initial report, released on July 30, 1999 makes no mention of them.
It states that there was no “in-flight break-up or fire, and no indication of pre-impact failure to the airframe,” which excludes an explosion damaging the plane. On June 7, 2000, eleven months after the plane crash, the NTSB released its final report.
That report was announced to the press by a short official NTSB news release which included the following statement: “The probable cause of the accident, as stated in the accident report, is: ‘The pilot’s failure to maintain control of the airplane during a descent over water at night, which was a result of spatial disorientation.
Factors in the accident were haze and the dark night.’” A first problem must be pointed out: that statement from the NTSB news release which is supposedly taken from the final report does not appear in the final report.
In fact, as I will show, it is hard to see how the full report supports the conclusion of that news release. One gets the impression that the person who wrote the news release didn’t even read the full report.
For example, the sudden drop of altitude from 2,200 feet to 1,100 feet in 14 seconds, stated in the full report, is hard to reconcile with the news release statement.
Disorientation implies that the pilot was not aware that he was flying straight into the ocean. But that is impossible, as the NTSB Investigator-in-Charge, Robert Pearce, had admitted as early as July 20, 1999: “They were aware they were going down. With that kind of descent rate, it is going to be noisier than hell in the cockpit.”
Jeb Burnside, commercial pilot and editor-in-chief of Aviation Safety Magazine, did a careful analysis of the NTSB report and radar data and confirms that weather conditions and pilot experience (or lack of) fail to explain the crash:
"On paper, this accident shouldn’t have happened. Despite most of his time being in a training environment, a typical 310-hour instrument-rating student in a well-equipped airplane should have had no problem with this flight.”
The mainstream media hardly paid attention to the full report, and focused on the short news release. But they even distorted it to make its hesitant conclusion (“probable cause”) more assertive and dramatic.
“Haze and the dark night,” which are mentioned as “factors in the accident,” were exaggerated and declared totally unsafe for flying. “The pilot’s failure to maintain control … as a result of spatial disorientation,” became proof that JFK Jr. was incompetent to fly in such terrible weather at night. And the implication was that JFK Jr. was reckless and irresponsible to fly that night, especially with his wife and sister-in-law on board.
So, after the first step of crucial omissions in the NTSB report (JFK Jr.’s 9:39 call to the airport and Pribanic’s report of an explosion), the disinformation process continued in two more steps: first, a NTSB news release about the “probable cause” of the “accident” is falsely presented as “stated” in the NTSB final report, whereas it is in reality a far cry from the picture presented in the report; second, that relatively prudent statement is exaggerated and dramatized in mainstream news, while all contradictory details in the full report are ignored.
Let’s see out that works for the two following crucial points: 1) weather conditions and visibility, 2) the pilot’s experience and cautiousness.
My point is not so much to determine exactly the visibility and the level of JFK Jr.’s skill, but rather to demonstrate a concerted effort to distort credible reports on these matters, with the obvious intention to convince the public that the lack of visibility and John’s inexperience are sufficient explanations for his plane crash, although in fact, they are not.
"At about 6:30 on the night of the accident, the pilot received an Internet weather forecast for flight from Teterboro, New Jersey, to Hyannis, Massachusetts. The report was for VFR (visual flight rules) weather, visibility 6 to 8 miles.”
So two hours before taking off, JFK Jr. received a forecast of very good flying conditions. The NTSB final report also quotes the Martha’s Vineyard tower manager as stating:
"The visibility, present weather, and sky condition at the approximate time of the accident was probably a little better than what was being reported. I say this because I remember aircraft on visual approaches saying they had the airport in sight between 10 and 12 miles out. I do recall being able to see those aircraft and I do remember seeing the stars out that night.”
This tower manager must be Marvin Wyatt, interviewed for the Boston Globe: “Marvin Wyatt, a controller at the Martha’s Vineyard Airport tower the night of Kennedy’s flight, said visibility was good at the airport at Kennedy’s expected arrival time.”
Wayne Madsen quotes an unnamed close friend of JFK Jr. (probably Billy Noonan, who was supposed to meet him that night) who said “that visibility around the Vineyard was clear at 9:41 p.m. when the plane disappeared from the sky.”
Mainstream news outlet, however, repeated over and over again, in contradiction even to the NTSB report, that the weather was so bad, the fog so thick, that John should have cancelled his plan to fly, had he been a responsible man.
FAA Flight Specialist Edward Meyer, who had prepared for the NTSB the FAA’s official report of weather conditions over Martha’s Vineyard on July 16, 1999, and had determined that they were “at least very good,” was disturbed by the way his conclusions were distorted, and released a public statement:
"Nothing of what I have heard on mainstream media makes any sense to me… The weather along his flight was just fine. A little haze over eastern Connecticut. … I don’t know why the airplane crashed, but what I heard on the media was nothing but garbage.”
One of the most dubious witnesses brought forward by the corporate media to support their claim of fatal visibility was Kyle Bailey. Here is how the Washington Post introduced him on July 21st:
"Kyle Bailey, 25, a pilot with more than a decade of flying experience who also keeps his plane at Essex County Airport and who frequently flies the same route as Kennedy - Fairfield to the Vineyard - took special note of Kennedy that night because Bailey had just decided against making the flight.
Bailey said he feared the combination of darkness and haze could be treacherous, causing him to lose sight of the horizon, lose his bearings, maybe even lose control of his plane.
Visibility was four to five miles in Fairfield due to haze, near the margin for flying by visual rules, as opposed to instruments.”
According to the NY Daily News of the same day, Bailey said:
"I saw him taxi [drive the plane on ground to prepare for take off], and I saw him take off.
I [later] told my family, ‘I can’t believe he’s going up in this weather.’ At night, you don’t know where the sky ends and the ocean begins.
You have no sight of the horizon. It can give you a false sense of flying level.”
“Bailey,” commented the Daily News,“was staggered by what he feared was another ghastly Kennedy tragedy. ‘It never seems to end for this family,’ he said. ‘He’s so young, with a life full of promise.’”
How moving! But who is Kyle Bailey, “the last man to see Kennedy alive at the Fairfield airport”? I had no difficulty to find the answer to that question: it happens that Kyle Bailey later became an aviation analyst regularly working for major network and cable televisions such as Fox News, CBS, ABC, NBC, BBC. Bailey even appeared in the documentary Curse on the Kennedys? and very recently in the ABC documentary The Last Days of JFK Jr., aired in January 2019, in which he repeats his story. Can you swallow that blue pill?
In the same documentary The Last Days of JFK Jr. appears another private pilot by the name of Bob Arnot, who claims to have flown the same night along the same route as John. He declares there was no visibility, to the point that, when approaching Martha’s Vineyard, he could not see any lights at all.
Unlike Bailey, who somehow escapted the attention of NTSB investigators, this Bob Arnot is most probably the unnamed pilot mentioned in the NTSB report as follows: “when his global positioning system (GPS) receiver indicated that he was over Martha’s Vineyard, he looked down and ‘…there was nothing to see.
There was no horizon and no light. … I turned left toward Martha’s Vineyard to see if it was visible but could see no lights of any kind nor any evidence of the island. … I thought the island might [have] suffered a power failure.’”
That testimony completely contradicts Martha’s Vineyard tower manager (Marvin Wyatt), who is quoted in the NTSB report as saying visibility was great. Which shows that the NTSB report is self-contradictory in some areas.
Now, it is a very small world. You can find on Wikipedia that “Dr. Bob Arnot is a journalist, author, former host of the Dr. Danger reality TV series, and previously medical and foreign correspondent for NBC and CBS.” Can you swallow that too? Or do you start to smell a media conspiracy?
Was JFK Jr. Reckless and Inexperienced?
Let’s now talk about JFK Jr.’s flying experience and skill. Kyle Bailey’s testimony implies that JFK Jr.’s is solely to blame for his own death and for the deaths of his wife and her sister.
That view was reinforced by hundreds of comments on air about how inexperienced JFK Jr. was. Just like on weather conditions, the mainstream media gave a grossly negative view of JFK Jr.’s flying experience and skill, unrelated to the NTSB report and to the real testimonies of flight instructors who knew him.
The NTSB report reckoned that JFK Jr. had a flight experience of “about 310 hours, of which 55 hours were at night.” During the last fifteen months, he had made 35 flights between Fairfield airport, N.J., and Martha’s Vineyard, including five at night.
Three certified flight instructors (CFI) quoted in the report describe John as an “excellent”, “methodical” and “very cautious” pilot. In the early days, some newspapers echoed that view with their own research. John McColgan, JFK Jr.’s federal licensing instructor from Vero Beach, Florida, was interviewed for the Orlando Sentinel, July 18, 1999, and said: “He was an excellent pilot. … In fact, by now he probably has enough hours to be a commercial pilot.”
One the same day, the New York Daily News quoted flight instructors Ralph and Chris describing John as a careful pilot, always checking meticulously “every nut and bolt on the airplane. … He was very safety oriented. … John was a natural in flying.”
On July 21, USA Today published an article titled “Pilot Kennedy was ‘conscientious guy,’” whose lead paragraph said: “John F. Kennedy Jr. attended the Harvard of flight schools, may have had far more flight experience than has been reported and was known at his New Jersey airport for prudence in the cockpit.” The article quoted other people who knew Kennedy as a good pilot.
But as days passed, major TV channels and newspapers gave a more and more negative assessment of John’s flying skills and of the weather conditions. They emphasized that he didn’t have the proper license to fly with instruments only, as the absence of visibility would have required.
It is true that John’s license was for visual flight only, meaning visibility of at least 4 miles. But although John had not yet obtained the license allowing him to fly by instruments only, he had passed the written test and completed the training for the inflight test. According to the flight instructor who trained him, as quoted in the NTSB report, “the pilot’s basic instrument flying skills and simulator work were excellent.”
So even if the visibility had been very bad - which it was not - John could have guided his plane safety to the airport, using his autopilot if necessary. According to Scott Meyers, a foremost expert on the death of JFK Jr. who was interviewed for the program “Encounters with the Unexplained: The Kennedy Curse, JFK, Jr.’s, Death – Accident or Assassination?” aired February 15, 2002:
"The fact that Kennedy knew how to use his plane’s navigational instruments casts serious doubt on the official explanation for the crash, because even if he had gotten lost, his knowledge of the plane’s instruments would have allowed him to flip a switch and allow the autopilot to guide him to a short distance from his runway destination.
A little haze should have never stopped him from landing safely.”
One question has been the focus of much attention from independent researchers: was there a flight instructor as co-pilot in the plane?
Officially, there wasn’t. No fourth body was recovered in the wreckage.
But strangely enough, one seat was also missing, and conspiracy theorists such as John Hankey have speculated that it might have had a flight instructor’s body seat-belted on it, which might have been spirited away for the sake of building up the story of an incompetent and reckless John.
For if John had flown with a flight instructor, then the whole argument of his recklessness falls.
Again, I am mentioning this issue here, not to make any definite conclusion, but mainly to point out evidence of a concerted effort to close the case and satisfy the public that JFK Jr. died - and killed his wife and sister-in-law - by his own recklessness.
JFK Jr. had owned his Piper Saratoga for a little more than two months, and he had never flown it without a flight instructor. He had flown to Martha’s Vineyard 8 times in the previous month with that plane, always with a flight instructor.
Since he had his wife and her sister on board, it doesn’t seem like him to fly without an instructor, especially at night. According to Donald Jeffries, “Early reports, such as the one that appeared in the New York Times on July 17, 1999, indicated that a flight instructor was on the plane. JFK Jr.’s George magazine coeditor Richard Blow recounted that Kennedy had told him he was taking a flight instructor with him during their last lunch together."
Then, from the next day on, any mention of a flight instructor on board disappeared. Different explanations were offered for the fact that John flew without a flight instructor that particular night, for the first time on his new plane. His biographer Christopher Andersen writes:
"On today’s trip up from New Jersey, Jay Biederman, the flight instructor who had recently helped John pass his written instrument test and was preparing him for his instrument flight test, was scheduled to go along as he had several times before.
But when Biederman canceled to join his parents on a hiking trip in Switzerland, John made the fateful decision not to find a replacement.”
Curiously, that explanation contradicts a key testimony included in the NTSB final report, of which John Hankey provides a good critical analysis at the end of his film. I quote here the shorter presentation from Donald Jeffries:
"One of Kennedy’s flight instructors, Robert Merena, told the NTSB, some six months after the crash, that JFK Jr. had turned down his request to fly with him by saying he wanted to “do it alone.”
These dramatic, ironic words were reported widely in the establishment press and solidified the image of JFK Jr. as an irresponsible daredevil. Merena’s own lawyer would deny he’d ever made such a statement, and the memorandum produced by the NTSB regarding it was suspiciously irregular, with no date, location, or signature on it.
Most crucially, Merena had been interviewed five days after the crash by the NTSB, and he never mentioned anything about this, which would certainly seem to have been a pertinent fact. Merena did tell the NTSB in this early interview, however, that he’d never seen JFK Jr. fly without an instructor.”
The damning story of John rejecting the offer of a flight instructor and stubbornly insisting to pilot alone was included in the NTSB’s final report and became widely quoted.
Here it is from ABC News on July 7, 2000: “John F. Kennedy Jr. turned down an offer by one of his flying instructors to accompany him the night of his fatal flight to Martha’s Vineyard, saying he ‘wanted to do it alone,’ federal investigators say.” The same could be read in the Los Angeles Times on the same day, and in TheNew York Times.
I personally feel that the question of whether there was a co-pilot in the plane or not cannot be conclusively answered either way. But the important thing here is the strong probability that Robert Merena’s testimony was fabricated or forced, to hammer in the point that there was no co-pilot and that JFK Jr. acted irresponsibly.
In this whole affair, we cannot prove directly that JFK Jr. was murdered. What we can prove, however, is that federal agencies and mainstream media conspired in a massive fraud, including the concealment of key evidence (the 9:39 call and reports of an explosion), the distortion of facts (visibility and pilot’s ability) and false testimonies (Kyle Bailey and Bob Arnot being the most likely).
That can be taken as indirect proof that JFK Jr. was murdered.
Eight hours of video footage taken by recovery divers might have helped to solve the mystery, but the Navy preferred to destroyed them (Sidney Morning Herald, February 13, 2001)
The National Security Protocol
Truth seekers such as Donald Jeffries, John Koerner or John Hankey have raised important questions concerning the 10 hours (they say 15 hours) it took for a search to begin after the plane was reported missing by Bessette and Kennedy relatives, at 10 p.m. on July 16th, and for the 4 or 5 days it took to locate and retrieve the wreckage and the bodies.
The plane was equipped with an Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT), which sends out a beacon signal in the event of a crash. According to the original UPI article mentioned earlier, “the beacon was heard by the Coast Guard in Long Island, N.Y., at 3:40 a.m. But as the search went on, authorities seemed to discount the relevance of the beacon signal.”
Was the search intentionally directed away from the crash site during three days, in order for the perpetrators to secretly destroy the evidence from the cockpit voice recorder (the NTSB report says that “its backup battery was missing, and it had retained no data”), remove the log book which John kept in a waterproof box and, more importantly in Hankey’s view, remove the body of the co-pilot (together with the missing seat reported by the NTSB)?
That is a possibility that finds support in the testimony of Lieutenant Colonel Richard Stanley of the Civil Air Patrol, who “would report seeing what he thought were Coast Guard helicopters around the crash site at about 7 a.m., hours before the Coast Guard or anyone else arrived.”
For lack of space, I will not dwell on those issues, which are thoroughly discussed by the above-mentioned researchers.
Rather, let’s focus on the tight military control of all procedures following the tragedy, from the search and rescue missions to the news reporting, all conducted under national security standards.
The search was done by military planes and vessels. According to John Koerner, “the military immediately instituted in the hours after the crash a 17-nautical mile no-fly zone, and no entry zone, around the crash site.
No civilians or media were allowed in this area until the bodies and wreckage were recovered.”
On July 20, 1999, we read in the NTSB report, “the airplane wreckage was located by U.S. Navy divers from the recovery ship, USS Grasp.”
Why was the Navy, rather than civilian rescue craft, tasked with the retrieval of JFK Jr.’s crashed airplane?
More disturbing still, why did the Pentagon take control of news reporting from July 18?
Pentagon Press conference, from Hankey’s Dark Legacy II (24:08)
There are issues also with the autopsies. Joanna Weiss and Matthew Brelis of the Boston Globe wrote on July 23, 1999, in an article headlined “JFK Autopsy Rushed”:
"The autopsies in the Kennedy case were performed especially quickly, pathologists said. The remains were taken to a Bourne hospital at about 7:15 p.m.
Wednesday night and released to the victims’ families at 11 p.m., according to the medical examiner’s office and the Cape and Islands district attorney’s office. /
Many jurisdictions refuse to perform autopsies at night, said Robert Kirschner, a former deputy chief medical examiner for Cook County, Ill. The haste in this case, he said, could lead to questions about the investigation’s thoroughness. …
The timing of the Kennedy investigation, Kirschner said, makes it unlikely that pathologists performed autopsies on Carolyn Bessette Kennedy or Lauren Bessette. ‘You can’t possibly do three investigations in four hours,’ he said.”
But, to me, the most suspicious thing of all is the way the bodies were disposed of after their rushed autopsies: they were cremated in Duxbury’s cemetery crematorium. Then their remains were taken aboard the Navy destroyer Briscoe, and scattered into the sea, near the place where they had found their death.
Why? “The burial for the 35th president’s son,” noted local Duxbury journalist Paula Maxwell, “was reportedly carried out in keeping with his expressed wishes.”
The Boston Globe reported on July 22 , “Kennedy’s family requested a burial at sea, and the Pentagon granted that request.”
But, the next day, the same newspaper expressed surprise:
"The cremated remains of John F. Kennedy Jr., his wife, and her sister were cast from a warship to the ocean currents in a manner not favored by the Catholic Church and in a ceremony that occurred only after the intercession of Pentagon brass.
The Roman Catholic Church prefers the presence of a body at its funeral rites. And the Defense Department rarely accords the honor of burial at sea to civilians.”
Moreover, no other Kennedy had ever been cremated. The reasons given for cremating JFK Jr. body do not make any sense and are contradictory.
The New York Times wrote: “Kennedy family members, citing his wishes and hoping to avoid having a spectacle made of Mr. Kennedy’s final resting place, have decided to have his body cremated and his ashes scattered at sea in a Navy ceremony, a family adviser said.”
Can we believe that the Kennedy family, who had always showed respect for Catholic traditions, wanted no grave for JFK Jr., by fear that his grave might become a pilgrimage site?
And can we believe that John, at age 39, had expressed “his wish” to be cremated? CNN added more bizarre explanations to that already incredible story:
"Sen. Kennedy, D-Massachusetts, had requested the burial at sea, saying it was his nephew’s wish to be cremated and his ashes spread on the waves.
The request was approved by Defense Secretary William Cohen. / The family of the Bessette sisters requested that the two women be buried in the same ceremony, the Pentagon said. / John Jr., like his father, the late President John F. Kennedy, had a love of the sea.
He spent many summers sailing and kayaking the waters where his plane crashed. / Pentagon officials tell CNN there are two grounds for granting permission for a naval burial at sea. First, there is a provision allowing for such burials for people providing “notable service or outstanding contributions to the United States. /
Also, protocol allows sea burials for the children of decorated Navy veterans. President Kennedy was a naval officer wounded and cited for heroism in World War II.”
How ridiculous! JFK was a decorated Navy veteran, and he surely loved sailing, yet he was buried in Arlington. It seems to me unconceivable that JFK Jr. would not have wished to be buried near his father.
Even Pierre Salinger asked to be buried at Arlington Cemetery, not far from JFK. It is just as unbelievable that the Bessettes, who are said to hold John responsible for their daughters’ death, and to have received 10 million dollars in compensation from the Kennedys, would decide just the same.
According to information found in RFK Jr.’s diary, published by the New York Post, Ann Freeman, Carolyn and Lauren Bessette’s mother, “began asking that her two daughters be buried near her home in Greenwich, Connecticut.”
It was Edwin Schlossberg, Caroline Kennedy’s wife, who convinced her to have her two daughters cremated and their ashes spread in the ocean. “He bullied, bullied, bullied the shattered grieving mother,” writes RFK Jr., also commenting: “All the Bessette family knows that Ed hated Carolyn and did everything in his power to make her life miserable.”
After Carole Radziwill, the wife of Anthony Radziwill, JFK Jr.’s cousin and close friend, complained to RFK Jr. about Schlossberg, RFK Jr. wrote in his diary: “She says she wants to start an ‘I hate Ed Club.’ There would be many, many members. John & Carolyn would have certainly applied.”
That surely makes us wonder about Edwin Schlossberg’s interest in the whole affair.
Navy destroyer USS Biscoe, where the funeral ceremony took place
Who Did It?
So, have we proven without a reasonable doubt that JFK Jr. was assassinated? Admittedly, no. None of the elements analyzed above is entirely conclusive by itself.
Perhaps, after all, Todd Burgun was mistaken about John’s radio call to Martha’s Vineyard airport at 9:39 (but why didn’t he come forward to retract his statement?). Perhaps Victor Pribanic lied, or mistook he sound of John’s plane crashing into the Ocean for an airborn explosion (but what about the other witnesses?).
Perhaps, among the conflicting reports about the visibility, we should give the benefit of the doubt to the worst reports. Perhaps Kyle Bailey, the last man to see JFK Jr. alive, was really there, before becoming an aviation analyst expert regularly appearing on Fox News Channel, Fox Business Network, MSNBC, CNBC, The Weather Channel, CBS, ABC, NBC, BBC, CTV, I24 News, and HLN, as his LinkedIn account says.
Perhaps flight instructor Robert Merena did suddenly remember in January 2000 that JFK Jr. had rejected his offer to fly with him because “he wanted to do it alone.” Perhaps John Junior, at age 39, did ask to be cremated and his ashes spread into the ocean he loved so much. And so on.
It is the accumulation of such doubtful elements that is hard to accept. It is also the military control over the operations, right down to news reporting from the Pentagon, which is odd.
Add the fact that the regional director of the NTSB in charge of the investigation, Robert Pearce, according to his official profile, later “briefed State Department officials and the Egyptian Ambassador in the wake of the EgyptAir Flight 990 crash [the jet plane that crashed into the Atlantic Ocean after leaving JFK airport, with 33 high ranking Egyptian military officers on board, allegedly by the fault of a suicidal Egyptian co-pilot] as well as supported the FBI on scene at the World Trade Center in the aftermath of the events of September 11, 2001.” I sure wouldn’t trust Robert Pearce to investigate my own plane crash.
In the final analysis, it is the explanation of the crash that is strikingly implausible. As Anthony Hilder put it:
"A finely-tuned, well-kept first-class airplane doesn’t just drop out of the sky and head straight down into the ocean unless it’s blown out of the sky or the pilot deliberately sends it into a dive to kill himself and his passengers.”
There is evidence of an accumulation of deliberate omissions, lies and false testimonies from the NTSB investigation to mainstream reporting, in order to blame the plane crash on the pilot alone, regardless of inconsistencies.
And so, between accident and assassination, I lean strongly toward assassination.
Who orchestrated the plot, then? Behind every Kennedy assassination, John Hankey sees the Bushs, heirs to the Nazis, he insists. Hankey belongs to the category of half-truthers who would rather see the hands of Nazis than of the Mossad.
He believes JFK Jr. named his magazine George as a way to “tell everyone who he thought killed his father, by hiding the answer in plain sight.”
Hankey doesn’t suspect the Clintons at all. Neither does John Koerner, who starts his book Exploding the Truth by a chapter for “exonerating the Clintons”: the Clintons loved the Kennedys so much they would never have done them harm, he wants us to believe.
Donald Jeffries is more rational when suggesting to add John F. Kennedy Jr. to the list of the notorious “Clinton Body Count”, which already includes quite many deaths by plane crash: Victor Raiser, the Clinton presidential campaign’s national finance cochairman (July 30, 1992), Dr. Stanley Heard, a member of Clinton’s health-care advisory committee (September 10, 1993), Hershel Friday, Clinton’s Finance Committee chairman (March 1, 1994).
After all, the Navy takeover of the rescue and recovery missions, and the whole national security protocol around the case, can only have been ordered by President Clinton.
Roger Stone, a longtime aide to President Richard Nixon and investigator into JFK’s death, believes the Clintons ordered the murder of JFK Jr.’s because he was planning to run for the Senate seat that Hillary coveted.
Yet the Clintons certainly had nothing to do with JFK or RFK’s assassinations. So whatever role they played in the case of JFK Jr.’s assassination, they must have been part of a larger scheme.
Even if Hillary had a motive to eliminate JFK Jr. from the New York Senate race, I don’t think she would have gotten away with it without higher protections.
Let us not forget also that, in all Kennedy assassinations, the key factor for success is the complicity of the mainstream media for more 50 years. The Clintons don’t own the media.
Like Michael Collins Piper long before me, and like Ron Unz more recently, I believe that Israel assassinated both JFK and RFK. From there follows naturally the hypothesis that Israel also killed JFK Jr., and for the very same reason as they killed RFK: to prevent him from ever reaching the White House and reopening the investigation on his father’s death.
When I say “Israel”, I mean it in the broad sense, as including all the Machiavellian crypto-Zionists infiltrated in all layers of the U.S. power structure, including corporate media.
Israel not just assassinated Kennedys. They keep assassinating their memory, through a constant flow of anti-Kennedy books attacking their character and vilifying their family.
This is what JFK researcher James DiEugenio calls “the posthumous assassination of JFK,” the obsession to “smother any legacy that might linger”; for “assassination is futile if a man’s ideas live on through others.”
Take for example pseudo-biographer C. David Heymann, who after working for the Mossad in Israel (from his own admission), returned to the U.S. only to write Kennedy biographies, including the salacious Bobby and Jackie: A Love Story, and went on, after JFK Jr.’s death, to claim a ten-year secret acquaintance with him in order to fill the media with rubbish.
Why do publishers and mainstream media keep taking Heymann seriously?
Why does the New York Post give a positive review of his latest book, American Legacy: The Story of John and Caroline Kennedy (2007), which portrays John Junior as a “novice pilot” who boarded his plane half-drunk and under heavy medication (“Vicodin to relieve the pain of a recently broken ankle, plus Ritalin for attention-deficit disorder and medication for a thyroid problem”), who took off while “the haze had already grown thick and viscous,” and who spent the last 30 seconds of his life “not knowing up from down, frantically pulling at his plane’s controls in a panicked attempt to right its deadly spiral,” “with whirling instruments sending him messages he couldn’t read”?
The Jewish elites have hated the Kennedys ever since Joseph Kennedy, as U.S. ambassador in London, tried to prevent Roosevelt from entering World War II, resigned when he did, and then complained that “the Jews have won the war.”
Kennedys must pay for “the sins of the father,” as Ronald Kessler titled his book (The Sins of the Father: Joseph P. Kennedy and the Dynasty He Founded, 1996), a not-so-subtle reference to Exodus 20:5 asserting Yahweh’s right of vengeance on three generations.
The Jewish elites also hated the Kennedys for everything they represented, including a very strong sense of blood kinship that Jews prefer Gentiles not to have.
Paradoxically, in a nation founded on the rejection of monarchy, the Kennedys embodied the idea of royalty, the highest form of a dynastic aristocracy founded not just on the accumulation of wealth and power, but on a patriotic dedication to civil service.
It is as if the archetype of royalty had crystallized in the United States on this family, to the point that the name of King Arthur’s court, Camelot, has stuck to their legend.
The Kennedys also embodied the Irish Catholic root of the American people, with its deep-seated antagonism to British puritanism, the more Israel-friendly branch of Christianity, which has come to dominate American politics since Lyndon Johnson (“Our First Jewish President” as one American Jewish newspaper calls him).
From this point of view, the triple assassination of President Kennedy, his younger brother and his only son are the equivalent in Western Christendom of the extermination of the Romanov family in Orthodox Russia.
And I believe that, just like Russia with the Tsar family, America will only be great again when it opens the archives and honors the Kennedys as national martyrs of a foreign power.
But wait: there is still one male heir to John F. Kennedy: Jack Schlossberg, son of Caroline Kennedy and Edwin Schlossberg. Will he become “our first Jewish president,” asks Rabbi Jeffrey Salkin?
I don’t know, but I’m pretty sure he won’t be assassinated.
Eliminating Free Speech The Smart Way December 30 2022 | From: InternationalMan / Various Left-wing activists have recently been increasingly active in seeking to limit opposing political viewpoints, in order to create a more ubiquitous “groupthink.”
One effort in accomplishing this has been to propose the creation of a “Human Rights Committee” in order to monitor the economic transactions of “white supremacist groups and anti-Islam activists.”
This should not be surprising, as, throughout the former Free World, collectivists are, increasingly, coming out of the closet and seeking to eliminate any and all opposition to their cause.
And this should not, in itself, be alarming, as it should be both predictable and understandable that any politically driven group, be it left-leaning or right-leaning, would seek to gain an advantage over its opposite number.
What may be a real cause for alarm, however, is that those whom they are trying to rope into their effort are banks and corporations… and that they’re succeeding without a shot being fired.
It might be hoped that those champions of industry and commerce would at least put up a perfunctory fight, but clearly, this is not the case. They’re not only caving in; they’re entirely on board.
As an example, MasterCard is considering the selective restriction of individuals from their services and funds. Those individuals would be the ones that held unacceptable political views.
But they’re not the first in the queue to economically force people to have “correct” views. PayPal and Patreon have barred selected individuals from receiving payments through their services when those individuals have been identified as holding “extreme views.” More alarmingly, they’ve been supported in this decision by the US Securities and Exchange Commission.
Journalist Ben Swann has commented that this means that the US government has granted “big corporations the ability to control what voices are heard.”
The reader will already be familiar with the fact that major corporations that are led by liberally aligned executives, such as Facebook, Twitter and Amazon, have already proudly stated that they wish to do their part to freeze out those whose opinions they disagree with.
Of course, in a free world, the head of a privately held corporation should be free to do business with only those individuals he approves of. Although that might make him discriminating, he should have the right to be discriminating.
The concern here, though, is that there’s nothing on the horizon that’s aimed at limiting collectivist notions. All the restrictions are being applied to those who are conservative, libertarian, or in fact, anything but collectivist.
There’s clearly an all-encompassing effort to not only silence non-collectivists in the media (including social media), but to silence them through the loss of economic freedom.
And the campaign is unfolding dramatically, on many fronts, at the same time. It would not be rash to suggest that, by 2020, it may not be safe for an individual to express any non-collectivist position by that time, for fear of being cut out of the economic structure.
Back in the early part of the twentieth century, the Bolsheviks did a wonderful job of eliminating the existence of views that opposed collectivism, through the use of concentration camps and execution.
Later in the century, the Nazi (abbreviation for Nationalsozialistische, or National Socialist Party) also did a bang-up job of disappearing dissent against their rhetoric.
But Lenin, Stalin, Hitler and Goebbels would all have their hats off to the new American version of collectivist propaganda, which is not only attacking freedom of speech in the media, but using economic warfare to ensure that, in the future, the only propaganda will be collectivist propaganda.
This is a tactic these past collectivist leaders would have envied, as the results of economic pressure can be so immediate and permanent.
And clearly, large banks, corporations and the US government are fully on board.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
This latter fact informs us that the move to a collectivist society in the US is not merely the work of some extremist groups; it is, indeed, the intended “New America.”
One hundred years ago, the US began a decline into corporatism, with the introduction of the Federal Reserve as the overlord of US banking. Since that time, there has been a steady decline in freedoms in the US, interrupted only by the capitalist boom years that were brought on by World War II.
And we now see the culmination of that long-sought-after objective. The American public are not only being phased into the fuller conversion to a collectivist society; they’re being forced into it through economic punishment, should they take any other view.
There can be no question that virtually all of the restrictions of free speech are intended to limit any thought other than collectivist thought.
But the more important take-away here is that this is not a mere ploy by a political group. It has the support of the financial industry, corporate America and the government (through the US Securities and Exchange Commission).
This tells us that the Deep State – that collective body that actually rules the US above the political structure – is on board for a conversion of the US into a fully collectivist state.
This objective should not be surprising, as rulers always wish, first and foremost, to rule. And as such, they will always seek to obtain total control, if possible. Collectivism is the key to that goal. The greater the degree of collectivism, the greater the level of totalitarianism.
In limiting free speech through economics, they’re now going about it the smart way. But this in itself should not be too surprising. What may be surprising is that the changes necessary to bring that about are happening so quickly.
For the US, this is much like Russia, circa 1917, or Germany, circa 1937. The question is no longer whether the government intends to institute totalitarianism. The question is how much time remains before the transition is complete.
This question should give us pause. Its answer would define the remaining shelf-life of the US, as a country that’s desirable as a place to reside.
Editor’s Note: The wave of political correctness and liberal group-think has taken the US by storm. The effort to silence opposing viewpoints and free speech will continue to accelerate. That’s why Doug Casey has prepared a timely video on surviving this modern American trend. In it Doug exposes the lies and mainstream bias that’s poisoning America.
The One-Eye Sign: Its Origins And Occult Meaning December 29 2022 | From: VigilantCitizen / Various Why are there so many pictures of celebrities hiding one eye? It is definitely not random. In fact, the One-Eye sign has a profound meaning and proves an important fact about the powers that be. This article looks at the origins and the meaning of the unescapable One-Eye sign.
The One-Eye sign is one of the most recurrent themes on The Vigilant Citizen because it is also one of the most recurrent themes in mass media. Throughout the years, this site has highlighted hundreds upon hundreds of clear instances where major artists, models, celebrities, politicians and public figures posed with one eye hidden.
The sign is everywhere: In music videos, on magazine covers, on movie posters, in advertisement and so forth. The sheer number of these pictures is simply staggering.
Considering these facts, the repeated occurrence of the One-Eye sign simply cannot be the result of coincidence. Indeed, there is a clear effort to have this sign displayed everywhere.
So, why is this sign everywhere and what does it mean? Here’s a look at the timeless and transcendental symbol of the Eye.
A Turkish “nazar” amulet used to repel “evil eye” curses. Similar charms can be found in Portugal, Brazil, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Albania, Algeria, Tunisia, Lebanon, Turkey, Greece, Israel, Egypt, Saudi Arabia, Jordan, Bangladesh, Iran, Iraq, Pakistan, parts of North India, Palestine, Morocco, southern Spain, Italy, Malta, Romania, the Balkans, the Levant, Afghanistan, Syria, and Mexico.
The human eye has been used as a symbol since the dawn of civilization. It can be found across all ages and cultures. Carl Jung identified the eye as a classic “archetypal symbol” – an image that is embedded in humanity’s “collective unconscious”.
According to his theory, humans instinctively respond to archetypal symbols and unconsciously assign to them a specific meaning.
“Eyes are probably the most important symbolic sensory organ. They can represent clairvoyance, omniscience, and/or a gateway into the soul.
Other qualities that eyes are commonly associated with are: intelligence, light, vigilance, moral conscience, and truth. Looking someone in the eye is a western custom of honesty.
In this way covering of the eyes, by wearing a helmet, sunglasses, etc. can mean mystery, not seeing the complete truth, or deceit. The eye often means judgment and authority.”
- Dictionnary of Symbolism, University of Michigan
In nearly all cultures, the symbol of the eye is associated with spiritual concepts such as divinity (the Eye of Providence), spiritual illumination (the Third Eye) or magic (the evil eye).
“The eye symbolizes seeing and light, and therefore consciousness itself. The eye is the part of us that beholds the universe and sees our place in it. It is knowledge, awareness and wisdom. The eye takes in light, the pure energy of the universe, and presents it to the inner spirit. It is the gateway, indeed the very union, between the self and the cosmos.”
- Peter Patrick Barreda, Archetype of Wholeness – Jung and the Mandala
In the Bible, Jesus referred to the eye as the “lamp of the body”.
“The eye is the lamp of the body; so then if your eye is clear, your whole body will be full of light. But if your eye is bad, your whole body will be full of darkness. If then the light that is in you is darkness, how great is the darkness!”
- Matthew 6:22-23
The symbol of the eye always had a mystical and spiritual dimension assigned to it. As the popular saying goes: Eyes are the windows to the soul. For this reason, the symbol of the eye is particularly important in occult circles and Mystery schools.
Sun God
Since the dawn of civilization, the symbol of the eye and the sun (aka the “eye in the sky”) are associated with divinity. In Ancient Egypt, the symbols of the Wadjet, the Eye of Horus and the Eye of Ra are all associated with the solar god.
A classic depiction of the Egyptian Eye of Ra and Eye of Horus
The archetype of the all-seeing one-eyed sun god can also be found in other ancient cultures.
In Persia, Ahura Mazda was considered to be the creator of Earth, the heavens, and humankind, as well as the source of all goodness and happiness on earth. He was said to have “the sun for an eye”.
“The supreme god Ahura Mazda also has one Eye, or else it is said that ‘with his eyes, the sun, moon and stars, he sees everything.”
- Manly P. Hall, The Secret Teachings of All Ages
In Norse mythology, Odin was known as the ‘Allfather’ (or father of the gods). He was represented as an old man with one eye.
Odin is yet another representation of a one-eyed creator sun god.
“The Supreme, invisible Creator of all things was called All-Father. His regent in Nature was Odin, the one-eyed god. The Norwegians regarded Balder the Beautiful as a solar deity, and Odin is often connected with the celestial orb, especially because of his one eye.”
- Ibid
Western Occultism
Considering the fact that Western occultism was greatly influenced by the esoteric teachings of the civilizations above, the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye made its way into orders such as the Rosicrucians, the Illuminati, and the Freemasons.
“Albert Mackey writes that the All Seeing Eye is “an important symbol of the Supreme Being, borrowed by the Freemasons from the nations of antiquity.”
The All Seeing Eye is a symbol representing the watchful gaze of God.
It reminds us that every thought and action is to be recorded by the Grand Architect of the Universe, and that we are bound to our obligations in spirit as well as in blood.”
- James E Frey, 32°, Midnight Freemasons
Due to the heavy influence of Freemasonry on the historical events of the past centuries, the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye was included on prominent documents such as the reverse of the Great Seal of the United States and the Declaration of Human Rights.
Left: The reverse of the Great Seal of the United States. Right: The Declaration of Human Rights
“If any one doubts the presence of Masonic and occult influences at the time the Great Seal was designed, he should give due consideration to the comments of Professor Charles Eliot Norton of Harvard, who wrote concerning the unfinished pyramid and the All-Seeing Eye which adorned the reverse of the seal, as follows:
“The device adopted by Congress is practically incapable of effective treatment; it can hardly (however artistically treated by the designer) look otherwise than as a dull emblem of a Masonic fraternity.”
- Hall, op. cit.
The symbol of the eye was also adopted by several powerful secret societies such as the O.T.O.
That being said, does the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye actually represent God – as in the Judeo-Christian God?
Well, this is where things get … occult (occult means hidden).
The prominent American Freemason Albert Pike wrote that the true meaning of occult symbols is only revealed to high-level initiates.
“It is in its antique symbols and their occult meaning that the true secrets of Freemasonry consist. But these have no value if we see nothing in the symbols of the blue lodge beyond the imbecile pretenses of interpretations of them contained in our monitors.
People have overlooked the truth that the symbols of antiquity were not used to reveal but to conceal. Each symbol is an enigma to be solved, and not a lesson to be read.
How can the intelligent Mason fail to see that the blue degrees are but preparatory, to enlist and band together the rank and file Masonic army for purposes undisclosed to them, that they are the lesser mysteries in which the symbols are used to conceal the truth?”
- Albert Pike, Legenda and Readings of the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite of Freemasonry
Manly P. Hall, another prominent Freemason wrote that the All-Seeing Eye esoterically represents the ultimate goal of occultism:
To attain divinity through one’s own means. This is done through the activation of the pineal gland – the Third Eye.
“Operative Masonry, in the fullest meaning of that term, signifies the process by which the Eye of Horus is opened. In the human brain there is a tiny gland called the pineal body, which is the sacred eye of the ancients, and corresponds to the third eye of the Cyclops.”
- Hall, Op. Cit.
In Islam
In Islamic eschatology, the end-times figure named Al-Masīḥ ad-Dajjal (“the false messiah, liar, the deceiver”) is said to be blind in his right eye.
By pretending to be the Messiah, the Dajjal would deceive and take over the world. For these reasons, the Dajjal bears great similarities with the Antichrist in Christianity.
The coming of the Dajjal would be preceded by several signs such as: People will stop offering the prayers; dishonesty will be the way of life; falsehood will become a virtue; people will mortgage their faith for worldly gain; usury and bribery will become legitimate; there will be acute famine at the time; there will be no shame amongst people; many people will worship Satan; there will be no respect for elderly people and people will start killing each other without any reason.
Considering the fact that the world today is ruled by what we call the “occult elite” (because of its ties with occult orders), it is no surprise that its main symbol is found everywhere.
However, it is all done in a deceitful way. Today’s entertainment industry thrives on control, manipulation, and distortion.
While the All-Seeing Eye is esoterically associated with the opening of the Third Eye to attain spiritual illumination, the One-Eye sign made by celebrities is about the exact opposite: Hiding and incapacitating an eye.
The symbolism of this gesture is powerful.
Katy Perry hiding one eye with the Eye of Horus in her video Dark Horse
Known by many as project MKULTRA, mind control aims to turn humans into slaves through abuse, trauma, and programming.
There is an actual culture revolving around Monarch mind control, complete with its own universe of symbols.
And the One-Eye sign is part of it.
This is a painting by Kim Noble, a survivor of trauma-based mind control. This painting is called The Naming and relates to the naming of an alter persona
The omnipresence of the One-Eye sign in mass media also serves another purpose: It proves that all outlets of mass media are owned by a very small, elite group.
Indeed, in order to have the same exact sign appear consistently and repeatedly across all media platforms and across the world, there needs to be a centralized source of power that forcibly makes this happen.
Think about the amount of money, power, and influence that is required to have all of these celebrities perform this specific gesture in videos and photoshoots.
Now, ponder on the amount money, power, and influence that is required to have this specific sign plastered across magazine covers, movie posters, music videos and anything else that might reach the eyes of the masses.
In short, this symbol represents the global elite and all of its agenda:
The debasing of the human psyche, the promotion of satanism, the normalization mind control, the normalization of transhumanism, the blurring of genders and more.
The ultimate goal: Straying the masses as far away as possible from Truth, health, and balance.
In Conclusion
The symbol of the eye is an archetype that transcends time and space. Perhaps because humans instinctually respond to gazing eyes, there is something about that symbol that is jarring yet fascinating.
While, in ancient times, the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye was often equated with the sun god, it gradually became a symbol of the power of the secret societies that shaped history in the last centuries.
Nowadays, the entertainment industry revels in the twisting and corruption of powerful symbols in the pursuit of its debasing agenda.
The omnipresence of the One-Eye sign now symbolizes the omnipresence of the occult elite. It is them saying: “Look at who we control”.
That being said, there is a silver lining here. The One-Eye sign is a convenient way of identifying media to avoid because it is most likely drenched in the occult elite’s debasing agenda.
Social Engineering - The War On The Higher Mind Of Humans: Here’s Why You Should Consider Converting Your Music To A=432 Hz December 28 2022 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various “If you want to find the secrets of the universe, think in terms of energy, frequency and vibration.” - Nikola Tesla
“What we have called matter is energy, whose vibration has been so lowered as to be perceptible to the senses. There is no matter.” – Albert Einstein
Tesla said it. Einstein agreed. Science proved it. It is a known fact that everything - including our own bodies - is made up of energy vibrating at different frequencies. That being said, it seems logical to wonder, can sound frequencies affect us?
It would appear that this is the case. Frequencies affect frequencies, much like mixing ingredients with other ingredients affects the overall flavour of a meal. The way frequencies affect the physical world has been demonstrated through various experiments, such as the science of Cymatics and water memory.
Cymatics illustrate that when sound frequencies move through a particular medium such as water, air, or sand, they directly alter the vibration of matter. Below are pictures demonstrating how particles adjust to different frequencies.
We all hold a certain vibrational frequency, and our bodies are estimated to be about 70% water. Given the above experiments, it stands to reason that musical frequencies could also alter our own vibrational state.
Every expression through sound, emotion, or thought holds a specific frequency which influences everything around it - much like a single drop of water can create a larger ripple effect in a large body of water.
Music Frequency
With this concept in mind, let us bring our attention to the frequency of the music we listen to. Most music worldwide has been tuned to A=440 Hz since the International Standards Organization (ISO) promoted it in 1953.
However, when looking at the vibratory nature of the universe, it’s possible that this pitch is disharmonious with the natural resonance of nature and may generate negative effects on human behaviour and consciousness.
Some theories (although unproven) even suggest that the Nazi regime had been in favor of adopting this pitch as standard after conducting scientific research to determine which range of frequencies best induce fear and aggression.
Whether or not the conspiracy is factual, interesting studies have pointed towards the benefits of tuning music to A=432 Hz instead.
When our atoms and DNA start to resonate in harmony with the spiralling pattern of nature, our sense of connection to nature is said to be magnified. The number 432 is also reflected in ratios of the sun, Earth, and moon, as well as the precession of the equinoxes, the Great Pyramid of Egypt, Stonehenge, and the Sri Yantra, among many other sacred sites.
“From my own observations, some of the harmonic overtone partials of A=432hz 12T5 appear to line up to natural patterns and also the resonance of solitons. Solitons need a specific range to form into the realm of density and span from the micro to the macro cosmos. Solitons are not only found in water mechanics, but also in the ion-acoustic breath between electrons and protons.”
Another interesting factor to consider is that the A=432 Hz tuning correlates with the color spectrum and chakra system, while the A=440 Hz does not.
“The Solar Spectrum & The Cosmic Keyboard
All of the frequencies in the spectrum are related in octaves, from gamma rays to subharmonics. These colors and notes are also related to our Chakras and other important energy centers. I
f we are to understand that… Chakras are connected to the Seven Rays of the Solar Spectrum, then the notes and frequencies we use for the same should be the same.
A432 Hz is the tuning of the Cosmic Keyboard or Cosmic Pitchfork, as opposed to the A440 Hz modern ‘standard.’ It places C# at 136.10 Hz ‘Om,’ which is the main note of the Sitar in classical Indian music and the pitch of the chants of the Tibetan monks, who tell us, ‘It comes from nature.'”
– Dameon Keller
Exploring The Difference
Let’s explore the experiential difference between A=440 Hz and A=432 Hz. Music lovers and musicians have noticed that music tuned in A=432 Hz is not only more beautiful and harmonious to the ears, but it also induces a more inward experience that is felt inside the body at the spine and heart.
Music tuned in A=440 Hz was felt as a more outward and mental experience, and was felt at the side of the head which projected outwards.
Audiophiles have also stated that A=432hz music seems to be non-local and can fill an entire room, whereas A=440hz can be perceived as directional or linear in sound propagation.
“The ancients tuned their instruments at an A of 432 Hz instead of 440 Hz – and for a good reason. There are plenty of music examples on the internet that you can listen to, in order to establish the difference for yourself. Attuning the instrument to 432 Hz results in a more relaxing sound, while 440 Hz slightly tenses up to body.
This is because 440 Hz is out of tune with both macrocosmos and microcosmos. 432 Hz on the contrary is in tune. To give an example of how this is manifested microcosmically: our breath (0,3 Hz) and our pulse (1,2 Hz) relate to the frequency of the lower octave of an A of 432 Hz (108 Hz) as 1:360 and 1:90.”
“The overall sound difference was noticeable, the 432 version sounding warmer, clearer and instantly sounded more listenable but the 440 version felt tighter, with more aggressive energy.”
– Anonymous guitarist
The video below was created by someone with no opinion on whether A=432 Hz or A=440 Hz is better. Therefore, the way both versions of the melody is played is unbiased. It is up to us to tune in and feel which one feels more harmonious to us!
I personally have enjoyed many bands, artists, and styles of music even though they were tuning in A=440 hz, however, after comparing a few songs in both A=432 hz and A=440 hz I can say I definitely feel and hear the difference.
I wouldn’t say that my experience of 440hz music has turned me into an aggressive person, but I can understand how an entire population being exposed to music that is more mind directed as opposed to heart directed - not to mention all of the materialistic and ego-driven lyrics in most popular music - is a perfect combination to maintain a more discordant frequency and state of consciousness within humanity.
This is, of course, simply my own opinion.
“Music based on C=128hz (C note in concert A=432hz) will support humanity on its way towards spiritual freedom. The inner ear of the human being is built on C=128 hz.” – Rudolph Steiner
I cannot state with complete certainty that every idea suggested in this article is 100% accurate, nor am I an expert on the subject. I simply gathered interesting information from others who researched this issue more deeply.
For this reason, if we are looking for scientific validation for these claims, I suggest that we each do our own research on the matter with an open yet discerning mind. Perhaps more research on this topic will be done in the near future to help explain the phenomenon.
I believe we all possess intuition and the ability to observe without judgment, which can be more useful than resorting to ridicule when exposed to information that has not yet been accepted by the scientific community.
It is therefore up to us to tone down the urge to jump to conclusions and instead EXPERIENCE the difference between A=440 Hz and A=432 Hz. To do so, we need to listen with our entire body and a neutral awareness as opposed to with our mental ideas, judgments, and preconceptions.
If you are interested in changing your music’s pitch to A=432 hz, click here to learn how to do it.
More Shameful Astroturf Tricks On The Horizon: Has NZSIS Turned Stasi?+ Goodbye 2022 - The End Of The Impossible Dream, In Fact A Technology Nightmare December 27 2022 | From: NZDSOS / GlobalResearch / HatchardReport / Various
Award-winning American investigative journalist Sharyl Attkisson defines astroturf as a multi-billion dollar industry which disguises propaganda to look as though it has grassroots origins, when in fact it is orchestrated by corporate or political interests.
In the same address she referred to free speech using upside down language (implying benign or altruistic motives whilst obscuring the real intent), suggesting that online speech is a “weapon of war” with the potential to “threaten the security of others“.
It therefore surely came as no surprise that a few short weeks later the New Zealand Security Intelligence Service (NZSIS) announced the publication of a new guide (Know the Signs), aimed at helping members of the public identify “potential terrorists“.
In announcing the publication release, Director-General of NZSIS Rebecca Kitteridge stated that we could save lives by identifying “a hot mess of ideologies and beliefs fuelled by conspiracy theories“.
Speaking of weaponising language, Sharyl Attkisson has specifically described the origins and intent of terms including conspiracy theory and anti-vaccine, as very effective propaganda tools used to marginalise people.
So we are left wondering, using the government’s own terms of reference, if we should report Ms Kitteridge and Ms Ardern based on our recognition of the signs?
We are also reminded of times in history when regimes used propaganda to maintain authoritarian control. A range of examples are provided by Australian journalist John Pilger in Silencing the Lambs – How Propaganda Works.
He quotes Nobel Prize winning playwright Harry Pinter, as saying:
"If we don’t recognise propaganda, we may accept it as normal and believe it."
In today’s age of mass media control it is essential to look beyond a proclaimed single source of truth to the broadest sources in order to determine an independent perspective.
The very essence of democratic values is the right to form opinions which diverge from political leaders and from each other, and to debate those opinions openly.
Suppressing divergent views was a highly effective tool of tyranny during East Germany’s communist regime from 1957 until the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989.
Why would citizens of a free democracy ever agree to turn onto the path of a surveillance state?
It would surely never be a willing choice, and would first need information control such as astroturf strategies from a politically motivated source that aims for fear, paranoia and obedience.
History teaches us that the way to avoid this path is to recognise propaganda in all its forms, including astroturf and silencing of dissent, so that we can reject it and open our minds to all available information.
Only then can we establish a reasonable opinion which holds true to our personal values. We must then find the courage to defend them.
"There is no such thing as “disinformation” or “misinformation”. There is only information you accept and information you do not accept.
You were not born with a requirement to believe everything you are told; rather, you were born with a brain that allows you to process the information you receive and make independent decisions.”
You’d Better Watch Out: The Surveillance State Is Making a List, And You’re On It
“He sees you when you’re sleeping, He knows when you’re awake, He knows when you’ve been bad or good, So be good for goodness’ sake!” - “Santa Claus Is Coming to Town”
NZSIS Head Office, Pipitea Street, Wellington
You’d better watch out - you’d better not pout - you’d better not cry - ‘cos I’m telling you why: this Christmas, it’s the Surveillance State that’s making a list and checking it twice, and it won’t matter whether you’ve been bad or good.
The World Health Organization (WHO), whose constitution defines health as ‘a state of physical, mental and social well-being, not merely the absence of disease or infirmity,’ has recently orchestrated remarkable reversals in human rights, poverty reduction, education, and physical, mental and social health indices in the name of responding to the Covid-19 pandemic.
This creepy new era of government / corporate spying - in which we’re being listened to, watched, tracked, followed, mapped, bought, sold and targeted - has been made possible by a global army of techno-tyrants, fusion centers and Peeping Toms.
Consider just a small sampling of the tools being used to track our movements, monitor our spending, and sniff out all the ways in which our thoughts, actions and social circles might land us on the government’s naughty list, whether or not you’ve done anything wrong.
Tracking you based on your phone and movements
Cell phones have become de facto snitches, offering up a steady stream of digital location data on users’ movements and travels. For instance, the FBI was able to use geofence data to identify more than 5,000 mobile devices (and their owners) in a 4-acre area around the Capitol on January 6.
Moreover, federal agents can now employ a number of hacking methods in order to gain access to your computer activities and “see” whatever you’re seeing on your monitor.
Malicious hacking software can also be used to remotely activate cameras and microphones, offering another means of glimpsing into the personal business of a target.
It is important to understand is that there is not one single new or original idea in Klaus Schwab’s so-called Great Reset agenda for the world. Nor is his Fourth Industrial Revolution agenda his or his claim to having invented the notion of Stakeholder Capitalism a product of Schwab.
Klaus Schwab is little more than a slick PR agent for a global technocratic agenda, a corporatist unity of corporate power with government, including the UN, an agenda whose origins go back to the beginning of the 1970s, and even earlier.
The Davos Great reset is merely an updated blueprint for a global dystopian dictatorship under UN control that has been decades in development. The key actors were David Rockefeller and his protégé, Maurice Strong.
In the beginning of the 1970s, there was arguably no one person more influential in world politics than the late David Rockefeller, then largely known as chairman of Chase Manhattan Bank.
Coupled with surveillance cameras that blanket the country, facial recognition technology allows the government and its corporate partners to identify and track someone’s movements in real-time.
One of the earliest investors in the scam known as FTX is Binance, the world’s largest cryptocurrency exchange. And Binance, we now know is tied to all sorts of globalist operations including the Chinese Communist Party (CCP), Klaus Schwab’s World Economic Forum (WEF), and the United Nations (UN), to name just a few of the more well-known ones.
Rapid advances in behavioral surveillance are not only making it possible for individuals to be monitored and tracked based on their patterns of movement or behavior, including gait recognition (the way one walks), but have given rise to whole industries that revolve around predicting one’s behavior based on data and surveillance patterns and are also shaping the behaviors of whole populations.
One smart “anti-riot” surveillance system purports to predict mass riots and unauthorized public events by using artificial intelligence to analyze social media, news sources, surveillance video feeds and public transportation data.
Tracking you based on your spending and consumer activities
With every smartphone we buy, every GPS device we install, every Twitter, Facebook, and Google account we open, every frequent buyer card we use for purchases - whether at the grocer’s, the yogurt shop, the airlines or the department store - and every credit and debit card we use to pay for our transactions, we’re helping Corporate America build a dossier for its government counterparts on who we know, what we think, how we spend our money, and how we spend our time.
Corporations such as Target have not only been tracking and assessing the behavior of their customers, particularly their purchasing patterns, for years, but the retailer has also funded major surveillance in cities across the country and developed behavioral surveillance algorithms that can determine whether someone’s mannerisms might fit the profile of a thief.
His frustration and exhaustion is evident, after Counterspin Media had been working their guts out in support of Liz Gunn and Lawyer Sue Grey, to try and get a victory for baby Will & his family, which sadly never came.
He pulls no punches as he lays waste to many within the 'Freedom Movement' and states he is part of the 'Truth Movement' & calls out the shills, pretenders, and detractors.
Private corporations in conjunction with police agencies throughout the country have created a web of surveillance that encompasses all major cities in order to monitor large groups of people seamlessly, as in the case of protests and rallies.
Tracking you based on your social media activities
Every move you make, especially on social media, is monitored, mined for data, crunched, and tabulated in order to form a picture of who you are, what makes you tick, and how best to control you when and if it becomes necessary to bring you in line.
As The Intercept reported, the FBI, CIA, NSA and other government agencies are increasingly investing in and relying on corporate surveillance technologies that can mine constitutionally protected speech on social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and Instagram in order to identify potential extremists and predict who might engage in future acts of anti-government behavior.
As Helen A.S. Popkin, writing for NBC News, observed, “We may very well face a future where algorithms bust people en masse for referencing illegal ‘Game of Thrones’ downloads… the new software has the potential to roll, Terminator-style, targeting every social media user with a shameful confession or questionable sense of humor.”
Not content to merely spy on individuals through their online activity, government agencies are now using surveillance technology to track one’s social network, the people you might connect with by phone, text message, email or through social message, in order to ferret out possible criminals.
What this creates is a “guilt by association” society in which we are all as guilty as the most culpable person in our address book.
Tracking you based on your car
License plate readers are mass surveillance tools that can photograph over 1,800 license tag numbers per minute, take a picture of every passing license tag number and store the tag number and the date, time, and location of the picture in a searchable database, then share the data with law enforcement, fusion centers and private companies to track the movements of persons in their cars.
With tens of thousands of these license plate readers now in operation throughout the country, affixed to overpasses, cop cars and throughout business sectors and residential neighborhoods, it allows police to track vehicles and run the plates through law enforcement databases for abducted children, stolen cars, missing people and wanted fugitives.
Of course, the technology is not infallible: there have been numerous incidents in which police have mistakenly relied on license plate data to capture out suspects only to end up detaining innocent people at gunpoint.
Just about every branch of the government - from the Postal Service to the Treasury Department and every agency in between - now has its own surveillance sector, authorized to spy on the American people.
The agency claims the online surveillance, which falls outside its conventional job scope of processing and delivering paper mail, is necessary to help postal workers avoid “potentially volatile situations.”
Now the government wants us to believe that we have nothing to fear from these mass spying programs as long as we’ve done nothing wrong.
Don’t believe it.
The government’s definition of a “bad” guy is extraordinarily broad, and it results in the warrantless surveillance of innocent, law-abiding Americans on a staggering scale.
As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, surveillance, digital stalking and the data mining of the American people - weapons of compliance and control in the government’s hands - haven’t made America any safer. And they certainly aren’t helping to preserve our freedoms.
Indeed, America [and the world] will never be safe as long as the U.S. government is allowed to shred the Constitution.
Goodbye 2022 - The End Of The Impossible Dream, In Fact A Technology Nightmare
Make 2023 your turning point.
Phew! What a year. Aren’t we all glad to say sayonara. But what drove the events of 2022? What can we take home to help us rebuild in 2023?
During the last four weeks, 197 people have died with Covid. 95% of these were fully vaccinated, far more than the proportion of the population who are fully vaccinated.
Beyond that, excess all cause mortality is running at 15% above the long term average as it has for most of the year (currently about 100 extra deaths per week), with no credible explanation from the government or the Ministry of Health.
Something has gone horribly wrong, and everyone in authority is keeping mum. The public are being kept in the dark.
2022 was a technology fail - big time. Biotechnology, education, finance, food, politics, communication, trade, farming, justice, employment, globalisation, media, and health all taught us that aspects of modern technology are tearing civilization to pieces.
The inherent weakness of fast technological change was suddenly revealed by the pandemic. We had a glimpse of the miserable colourless future that much technology is promising. Some people gave up, some people didn’t notice, and some woke up.
Biotechnology: I don’t need to say much. It has almost all been said. mRNA, DNA vaccines revealed their roots and their fruits as risky, dangerous gene therapy. People died suddenly in unprecedented numbers. Human physiology, the culmination of years of evolutionary fine tuning, knows exactly what it is doing. Biotechnologists do not.
The promised biotechnology dream is truly impossible. Tens of thousands of highly paid biotechnologists struggle in their labs to cure even one disease or one person. An impossible doctor/patient ratio that could never be financed by any conceivable health system.
Yet politicians, investors, media, and the pharmaceutical lobby egged each other on to proclaim the benefits of biotech based on misinformation circulated by multinational databases, paid troll armies, social media platforms, misleading PR, biased think tanks, and international global agencies operating outside of protective national laws.
In any case, gene editing didn’t cure anyone, it escaped from a lab and killed millions, and then the so-called cure left a trail of bodies and a myriad of depressed immune systems as it travelled around the world. This was all funded by governments and endorsed by highly paid scientists. Time to outlaw biotechnology experimentation.
Politics: The political class revealed their power hungry aspirations, their appalling ignorance, and their addiction to the funding of lobbyists.
The technology of social manipulation was used to reach the apogee of propaganda. Reliant on social media, populations were guided to believe that two near-identical controlling viewpoints (left and right) represented a choice.
Politicians spent big on media manipulation and rewarded their cronies with lucrative pandemic contracts for ineffective remedies and equipment. They bankrupted nations and cancelled voices of sanity. Time to rein in the power of big government and fix political funding issues.
Every once in a great while a highly radioactive truth bomb gets dropped that changes everything - EVERYTHING! Well, a JFK truth bomb just exploded and the Internet is now experiencing the massive fallout.
Here’s the critical truth that the Khazarian Mafia has spent nearly 60 years assiduously suppressing with every single major organ of propaganda and prevarication belonging to their wholly owned mainstream media.
Justice: The law is ever the servant of the long purse, no more so than in 2022. With just one source of truth (the government), judges looked the other way, pontificated, jailed, and made up specious arguments to cancel the effect of human rights that had been won with great difficulty by oppressed people over past centuries. Time to reinstate human rights.
Farming: Ignoring the fact that plants and animals have covered the earth throughout history, against all commonsense, farmers were blamed for climate change. Working from private jets, politicians and entrepreneurs used arguments derived from computer analysis to justify the purchase of lands and taxation that will reduce food production.
GE crops continued to fail and require higher and more toxic pesticide inputs. Meanwhile, 10% of the world’s population is hungry. The number grew by 150 million in 2022. Organic agriculture is sustainable and healthy.
Food: The modern ultra processed diet full of chemicals finally served up its true desserts. Those suffering from diabetes, heart disease, smoking, and other conditions (which are largely preventable if you follow a healthy diet and a balanced lifestyle), were the first victims of the pandemic.
This is just a precursor to the unhealthy effects of the promised biotechnology revolution in the food industry.
Legislation for regulation is set to bring an end to natural products, herbs, and spices, all replaced with the fruits of giant energy hungry biotech vats laced with exotic genes, accelerants, and catalysts.
Time to restore diets based on natural fresh foods.
Health: Doctors forgot the hippocratic oath, medical ethics, and informed consent. They looked the other way when patients died and made up stories to cover their tracks. Remote consultations debased the doctor-patient relationship.
Medical administrators stopped publishing statistics and liaised with social media for them to do the same. They shamelessly accepted massive funding dependent on their adoption of particular medical interventions that didn’t work and caused harm.
Experts proclaimed cures over the airways based on biased commercially motivated studies which had carefully concealed adverse effects. With the help of the media they closed the doors to debate.
The end result - longevity declined, birth rates declined, while hospital admissions and death rates soared, but the public wouldn’t know it was happening. Time to base medical funding on the number of healthy outcomes.
Education: Universities and schools received generous financial incentives to insist on vaccination and masking, and close their doors. Those hesitating or asking questions were excluded.
Education based on remote learning technology failed miserably. Youth crime and suicide rose. Engagement and achievement fell among all age ranges.
Development of the young was slowed. Face to face personal instruction is the lost gold standard. Government control of education should be reduced, interdisciplinary studies revived, and personal teaching time valued.
Finance and Trade: Crypto currencies based on the memory banks of computers fell and fell in value. Mortgage rates rose to unaffordable heights. Stocks fell. Pharmaceutical giants, energy companies, and billionaires laughed all the way to the banks who laughed with them.
Plans were pushed ahead to digitize money and require digital identities. The vulnerability of international supply chains based on offshore production was revealed. International trade based on computer controlled ‘just-in-time’ shipments collapsed.
Inflation took off. Commodity monopolies profiteered. Renewed emphasis on national self-sufficiency and real values is required.
Globalisation: The global reach of the internet spawned a special brand of dictator. The WHO and WEF were prime examples. Operating outside of democratic safeguards, unelected officials began to assume power over the entire population of the world, all to the delight of big pharma.
Super powers poured sophisticated weaponry into regional and ethnic conflicts to the delight of arms manufacturers. The sums involved are many times the amounts needed to feed the world and promote solar energy adoption. Politicians should be stripped of the power to sign international treaties without local scrutiny and support.
An international vaccine passport, digital identity, a social credit system and a central bank digital currency (CBDC) form a digital control system that will lock down the population in perpetuity
Facial recognition is an essential part of the control structure, as it’s the “password” to your digital identity.
By the end of 2022, there will be 1 billion data collecting surveillance cameras in the world, all connected to the internet and artificial intelligence (AI). Cameras and audio recording devices in cell phones, automobiles and smart appliances also collect and share data.
All these data are then used to give each person an individual score, based on their behavior, expression and interaction with the world. Ultimately, your social credit score, will dictate what you can and cannot do, what you can buy and where you can go. Read more here.
Entertainment: Globalisation of entertainment has led to dull uniformity and suppressed cultural diversity. The Avatar sequel costing over $400 million to produce showed us that live theatre and actors beat digital programming. The expressive quality of the human face (often masked in 2022) wins every time. Local production and traditional culture can be revived.
Employment: Remote working took off everywhere. Faced with a surfeit at work and at home we realised just how uninteresting computers and phones can become.
Devoid of human contact, life can lose meaning and the spark of humanity. Employment law failed to protect employees from the dictates of fearful and coercive employers. Millions lost their jobs rather than submit to vaccine mandates. Workplace rights need to be restored.
Media: The collapse of a sustainable funding mechanism for print media has been seized upon by governments and commercial interests who now fund digital platforms but only do so in return for content control.
This has blurred the distinction between advertising and reporting to the extent that the public is often unaware that the articles they are reading purporting to be truth or science are actually paid content designed to influence public behaviour for private profit or political gain. The independence of the media needs to be reasserted.
Communication: Social media closed the door on diversity of opinion. The entire world was fooled into believing a lie. This had been carefully curated by computer controlled systems of censorship designed and built up over years by commercial pharmaceutical interests.
During the pandemic, the interests of governments, financial moguls, and big pharma coalesced into a perfect storm of deceit. Governments imposed censorship on free speech.
Suddenly hundreds of thousands of people found their voice of protest, they were instantly suppressed, but reappeared everywhere. We cannot be silenced. Truth will have out.
Trauma Based Mind Control?
An Example of Balancing Truth in Politics
The Drive to Create a Worldwide DNA Database
Los Alamos Research Explains How 5G Terahertz Waves Tear Apart DNA & Why We Must Stop The 5G Wireless 
Anne Heche
The Man Who Discovered The Cause Of Cancer Wrote A Book On Curing It
Western Occultism
Exploring The Difference
Bio-Resonant Therapy And Telecommunication Frequencies
CURRENT AFFAIRS
We need to understand that there’s no person out there who will complete us.
PDF Download:
The Facts: Consciousness is appearing to be a fundamental property, just like liquids, solids and gas, consciousness and its connection to the physical material world is now gaining big time credibility.
1. At age 39, John had made up his mind to launch his political career by seeking an electoral mandate in New York State, and he was about to announce it publicly. 
